JP2023182889A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can favorably carry out a notification of occurrence of a predetermined event.SOLUTION: According to the invention, a game machine includes detection means which detects a state of a door body, notification means which can execute a notification in response to detection by the detection means, and control means which can execute discharge control for discharging a game medium corresponding to a game value to outside of the game machine. The notification means can execute the notification in response to the detection by the detection means either in the case in which the detection by the detection means is carried out when the discharge control is executed or in the case in which the detection by the detection means is carried out when the discharge control is not executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 125

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine in which a player plays a game using gaming value owned by the player.

Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a notification means for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2021-16405 Publication

However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for improvement in properly reporting the occurrence of a predetermined event.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value owned by the player, stores the gaming value owned by the player, and controls update of the gaming value. a door body that can be opened and closed; a detection unit that detects the state of the door body; and a notification unit that can issue a notification in accordance with the detection by the detection unit; It is possible to perform discharge control for discharging game media corresponding to the game value out of the gaming machine, and the notification means is configured to perform detection by the detection means when the discharge control is being performed. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform notification in accordance with the detection by the detection means both in the case where the detection is performed by the detection means when the discharge control is not performed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the game machine with the glass frame removed. It is a back view of the gaming machine. It is a figure showing a main control device. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main control device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between the distances between two points for each part of the main control device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a sticker attached to the main control board case. It is a figure showing a frame control device. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the frame control device. It is a top view of a frame control board. It is a perspective view of a frame control board. It is an enlarged view of the periphery of a frame control part and a frame control display. It is a diagram excluding various electronic components around the frame control unit and the frame control display. FIG. 2 is a partial perspective view of the surroundings of a frame control unit and a frame control display; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the arrangement of electronic components within the frame control board case. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the arrangement of electronic components within the frame control board case. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the distance between two points for every part of a frame control device. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the distances between two points for each part based on the frame control display. It is a figure which shows the seal affixed to a frame control board case. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between various seals of the frame control board case and various electronic components. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the distance between two points for each part of a main control device and a frame control device. It is a figure showing the positional relationship of each seal of each control device and each operation part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between the distances from the power switch to each element of the control device. It is a figure showing a modification of a main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a gaming machine and peripheral devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a gaming machine and peripheral devices. It is a figure which shows the memory map of a main control part and a frame control part. It is a diagram showing the relationship between a gaming area and an information area. It is a system configuration diagram of a gaming machine and peripheral devices. FIG. 3 is a diagram specifically explaining the flow of information transmission and reception. It is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table for special symbols. It is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table. It is a figure showing a special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a preliminary determination table. It is a diagram showing a modified example of the specifications of the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a modified example of the specifications of the gaming machine. It is a figure showing a list of messages related to communication between the main control board and the frame control board. It is a diagram showing gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. It is a diagram showing hole control/fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. It is a diagram showing details of hole control/fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. It is a diagram showing details of hole control/fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. It is a diagram showing details of hole control/fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. It is a diagram showing a list of functions and implementation areas of a gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a list of functions and implementation areas of a gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board that enable playing after the gaming machine is started. It is a diagram showing a communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board in which the game is not possible after the gaming machine is started. It is a diagram showing a communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board that enter a setting change/setting confirmation state after the gaming machine is started. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a communication procedure in which the main control board determines that a communication line is disconnected. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a communication procedure in which the frame control board determines that a communication line is disconnected. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing input control processing of the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process of a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process of a main control board. It is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing of the main control board. 7 is a flowchart showing acquisition upper limit management processing of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing an increment counter update process of the main control board. 7 is a flowchart illustrating acquisition upper limit device operation determination processing of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing error control processing of the main control board. 2 is a flowchart showing HC/fraud monitoring information management processing of the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between a frame control board and a dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows the gaming machine information notification transmitted from a frame control board to a dedicated unit. It is a diagram showing gaming machine performance information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. It is a diagram showing gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. It is a diagram showing hole control/fraud monitoring information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. It is a diagram showing fraud detection states 2 and 3 of hall con/fraud monitoring information. It is a diagram showing game information of hole con/fraud monitoring information. It is a figure which shows the count notification transmitted from a frame control board to a dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows the lending notice transmitted from a dedicated unit to a frame control board. It is a figure which shows the lending reception result response transmitted from a frame control board to a dedicated unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a basic communication sequence between a frame control board and a dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows the starting sequence 1 of a frame control board and a dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows the starting sequence 2 of a frame control board and a dedicated unit. It is a diagram showing a gaming machine information notification sequence 1 of a frame control board and a dedicated unit. It is a diagram showing gaming machine information notification sequence 2 of the frame control board and the dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows the count notification sequence 1 of a frame control board and a dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows the count notification sequence 2 of a frame control board and a dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows the rental notification sequence 1 of a frame control board and a dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows the rental notification sequence 2 of a frame control board and a dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows the recovery sequence when the dedicated PIF which connects a frame control board and a dedicated unit is disconnected. It is a figure which shows the notification sequence of hole control/fraud monitoring information of a frame control board and a dedicated unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a frame control board. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the frame control board. It is a flowchart which shows the ball extraction operation process of a frame control board. It is a flowchart which shows the gaming machine installation information reception process of a frame control board. It is a flow chart showing gaming machine information reception processing of the frame control board. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball number update process of a frame control board. It is a flowchart which shows the error control process of a frame control board. 7 is a flowchart showing severe error notification control processing of the frame control board. It is a flowchart which shows the hardware error notification control process of a frame control board. It is a flowchart which shows the minor error notification control process of a frame control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the display contents and display priority of the frame control display when various notification events occur. 3 is a flowchart illustrating display performance information calculation processing of a frame control board. It is a flowchart showing gaming machine performance information calculation processing of the frame control board. It is a flow chart showing gaming machine information notification processing of the frame control board. It is a flowchart showing the game ball counting process of the frame control board. It is a flowchart showing the game ball lending process of the frame control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a production control part. It is a flowchart which shows timer interrupt processing of a production control part. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead type performance processing of a performance control part. It is a flow chart which shows icon change production decision processing of a production control part. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table. It is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C. It is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G. It is a flowchart showing jackpot preview performance determination processing of the performance control unit. It is a figure which shows the notification event type, the priority order of a notification event, and the notification mode of a notification event. It is a figure which shows the notification event type, the priority order of a notification event, and the notification mode of a notification event. It is a figure which shows the notification event type, the priority order of a notification event, and the notification mode of a notification event. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event when the power is turned on. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event when the power is turned on. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the initial operation of the movable performance device when the number of game balls is cleared and when the power is restored. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality). It is a figure which shows the relationship between a glass frame (inner frame) opening error and a ball extraction operation in progress. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality, etc.). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality, etc.). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality, etc.). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality, etc.). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the notification mode between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality, etc.). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing information output and notification modes of various events. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing information output and notification modes of various events. It is a diagram showing effects when various events occur. It is a diagram showing effects when various events occur.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with the glass frame 4 removed. FIG. 4 is a back view of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, an inner frame 3 rotatably supported on the front side of the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported on the front side of the inner frame 3, and a game ball. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which (game media) flows is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The inner frame 3 has a concave game board mounting part 25 with an open front surface for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and a first hinge mechanism part 6 at one end in the horizontal direction (left side in FIG. 3). It is removably connected to the outer frame 2 via , and is rotatably supported around the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the inner frame 3 is exposed to the front, making it difficult to perform maintenance on various devices installed on the back side of the inner frame 3. becomes possible.

The glass frame 4 is detachably attached to the front side of the inner frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism part 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction (left side in FIG. 3) so as to cover the front side of the game board mounting part 25 of the inner frame 3. They are connected to each other and are rotatably supported using the second hinge mechanism section 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the inner frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the game board mounting portion 25 of the inner frame 3 can be viewed through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and various operation devices (such as a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 to be described later). ), a firing operation device 13 that can be operated to fire a game ball, a third image display device 72 (left side sub-display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display, and a fourth image display device. 73 (right side sub-display device) is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations at the top and at two locations at the bottom of the glass frame 4, spaced apart from each other, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, The performance will be performed using audio). Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). The frame lighting device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on when the inner frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is opened, and a top lamp 10b that is controlled to turn on when a predetermined effect is performed. ing.

The operation unit part 11 has a shape that bulges forward, and a production button device 16 that can be operated by the player is provided in the center part of the top surface, and a production button device 16 that can be operated by the player is provided in the left part of the top surface. A selection button device 18 is provided between the production button device 16 and the selection button device 18, and on the back side of the selection button device 18, a counting button 20 that can be operated by the player is provided. On the back side of 20, a game ball number display 135 is provided for displaying the number of game balls (gaming value amount) owned by the player.

In addition, in order for the player to secure (play) the gaming machine 1 in a position that does not overlap with the game ball count display 135 in the operating unit section 11 (for example, a position on the right side of the upper surface of the operating unit section). An article storage area (placement section) may be provided for placing items (mobile phones, drinks, cigarettes, etc.).

The performance button device 16 includes a performance button 17 that can be pressed and operated by the player, a performance button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 26) that detects a pressing operation on the performance button 17, and a button drive device for driving the performance button 17. 17b (see FIG. 26) is provided, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The effect button 17 performs a light emitting effect by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 26), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow color). It is now possible. In addition, it is possible to move in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the production position located above by the driving force of the button drive motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b. The button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the button is at the origin position. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a production operation by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode by the driving force of a button vibration motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a joystick 19 that the player can operate in up, down, left and right directions, and a joystick detection switch 19a (see FIG. 26) for detecting operations on the joystick 19. It is possible to input predetermined information into .

The counting button 20 is provided with a counting button switch 20a for detecting a pressing operation on the counting button 20, and when the player operates the counting button switch 20a, the number of game balls owned by the player is displayed on the game ball number display 135. Count the number of balls (gaming value) (store and account in the card itself or in the hall computer, etc., described later, in association with identification information stored in a storage medium such as a membership card or visitor card inserted into the dedicated unit 170, described later) It is now possible to do so.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 26) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 26) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. A firing handle light emitting device (not shown), which is a part of the device, lights up in a predetermined manner to create a light emitting effect.

Further, a firing permission signal is input from both a main control device 110A and a frame control device 120A, which will be described later, and the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15; When it is detected that the firing handle 15 is rotated by the firing volume 15b, a ball feeding unit 91 (described later) is driven and game balls are sent out one by one to a launching pad of a firing device 92 (described later). It is designed to be fired into the game area 5a of the game board 5. In addition, in this embodiment, the sending of the game ball to the launch pad and the subsequent firing of the game ball operate as one set, so the timing at which the game ball is sent to the launch pad (the timing when the game ball is fired) Even if you release your hand from the firing handle 15 at the timing before the ball is fired, the game ball will still be fired from the launch pad.

The third image display device 72 and the fourth image display device 73 display various effects and display various game-related information according to the progress of the game. Specifically, a volume adjustment image for adjusting the volume of game sound output from the audio output device 9, a light amount adjustment image for adjusting the light amount of various lighting devices and various image displays, and a light amount adjustment image for customizing game effects. Customized images etc. are displayed.

The inner frame 3 includes a concave game board mounting part 25 for mounting the game board 5 from the front opening, and a game board 92 for ejecting game balls from a firing device 92 to the game area 5a for circulating and using the game balls within the game machine 1. A ball circulation mechanism 90 that collects the played game balls and supplies them again to the firing device 92, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and a locking mechanism 27 for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4. A glass frame open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 26), an inner frame open detection switch 31b (see FIG. 26) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the inner frame 3, and a radio wave detection sensor for detecting abnormal radio waves. 54a (see FIG. 26) is provided.

The ball circulation mechanism 90 includes a firing device 92 for firing game balls toward the game area 5a, a ball feeding unit 91 for sending game balls one by one to the launching pad of the firing device 92, and a supplied game ball. A lifting polishing device 95 for hoisting the balls while polishing them, and a lifting polishing device 95 that allows the game balls that have flown down the gaming area 5a to flow down to the entrance of the lifting polishing device 95, and lifts the game balls lifted by the lifting polishing device 95. A ball passage unit 94 that causes the ball to flow down to the entrance of the ball sending unit 91, and a game ball (foul ball) that was fired by the firing device 92 but returned without flying into the game area 5a, merges into the ball passage unit 94. A foul ball passage unit 93 is provided for this purpose.

The ball feeding unit 91 includes a subtraction entrance switch 91b (see FIG. 26) for detecting game balls flowing down the ball passage unit 94, and a subtraction entrance switch 91b for sending the game balls detected by the subtraction entrance switch 91b to the firing device 92. A subtraction solenoid 91a (see FIG. 26) and a subtraction port switch 91c (see FIG. 26) for detecting the game ball sent out to the firing device 92 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a are provided.

The launch device 92 includes a launch pad (not shown) on which the game balls sent out from the ball feed unit 91 are parked, and a launch pad switch 92a (see FIG. 26) for detecting the game balls parked on the launch pad. ) and a firing solenoid 92b (see FIG. 26) for operating a firing mallet (not shown) for firing game balls parked on the firing pad.

The foul ball passage unit 93 includes a foul ball passage (not shown) for allowing game balls (foul balls) that have returned without flying into the game area 5a to join the ball passage unit 94, and a foul ball passage that flows down the foul ball passage. A foul ball switch 93a (see FIG. 26) is provided for detecting a game ball that is being played.

The rear part of the ball passage unit 94 includes a winning ball passage (not shown) for collecting and flowing down the winning game balls from various winning holes provided in the gaming area 5a, and a winning ball passage (not shown) for collecting and flowing down the winning game balls from various winning holes provided in the gaming area 5a; a winning passage count switch 94a (see FIG. 26) for detecting balls (balls); and a non-winning ball passage (not shown) for collecting and flowing down game balls that have flown into the out opening without winning in the various winning openings; A non-winning path count switch 94b (see FIG. 26) for detecting game balls (out balls) flowing down the non-winning ball path, and game balls flowing down the winning ball path and game balls flowing down the non-winning ball path. A merging passage (not shown) for merging game balls flowing down the foul ball passage and supplying the ball to the lifting polishing device 95; and a game ball supplied to the lifting polishing device 95 at the downstream end of the merging passage. A lower lift switch 94d (see FIG. 26) is provided for detecting a ball.

In addition, in the front part of the ball passage unit 94, there is a lifting ball passage (not shown) for supplying the game balls lifted by the lifting polishing device 95 to the ball feeding unit 91, and an upstream of the lifting ball passage. An on-lift switch 94c (see FIG. 26) for detecting the game balls lifted by the hoisting and polishing device 95 at the end and a midstream part of the hoisting ball passage (downstream of the on-lift switch 94c) are provided. An overabundance sensor 94e (see FIG. 26) for detecting an excess (surplus) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifting ball path, and an overabundance sensor 94e at the downstream part of the lifting ball path An insufficient sensor 94f (see FIG. 26) is provided downstream of the lifting ball passageway to detect an insufficient number (lack) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifting ball passageway. A ball removal lever (not shown) is provided for removing the game ball from the gaming machine from a ball removal port (not shown) provided at the downstream end (downstream of the insufficient sensor 94f).

The lifting and polishing device 95 includes a lift part (not shown) for lifting the game ball by the driving force of a motor, a lift origin switch 95b (not shown) for checking the origin position of the lift part, and a lift part (not shown) for confirming the origin position of the lift part. There are provided an abrasive material (not shown) for polishing the game balls lifted by the player and an abrasive confirmation switch 95a (not shown) for detecting whether the abrasive material is attached.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock on the inner frame 3 is released and the inner frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is locked. It is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a where a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a shooting ball guide path 38 is formed that guides the game ball shot by the shooting device 92 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Further, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls flowing down to the outside of the gaming area (ball passage unit 94).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 called a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and this decorative frame 40 allows the game area 5a to fire with a first firing force. The game area is divided into a left side gaming area where the game ball fired flows down, and a right side gaming area where the game ball fired with a second firing force stronger than the first firing force flows down, and the left side gaming area and the right side gaming area. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce a game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to warp the game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40. A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, there are three general prize winning holes 43 spaced apart from each other, in which game balls can always be entered. One general winning hole 43 is provided in which a ball can always be won. When the game balls that have won (entered) the general winning hole 43 are detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 27), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of the game balls are rewarded with prize balls (game benefits are granted). ) is added to the number of game balls (gaming value) owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125, which will be described later, is updated.

One of the three general winning holes 43 (the one on the left end) provided at the lower left side of the decorative frame 40 also serves as a starting area for the normal symbol, and when a prize is won in this general winning hole 43. When a game ball is detected by the general winning a prize opening detection switch 43a, a right is granted to make a winning determination as to whether or not to execute an auxiliary game (opening of the second starting opening 47, which will be described later), which will be described later. The normal drawing determination information is stored).

Below the stage part 42, there is a first starting hole 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) in which a game ball can always win (entering). When the game balls that have been played (balls) are detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 27), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are used as prize balls (granting game benefits) to play games owned by the player. This is added to the number of balls (gaming value) and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 to be described later is updated. In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally to the lower right of the first starting port 45, there is a mark indicating whether or not it is impossible to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the hit determination described later). A variable starting section 46 is provided which can convert from a difficult closed state to an open state where it is possible to win a game ball or is easy.

The variable starting part 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and also includes a second starting port opening/closing member 48 that is movable in the front-back direction, and a second A second starting port 47 (starting winning area with a second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the starting port opening/closing member 48, and a second starting port that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47. By moving the starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 27) and the second starting port opening/closing member 48 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second starting port 47 is changed to the closed state, and the second starting port is closed. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 27) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 into an open state by moving the opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning-permitting position).

Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 which is in the open state during an auxiliary game to be described later and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 27), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 2) are added to the number of game balls owned by the player as a prize ball (granting a gaming benefit), and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 to be described later is updated. . In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

In the right side game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40, there is provided a normal pattern gate 44 (normal pattern starting area) through which the game ball can pass at all times, and the game ball that has passed through the normal pattern gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch. 44a (see FIG. 27), the prize ball (gaming privilege) is not awarded, but it is determined whether or not to execute the auxiliary game (opening of the second starting port 47, which will be described later). The right to do so is granted (the general identification information described later is stored). In addition, regarding the normal pattern gate 44, it is easier for game balls to win (pass through) the general winning opening 43 which also serves as the starting area for the above-mentioned normal pattern.

Below the general figure gate 44, there is a gate that changes from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (i.e., it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination) to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize or to be opened easily. A variable winning unit 49 (variable winning device) that can be converted into a state is provided.

The variable winning part 49 (variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in FIG. 1) to serve as a flow path for the game ball, and also has a large winning opening opening/closing member 51 that is movable in the front-back direction. , a big winning hole 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the big winning hole opening/closing member 51 , and a big winning hole detection switch 50 a ( (See FIG. 27), the big winning opening opening/closing member 51 is moved forward (winning restriction position) to convert the big winning opening 50 to the closed state, and the big winning opening opening/closing member 51 is moved backward (winning allowed position). ) is provided with a big winning opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 27) for converting the big winning opening 50 into an open state by moving it toward the opening/closing state.

Then, during a jackpot game to be described later, when the jackpot opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the jackpot opening 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state, the game that had flowed down the upper surface of the jackpot opening/closing member 51 When a game ball enters the big winning hole 50 and is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are sent to the prize ball (game ball). The bonus is added to the number of game balls owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125, which will be described later, is updated.

In addition, the game ball launched into the left side game area flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40 as it is, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down via the stage part 42, and is placed below the decorative frame 40. The winnings will be won in any of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, there is no chance of winning (passing through) the general prize gate 44, the general prize opening 43, and the variable prize winning section 49 (big prize opening 50) provided in the right side gaming area.

In addition, the game balls launched into the right side game area flow down via the channel on the right side of the decorative frame 40, and after almost all of them pass through the general gate 44, one general winning prize is provided in the right side game area. The winnings will be won in any of the opening 43, the variable starting part 46 (second starting opening 47), and the variable winning part 49 (big winning opening 50), or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, no prizes are won in the general winning hole 43 or the first starting hole 45 provided in the left side gaming area.

On the back side of the game board 5, safe balls (winning balls), which are game balls that have entered the general prize opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50, are received and allowed to flow down. A safe ball flow path that later flows into the winning ball path of the ball path unit 94, and a safe ball flow path that allows the ball to flow into the winning ball path of the ball path unit 94, and a non-winning ball path of the ball path unit 94 after accepting the out ball (non-winning ball) that is a game ball that has flowed into the out port 39 and letting it flow down. An out ball flow path is provided for flowing into the ball passage, and an out ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 27) for detecting an out ball is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there are a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol pending display 63, a second special symbol pending display 64, and a normal symbol. A main information display device 59 is provided, which includes a hold display 65, a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, a status confirmation display 68, and a game status display (not shown). This main information display device 59 is composed of a plurality of LEDs.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , the second special symbol display device 61 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. Yes, the normal symbol display 62 displays the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol, which is performed based on the winning (passage, ball entry) of the game ball to the general prize opening 43 and the general symbol gate 44, which also serve as the starting area for the normal symbol. This is a variable display device for displaying (notifying).

Jackpot determination means that when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, special pattern determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination) This corresponds to acquiring a numerical value, a random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 60, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Furthermore, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of eight LEDs, and the lighting mode of the LED changes at a predetermined period (32 ms) in the variable display of each special symbol (moving lighting). do. When the special symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED is turned on in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot mode, loss mode).

Note that in this embodiment, a "big hit" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot determination. A "jackpot game" is a game in which a round game in which the jackpot 50 is changed from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times, 10 times, etc.) with an interval in between. This refers to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player in which the player can easily win prize balls.

The maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, but even before the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls ( For example, when 10 balls are won (balls entered), one round game ends. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) that have different degrees of advantage to the player.

Hit determination is based on the winning (passage, ball entry) of the game ball to the general prize opening 43 or the regular symbol gate 44, which also serves as the starting area of the regular symbol, and the regular symbol determination information (random value for hit determination, normal symbol This corresponds to acquiring a random number value for determination, a random number value for determining a normal figure variation pattern, etc.) and determining whether or not to execute an auxiliary game based on the acquired common figure determination information. In addition, when a hit determination is performed, a normal symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol is performed to notify the determination result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a manner to notify the result of the auxiliary game determination (win mode or loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute an auxiliary game (winning game) in auxiliary game determination. The term "auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) win a prize (balls entered), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be satisfied. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) are provided which have different degrees of advantage to the player.

The first special symbol reservation display 63 is composed of two LEDs, and indicates the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the first starting port 45. It is for displaying a certain number of first reservations (U1), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reservations. Although up to four first reservations are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display 64 is composed of two LEDs, and indicates the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the second starting port 47. It is for displaying a certain number of second reservations (U2), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reservations. Although up to four second reservations are stored, there may be fewer or more than four, or the second reservation may not be stored.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of two LEDs, and indicates the number of normal drawing determination information (normal drawing holding) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes through) the normal drawing gate 44. It is for displaying the number, and it lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of ordinary drawings on hold. In addition, although up to 4 pieces of common picture reservations are stored, it may be fewer or more than 4, or it is also possible not to store common picture reserves.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, numbers such as "3" or "7" will be displayed in a static manner, and if it is determined to be a loss, a "-" will be displayed in a static manner, and a variable display will be displayed. It is a good idea to repeat turning off and "-" inside.

The round number display 66 is composed of six LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. starts lighting up, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if it is a jackpot game with four rounds, only the leftmost LED will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with ten rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-hand hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is used to notify the user of the right-hand hit to encourage the player to fire the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-hand hit). The LED does not light up during the normal game state, but the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game), during the variable probability game state (described later), and during a specific time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED, and is for executing a time-saving notification indicating that the time-saving game state is in progress. When the time-saving game state is started, the LED lights up, and the time-saving game state is started. When the gaming state ends, the LED turns off.

The gaming state indicator (not shown) is composed of one LED, and is used to notify that the gaming machine 1 is in a variable-probability gaming state or a time-saving gaming state. The LED lights up in the gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, and then turns off when the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state ends (the gaming state changes).

Inside the gaming area 5a, there are a sub-first fluctuation display, a sub-second fluctuation display, a sub-first reservation display, a sub-second reservation display, a sub-normal figure fluctuation display, a sub-normal figure reservation display, A sub-information display device 80 consisting of a sub-right-handed display is provided. This sub-information display device 80 is basically composed of LEDs.

The sub-first fluctuation display is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the sub-second fluctuation display is for indicating whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. This is for displaying (notifying) whether or not there is one, and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol starts, the LED flashes at a predetermined period (1 second) (lights on for 0.5 seconds → lights off for 0.5 seconds) to display the first lamp pattern LZ1 or the second lamp pattern. LZ2 is displayed in a variable manner and goes out when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the result of jackpot determination of the special symbol may be notified by the sub-first variable display or the sub-second variable display. In this case, it is preferable that the LED is turned on in the case of a jackpot and turned off in the case of a loss.

The sub-first hold display is for displaying the number of pieces of first hold information (first hold count), which will be described later, and the sub-second hold display is for displaying the number of pieces of second hold information (second hold count), which will be described later. They are used to display the number of pending items, and are each made up of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and when the number of reservations is "2", the LED on the right turns off. The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of reservations is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reservations is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-normal figure fluctuation display is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the LED blinks at predetermined intervals (variable display). Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, an aspect indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights on in the case of a win, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, on the sub-normal symbol fluctuation display, so that you can only know whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating, it blinks while the regular symbol is fluctuating, and turns on or off when it is stopped. Good too.

The sub-universal drawing reservation display is for displaying the number of ordinary drawings pending storage (the number of ordinary drawings pending), and is constituted by two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved general drawings is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of reserved general drawings is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the number of reserved general drawings is ``1''. The left and right LEDs light up when the number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED lights up when the number of reserved maps is "3", and the left and right LEDs light up when the number of reserved maps is "4". LED blinks.

The sub-right hitting indicator is for prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and the time saving state, and turns off during the other game states.

A first image display device 70 (main display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and a first image display device 70 (main display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the bottom of the production space 40a. In front of the display device 70, a second image display device 71 (central sub-display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display whose size and display area are smaller than that of the first image display device 70 is provided. A movable performance device 77 for performing motion performance is provided at the top.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The performance display includes a customer waiting demonstration performance that is performed while the special symbol variable display is not being performed, a variable performance that involves the variable display of a plurality of performance symbols 70a that is performed while the special symbol variable display is being executed, and a special symbol. There is a variable display (update variation) of the special symbol TZ (so-called fourth symbol) that is performed during the execution of the variable display, and a jackpot performance that is carried out during the execution of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, while the first image display device 70 is performing a variable effect, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) constituted by a solenoid, a motor, etc. It becomes.

Specifically, the vertical direction is between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a presentation position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. It is designed to perform a movement effect by moving (ascending, descending). It should be noted that the moving direction of the second image display device 71 may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 includes a variable display area for displaying the three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and a production mode related to the execution of the variable production. A display area and the like are formed for executing display effects (such as displaying a background image) according to the image.

In addition, the production pattern 70a is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of special symbols executed on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbol, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, as the effect pattern 70a, a pattern indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (loss mode, jackpot mode). The jackpot mode is a combination of the same performance symbols 70a such as "777" or "555", and the loss mode is any other mode.

The manner in which the performance symbols 70a are displayed in a variable manner is by scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may also be scrolling in the horizontal direction, switching on the spot, rotating (rotating), etc. good.

Also, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device depending on the result of the jackpot determination. 71 is designed to increase the player's expectation that a jackpot game (special game) will be executed.

The first image display device 70 includes a first pending icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first pending icons (first pending information) corresponding to the first pending number (U1) in a normal gaming state or the like; A second reservation icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second reservation icons (second reservation information) corresponding to the second reservation number (U2) in a time-saving gaming state, etc., and a display area 70D for displaying a number of second reservation icons (second reservation information) corresponding to the second reservation number (U2), and a display area 70D for displaying a variable effect that is in progress. The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) shown in FIG. A second reservation number display area 70F and the like for display are formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B includes, from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, a first display section (first area), a second display section (second area), a third display section (third area), and a fourth display section (first area). The area is divided into a display section (fourth area), and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) are displayed in the first to fourth display sections.

Specifically, in the first display area 70B of the first pending icon display area, a first pending icon indicating first pending information for which variable display of the first special symbol is first performed is displayed; The second display section displays the first pending icon indicating the first pending information for which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed second, and the third display section displays the first pending icon that indicates the first pending information for which the first special symbol is displayed thirdly. A first pending icon indicating first pending information for which variable display is executed is displayed, and a first pending icon indicating first pending information for which variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed. An icon will be displayed.

The second pending icon display area 70D includes, from the left side, a first display section (first area), a second display section (second area), a third display section (third area), and a fourth display section (fourth area). The number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) is displayed in the first to fourth display sections.

Specifically, in the second pending icon display area 70D, a second pending icon indicating a second pending memory in which a variable display of the second special symbol is first displayed is displayed in the first display section, and The second display section displays a second pending icon indicating a second pending memory in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the third display section displays a second pending memory in which a variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the third instance. A second pending icon indicating a second pending memory for which display is executed is displayed, and a second pending icon indicating a second pending memory for which a variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourthly is displayed on the fourth display section. is displayed.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D, and is arranged so that it does not rest on or float on the pedestal image. The icon will be displayed as follows.

Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (production symbol 70a), the first pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are moved one by one toward the icon display area 70C. The first pending icon displayed on the first display section of the first pending icon display area 70B becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 70C, and the first special symbol ( At the end of the variable display of the production pattern 70a), the icon disappears (erases). In other words, a disappearing effect (erasing effect) of the icon is performed.

In addition, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (production symbol 70a), the second pending icons displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C. ), the second pending icon displayed in the first display part of the second pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C, and becomes the icon, and the second special symbol (production pattern 70a) ) disappears (erases) when the fluctuating display ends. Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

The movable performance device 77 has a first movable member 77a and a second movable member 77b that can be operated, and the movable performance device 77 has a first movable member 77a and a second movable member 77b that can be operated. It is possible to perform an action effect by causing the second movable member 77b to perform a predetermined action. Further, the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b are provided with a board illumination device 76 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, which can emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the motion performance. .

Specifically, the first movable member 77a has a standby position located near the end (above) of the first image display device 70 and a presentation position located near the center (below) of the first image display device 70. It is designed to move (rise, fall) between The second movable member 77b is configured to move between a standby position where it covers a part of the front of the first movable member 77a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 77a.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a main control device 110A with a built-in main control board 110 that controls the progress of the game, an effect control device 130A with a built-in effect control board 130 that controls the effect of the game, and a main control. An upper cover member 23 made of transparent resin is provided to cover the rear of the device 110A and the production control device 130A, and the main control device 110A and the production control device 130A are arranged vertically.

At the rear of the production control device 130A, there is one of a plurality of adjustment modes in which reference values for the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of various light sources (various lighting devices, various display devices) are set. A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching to the upper cover member 23, and the rear side is covered by an upper cover member 23 in the normal state.

On the back side of the inner frame 3, there is a frame control device 120A (value control device) that incorporates a frame control board 120 that controls the number of game balls owned by the game (game value amount) and controls information communication with the dedicated unit 170. ), a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, and a rental device connection terminal provided with a rental device connection terminal 101 for connecting dedicated wiring for communicating with a dedicated unit 170 installed in parallel to the gaming machine 1. A lower cover member 120B made of transparent resin is provided to cover the upper rear part of the plate 100 and the frame control device 120A.

The power supply device 160A is disposed at one end of the left and right sides of the lower part of the inner frame 3 (the right side in FIG. 4), and the power supply device 160A is located at one side of the left and right sides (the right side of the inner frame 3 near the rotation axis in FIG. 4). A power cord lead-out portion having a power plug 161 at its tip is provided, and a power switch 164 that can be turned on and off is provided.

The frame control device 120A is arranged so that the power supply cord lead-out portion and the power switch of the power supply device 160A are exposed at the rear. (close to the free rotation end) and is arranged so as to overlap behind the power supply device 160A.

On the back side of the inner frame 3 and above the power switch 164, a rental device connection terminal board 100 for communicating with the dedicated unit 170 is provided. A lending device connection terminal 101 is mounted into which a connector provided at the end of a dedicated cable for carrying out the rental is inserted.

The frame control board 120 built in the frame control device 120A has a frame for displaying the number of game balls (playing value amount) owned by the player, etc., similar to the game ball number display 135 provided in the glass frame 4. Although a control display 125 is provided, the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 are arranged offset in the vertical and horizontal directions of the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the game ball number display 135 is arranged near the rotation axis of the glass frame 4, and the frame control display 125 is located below the game ball number display 135, so that the inner frame 3 can freely rotate. It is located near the edge.

In this way, since the game ball count display 135 provided on the front side of the game machine is arranged near the rotation axis of the glass frame 4, when the game clerk opens the inner frame 3 or the glass frame 4, Even if it is, the movement width of the game ball number display 135 becomes small and the visibility of the game ball number display 135 does not deteriorate drastically, and the display contents of the game ball number display 135 can be checked easily. It becomes possible to improve the convenience for game store staff and players.

In addition, since the frame control display 125 provided on the back side of the gaming machine is provided near the free rotation end of the inner frame 3, when the gaming clerk opens the inner frame 3 and checks the frame control display 125, In addition, the frame control display 125 is easier to visually recognize than when the frame control display 125 is provided closer to the rotation axis of the inner frame 3, making it easier to view the display contents of the frame control display 125. It becomes possible to improve convenience for store staff.

Further, the lower cover member 120B covers only the upper side of the frame control device 120A (including various female connectors 127a to 127f exposed from the frame control board case 300, which will be described later), and covers various types of female connectors provided on the lower side of the frame control device 120A. Buttons (game ball number clear button 121b related to the game ball number clear switch 121 described later, ball removal button 122b related to the ball removal switch 122, error release button 123b related to the error release switch 123) are not covered. . Therefore, various buttons provided on the lower side of the frame control device 120A (game ball number clear button 121b related to the game ball number clear switch 121 described later, ball removal button 122b related to the ball removal switch 122, error related to the error release switch 123) The release button 123b) becomes easier to operate, making it possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

In addition, the lower cover member 120B does not cover various stickers (frame management number sticker 308 and operation guide sticker 309 described later) attached to the frame control device 120A and the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120. It looks like this. Therefore, the lower cover member 120B does not obstruct the visibility of the various stickers and the frame control display 125, making it possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Note that an acquisition upper limit device operation display section may be provided on the front side of the glass frame 4 to display the operating state of the acquisition upper limit device, which will be described later. The light may be turned on when the upper limit acquisition device is in operation, or the operation display section of the upper limit acquisition device can be operated by a gaming clerk (it cannot be operated when the glass frame 4 is closed, but when the glass frame 4 is open). When the acquisition upper limit device is not operating, the panel part slides to display the inoperative state, and when it is operating, the panel part slides to display the operating state. Good too.

(Configuration of main controller)
The configuration of the main controller 110A will be explained using FIGS. 5 and 6. 5(a) is a front view of the main controller 110A, FIG. 5(b) is a back view of the main controller 110A, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller 110A.

The main control device 110A includes a rectangular main control board 110 on which various electronic components (main control unit 110m, various connectors, various switches, integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistance arrays, etc.) are mounted, and a main control board 110. A main control board case 200 made of transparent resin that accommodates the main control board case 200 inside, a seal 223 for regulating opening of the main control board case 200 (leaving traces of opening), and a transparent resin for breaking the seal 223. A cutter member 222 made of aluminum and a seal cover member 221 made of transparent resin are attached to the main control board case 200 so as to cover the seal 223.

At one end of the main control board 110 in the short direction (near the long side in the back of FIG. 6), there is a main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer having a CPU, ROM, and RWM) that controls the progress of the game. A main inspection connector 116 into which a male connector provided at the end of a wiring for electrical connection with an inspection device for inspecting the main control device 110A (specifically, the main control unit 110m) at a game parlor is inserted. An information display 115 and the like for displaying setting values, which will be described later, are installed.

In addition, on the other end of the main control board 110 in the short direction (near the long side in front of you in FIG. 6), there is provided at the end of the wiring for electrically connecting with the frame control board 120 and the production control board 130. A plurality of female connectors 117a to 117g are mounted, into which male connectors are inserted.

In addition, at one end in the longitudinal direction of the main control board 110 (near the short side on the right side in FIG. 6), there is a display that clears the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m by the operation of the gaming store clerk or at the stage of the advantage level of the game. The RWM clear switch 111a inputs a signal for updating a set value (associated with the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot determination described later), and a state where the set value can be changed by operation using a setting key by a game clerk. Alternatively, a setting key switch 112a, etc., for inputting a signal for shifting the set value to a confirmable state is mounted.

The main control board case 200 includes an upper case member 201 that is formed in a concave shape with an open bottom and covers the front side of the main control board 110, and an upper case member 201 that is formed in a concave shape with an open top and covers the back side of the main control board 110. A lower case member 211 that covers the side is provided, and an accommodation space for accommodating the main control board 110 is formed by bringing the upper case member 201 and the lower case member 211 into a closed state.

The upper case member 201 includes an opposing wall (top plate portion 202, etc.) that faces the surface of the main control board 110 and serves as a top plate of the recessed chamber, and a wall that hangs down (extends) from the end (periphery) of the opposing wall. ) and an upper peripheral wall portion 203 that serves as a side wall of the recessed chamber, and an upper flange portion 210 for attaching the main controller 110A to the back side of the game board 5.

The opposing walls of the upper case member 201 are the top plate part 202 (uniform thickness, 2 mm) at the highest position, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the upper case member 201 (FIG. 5). The first step part 205a forms a step with the top plate part 202 at the upper left corner of FIG. It has a second step portion 205b that forms a step with the top plate portion 202.

The separation width from the surface of the main control board 110 is determined in the following order: top plate section 202 (first opposing wall)>first step section 205a (second opposing wall)>second step section 205b (third opposing wall). It is designed to become smaller.

Management information (identification information) of the main control board 110 is located on the right side of the center part of the top plate section 202 (a position that does not overlap with the main control section 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, and information display 115). A main management number sticker affixing section 207 is provided for pasting a main management number sticker 208 on which is printed.

The main management number sticker affixing section 207 is a rectangular area formed by recessing a part of the top plate section 202 so as to be lowered by one step. Then, the main management number sticker 208 is pasted on the main management number sticker pasting section 207, and the pasting area lined up on the left side of the main management number sticker pasting section 207 (main control section 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display A model information sticker 209 on which model information of the gaming machine 1 is printed is attached at a position that does not overlap the machine 115 in the front or back.

Note that the front surface of the main management number sticker affixing section 207 is substantially flush with or flush with the back surface of the top plate section 202 (the surface facing the main control board 110). Therefore, the height (distance, width) from the front surface of the main control board 110 to the main management number sticker 208, and the height (distance, width) from the front surface of the main control board 110 to the back surface of the top plate section 202 (the surface facing the main control board 110). The height (distance, width) is substantially the same or the same.

An opening that enables the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a is formed in the top plate section 202 at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a mounted on the main control board 110. An RWM clear button 111b for pressing the operation part of the switch 111a is loosely fitted so as to be movable up and down, and by pressing the RWM clear button 111b, it is possible to turn on the RWM clear switch 111a.

Furthermore, a cylinder opening for exposing the key cylinder of the setting key switch 112a is formed in the top plate section 202 at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a mounted on the main control board 110, and a cylinder opening is formed in the top plate section 202 at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a mounted on the main control board 110. It is possible to rotate the key by inserting the key into the keyhole of the key cylinder.

An opening for exposing the main inspection connector 116 to the outside is formed in the first stage part 205a at a position corresponding to the main inspection connector 116 mounted on the main control board 110, and the inspection device A male connector provided at the end of the wiring extending from the main inspection connector 116 can be inserted into the main inspection connector 116.

A plurality of openings for exposing the plurality of female connectors 117a to 117f to the outside are formed in the second stage portion 205b at positions corresponding to the plurality of female connectors 117a to 117g mounted on the main control board 110. The male connector provided at the end of the wiring for electrical connection with the frame control device 120A and the production control device 130A can be inserted into various female connectors 117a to 117g.

The lower case member 211 has an opposing wall (bottom plate portion 212, etc.) that faces the back surface of the main control board 110 and serves as the bottom plate of the recessed chamber, and stands up (extends) upward from the end (periphery) of the opposing wall. It has a lower circumferential wall portion 213 that becomes a side wall of the recessed chamber, and a lower flange portion 220 for attaching the main control device 110A to the back side of the game board 5 in cooperation with the upper flange portion 210 of the upper case member 201. .

At one end in the longitudinal direction of the main control board case 200 (on the left side in FIG. 5(a)), an upper case member 201 and a lower case member 211 housing the main control board 110 are disposed in a closed state. A main caulking part 204A for sealing the case 200 is provided, and the other longitudinal end of the main control board case 200 (the right side in FIG. 6(a)) accommodates a cutter member 222, and the upper case A seal affixing section 206A for affixing a seal 223 across the member 201 and the lower case member 211 is provided.

The main caulking part 204A includes an upper caulking part 204 connected to the upper case member 201 via the broken part, a lower caulking part 214 connected to the lower case member 211 via the breaking part, and a lower part from the upper caulking part 204 to the lower case member 211. It has a fixing member that is press-fitted into the caulking part 214 and fixing the upper caulking part 204 and the lower caulking part 214.

The upper crimping part 204 includes a first upper crimping part 204a used to first seal the main control board case 200, and a first upper crimping part 204a used to seal the main control board case 200 again after the main control board case 200 is first opened. The first upper crimped part 204a and the second upper crimped part 204b are arranged side by side in the lateral direction of the main control board case 200.

The lower crimping part 214 includes a first lower crimping part 214a used to first seal the main control board case 200, and a first lower crimping part 214a used to seal the main control board case 200 again after the main control board case 200 is first opened. The first lower crimped part 214a and the second lower crimped part 214b are arranged side by side in the lateral direction of the main control board case 200.

The sealing sticker pasting portion 206A includes an upper pasting portion 206a that is provided so as to protrude laterally from the upper peripheral wall portion 203 of the upper case member 201, and an upper pasting portion 206a that is provided so as to protrude laterally from the lower peripheral wall portion 213 of the lower case member 211. A housing space for the cutter member 222 is formed between the upper and lower adhesive parts 206a and 216a that are arranged vertically. Then, with the cutter member 222 accommodated in the accommodation space, the sealing sticker 223 is attached across the upper attachment section 206a and the lower attachment section 206b, thereby sealing the board case.

The seal cover member 221 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with one side open, and an engaging portion (not shown) that engages with both ends of the cutter member 222 in the longitudinal direction is formed inside the concave chamber. There is. When the seal cover member 221 is attached to the main control board case 200 so as to enclose the seal affixed portion 206A with the seal 223 affixed thereto, the seal cover member 221 is formed inside the concave chamber. The seal 223 is protected in a state where the mating portion is engaged with the cutter member 222.

When the main control board case 200 configured as described above is first opened for inspection or the like, the seal cover member 221 is first removed. The cutter member 222 moves, thereby breaking the seal 223 and releasing the seal on the main control board case 200. Then, the broken part of the first upper crimped part 204a and the broken part of the first lower crimped part 214a are broken using a tool such as nippers to release the seal by the main crimped part 204A, and the main control board case 200 is removed. Open it.

When resealing the main control board case 200 after opening the main control board case 200, the second upper crimp portion 204b and the second lower crimp portion 214b are By fixing with the fixing member, the main control board case 200 is resealed. Then, the seal cover member 221 is attached so as to enclose the seal affixing portion 206A. Note that when resealing the main control board case 200, the cutter member 222 is not accommodated in the sealing sticker application portion 206A, but it may be accommodated.

In this way, in the main control board case 200, the main control unit 110m, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 115 mounted on the main control board 110 are located at a position (area) that does not overlap in the front or back. A management number sticker 208 and a model information sticker 209 are attached. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of electronic components that require a high degree of visual inspection and electronic components that require operation, thereby making it possible to improve the convenience of the game store staff.

In addition, various female connectors 117 for exchanging signals with the frame control device 120A provided below the main control device 110A are mounted on one end side of the main control board 110 near the frame control device 120A. 110m and an information display 115 are mounted on the other end side of the main control board 110. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the wiring for electrically connecting the main controller 110A and the frame controller 120A overlaps the main controller 110m and the information display 115. The visibility of the information display 115 can be ensured.

Although a plurality of female connectors 117a to 117g for exchanging signals with the frame control board 120 and the effect control board 130 are mounted on one end of the main control board 110 in the longitudinal direction, Alternatively, the female connector for exchanging signals with the frame control board 120 located below the main control board 110 may be mounted on the end of the main control board 110 closer to the frame control board 120. A female connector for exchanging signals with the performance control board 130 located above the main control board 110 may be mounted on the end of the main control board 110 near the performance control board 130. Alternatively, other mounting arrangements may be used.

In addition, although the information display 115 is mounted on the other end of the main control board 110 in the lateral direction, it can be placed near the center of the main control board 110 if it is near the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a. Alternatively, other implementation arrangements may be used.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine 1 is not equipped with the setting key switch 112a (setting change mode for changing setting values and setting confirmation mode for confirming and displaying setting values), the information display 115 is not installed. You can do it like this.

(Relationship between distances between two points for each part of the main controller)
The relationship between the distances between two points for each part of the main controller 110A will be explained using FIG. 7. The left diagram in FIG. 7 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 5, and the right diagram in FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of the dotted circle portion in the left diagram.

First, the main control section 110m is operated by inserting a plurality of terminals protruding from the bottom of the main body section, which has a vertical width larger than the width between the two side surfaces, into a through hole formed in the main control board 110. Chip information 110m1 (chip model number, product code, manufacturer name, etc.) indicating the main control unit 110m is printed in black on one side of the main body, and is lined up next to the chip information 110m1. , a main chip model information sticker 110m2 on which model information (manufacturer name, model name, etc.) is printed is attached.

The distance (height, width) L1 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209) is It is larger than the distance (height, width) L2 in the thickness direction of the board to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) L2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the back surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker 208) is the surface of the main control board 110. It is larger than the distance (height, width) L4 in the thickness direction of the substrate from to the upper end of the main control section 110m.

The distance (height, width) L4 in the board thickness direction from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main control unit 110m is the distance from the surface of the main control board 110 to the side surface of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer). It is larger than the distance (height, width) L7 in the thickness direction of the substrate to the upper end of the main chip model information sticker 110m2 attached to the main chip.

The distance (height, width) L7 in the board thickness direction from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main chip model information sticker 110m2 affixed to the side surface of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) is as follows: It is larger than the distance (height, width) L3 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main inspection connector 116.

The distance (height, width) L3 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 is the distance L3 from the surface of the main control board 110 to the top of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer). It is approximately the same as the distance (height, width) L5 in the thickness direction of the substrate to the upper end of the chip information 110m1 printed on the side surface.

The distance (height, width) L5 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the chip information 110m1 printed on the side surface of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) is It is larger than the distance (height, width) L6 in the thickness direction of the substrate from the surface of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the lower end of the chip information 110m1 printed on the side surface of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer).

The distance (height, width) L6 in the thickness direction of the main control board 110 from the surface of the main control board 110 to the bottom end of the chip information 110m1 printed on the side surface of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) is The distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) from the surface of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the bottom end of the main chip model information sticker 110m2 attached to the side surface of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) is greater than L8. .

The distance (height, width) L2 in the thickness direction of the board from the front surface of the main control board 110 to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 is indicated on the information display 115. It is larger than the distance (height, width) H5 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209).

The distance (height, width) H5 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface of the information display 115 to the surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209) is the distance H5 of the main inspection connector 116. It is approximately the same as the distance (height, width) H7 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209).

The distance (height, width) H7 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209) is It is larger than the distance (height, width) H6 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200.

The distance (height, width) H6 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface of the information display 115 to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200 is the distance H6 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface of the information display 115 It is approximately the same as the distance (height, width) H8 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200 to the back surface (main management number sticker 208).

The distance (height, width) H8 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200 is the main control part 110m. It is larger than the distance (height, width) H3 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the (one-chip microcomputer) to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209).

The distance (height, width) H3 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the surface of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209) is The distance in the board thickness direction (height, width) from the upper end of the control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the back surface of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200 (main control number sticker 208) is greater than H4. It has become.

Note that the distance (height, width) L4 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the top end of the main control unit 110m is the distance L4 from the surface of the main control board 110 to the top end of the main inspection connector 116. may be smaller than the distance (height, width) L3 in the thickness direction of the substrate. In this case, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main chip model information sticker 110m2 affixed to the side surface of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer). Regarding L7 and the distance (height, width) L5 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the chip information 110m1 printed on the side of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer), It is smaller than the distance (height, width) L3 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the control board 110 to the upper end of the main inspection connector 116.

(Seal affixed to main control board case)
The seal attached to the main control board case 200 will be explained using FIG. 8. FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing the main management number sticker 208 affixed to the main management number sticker affixing section 207, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a model information sticker 209.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), the main management number sticker 208 is a transparent rectangular sticker with a watermark (pattern) to prevent forgery. , a main management information printing section 208b on which management information of the main control device 110A is printed, an opener entry column 208c for entering the person who opened the main control board case 200, and the date of opening of the main control board case 200. an information printing section 208e on which predetermined character information is printed, a line section 208f printed along the outline of the main management number sticker 208, and a main management number. A transparent window portion 208g is provided that allows the rear side of the seal 208 to be seen through.

The main management information printing section 208b is provided at a position near the top of the main management number sticker 208, and is composed of a square first area and a rectangular second area extending rightward from the right side of the first area. This information image is printed on the white printed part (opaque part) and the first area of the white printed part (opaque part), and is used to identify the main control device 110A (main control board 110). A two-dimensional code (QR code: registered trademark) is printed in the second area, and an identification symbol "AA-1" indicating the manufacturer name of the main control device 110A (main control board 110) is printed on the second area. It has a management number "No. 111111" for identifying the control device 110A (main control board 110). Note that the two-dimensional code (QR code: registered trademark) includes information on the manufacturer's name and management number.

The opening person entry field 208c is a rectangular white printed area (opaque area) that is long from side to side, and is provided at a position to the left of the vertical center of the main management number sticker 208, and is used to write the opening person first. It has a first opening person entry field 208c1 for entering the opening person, and a second opening person entry field 208c2 which is provided below the first opening person entry field 208c1 with an interval, and for writing the opening person second. are doing.

The opening date entry field 208d is a rectangular white printed part (opaque part) that is long from side to side, and is located to the right of the main management number sticker 208 and is spaced to the right of the first opening person entry field 208c1. At the same time, there is a space between the first opening date entry field 208d1 for first entering the opening date, the right side of the second opening date entry field 208c2, and the lower part of the first opening date entry field 208d1. and a second opening date entry field 208d2 for entering the opening date.

The information printing section 208e includes a first information printing section 208e1 of "main board management number" printed in black above the main management information printing section 208b, and a first information printing section 208e1 printed in black above the first opener entry field 208c1. A second information printing section 208e2 for "opened by", a third information printing section 208e3 for "opening date" printed in black above the first opening date entry field 208d1, and a main management number sticker 208 The fourth information printing section 208e4 has the manufacturer's name "〇ABC" printed in black at a position near the lower end of the .

The line portion 208f includes a left side line portion 208f1 printed along the left outer edge of the main management number sticker 208 from the vicinity of the first information printing portion 208e1 to the vicinity of the fourth information printing portion 208e4, and the vicinity of the first information printing portion 208e1. It has a right side line part 208f2 that is printed along the right outer edge of the main management number sticker 208 from 208e4 to around the fourth information printing part 208e4, and the left line part 208f1 and the right line part 208f2 form the main management information printing part. 208b, an opening field 208c, an opening date field 208d, etc. are enclosed.

The transparent window section 208g includes a first transparent window section 208g1 provided between the main management information printing section 208b and the first opener entry field 208c1, a first opener entry field 208c1, and a second opener entry field 208c2. A second transparent window section 208g2 provided between the main management information printing section 208b and the first opening date entry column 208d1, and a third transparent window section 208g3 provided between the main management information printing section 208b and the first opening date entry column 208d1, and the first opening date. A fourth transparent window section 208g4 provided between the entry field 208d1 and the second opening date entry field 208d2, and a fourth transparent window section 208g4 provided between the first opening person entry field 208c1 and the first opening date entry field 208d1. 5 transparent window section 208g5, 6th transparent window section 208g6 provided between the second opener entry field 208c2 and the second opening date entry field 208d2, the opener entry field 208c and the left side line section 208f1. A seventh light-transmitting window section 208g7 provided in between, an eighth light-transmitting window section 208g8 provided between the opening date entry field 208d and the right side line section 208f2, an opener entry field 208c, and an opening date entry field 208g7. It has a ninth light-transmitting window section 208g9 provided between the column 208d and the fourth information printing section 208e4.

The main control unit 110m, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display are mounted on the main control board 110 through the light-transmitting windows 208g1 to 208g9 and the main control board case 200. 115, various female connectors 117a to 117g, and other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) are visible.

In addition, there are two cases in which various electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 can be visually recognized only through the main control board case 200 (through) the main control board case 200, and ( (through the main control board 110), the visibility of various electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 is different (specifically, the visibility is higher in the former). It has become.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), the model information sticker 209 is a transparent rectangular sticker with a transparent part 209a that allows the rear view to be seen through, and a model code of the gaming machine 1 (main controller 110A). A printed information writing section 209b, a dividing line section 209c that divides the model information sticker 209 into upper and lower sections, an information printing section 209d on which predetermined character information is printed, and a transparency that allows the rear side of the model information sticker 209 to be seen through. A light window section 209e is provided. Note that the model information sticker 209 is not watermarked (patterned) to prevent forgery, and has a smaller width (area) in the vertical and horizontal directions than the main management number sticker 208.

The information writing section 209b is provided at the bottom and right side of the model information sticker 209, and includes a rectangular white printed section (opaque section) that is long from side to side, and a white printed section (opaque section). ) and a model code printed on the rectangular part.

The division line portion 209c is constituted by a white printed portion (opaque portion) provided at the center of the model information sticker 209 in the left-right direction.

The information printing section 209d includes a model information printing section 209d1 in which the model name "Pachinko 〇〇〇〇〇ABCD" of the gaming machine 1 (main controller 110A) is printed in black in an area above the division line section 209c; In an area below the division line part 209c and to the left of the model information sticker 209, there is a manufacturer name printing part 209d2 in which the manufacturer name "Manufacturer name: Corporation" of the gaming machine 1 (main controller 110A) is printed in black. are doing.

The transparent window section 209e is provided between the information writing section 209b and the division line section 209c.

The main control unit 110m, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, the information display 115, Various female connectors 117a to 117g and other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) are visible.

In addition, there are two cases in which various electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 can be visually recognized only through the main control board case 200 (through) the main control board case 200, and ( (through the main control board 110), and the visibility of various electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 differs depending on the case (specifically, the former has higher visibility than the latter). ).

In this way, the main management number sticker 208 includes a two-dimensional code (first information) that is an information image for identifying the main control device 110A (main control board 110), and the manufacturer of the main control device 110A. An identification information display area (main management information printing section 208b) having an identification symbol (second information) indicating the manufacturer's name and a management number (third information) for identifying the main controller 110A, and the main controller 110A. The opening information entry area (opener entry field 208c, opening date entry field 208d) is configured to include an opening information entry area for entering opening information. Therefore, it becomes easier to inspect and confirm the main control device 110A, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

The main control number sticker 208 also includes a two-dimensional code (first information) that is an information image for identifying the main control device 110A (main control board 110), and the name of the manufacturer of the main control device 110A. An identification information display area (main management information printing unit 208b) having an identification symbol (second information) indicating the main controller 110A and a management number (third information) for identifying the main controller 110A, and an unsealing area for the main controller 110A. It includes an opening information entry area for entering information (opener entry area 208c, opening date entry area 208d), and between the identification information display area and the opening information entry area, there is a rear main control board 110. Various electronic components (main control unit 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 115, various female connectors 117a to 117g), and other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, A see-through area (a light-transmitting portion 208a, a light-transmitting window portion 208g) through which the array (such as an array) can be visually recognized is provided. Therefore, even if the main control number sticker 208 is attached to the main control board case 200, various electronic components behind the main control number sticker 208 can be visually confirmed through the see-through area, and the gaming machine It becomes possible to ensure security.

In addition, the main control number sticker 208 (opening information entry area) includes a first entry area (opener entry field 208c) where the person who opened the main controller 110A can be written in, and the date of opening of the main controller 110A. It includes a second entry area (opening date entry field 208d) that can be filled in, and between the first entry area (opener entry field 208c) and the second entry area (opening date entry field 208d). , various electronic components mounted on the rear main control board 110 (main control section 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 115, various female connectors 117a to 117g, and other electronic components (integrated A see-through area (a light-transmitting portion 208a, a light-transmitting window portion 208g) is provided in which a circuit, a capacitor, a resistor, a resistor array, etc.) can be visually recognized. Therefore, even if the main control number sticker 208 is attached to the main control board case 200, various electronic components behind the main control number sticker 208 can be visually confirmed through the see-through area, and the gaming machine It becomes possible to ensure security.

The model information sticker 209 also includes a model information display area (information writing section 209b, model information printing section 209d1, manufacturer name printing section 209d2) for identifying the model of the main controller 110A (gaming machine 1). It consists of Therefore, it becomes easier to identify the model of the main control device 110A (game machine 1), and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Furthermore, the model information sticker 209 includes an information writing section 209b on which a model code is printed, and a partition line section 209c that partitions the model information sticker, and between the information writing section 209b and the partition line section 209c, Various electronic components (main control section 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 115, various female connectors 117a to 117g, and other electronic components (integrated circuit) mounted on the rear main control board 110 , a capacitor, a resistor, a resistor array, etc.)) are provided. Therefore, even if the model information sticker 209 is attached to the main control board case 200, various electronic components behind the model information sticker 209 can be visually confirmed through the see-through area, thereby increasing the security of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to guarantee the amount.

In addition, the area of the main management number sticker 208 is large because it contains a large amount of information important for the management and security of the gaming machine 1. The area of the model information sticker 209 with less information is smaller. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the main control board 110 from being extremely reduced due to the model information sticker 209 having little information (small amount of information) important for the management and security of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to ensure security.

In addition, various electronic components (main control board 110) mounted on the rear main control board 110 can be seen through the transparent part 208a of the main control number sticker 208, which has been watermarked (patterned) to prevent counterfeiting. than when visually checking the control unit 110m, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 115, various female connectors 117a to 117g, and other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) , when various electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 are visually recognized through the transparent part 209e of the model information sticker 209 that is not watermarked (patterned) to prevent counterfeiting. The visibility of various electronic components is higher. Therefore, even if two stickers are affixed to the main control board case 200, security will not become extremely low.

Note that the RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch, and various female connectors 117a to 117g mounted on the main control board 110 are made invisible through the light-transmitting window portion 208g and the light-transmitting window portion 209e. Good too.

(Configuration of frame control device)
The configuration of the frame control device 120A will be explained using FIGS. 9 and 10. 9(a) is a front view of the frame control device 120A, FIG. 9(b) is a back view of the frame control device 120A, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the frame control device 120A.

The frame control device 120A includes a rectangular frame control board 120 on which various electronic components (a frame control unit 120m, various connectors, various switches, etc.) are mounted, and a transparent resin frame that houses the frame control board 120 inside. A control board case 300 is provided.

A frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer having a CPU, ROM, and RWM) is mounted at a position near the center of the frame control board 120, and controls the number of game balls (gaming value) owned by the game. A male connector provided at the end of the wiring for electrical connection with the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is inserted into one end of the board 120 in the short direction (along the long side on the upper side in FIG. 10). A plurality of female connectors 127a to 127f are mounted, and a test connector 128 into which a male connector provided at the end of a wiring for electrical connection with an inspection jig during testing of the gaming machine 1 is inserted.

In addition, on the other end side in the lateral direction of the frame control board 120 (along the long side on the lower side in FIG. 10), a game is stored in the frame control unit 120m on the condition that the game store clerk simultaneously operates the power switch 164. The number of game ball clear switch 121 is used to clear the number of game balls (gaming value) owned by a person, and is used in circulation in the game machine 1 on the condition that it is operated simultaneously with the power switch 164 by a game clerk. Canceling a predetermined error or error notification without requiring simultaneous operation of a ball removal switch 122 for performing a process for removing a game ball from the game machine (ball removal operation) and a power switch 164 by a game clerk. An error release switch 123 for performing processing to perform the process, an error code according to the number of game balls owned by the player (playing value amount) and the type of error, and performance information calculated as the result of the game (normal base value, etc.) ), a frame control display 125 for displaying a plurality of information such as information indicating that the ball is being pulled out, and a frame control display 125 for inspecting the frame control device 120A (specifically, the frame control unit 120m) at the game parlor. A frame inspection connector 126, etc., into which a male connector provided at the end of the wiring for electrical connection with the inspection device is inserted, is mounted.

The frame control board case 300 includes a first case member 301 that is formed in a concave shape with an open bottom and covers the front side of the frame control board 120, and a first case member 301 that is formed in a concave shape with an open top and covers the front side of the frame control board 120. It is provided with a second case member 311 that covers the back side, and by bringing the first case member 301 and the second case member 311 into a closed state, an accommodation space for accommodating the frame control board 120 is formed. ing.

The first case member 301 includes an opposing wall that faces the surface of the frame control board 120 and serves as a top plate of the recessed chamber (for example, a top plate portion 302, etc.), and hangs downward from an end (periphery) of the opposing wall. (extending) and an upper peripheral wall portion 303 that serves as a side wall of the recessed chamber.

The opposing wall of the first case member 301 has a top plate part 302 (uniform thickness, 2 mm) at the highest position, and a top plate part 302 at the highest position (uniform thickness, 2 mm) and a top plate part 302 (uniform thickness, 2 mm) and a top plate part 302 on one longitudinal end side of the first case member 301 (left side in FIG. 9(a)). A step is formed between the first step 305a that forms a step between the first step 305a and the top plate 302 at one end of the first case member 301 in the transverse direction (upper side in FIG. 9(a)). and a third step 305c that forms a step between the second step 305b and the second step 305b so as to continue outward from the second step 305b (upper side in FIG. 9(a)). , between the other end of the first case member 301 in the transverse direction (lower side in FIG. 9(a)) and the other end in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 9(a)) and the top plate part 302. A fourth step portion 305d forming a step on the other end side of the first case member 301 in the width direction (lower side in FIG. 9(a)) and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 9(a)) The fifth step part 305e forms a step between the top plate part 302 and the fourth step part 305d on the right side of FIG. a sixth step 305f that forms a step between the top plate section 302 and the first step 305a at one end side in the longitudinal direction (the left side of FIG. 9(a)). have.

The distance from the surface of the frame control board 120 is as follows: top plate portion 302 (first opposing wall)>first step portion 305a (second opposing wall)>second step portion 305b (third opposing wall)>second step portion 305b (third opposing wall) 4th step 305d (5th opposing wall) > 5th step 305e (5th opposing wall) > 3rd step 305c (3rd opposing wall) = 6th step 305f (6th opposing wall). It's supposed to be.

At the other end of the top plate section 302 in the longitudinal direction and at one end in the transverse direction (near the upper right in FIG. 9(a)), there is a frame management board on which management information (identification information) of the frame control board 120 is printed. A frame management number sticker pasting section 307 for pasting a number sticker 308 is provided. The frame management number sticker pasting part 307 is a rectangular area formed by recessing a part of the top plate part 302 downward one step.

Then, a frame management number sticker 308 is affixed to the frame management number sticker affixing section 307, and is located between the frame management number sticker affixing section 307 and the fifth stage section 305e, and corresponds to the ball removal switch 122 and the error release switch 123. An operation guide sticker 309 on which information indicating the ball removal switch 122 and the error release switch 123 is printed is pasted at the position.

Note that the front surface of the frame management number sticker pasting section 307 is substantially flush with or flush with the back surface of the top plate section 302 (the surface facing the frame control board 120). Therefore, the height (distance, width) from the front surface of the frame control board 120 to the frame management number sticker 308, and the height (distance, width) from the front surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface of the top plate section 302 (the surface facing the frame control board 120). The height (distance, width) is substantially the same or the same.

A plurality of openings are formed in the third stage portion 305c at positions corresponding to the plurality of female connectors 127a to 127f mounted on the frame control board 120, and a plurality of female connectors 127a to 127f are connected to each of the plurality of openings. 127f is exposed to the outside, and a male connector provided at the end of the wiring for electrical connection with the main control device 110A and the production control device 130A can be inserted into the plurality of female connectors 127a to 127f. It is possible.

An opening for exposing the frame inspection connector 126 to the outside is formed in the sixth stage portion 305f at a position corresponding to the frame inspection connector 126 mounted on the frame control board 120, so that the frame inspection connector 126 is exposed to the outside. A male connector provided at the end of the extending wiring can be inserted into the frame inspection connector 126.

An opening that enables the operation of the game ball number clear switch 121 is formed at a position of the fifth stage portion 305e that corresponds to the game ball number clear switch 121 mounted on the frame control board 120. A game ball number clear button 121b for pressing the operation part of the game ball number clear switch 121 is fitted in the opening so that it can move up and down, and pressing the game ball number clear button 121b clears the game ball number clear switch. 121 can be turned on.

Further, an opening that enables operation of the ball removal switch 122 is formed at a position of the fifth stage portion 305e that corresponds to the ball removal switch 122 mounted on the frame control board 120. A ball removal button 122b for pressing the operation part of the ball removal switch 122 is loosely fitted in the ball removal switch 122 so as to be movable up and down, and by pressing the ball removal button 122b, it is possible to turn on the ball removal button 122b. There is.

Furthermore, an opening that allows the error cancellation switch 123 to be operated is formed in the fifth stage portion 305e at a position corresponding to the error cancellation switch 123 mounted on the frame control board 120. An error release button 123b for pressing the operation part of the error release switch 123 is loosely fitted in the controller so as to be movable up and down, and by pressing the error release button 123b, it is possible to turn on the error release switch 123. There is.

A button cover member 310 made of transparent resin is attached to the fourth stage portion 305d, and the button cover member 310 is made of transparent resin and rotates between a first state where it covers the game ball number clear button 121b and a second state where the game ball number clear button 121b is exposed. When operating the game ball number clear switch 121, the button cover member 310 is changed from the normal first state to the second state.

The upper surface of the button cover member 310 is provided with an engraved part 310a in which the words "Game Ball Count Clear Switch" indicating the Game Ball Count Clear Switch 121 are engraved. Therefore, the first case member 301 is attached with information indicating the game ball count clear switch 121, the ball removal switch 122, and the error release switch 123, but the first case member 301 and the second case member (frame Information indicating the frame control display 125 is not attached to the control board case 300).

The second case member 311 has an opposing wall (bottom plate portion 312) that faces the back surface of the frame control board 120 and serves as the bottom plate of the recessed chamber, and stands up (extends) upward from the end (periphery) of the opposing wall. It has a lower peripheral wall portion 313 which becomes a side wall of the recessed chamber.

At one end in the longitudinal direction of the frame control board case 300 (on the left side in FIG. 9A), a first case member 301 and a second case member 311 housing the frame control board 120 are placed in a closed state. A frame caulking portion 304A for sealing the control board case 300 is provided.

The frame crimping part 304A includes a crimping part 304 connected to the upper circumferential wall 303 of the first case member 301 via a broken part, and a crimping receiver connected to the lower circumferential wall 313 of the second case member 311 via the broken part. 314, and a fixing member that is press-fitted from the caulking part 304 into the caulking receiving part 314 and fixing the caulking part 304 and the caulking receiving part 314.

The caulking portion 304 of the first case member 301 includes a first caulking portion 304a used to initially seal the frame control board case 300, and a first caulking portion 304a used to seal the frame control board case 300 again after the frame control board case 300 is first unsealed. The first crimped part 304a and the second crimped part 304b are arranged side by side in the lateral direction of the frame control board case 300.

The caulking receiving part 314 of the second case member 311 is a first caulking receiving part 314a used to first seal the frame control board case 300, and a first caulking receiving part 314a used to seal the frame control board case 300 after the frame control board case 300 is first opened. The first crimping receiving part 314a and the second crimping receiving part 314b are arranged side by side in the lateral direction of the frame control board case 300.

Two mounting shafts 315a and 315b are provided on the lower circumferential wall 313 at one end of the second case member 311 in the lateral direction (the upper long side in FIG. 10). Two flanges 317a and 317b are provided on the lower peripheral wall portion 313 at the other end in the hand direction (lower long side portion in FIG. 10), and each of the two flanges 317a and 317b can be locked. Members 318a, 318b are attached.

At the other end of the second case member 311 in the lateral direction and at a position corresponding to the button cover member 310 attached to the first case member 301 (lower right side in FIG. 10), there is a A locking pawl 316 is provided to engage with the free end side of the button cover member 310 to be attached, to restrict conversion of the button cover member 310 to the second state, and to maintain the button cover member 310 in the first state.

When assembling the frame control device 120A configured in this way, first, the first case member 301 is assembled with the frame control board 120 facing the accommodation space formed by the first case member 301 and the second case member 311. and the second case member 311 are brought into a closed state, and the first caulking part 304a and the first caulking receiving part 314a are fixed with a fixing member, thereby bringing the frame control board case 300 into a sealed state.

Further, by converting the button cover member 310 from the second state to the first state and causing the locking claw 316 provided on the second case member 311 to engage with the button cover member 310, the second state of the button cover member 310 is Regulates conversion to two states.

When the frame control device 120A is attached to the back side of the inner frame 3 (specifically, at a position overlapping the back side of the power supply device 160A), two mounting bearings (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner frame 3 are provided. ), and in this state, the second case member 311 is attached to each of two lock receiving parts (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner frame 3. The locking members 318a and 318b attached to are fixed.

On the other hand, when unsealing and inspecting the frame control device 120A of the gaming machine 1 installed in a game parlor, the locking members 318a and 318b are removed from the lock receivers, and then the mounting shafts 315a and 315b are removed from the mounting shafts to control the frame. The device 120A is removed from the back side of the inner frame 3. Then, by breaking the broken part of the first crimped part 304a and the broken part of the first crimped receiving part 314a using a tool such as nippers, the sealing by the frame crimped part 304A is released, and the frame control board case 300 Open it.

After that, when housing the frame control board 120 in the frame control board case 300 and reassembling the frame control device 120A, first, the frame control board 120 is placed in the housing space formed by the first case member 301 and the second case member 311. By bringing the first case member 301 and the second case member 311 into a closed state while facing the frame control board case 300, and fixing the second crimping part 304b and the second crimping receiving part 314b with the fixing member, the frame control board case 300 is closed. Reseal.

Further, by converting the button cover member 310 from the second state to the first state and causing the locking claw 316 provided on the second case member 311 to engage with the button cover member 310, the second state of the button cover member 310 is Regulates conversion to two states.

When the resealed frame control device 120A is attached to the back side of the inner frame 3 (specifically, at a position overlapping the rear side of the power supply device 160A), various connectors of the frame control device 120A are provided. The mounting shaft portion 315a of the second case member 311 is attached to each of two mounting bearing portions (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner frame 3 in a tilted state in which one end side faces upward and this one end side falls to the back side. , 315b are pivoted, and rotated from that state to a standing state where one end side where various connectors of the frame control device 120A are provided and the other end side where various connectors are not provided are lined up vertically, and the inner frame 3 Lock members 318a and 318b attached to the second case member 311 are fixed to each of two lock receivers (not shown) provided on the back side of the case member 311.

Thereafter, when the lower cover member 120B is attached to the back side of the inner frame 3 so as to cover the upper rear part of the frame control device 120A to protect the various connectors of the frame control device 120A, the attachment of the frame control device 120A is completed.

In this way, the frame management number sticker 308 is attached to the frame management number sticker attachment section 307 that is recessed from the surface of the frame control board case 300 (the surface of the top plate section 302). Therefore, even if something hits the frame control board case 300 during transportation or installation of the gaming machine 1, the frame management number sticker 308 can be prevented from being easily damaged, and the frame management number sticker 308 can be printed. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the management information (identification information) being difficult to read.

Moreover, instead of having the operator directly operate the operation part of the game ball count clear switch 121, the game ball count clear button 121b, which is fitted into the opening that allows the game ball count clear switch 121 to be operated, is operated. ing. Therefore, when operating the game ball number clear switch 121, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the game ball number clear switch 121 is broken due to static electricity or the like. Furthermore, since the game ball number clear button 121b is loosely fitted into the opening that allows the operation of the game ball number clear switch 121, it is possible to prevent this opening from being normally open. This also makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as allowing foreign objects to enter the frame control device 120A.

Further, instead of directly operating the operation section of the ball removal switch 122, the user operates a ball removal button 122b that is loosely fitted into an opening that allows the ball removal switch 122 to be operated. Therefore, when operating the ball removal switch 122, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the ball removal switch 122 is damaged due to static electricity or the like. In addition, since the ball removal button 122b is loosely fitted into the opening that allows the operation of the ball removal switch 122, this opening can be prevented from being normally open, and the frame control It is also possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as allowing foreign objects to enter the inside of the device 120A.

Further, instead of directly operating the operating section of the error release switch 123, the user operates an error release button 123b that is loosely fitted into an opening that allows the error release switch 123 to be operated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the error release switch 123 is damaged due to static electricity or the like when the error release switch 123 is operated. In addition, since the error release button 123b is loosely fitted into the opening that allows the error release switch 123 to be operated, this opening can be prevented from being normally open, and the frame control It is also possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as allowing foreign objects to enter the inside of the device 120A.

Further, the frame control board case 300 is provided with a button cover member 310 that converts between a first state that covers the game ball number clear button 121b and a second state that exposes the game ball number clear button 121b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the game ball number clear button 121b (game ball number clear switch 121) is inadvertently pressed and the number of game balls owned by the player is cleared.

Further, the frame control board case 300 includes a locking claw 316 that restricts the button cover member 310 from converting from the first state in which it covers the number of game balls clear button 121b to the second state in which it exposes the number of game balls clear button 121b. is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the button cover member 310 from unintentionally converting to the second state in which the number of game balls clear button 121b is exposed, and the number of game balls clear button 121b (the number of game balls clear switch 121) can be prevented from being accidentally turned off. It is possible to suppress inconveniences such as the number of game balls owned by the player being cleared due to being pressed.

In addition, a stamp with the words "Game Ball Count Clear Switch" indicating the Game Ball Count Clear Switch 121 is engraved on the frame control board case 300 (button cover member 310) at a position corresponding to the Game Ball Count Clear Switch 121. A section 310a (guidance information related to the game ball count clear switch 121) is provided. Therefore, the existence and position of the game ball number clear switch 121 can be easily grasped, and the convenience of the game store clerk who operates the game ball number clear switch 121 can be improved.

Further, an operation guide sticker on which information indicating the ball removal switch 122 (guidance information related to the ball removal switch 122) is printed is placed at a position corresponding to the ball removal switch 122 in the frame control board case 300 (top plate portion 302). 309 is attached. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the existence and position of the ball removal switch 122, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk who operates the ball removal switch 122.

Additionally, an operation guide sticker on which information indicating the error release switch 123 (guidance information regarding the error release switch 123) is printed is placed at a position corresponding to the error release switch 123 in the frame control board case 300 (top plate portion 302). 309 is attached. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the existence and position of the error release switch 123, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk who operates the error release switch 123.

Further, information indicating the frame control display 125 (guidance information regarding the frame control display 125) is provided in the frame control board case 300 (the position corresponding to the frame control display 125 in the first case member 301). It is designed so that it cannot be damaged. Therefore, the frame control display 125 and other electronic components (frame control section 120m, integrated circuit, capacitor, resistor, connector, etc.) can be visually recognized by the information indicating the frame control display 125 (guidance information related to the frame control display 125). This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as impeding sex, and improves the convenience of game store staff.

Further, a frame control device 120A attached to the back side of the inner frame 3 is rotatable via attachment shafts 315a and 315b. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether any unauthorized parts are attached to the back side of the frame control device 120A, etc., and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Further, the portions of the frame control device 120A where various connectors are provided (second step portion 305b, third step portion 305c) are protected by being covered by the lower cover member 120B. Therefore, damage to various connectors provided in the frame control device 120A, disconnection of wiring, etc. due to external factors can be prevented, and signals can be appropriately exchanged with the main control device 110A.

Furthermore, the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120 is not covered by the lower cover member 120B. Therefore, the lower cover member 120B does not reduce the visibility of the frame control display 125, making it easier to confirm the display contents of the frame control display 125.

Note that the game ball number clear button 121b may not be provided and the operation section of the game ball number clear switch 121 may be operated directly, or the game ball number clear switch 121 and the game ball number clear button 121b may be integrated to make the game easier. It may also be used as a pitch count clear button.

Further, the operation part of the ball removal switch 122 may be operated directly without providing the ball removal button 122b, or the ball removal switch 122 and the ball removal button 122b may be integrated to form a ball removal button.

Further, the error release button 123b may not be provided, and the operating section of the error release switch 123 may be operated directly, or the error release switch 123 and the error release button 123b may be integrated to form an error release button.

Furthermore, although the second case member 311 is provided with the locking claw 316 that restricts the conversion of the button cover member 310 to the second state, the locking claw 316 may be provided in the first case member 301 or It may be constructed of a member different from the first case member 301 and the second case member 311 and attached to the first case member 301 or the second case member 311.

(Configuration of frame control board)
The configuration of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIGS. 11 to 15. 11 is a plan view of the frame control board 120, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the frame control board 120, and FIG. 13 is an enlarged view of the surroundings of the frame control unit 120m and the frame control display 125, FIG. 14 is a diagram excluding various electronic components around the frame control section and the frame control display 125, and FIG. 15 is a partial perspective view of the vicinity of the frame control section 120m and the frame control display 125. Note that the multiple electronic components (integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, etc.) for outputting signals from the test connector 128 described above are installed in the game machine 1 to be tested, but they are not provided at the game store. Since it is not mounted on the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 to be sold, illustration is omitted here.

The frame control board 120 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape with a corner (lower right corner in FIG. 11) of one longitudinal end of a horizontally long flat plate cut out, and has a blue (or green) surface. Mounting reference line KJ, which serves as a reference for the mounting position of various electronic components, and identification symbols (for example, "IC1", etc.) indicating various electronic components are printed in white, and can be identified according to mounting reference line KJ. Various electronic parts according to the symbol (frame control unit 120m, game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, error release switch 123, frame control display 125, integrated circuit (IC), capacitor, resistor, resistor array, connectors, etc.) are implemented.

In this embodiment, the integrated circuit is marked with IC "〇〇 (1 to 2 digit number)" or X "〇 (1 digit number)", and the capacitor is marked with BC or C " 1-2 digit number)" symbol for the resistor, R "〇〇 (1-2 digit number)" symbol for the resistor, and RA "〇 (1-digit number)" symbol for the resistor array. The reference line is marked KJ, and the integrated circuit identification symbol is IC "〇〇 (1-2 digit number)" b or X "〇 (1 digit number)" b. , the identification symbol for the capacitor is the code C “〇〇 (1-2 digit number)” b, and the identification symbol for the resistor is the sign R “〇〇 (1-2 digit number)” b, the resistor The array identification symbol is RA "〇 (one digit number)".

A frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer) is mounted near the center of the frame control board 120, and a main control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer) is mounted on the other end of the frame control board 120 in the short direction (along the right long side in FIG. 10). On the opposite end of the device 110A) there are a game ball count clear switch 121 for operation by a game clerk, a ball removal switch 122, an error release switch 123, and a frame control for displaying predetermined information in red. A frame inspection connector 126 into which a male connector provided at the end of a wiring for electrical connection with a display device 125 and an inspection device for inspecting the game machine 1 at a game parlor is inserted is mounted.

It should be noted that the frame control display 125 is more sensitive to light from the end of the frame control board 120 (the long side on the right side in FIG. The separation width is large.

One end of the frame control board 120 in the short direction (near the end on the main control device 110A side along the left long side in FIG. 11) is electrically connected to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130. A plurality of female connectors 127a to 127f into which the male connectors provided at the ends of the wiring are inserted are mounted, and other electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) are mounted almost entirely on the frame control board 120. It has been implemented at appropriate locations throughout the area.

Note that the position near one end in the longitudinal direction of the frame control board 120 is a tall component concentration mounting area (compared to other areas) of electronic components that are taller than the frame control display 125 such as the electrolytic capacitor BC and the integrated circuit IC14. The area around the frame control display 125 is a concentrated mounting area for electronic components such as integrated circuits and resistors that are shorter than the frame control display 125. (A region where the mounting density of short components is higher than that of tall components).

In the frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer), inverted L-shaped terminals protruding from both sides of a main body (circuit unit) that is rectangular in plan view are inserted into sockets mounted on the frame control board 120. Implemented. The socket is mounted by being inserted into a plurality of through holes formed inside a rectangular mounting reference line KJ (slightly larger than the outline of the socket) printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120. be done.

In addition, on the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m, chip information 120m1 (chip model number and product code) indicating the frame control unit 120m is printed in black, and the chip information 120m1 is printed in white next to the chip information 120m1. A frame chip model information sticker 120m2 with chip information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) indicating the frame control unit 120m printed in black is affixed to the base seal of the frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer). At a position where the sockets do not overlap, an identification symbol of IC1 indicating the frame control section 120m is printed in white.

The game ball count clear switch 121, the ball removal switch 122, and the error release switch 123 are all the same parts with the operation part (button part) protruding from the top surface of the cubic switch body, and the operation part (button part) protruding from the bottom of the switch body. A plurality of terminals are inserted into a plurality of through holes formed inside a square mounting reference line KJ (slightly larger than the outline of the switch body) printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120. Implemented.

In addition, near each of the game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, and error release switch 123 (outside the installation reference line KJ), there is an identification of SW "〇 (one-digit number)" indicating the corresponding switch. The symbol is printed in white.

The frame control display 125 has a plurality of terminals protruding from the bottom of a cubic (rectangular in plan view) main body (package) in which six 7-segment displays are arranged in a white color on the surface of the frame control board 120. It is mounted by being inserted into a plurality of through holes formed inside a rectangular attachment reference line KJ (slightly larger than the frame control display 125) printed in .

Further, on the top surface (display surface 125a) of the main body (package) of the frame control display 125, frame control display information such as the model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2 of the frame control display 125 is printed in white. An identification symbol "IC5" indicating the frame control display 125 is printed in white near the frame control display 125 (outside the mounting reference line KJ).

In the frame inspection connector 126, a plurality of terminals protruding from the bottom of the concave connector body with an open top surface are aligned with the mounting reference line KJ (lower than the outline of the connector body) printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120. It is mounted by being inserted into multiple through-holes formed inside a slightly larger shape.

Further, near the frame inspection connector 126 (outside the attachment reference line KJ), an identification symbol CN1 indicating the corresponding frame inspection connector is printed in white.

Each of the female connectors 127a to 127f has a plurality of terminals protruding from the bottom of the concave connector main body with an open top surface, and is connected to a mounting reference line KJ printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120 (from the outline of the connector main body). It is mounted by being inserted into multiple through-holes formed inside the (slightly larger shape).

Further, in the vicinity of each of the female connectors 127a to 127f (outside the attachment reference line KJ), an identification symbol of CN "○ (one digit number)" indicating the corresponding female connector is printed in white.

Various integrated circuits (IC1, IC2, IC3, IC4, IC5, IC6, It is mounted by being inserted into a plurality of through holes formed outside a rectangular attachment reference line KJ printed in white on the surface of the control board 120.

Further, on the top surface of the main body of each integrated circuit, integrated circuit information such as the model number and manufacturer name of the frame control display 125 is printed in white, and the corresponding integrated circuit is printed near each integrated circuit. The identification symbol of IC “〇〇 (1-2 digit number)” and X “〇 (1-digit number)” (IC “〇〇 (1-2 digit number)” b, X1a, etc.) indicating It is printed in .

The electrolytic capacitor (BC, C "〇〇 (1-2 digit number)") has a circular shape with a plurality of terminals protruding from the bottom of the cylindrical main body printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120. It is mounted by being inserted into a plurality of through holes formed inside the mounting reference line KJ.

Capacitor information such as the electrolytic capacitor model number and capacity (C67a for electrolytic capacitor C67) is printed in black on the top and side surfaces of the main body of the electrolytic capacitor, and the corresponding information is printed near each electrolytic capacitor. The identification symbol C “〇〇 (1-2 digit number)” (C “〇〇 (1-2 digit number)” b) indicating an electrolytic capacitor is printed in white. The font size of the capacitor information printed on the side of the electrolytic capacitor body is larger than the font size of the capacitor information printed on the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor body. , the font size of the lower capacitor information is larger than the font size of the upper capacitor information.

The resistor (R “〇〇 (1-2 digit number)”) has two terminals protruding from the longitudinal end of the main body, which are two circles printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120. It is mounted by being inserted into a through hole formed inside the mounting reference line KJ (not shown) of the shape.

In addition, near each resistor, there is a white identification symbol R “〇〇 (1-2 digit number)” (R “〇〇 (1-2 digit number)” b) indicating the corresponding resistance. It is printed in .

The resistor array (RA "〇 (single digit number)") has a plurality of terminals protruding from the bottom of the horizontally elongated main body located on the rectangular mounting reference line KJ printed in white on the surface of the frame control board 120. It is mounted by being inserted into multiple through holes formed inside.

In addition, on the side of the main body of each resistor array, resistor array information (not shown) such as the model number and manufacturer of the resistor array is printed, and near each resistor array, the corresponding resistor array is printed. The identification symbol of CRA "〇 (1 digit number)" (RA "〇 (1 digit number)" b) is printed in white.

The inside of each mounting reference line KJ is a non-printing area in which no identification symbol indicating an electronic component is printed, and no electronic components other than the corresponding electronic component are mounted.

Regarding the height from the surface of the frame control board 120 in a state where various electronic components are mounted, the height from the surface of the frame control board 120 is higher than that of the frame control display 125. , various connectors, and resistor arrays are higher, and various integrated circuits (integrated circuits excluding IC 14), small capacitors, and resistors are lower than the frame control display 125.

A non-mounting area NZA where no electronic components are mounted is provided between the end of the frame control board 120 corresponding to the frame control display 125 and the frame control display 125. On one side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 15), electronic components shorter than the frame control display 125 are mounted, and electronic components taller than the frame control display 125 are not mounted. An area MA is provided, and on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the frame control display 125 (lower side in FIG. 15), there is a tall mounting area where both electronic components taller than the frame control display 125 are mounted. HA is provided.

Furthermore, the mounting area around the frame control display 125 is an area where fewer electronic components are taller than the frame control display 125 compared to other mounting areas (for example, the area where the electrolytic capacitor BC is mounted). ing.

The identification symbols of the various electronic components printed on the frame control board 120 are all white letters in the first font (first typeface), and are printed on the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m. The chip information 120m1 (chip model number and product code) is in black letters in the second font (second font) and is written on the frame chip model information sticker 120m2 affixed to the top of the main body of the frame control unit 120m. The printed chip information (model number and manufacturer name) is in black letters in the third font.

In addition, the frame control display information (model number 125a1, lot number 125a2) printed on the top surface of the main body of the frame control display 125 is in white letters in the fourth font (fourth font), Various information (number of game balls, error code, performance information, etc.) displayed on the display section (7 segments) of the display device 125 is in red in the fifth font (fifth font).

In addition, the integrated circuit information (model number, manufacturer name) printed on the top of the main body of various integrated circuits is in white letters in the 6th font. And the capacitor information (model number, capacity, manufacturer name, etc.) printed on the side is in black letters in the 7th font, and the resistor array information printed on the side of the main body of each resistor array. (Model number, manufacturer name, etc.) are in white letters in the 8th font.

In this way, the connectors 127a to 127f for electrically connecting with the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 are located near one end of the frame control board 120 (one end in the lateral direction which is the main control device 110A side). ), and the frame control display 125 is provided near an end different from one end of the frame control board 120 (on the other end in the lateral direction opposite to the main controller 110A). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the frame control display 125 becomes an obstacle when attaching and detaching the connector, and it is also possible to suppress the wiring extending from the connector from obstructing the visibility of the frame control display 125. It becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game clerk.

In addition, connectors 127a to 127f for electrically connecting with the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 are located near one end of the frame control board 120 (one end in the lateral direction that is the main control device 110A side). The game ball count clear switch 121 is provided near an end different from one end of the frame control board 120 (on the other end in the lateral direction opposite to the main controller 110A). ing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of operating the game ball number clear switch 121 when attaching or detaching the connector, and also to suppress the inconvenience that the wiring extending from the connector obstructs the operation of the game ball number clear switch 121. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

In addition, connectors 127a to 127f for electrically connecting with the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 are located near one end of the frame control board 120 (one end in the lateral direction that is the main control device 110A side). The bulb removal switch 122 is provided near an end different from one end of the frame control board 120 (on the other end in the lateral direction opposite to the main controller 110A). . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of operating the bulb removal switch 122 when attaching or detaching the connector, and it is also possible to suppress the inconvenience that the wiring extending from the connector obstructs the operation of the bulb removal switch 122. , it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game clerk.

In addition, connectors 127a to 127f for electrically connecting with the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 are located near one end of the frame control board 120 (one end in the lateral direction that is the main control device 110A side). The error release switch 123 is provided near an end different from one end of the frame control board 120 (on the other end in the width direction opposite to the main controller 110A). . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of operating the error release switch 123 when attaching or detaching the connector, and it is also possible to suppress the inconvenience that the wiring extending from the connector obstructs the operation of the error release switch 123. , it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game clerk.

Also, a frame control display 125 for displaying the number of gaming balls owned by the player (gaming value amount), and a gaming ball number clear switch 121 for clearing the number of gaming balls owned by the player (gaming value amount). are provided at the same position near the end of the frame control board 120. Therefore, when operating the game ball number clear switch 121, it becomes easier to check the frame control display 125, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game clerk.

Additionally, there is a frame control display 125 that displays information indicating that a ball extraction operation is in progress for extracting game balls that are circulated in the gaming machine 1 to the outside of the gaming machine, and a frame control display 125 that displays information indicating that a ball extraction operation is in progress for extracting game balls that are circulated in the gaming machine 1, and A ball removal switch 122 is provided at the same position near the end of the frame control board 120. Therefore, when operating the ball removal switch 122, it becomes easier to check the frame control display 125, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Further, a frame control display 125 for displaying an error code according to the type of error and an error release switch 123 for canceling an error or error notification are provided at the same position near the end of the frame control board. There is. Therefore, when operating the error release switch 123, it becomes easier to check the frame control display 125, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Also, the frame control display 125 is more sensitive to the signal from the end of the frame control board 120 (the long side on the right side in FIG. 10) than the game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, and error release switch 123 The separation width is large. Therefore, the frame control display 125 is placed closer to the center of the frame control board 120, and the visibility of the frame control display 125 can be improved.

Further, a non-mounting area NZA where no electronic components are mounted is provided between the end of the frame control board 120 corresponding to the frame control display 125 and the frame control display 125. Therefore, if a fraudulent electronic component is mounted between the bottom of the frame control display 125 or the edge of the frame control board 120 and the frame control display 125, it is possible to easily discover the fraudulent component. becomes.

Further, on one longitudinal side of the frame control display 125 (upper side in FIG. 15), an electronic component that is shorter than the frame control display 125 is mounted, and an electronic component that is taller than the frame control display 125 is mounted. A low-profile mounting area MA where electronic components are not mounted is provided, and on the other longitudinal side of the frame control display 125 (lower side in FIG. 15), both electronic components taller than the frame control display 125 are mounted. A tall mounting area HA is provided in which the mounting area HA is mounted. Therefore, the presence of the low-profile mounting area MA makes it possible to make the frame control display 125 easier to see while relaxing restrictions on the arrangement of electronic components.

In addition, on the frame control board 120, mounting reference lines KJ for various electronic components to be mounted on the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 sold to a game store are printed, while the gaming machine used for testing The mounting reference line KJ of various electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, test connectors 128, etc.) that are mounted on the frame control board 120 of the game machine 1 sold to game stores is It is no longer printed. Therefore, when visually checking the first frame control board 120 of a game machine sold to a game store, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that no electronic components are mounted even though the mounting reference line is printed. It becomes possible.

In addition, the mounting reference line KJ includes a first mounting reference line printed at the mounting position of the first electronic component (frame control section 120m, integrated circuit, etc.) whose terminal protrudes laterally from both sides, and a first mounting reference line printed at the mounting position of the first electronic component (frame control section 120m, integrated circuit, etc.) whose terminal protrudes laterally from both sides, and A second installation reference line printed at the installation position of the second electronic components (game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, error release switch 123, frame control display 125, electrolytic capacitor BC, etc.) that protrudes downward from the The first mounting reference line is formed between the terminals protruding from both sides of the first electronic component, and the second mounting reference line is formed to surround the terminal protruding from the bottom of the second electronic component. has been done. Therefore, the arrangement efficiency of the mounting reference line KJ on the frame control board 120 can be improved, and it becomes possible to downsize the frame control board 120.

In addition, the mounting reference line KJ is formed to surround the outer shape of the main body of the electronic component (shape imitating the outline), and the inside of the mounting reference line KJ is a non-printing area for the identification symbol of the electronic component, and the mounting reference line KJ The outside of the area is used as the print area for electronic component identification symbols. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the identification symbol of the electronic component becomes invisible due to the electronic component, and it is also possible to suppress the mounting of an unauthorized electronic component inside the mounting reference line KJ.

In addition, the mounting reference line KJ is formed to surround the outer shape of the main body of the electronic component, and the mounting reference line KJ of the first electronic component (frame control section 120m, integrated circuit, etc.) whose terminals protrude laterally from both sides. The inside of the area is designated as a non-mounted area for electronic components. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized electronic components from being mounted inside the mounting reference line KJ.

In addition, the frame control board 120 includes identification symbols of various electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 sold to a game store, and the identification symbols of various electronic components mounted on the gaming machine 1 to be tested. Identification symbols for various electronic components that are not mounted are printed on the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 sold to a gaming parlor. Therefore, the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 used for testing and the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 sold to gaming stores can be made common, and development efficiency and production efficiency can be improved. becomes possible.

Further, a tall component concentrated mounting area HM for electronic components taller than the frame control display 125 including the electrolytic capacitor BC is provided at a position near the end in the longitudinal direction of the frame control board 120. A frame control display 125 is mounted near the center of the substrate 120 in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, even if the resin-made frame control board case 300 is pressed and the central part of the frame control board case 300 bends, the electronic components taller than the frame control display 125, such as the electrolytic capacitor BC, will not be placed in the frame. The control board 120 becomes less likely to collide, the frame control display 125 becomes easier to see, and the efficiency of arranging electronic components on the frame control board 120 can be improved.

In addition, the front view direction (direction in which it can be read correctly) of various information displayed on the display surface 125a (six 7 segments) of the frame control display 125, and the frame control display printed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 The front view direction of the information is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent attachment errors of the frame control display 125, and also to check various information displayed on the display surface 125a (six 7 segments) of the frame control display 125 and the frame control display information at the same time. It becomes easier.

In addition, the display mode (font, display color) of various information (number of game balls, error code, performance information, etc.) displayed on the display section (six 7 segments) of the frame control display 125 and the display mode (font, display color) of the frame control display 125 The display mode (font, print color) of the frame control display information printed on the display surface 125a of the display screen 125a is made different. Therefore, it becomes difficult to confuse the various information displayed on the display section (six 7 segments) of the frame control display 125 with the frame control display information, and the various information displayed on the display section of the frame control display 125 becomes difficult to confuse. It becomes possible to improve identifiability.

In addition, the display mode (font, display color) of various information (number of game balls, error code, performance information, etc.) displayed on the display unit (six 7 segments) of the frame control display 125 and the display mode (font, display color) of the frame control board 120 The display format (font, display color) of the printed identification symbols of various electronic components (for example, X1, IC2, C26, C67, R7, etc.) is made different. Therefore, it becomes difficult to confuse the various information displayed on the display section of the frame control display 125 with the identification symbols of various electronic components printed on the frame control board 120. This makes it possible to improve the identifiability of various types of information.

In addition, the display mode (font, display color) of various information (number of game balls, error code, performance information, etc.) displayed on the display unit (six 7 segments) of the frame control display 125 and the display mode (font, display color) of the frame control board 120 The display format (font, display color) of various information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) printed on various electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, etc.) to be mounted are made different. Therefore, it becomes difficult to confuse the various information displayed on the display section of the frame control display 125 with the various information printed on the various electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120. It is possible to improve the identifiability of various information displayed on the screen, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

In addition, the display mode (font, printing color) of the frame control display information (model number, lot number, etc.) printed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 and the various electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120 are also explained. The display format (font, display color) of various information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) printed on (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistor arrays, etc.) is made different. Therefore, it becomes difficult to confuse the frame control display information printed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 with various information printed on various electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120, and the frame control display It is possible to improve the identifiability of information and various information printed on various electronic components, and it is possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

In addition, the display mode (font, display color) of various information (number of game balls, error code, performance information, etc.) displayed on the display section (six 7 segments) of the frame control display 125, and the display mode (font, display color) of the frame control section 120m or The display format (font, display color) of various information (model number, product code, manufacturer name, etc.) printed on the frame chip model information sticker 120m2 is made different. Therefore, it becomes difficult to confuse the various information displayed on the display section of the frame control display 125 with the various information printed on the frame control section 120m or the main chip model information sticker 110m2. It is possible to improve the identifiability of various information displayed on the screen, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

In addition, the display mode (font, printing color) of the frame control display information (model number, lot number, etc.) printed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125, and the frame control section 120m or frame chip model information sticker 120m2 The display format (font, display color) of various information (model number, product code, etc.) printed on the product is different. Therefore, the frame control display information printed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 may be confused with various information (model number, product code, etc.) printed on the frame control unit 120m or the main chip model information sticker 110m2. This makes it possible to improve the identifiability of the frame control display information and various information printed on the frame control section 120m or the main chip model information sticker 110m2, thereby improving the convenience of the game store staff. .

Although a plurality of female connectors 127a to 117f for exchanging signals with the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 are mounted on one end of the frame control board 120 in the longitudinal direction, It may be mounted on one end side, or a female connector for exchanging signals with the main control board 110 may be disposed on one end side in the short direction of the frame control board 120, and a female connector for exchanging signals with the main control board 110 may be arranged on one end side in the short direction of the frame control board 120. A female connector for exchanging signals with the main control board 110 may be arranged at one longitudinal end of the frame control board 120, or a female connector for exchanging signals with the main control board 110 may be arranged at one longitudinal end of the frame control board 120. At the same time, a female connector for exchanging signals with the production control board 130 may be arranged at one end of the frame control board 120 in the lateral direction, or may be arranged in other mounting arrangements.

In addition, although the frame control display 125 is mounted on the other end of the frame control board 120 in the lateral direction (a position near the end opposite to the main controller 110A), the number of game balls clear switch 121 It may be mounted near the center of the frame control board 120 as long as it is near the pull-out switch 122 or the error release switch 123, or it may be mounted at the end of the frame control board 120 in the longitudinal direction. Good too.

In addition, a game ball count clear switch 121, a ball removal switch 122, and an error release switch 123 are mounted on the other end of the frame control board 120 in the lateral direction, and they exchange signals with the main control board 110 and the production control board 130. If the mounting position of the plurality of female connectors 127a to 117f is on the end side of the frame control board 120 that is different from the mounting position of the plurality of female connectors 127a to 117f, it may be mounted on the end side in the longitudinal direction of the frame control board 120. It may be a mounting arrangement.

In addition, the frame control board 120 includes a test connector 128 that is not mounted on the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 sold to a game store, and electronic components (integrated circuits, resistors, etc.) for outputting signals from the test connector 128. , capacitors, etc.) are printed, while their mounting reference lines KJ are not printed. However, it is also possible not to print both the identification symbol and the mounting reference line KJ. , both the identification symbol and the mounting reference line KJ may be printed, or the mounting reference line KJ may be printed without printing the identification symbol.

In addition, chip information 120m1 printed on the frame control section 120m, integrated circuit information (model number, manufacturer name) printed on the top surface of the main body of various integrated circuits, and printed on the top and side surfaces of the main body of each electrolytic capacitor. Although the capacitor information (model number, capacity, etc.) and the resistor array information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) printed on the side of the main body of each resistor array are in different fonts, they may be in the same font. Even in this case, the frame control display information (model number 125a1, lot number 125a2) printed on the top surface of the main body of the frame control display 125 and the display on the main body of the frame control display 125 (7 segments) It is preferable to use a different font from the various information (number of game balls, error code, performance information, etc.) that is displayed.

(Arrangement configuration of electronic components inside the frame control board case)
The arrangement of electronic components in the frame control board case 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the arrangement of electronic components in the frame control board case 300 in which the frame control board 120 is housed, and FIG. 17 is a sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 15.

The first case member 301 that covers the front side of the frame control board 120 has a plurality of steps (steps) forming a step between it and the top plate part 302 (first opposing wall) at a position near the end of the frame control board 120. (first step to sixth step) are provided. In other words, the transparency changes around the boundary between the top plate 302 and each step (the drop-off area from the top 302 to each step), so the difference between the top plate 302 and each step The visibility of the frame control board 120 when looking through the frame control board 120 from above around the boundary portion is poor.

Further, the top plate portion 302 of the first case member 301 is provided with a frame management number sticker pasting portion 307 at a position near the end of the frame control board 120, and a transparent base is attached to the frame management number sticker pasting portion 307. A frame management number sticker 308 on which various information is printed is attached. In other words, since the transparency changes at the boundary between the top plate part 302 and the frame management number sticker pasting part 307 and around the frame management number sticker 308, the border between the top plate part 302 and the frame management number sticker pasting part 307 changes. The visibility of the frame control board 120 when looking through the frame control board 120 from above around the boundary and frame management number sticker 308 is poor.

Moreover, the top plate part 302 of the first case member 301 has various information printed on a transparent base sticker at a position between the frame management number sticker pasting part 307 and the fifth step part (sixth opposing wall). An operation guide sticker 309 is attached. That is, since the transparency changes around the operation guide seal 309, the visibility of the frame control board 120 when looking through the frame control board 120 from above the periphery of the operation guide seal 309 is poor.

In such a frame control board case 300, the frame control section 120m (one-chip microcomputer), which has a lower height when mounted than tall components such as the electrolytic capacitor BC, is connected to the first stage section (second opposing wall) to The top plate part 302 (first opposing wall) and the front and rear (in the thickness direction of the frame control board 120) are ) is implemented in a position that overlaps with

In addition, the frame control display 125, which is lower in height when mounted than tall components such as electrolytic capacitor BC, has a frame control It is mounted at a position that overlaps the top plate portion 302 (first opposing wall) front and back (in the thickness direction of the frame control board 120) so as not to overlap the number sticker 308 and the operation guide sticker 309 front and rear.

In addition, the plurality of electrolytic capacitors BC, which are parts taller than the frame control section 120m and the frame control display 125, are connected to the frame management number sticker pasting section 307 and the frame management number sticker 308 (frame control board 120 in the thickness direction).

In addition, although the integrated circuit IC 14 is a taller component than the frame control section 120m and the frame control display 125, the height when mounted is lower than the electrolytic capacitor BC. The control board 120 is mounted at a position overlapping the control board 120 (thickness direction).

Further, the frame control display 125 has both a viewpoint 1 looking down on the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 and a viewpoint 2 looking down on the side wall part (upper peripheral wall part 303) of the frame control board case 300 from diagonally above. It is arranged at a position near the end of the frame control board 120 (a position adjacent to the upper circumferential wall part 303) so that the display surface 125a is visible through the frame control board case 300.

In this way, the frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer) controls the first stage part (second opposing wall) to the sixth stage part (seventh opposing wall), the frame management number sticker 308, and the operation guide sticker 309. It is mounted at a position that overlaps the top plate portion 302 (first opposing wall) in the front and back (thickness direction of the frame control board 120) so as not to overlap front and back. Therefore, the visibility of the frame control unit 120m (one-chip microcomputer) can be ensured, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts against the frame control unit 120m.

In addition, the frame control display 125, which is lower in height when mounted than tall components such as electrolytic capacitor BC, has a frame control It is mounted at a position that overlaps the top plate portion 302 (first opposing wall) front and back (in the thickness direction of the frame control board 120) so as not to overlap the number sticker 308 and the operation guide sticker 309 front and back. Therefore, visibility of the frame control display 125 can be ensured, and various information displayed on the frame control display 125 can be easily checked.

In addition, at a position that overlaps the frame management number sticker pasting part 307 and the frame management number sticker 308, which reduce visibility (in the thickness direction of the frame control board 120), there are A plurality of electrolytic capacitors BC, which are expensive components, are mounted. Therefore, it is possible to have a suitable component arrangement that allows reading of information printed on the upper surface of the electrolytic capacitor BC.

Components taller than the frame control section 120m and the frame control display 125 are placed at positions that overlap the frame management number sticker pasting section 307 and the frame management number sticker 308, which reduce visibility (in the thickness direction of the frame control board 120). An integrated circuit IC14 is mounted. Therefore, it is possible to have a suitable component arrangement that allows reading of information printed on the top surface of the integrated circuit IC 14 or the like.

Further, the frame control display 125 is arranged at a position where the display surface 125a is visible from the outside of the side wall portion (upper circumferential wall portion 303) of the frame control board case 300. Therefore, it becomes easier to check the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125, and it becomes easier to check various information displayed on the frame control display 125.

(Relationship of distance between two points for each part of frame control device)
The relationship between the distances between two points for each part of the frame control device 120A will be explained using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 16.

The distance in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the printed surface of the identification symbol of each electronic component) to the surface (operation guide sticker 309) of the top plate part 302 (opposing wall) of the frame control board case 300 ( Height, width) K1 is the distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the front surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. It is larger than.

The distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, The width) K2 is larger than the distance (height, width) K8 in the board thickness direction from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor C67 (the surface on which capacitor information is printed).

The distance (height, width) K8 in the board thickness direction from the surface of the frame control board 120 (printed surface with the identification symbol of each electronic component) to the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor C67 (printed surface with capacitor information) is the frame control board 120. It is larger than the distance (height, width) K3 in the thickness direction of the substrate from the front surface of the substrate 120 to the back surface of the first step portion 305a (opposing wall).

The distance (height, width) K3 in the board thickness direction from the front surface of the frame control board 120 (the printed surface of the identification symbol of each electronic component) to the back surface of the first step 305a (opposing wall) is the distance K3 of the frame control board 120. The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate from the surface of the electrolytic capacitor C41 to the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor C41 (the surface on which capacitor information is printed) is larger than the distance K7.

The distance (height, width) K7 in the board thickness direction from the surface of the frame control board 120 (printed surface with the identification symbol of each electronic component) to the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor C41 (printed surface with capacitor information) is determined by the frame control board 120. It is larger than the distance (height, width) K9 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the board 120 to the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126.

The distance (height, width) K9 in the board thickness direction from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the printed surface of the identification symbol of each electronic component) to the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 is the surface of the frame control board 120. It is larger than the distance (height, width) K6 in the thickness direction of the substrate from to the upper surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (the printed surface of the chip information 120m1, the frame chip model information sticker 120m2).

The thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (printed surface with identification symbols of each electronic component) to the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (printed surface with chip information 120m1, frame chip model information sticker 120m2) The distance (height, width) K6 is the thickness of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2). The distance in the horizontal direction (height, width) is larger than K5.

The thickness of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the printed surface of the identification symbol of each electronic component) to the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the printed surface of the frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) The distance in the horizontal direction (height, width) K5 is the distance in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit IC 12 (printed surface of integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name). The distance (height, width) is larger than K4. Note that the same applies to the integrated circuit X1, the integrated circuit IC15, and the like.

The distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, Width) K2 is the distance (height, width) is larger than M4.

The distance (height) in the board thickness direction from the surface of the integrated circuit IC 12 (printed surface of integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name) to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. M4 is the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the printed surface of the frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the back surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. The distance in the thickness direction (height, width) is larger than M5.

The board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the back surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) The distance in the thickness direction (height, width) M5 is the distance in the thickness direction of the board from the front surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface of the first step part 305a (opposing wall) of the frame control board case 300. width) is larger than M3.

Distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the front surface of the frame control board 120 (the printed surface of the identification symbol of each electronic component) to the back surface of the first step 305a (opposing wall) of the frame control board case 300 M3 is larger than the distance (height, width) M9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. It has become.

The distance (height, width) M9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 is 120 m of the frame control part. Distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) from the top surface of the main body (printed surface of chip information 120m1, model information sticker for frame chip 120m2) to the back surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 M6 It is larger than.

Thickness of the board from the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip model information sticker 120m2) to the back surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) The distance in the width direction (height, width) M6 is the distance in the thickness direction of the board from the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor C41 (the surface on which capacitor information is printed) to the back surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. , width) is larger than M7.

The distance (height, width) M7 in the board thickness direction from the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor C41 (capacitor information printed surface) to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 is as follows: It is larger than the distance (height, width) M8 in the board thickness direction from the top surface of the electrolytic capacitor C67 (the printed surface of the capacitor information) to the back surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300.

In this way, the identification display of the frame control display 125 (frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) and the identification display (model number and (integrated circuit information such as manufacturer's name), the height (distance, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 is higher in the identification display of the frame control display 125. Therefore, even when viewing through (through) the frame control board case 300, it is difficult to confuse the identification display of the frame control display 125 with the identification display of a predetermined integrated circuit, and the frame control display It becomes possible to improve the identifiability of the identification display of 125 and the identification display of a predetermined integrated circuit, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

In addition, the identification display of the frame control display 125 (frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) and the identification display of predetermined capacitors (for example, electrolytic capacitors C41 and C67) (model number, capacity, manufacturer name, etc.) (capacitor information), the height (distance, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 is lower in the identification display of the frame control display 125. Therefore, even when viewing through (through) the frame control board case 300, it is difficult to confuse the identification display of the frame control display 125 with the identification display of a predetermined capacitor. It becomes possible to improve the identifiability of the identification display of the predetermined capacitor and the identification display of the predetermined capacitor, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

In addition, the identification display of the frame control display 125 (frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) and the identification display of the frame control section 120m (chip information 120m1 indicating the frame control section 120m, frame chip model information The height (distance, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 is different from the chip information such as the model number and manufacturer's name printed on the sticker 120m2. Therefore, even when viewing through (through) the frame control board case 300, it becomes difficult to confuse the identification display of the frame control display 125 with the identification display of the frame control unit 120m, and the frame control display It becomes possible to improve the identifiability of the identification display of 125 and the identification display of frame control unit 120m, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Although the frame control unit 120m is mounted on the frame control board 120 using a socket, the frame control unit 120m is mounted by inserting a plurality of terminals into a plurality of through holes provided in the frame control board 120. You can. In this case, the distance in the board thickness direction from the surface of the frame control section 120m (chip information printed surface, chip model information sticker) to the back surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (height, width) H6 is the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the back surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. distance (height, width) H5 from the front surface of the frame control board 120 (the printed surface of the identification symbol of each electronic component) to the back surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (or the frame management number sticker 308 ) is smaller than the distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the substrate.

(Relationship between the distance between two points for each part based on the frame control display)
The relationship between the distances between two points for each part based on the frame control display 125 will be explained using FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 16.

The distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, Width) K2 is larger than the distance (height, width) K10 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the upper end of the game ball number clear button 121b.

Further, the distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the front surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 is It is larger than the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface (printed surface of identification symbols of various electronic components) to the upper end of the game ball count clear switch 121.

The distance (height, width) K10 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the printed surface of the identification symbols of various electronic components) to the upper end of the game ball number clear button 121b is the distance K10 in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) of the frame control board 120. It is approximately the same or the same as the distance (height, width) K11 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface (printed surface of identification symbols of various electronic components) to the upper end of the bulb button 122b.

In addition, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (printed surface of identification symbols of various electronic components) to the upper end of the game ball count clear switch 121 is 120 (printed surface with identification symbols of various electronic components) to the upper end of the bulb removal switch 122 in the thickness direction of the board (height, width).

The distance (height, width) K11 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (printed surface with identification symbols of various electronic components) to the upper end of the bulb button 122b is the surface of the frame control board 120. It is approximately the same or the same as the distance (height, width) K12 in the thickness direction of the board from (printed surface of identification symbols of various electronic components) to the upper end of the error release button 123b.

Further, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the frame control board 120 from the surface of the frame control board 120 (printed surface with identification symbols of various electronic components) to the upper end of the bulb removal switch 122 is It is approximately the same or the same as the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface (printed surface of identification symbols of various electronic components) to the upper end of the error release switch 123.

The distance (height, width) M13 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the upper end of various buttons (game ball count clear button 121b, ball removal button 122b, error release button 123b) is , of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (printed surface with identification symbols of each electronic component) to the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface with frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2). The distance in the thickness direction (height, width) is larger than K5.

The thickness of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the printed surface of the identification symbol of each electronic component) to the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the printed surface of the frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) The distance in the horizontal direction (height, width) K5 is from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip model information sticker 120m2). It is larger than the distance (height, width) M10 in the thickness direction of the substrate.

From the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the upper surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip model information The distance (height, width) M10 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit The distance (height, width) M11 in the thickness direction of the substrate to the surface) is larger than the distance (height, width) M11.

From the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the surface where frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2 is printed) to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit X1 (the surface where integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name is printed) The distance (height, width) M11 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit IC 15 (printed surface of integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name) The distance in the thickness direction (height, width) M12 of the substrate is approximately the same or the same.

In this way, from the surface of the frame control board 120 (the surface on which the identification symbols of each electronic component are printed) to the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the surface on which frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2 is printed). The distance in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (chip information The printed surface of 120 m1 and the distance in the thickness direction of the board to the frame chip model information sticker (120 m2) are made to be different. Therefore, the information displayed on the surface of the frame control board 120 and the information displayed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 are less likely to be confused (easier to distinguish), and the frame control board case 300 can be viewed through the frame control board case 300. It becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk who visually inspects various electronic components of the frame control board 120.

In addition, from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the upper surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip The distance in the thickness direction of the board to the model information sticker (120m2) and the distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit X1. I try to make them different. Therefore, it becomes difficult to confuse the information displayed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125, the information displayed on the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m, and the information displayed on the top surface of the integrated circuit X1. (Easy to distinguish), it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk who visually inspects various electronic components of the frame control board 120 through the frame control board case 300.

In addition, from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (printed surface of frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2) to the upper surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip The distance in the thickness direction of the board to the model information sticker (120m2) and the distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit IC 15. I try to make them different. Therefore, it is difficult to confuse the information displayed on the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125, the information displayed on the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m, and the information displayed on the top surface of the integrated circuit IC 15. (Easy to distinguish), it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk who visually inspects various electronic components of the frame control board 120 through the frame control board case 300.

Note that from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 (the surface where frame control display information such as model number 125a1 and lot number 125a2 is printed) to the top surface of the main body of the integrated circuit X1 (the surface where integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name is printed) The distance (height, width) M11 in the thickness direction of the board from the display surface 125a of the frame control display 125 to the upper surface of the main body of the integrated circuit IC 15 (the printed surface of integrated circuit information such as model number and manufacturer name) ) may be made to differ from the distance (height, width) M12 in the thickness direction of the substrate.

(Seal affixed to frame control board case)
The seal attached to the frame control board case 300 will be explained using FIG. 20. 20(a) is a diagram showing the frame management number sticker 308 affixed to the frame management number sticker affixing section 307, and FIG. FIG. 20C is a diagram for comparing the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), the frame management number sticker 308 is a transparent rectangular sticker, and includes a transparent portion 308a that allows the rear view to be seen through, and a frame on which management information of the frame control device 120A is printed. A management information printing section 308b, an opener entry field 308c for entering the person who opened the frame control board case 300, and an opening date entry field 308d for entering the opening date of the frame control board case 300. , an information printing section 308e on which predetermined character information is printed, a line section 308f printed along the outline of the frame management number sticker 308, and a transparent window section that allows the rear of the frame management number sticker 308 to be seen through. 308g is provided.

The frame management information printing unit 308b is provided at a position above the frame management number sticker 308, and is composed of a square first area and a rectangular second area extending rightward from the right side of the first area. a two-dimensional code (QR code: registered trademark) printed on the first area of the white printed area (opaque area), and the manufacturer's name printed on the second area. It has an identification symbol “AA-1” indicating the frame control board 120 and a management number “No. 111111” of the frame control board 120. Note that the two-dimensional code (QR code: registered trademark) includes information on the manufacturer's name and management number.

The opener entry field 308c is a rectangular white printed area (opaque area) that is long from side to side, and is provided at a position below the frame management number sticker 308 to the left.

The opening date entry field 308d is a rectangular white printed part (non-transparent part) that is long from side to side, and is provided on the right side of the frame management number sticker 308 and on the right side of the opening person entry field 208c with an interval. It is being

The information printing section 308e includes a first information printing section 308e1 of "frame control board management number" printed in black above the frame management information printing section 308b, and a first information printing section 308e1 of "frame control board management number" printed in black above the opener entry field 308c. A second information printing section 308e2 for "opened person", a third information printing section 308e3 for "opening date" printed in black above the opening date entry column 308d, and a lower end of the frame management number sticker 308 It has a fourth information printing part 308e4 with "Manufacturer name: Co., Ltd." printed in black at the position.

The line portion 308f includes a left side line portion 308f1 printed along the left outer edge of the frame management number sticker 308 from the vicinity of the first information printing portion 308e1 to the vicinity of the fourth information printing portion 308e4, and the vicinity of the first information printing portion 308e1. It has a right line part 308f2 that is printed along the right outer edge of the frame management number sticker 308 from 308e4 to the vicinity of the fourth information printing part 308e4, and the left line part 308f1 and the right line part 308f2 print the frame management information. The printing section 308b, the opening field 308c, the opening date field 308d, etc. are enclosed.

The transparent window portion 308g is a first transparent window portion 308g1 provided between the frame management information printing portion 308b and the opener entry field 308c, and a first transparent window portion 308g1 provided between the frame management information printing portion 308b and the opening date entry field 308d. A second light-transmitting window section 308g2 provided, a third light-transmitting window section 308g3 provided between the opener entry field 308c and the opening date entry field 308d, and between the opener entry field 308c and the left side line section 308f1. , and a fifth light-transmitting window 308g5 provided between the opening date entry column 308d and the right side line portion 308f2.

Various electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120 can be visually recognized through each of the transparent windows 308g1 to 308g5 and the frame control board case 300. When viewing various electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120 only through (through) the frame control board 120, and when viewing the various electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120 through (through) the transparent window section 308g and the frame control board case 300. The visibility of the various electronic components mounted on the board 120 is different depending on whether the various electronic components are visually recognized (specifically, the former has higher visibility). Note that details will be described later.

In addition, various information printed on the frame management number sticker 308 (two-dimensional code, identification symbol, management number, "frame control board management number", "opener", "opening date", "manufacturer name Co., Ltd.") , line portion 308f) are black characters of the ninth font (ninth font).

As shown in FIG. 20(b), the operation guide sticker 309 is a transparent rectangular sticker, and includes a transparent portion 209a that allows the rear view to be seen through, and operation guides for various buttons provided on the frame control device 120A. It includes an information printing section 309b on which information is printed. Note that the operation guide sticker 309 is not watermarked (patterned) to prevent forgery, and has a smaller width (area) in the vertical and horizontal directions than the frame management number sticker 308.

The information printing section 309b is a first guide printing section 309b1 in which a "ball removal button + arrow mark" indicating the position of the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) is printed in yellow on the right side of the operation guide sticker 309. and a second guide printing part 309b2 on which an "error release button + arrow mark" indicating the position of the error release button 123b (error release switch 123) is printed in yellow on the left side of the operation guide sticker 309. There is.

The various information printed on the operation guide sticker 309 ("ball removal button + arrow mark", "error release button + arrow mark") is in yellow in the 10th font.

As shown in FIG. 20(c), when the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 are compared, the width of the frame management number sticker 308 in the vertical and horizontal directions is larger than that of the main management number sticker 208 in the vertical and horizontal directions. width is smaller. In other words, the area of the frame management number sticker 308 is smaller than the area of the main management number sticker 208.

Further, while the main management number sticker 208 has two opener entry columns 208c, the frame management number sticker 308 has one opener entry column 308c. In other words, the number of opener entry fields 308c of the frame management number sticker 308 is smaller than the number of opener entry fields 208c of the main management number sticker 208.

Moreover, the number of opening date entry fields 208d of the main management number sticker 208 is two, whereas the number of opening date entry fields 308d of the frame management number sticker 308 is one. In other words, the number of opening date entry fields 308d of the frame management number sticker 308 is smaller than the number of opening date entry fields 208d of the main management number sticker 208.

Furthermore, the main management number sticker 208 is watermarked (patterned) to prevent forgery, whereas the frame management number sticker 308 is not watermarked (patterned) to prevent forgery. . In other words, the transparency of the frame management number sticker 308 is higher than the light transmittance (transmittance, visibility of electronic components mounted on the main control board 110) of the transparent part 208a and the transparent window 208g of the main management number sticker 208. The light transmittance (transmittance, visibility of electronic components mounted on the frame control board 120) of the light section 308a and the transparent window section 308g is higher.

Further, the main management information printing section 208b of the main management number sticker 208 is printed with a two-dimensional code, an identification symbol, and the management number of the main control board, and the frame management information printing section 308b of the frame management number sticker 308 is printed with a two-dimensional code, an identification symbol, and the management number of the main control board. , two-dimensional code, identification symbol, and control number of the frame control board are printed on it. That is, the same information is printed on the main management information printing section 208b of the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management information printing section 308b of the frame management number sticker 308.

In this way, the frame management number sticker 308 includes a two-dimensional code (first information) that is an information image for identifying the frame control device 120A (frame control board 120), and a two-dimensional code (first information) that is an information image for identifying the frame control device 120A (frame control board 120). ) and a management number (third information) for identifying the frame control device 120A (frame control board 120). The management information printing section 308b) and an opening information entry area (opener entry field 308c, opening date entry field 308d) for entering the opening information of the frame control device 120A. Therefore, it becomes easier to inspect and confirm the main control device 110A, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the manufacturer's employees and game store clerks.

Furthermore, the frame management number sticker 308 includes a two-dimensional code (first information) that is an information image for identifying the frame control device 120A (frame control board 120), and a manufacturer name that is the manufacturer of the frame control device 120A. an identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b) having an identification symbol (second information) indicating the frame control device 120A and a management number (third information) for identifying the frame control device 120A; A rear frame control board 120 is provided between the identification information display area and the opening information entry area. A see-through area (a first light-transmitting window portion 308g1, a second light-transmitting window portion 308g2) is provided in which various electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistance arrays, etc.) mounted on the display device can be visually recognized. Therefore, even if the frame management number sticker 308 is attached to the frame control board case 300, various electronic components behind the frame management number sticker 308 can be visually confirmed through the see-through area, and the gaming machine It becomes possible to ensure security. Furthermore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the manufacturer's employees and game store staff.

In addition, the frame management number sticker 308 (opening information entry area) includes a first entry area (opener entry field 308c) in which the name of the person who opened the frame control device 120A can be written, and the date of opening of the frame control device 120A. between the first entry area (opener entry field 308c) and the second entry area (opening date entry field 308d). is provided with a see-through area (third transparent window portion 308g3) through which various electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) mounted on the rear frame control board 120 can be visually recognized. Therefore, even if the frame management number sticker 308 is attached to the frame control board case 300, various electronic components behind the frame management number sticker 308 can be visually confirmed through the see-through area, and the gaming machine It becomes possible to ensure security. Furthermore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the manufacturer's employees and game store staff.

Further, the operation guide sticker 309 includes a first guide printing section 309b1 on which operation guide information for the first operation section (bulb removal button 122b) provided in the frame control device 120A is printed, and and a second guide printing section 309b2 on which operation guide information for the second operation section (error release button 123b) is printed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk who operates the first operation section and the second operation section.

Further, the operation guide sticker 309 includes a first guide printing section 309b1 on which operation guide information for the first operation section (bulb removal button 122b) provided in the frame control device 120A is printed, and and a second guide printing section 309b2 on which operation guide information for the second operating section (error release button 123b) is printed. A see-through area (transparent section 309a) is provided in which various electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, resistors, resistor arrays, etc.) mounted on the frame control board 120 can be visually recognized. Therefore, even if the operation guide sticker 309 is attached to the frame control board case 300, various electronic components behind the operation guide sticker 309 can be visually confirmed through the see-through area, thereby increasing the security of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to guarantee the amount.

In addition, the area of the frame management number sticker 308 is large because it contains a large amount of information important for the management and security of the gaming machine 1. The area of the operation guide sticker 309 with less information is smaller. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the frame control device 120A from being extremely reduced due to the operation guide sticker 309 that has little information (small amount of information) that is important for the management and security of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to ensure security.

In addition, the main control number sticker 208, which is attached to the main control device 110A and has a transparent area that allows various electronic components mounted on the rear main control board 110 to be seen through, has a predetermined pattern (for anti-counterfeiting). On the other hand, the frame management number sticker 308 is attached to the frame control device 120A and has a see-through area that allows various electronic components mounted on the rear frame control board 120 to be seen through. , a predetermined pattern (a watermark to prevent forgery) is not added. Therefore, it is possible to increase the visual security of the frame control device 120A while increasing the physical security of the main control device 110A, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

Also, the transparency of the main management number sticker 208, which is attached to the main control device 110A and has a see-through area that allows various electronic components mounted on the rear main control board 110 to be seen through (because it has a watermark, : low) and the transparency of the frame management number sticker 308, which is affixed to the frame control device 120A and has a transparent area that allows various electronic components mounted on the rear frame control board 120 to be seen through (low). Transparency: high). Therefore, the ease of visual confirmation of the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A can be made different, and it is difficult to forge the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 using the same method. This makes it possible to ensure the security of gaming machines.

In addition, the area of the main management number sticker 208 that is affixed to the main control device 110A and has a see-through area that allows various electronic components mounted on the rear main control board 110 to be seen through, and the area of the main management number sticker 208 that is affixed to the frame control device 120A. At the same time, the area of the frame management number sticker 308, which has a see-through area that allows various electronic components mounted on the rear frame control board 120 to be seen through, is made to be different. Therefore, the ease of visual confirmation of the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A can be made different, and it is possible to prevent the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 from being forged using the same method (same process). This makes it possible to ensure the security of gaming machines.

In addition, the number of entry columns provided in the main control number sticker 208 that is attached to the main control device 110A and has a see-through area that allows various electronic components mounted on the rear main control board 110 to be seen ( 2 entry fields, 2 entry fields for opening date), and a see-through area that is affixed to the frame control device 120A and allows various electronic components mounted on the rear frame control board 120 to be seen through. The number of entry fields provided on the management number sticker 308 (one entry field for the person who opened the seal, one entry field for the opening date) is made to be different. Therefore, it is difficult to forge the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 using the same method (same process), and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

Although the name of the person who opened the package is to be entered in the first entry area (opener entry field 308c) of the frame management number sticker 308, it is also possible to write the name of the opening hall, or to affix a seal. It may be possible to write down the situation when the package was opened, or the date when the package was opened.

In addition, although the date of opening is to be entered in the second entry area (opener entry field 308c) of the frame management number sticker 308, it is also possible to enter the date and time of opening, or the location where it was opened. It may be possible to write down the situation when the package was opened, or the name of the person who opened the package.

Further, although the main management number sticker 208 is watermarked and the frame management number sticker 308 is not watermarked, both the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 may be watermarked. . In this case, the transparency of the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 may be the same or different (for example, the transparency of one of the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 may be higher). You can.

Alternatively, the frame management number sticker 308 may be watermarked, but the main management number sticker 208 may not be watermarked. In this case, the transparency of the main management number sticker 208 may be higher than or equal to that of the frame management number sticker 308.

Also, the area of the frame management number sticker 308 is smaller than the area of the main management number sticker 208, but the area of the main management number sticker 208 is smaller than the area of the frame management number sticker 308. You can.

Furthermore, the shape of the main management number sticker 208 and the shape of the frame management number sticker 308 are both rectangular (rectangular); (For example, one of the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 may have a round or triangular shape, and the other may have a rectangular shape).

Furthermore, the number of entry columns provided in the frame management number sticker 308 (two entry columns for the opener and two entry columns for the opening date) is greater than the number of entry columns provided for the main management number sticker 208 (two entry columns for the opener and two entry columns for the opening date). Although the number of entry fields is smaller than the number of entry fields provided on the frame management number sticker 308, the number of entry fields provided on the main management number sticker 208 is smaller than the number of entry fields provided on the frame management number sticker 308. (For example, the frame management number sticker 308 has two columns for the person who opened the package and two columns for the date of opening, and the column for the main management number sticker 208 has one column for the person who opened the package and one column for the date of opening.) There may be one column).

In addition, the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 each consist of one sticker, and are provided with a management information printing section and various entry fields, but the main management number sticker 208 and the frame management number sticker 308 may each be composed of two stickers, one of which may be provided with a management information printing section, and the other may be provided with various entry fields.

(Relationship between various seals on the frame control board case and various electronic components)
The relationship between various seals of the frame control board case 300 and various electronic components will be explained using FIG. 21.

The frame management number sticker 308 is located at a position corresponding to the tall component concentrated mounting area HM where tall components such as the electrolytic capacitor BC of the frame control board 120 are concentrated, and is placed in the first case so as to span over a plurality of electronic component DBs. It is pasted on the frame management number sticker pasting part 307 of the member 301.

Specifically, the frame management number sticker 308, the frame control unit 120m, the number of game balls clear button 121b (the number of game balls clear switch 121), the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), and the error release button 123b ( The error release switch 123), the frame control display 125, and various connectors (female connectors 127a to 127f, test connector 128) are arranged so as not to overlap one another.

Then, electrolytic capacitors BC and other components mounted in the tall component concentrated mounting area HM are transmitted through (through) each transparent window 308g (or transparent part 308a) provided in the frame management number sticker 308. Various electronic components BC (integrated circuits IC11, 17, etc., capacitors C20 to 22, etc., resistors R57, 75, etc., connectors 127a to 127c, etc.) are printed on the frame control board 120 corresponding to these various electronic components. Various identification symbols and installation reference lines KJ can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, through each transparent window section 308g (or transparent section 308a) provided on the frame management number sticker 308, the frame control section 120m, the number of game balls clear button 121b (the number of game balls clear switch 121 ), ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), error release button 123b (error release switch 123), frame control display 125 (display surface 125a), specific connectors (connectors 127d to 127f, test connector 128) ), various identification symbols and mounting reference lines KJ printed on the frame control board 120 corresponding to these various electronic components are difficult or impossible to see.

The operation guide sticker 309 is located at a position corresponding to the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) and the error release button 123b (error release switch 123) below the frame management number sticker 308 (on the right side in FIG. 21). It is attached to the first case member 301 so as to span the plurality of electronic component DBs.

Specifically, the operation guide sticker 309, the frame control section 120m, the number of game balls clear button 121b (the number of game balls clear switch 121), the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), and the error release button 123b (error release button 123b) The release switch 123), the frame control display 125, and various connectors (female connectors 127a to 127f, test connector 128) are arranged so as not to overlap one another.

Further, the arrow mark of the first guide printed portion (“bulb removal button + arrow mark”) of the operation guide sticker 309 is arranged so as to point to the ball removal button 122b, and the second guide print portion of the operation guide sticker 309 ( The arrow mark of the "error release button + arrow mark" is arranged so as to point to the error release button 123b.

Then, various electronic components BC (integrated circuits IC6, 11, 14, etc., capacitors C9, 31, 36, etc., resistors R57, 75, 103, etc., game ball number clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, error release switch 123, frame control display 125, etc.) and various identification symbols printed on the frame control board 120 corresponding to these various electronic components. and the installation reference line KJ can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, through the transparent part 309a provided on the operation guide sticker 309, the frame control part 120m, the number of game balls clear button 121b (the number of game balls clear switch 121), the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), error release button 123b (error release switch 123), frame control display 125 (display surface 125a), specific connectors (connectors 127d to 127f, test connector 128), and their various electronic components. Various identification symbols and attachment reference lines KJ printed on the frame control board 120 correspondingly are difficult or invisible.

In addition, so as not to overlap with the frame management number sticker 308, the engraved part 310a on which the words "Game Ball Count Clear Switch" are engraved on the button cover member 310 converted to the first state is attached to the Game Ball Count Clear Button 121b ( It is arranged so as to cover the upper part of the game ball count clear switch 121).

In this way, the frame control board case 300 displays a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and a management number (third identification information) of the frame control board. The number of game balls clear button 121b (number of game balls clear switch 121), which has an identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b) and is used to clear the number of game balls (playing value amount) owned by the player, It is provided on the frame control board 120 so as not to overlap with the identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b) makes it difficult to operate the game ball number clear button 121b (game ball number clear switch 121), improving the convenience of the game store staff. It becomes possible to do so.

Further, the frame control board case 300 includes identification information that displays a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and a management number (third identification information) of the frame control board. It has a display area (frame management information printing section 308b), and is used to clear the number of game balls (gaming value amount) owned by the player so as not to overlap with the identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b). Guidance information (engraved portion 310a with the words "Game Ball Count Clear Switch") indicating the Game Ball Count Clear Button 121b (Game Ball Count Clear Switch 121) is provided. Therefore, the presence of the game ball number clear button 121b (game ball number clear switch 121) can be easily recognized, making it possible to improve the convenience of the game clerk.

The frame control board case 300 includes an identification information display area in which a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and a management number (third identification information) of the frame control board are displayed. (frame management information printing section 308b), and a ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) for removing the game medium from the gaming machine overlaps the identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b) in front and back. It is provided on the frame control board 120 to prevent this from happening. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b) makes it difficult to operate the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk. becomes.

Further, the frame control board case 300 includes identification information that displays a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and a management number (third identification information) of the frame control board. It has a display area (frame management information printing section 308b), and has a ball removal button 122b (ball removal button) for removing the game medium from the gaming machine so as not to overlap the identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b) front and back. The switch 122) is provided with guidance information (a first guidance printed portion 309b1 on which "ball removal button + arrow mark" is printed). Therefore, the existence of the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) can be easily recognized, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

The frame control board case 300 includes an identification information display area in which a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and a management number (third identification information) of the frame control board are displayed. (Frame management information printing section 308b), and an error cancellation button 123b (error cancellation switch 123) for clearing a predetermined abnormality or a predetermined abnormality notification is an identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b). They are provided on the frame control board 120 so as not to overlap front and back. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the error cancellation button 123b (error cancellation switch 123) becomes difficult to operate due to the identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b), and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk. becomes.

Further, the frame control board case 300 includes identification information that displays a two-dimensional code (first identification information), an identification symbol (second identification information), and a management number (third identification information) of the frame control board. An error release button 123b that has a display area (frame management information printing section 308b) and is used to clear a predetermined abnormality or a predetermined abnormality notification so as not to overlap with the identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b). (Error cancellation switch 123) guidance information (second guidance printing section 309b2 on which "error cancellation button + arrow mark" is printed) is provided. Therefore, the existence of the error release button 123b (error release switch 123) can be easily recognized, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

In addition, the frame control unit 120m, the number of game balls clear button 121b (the number of game balls clear switch 121 ), ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), error release button 123b (error release switch 123), frame control display 125 (display surface 125a), specific connectors (connectors 127d to 127f, test connector 128) ) etc., various identification symbols printed on the frame control board 120 corresponding to these various electronic components, and a part or all of the mounting reference line KJ may be made easily visible or visible.

(Relationship between the distance between two points of each part of the main control device and frame control device)
The relationship between the distances between two points of each part of the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A will be explained using FIG. 22. FIG. 22(a) is a diagram showing the distance between two points for each part of the main control device 110A, and FIG. 22(b) is a diagram showing the distance between two points for each part of the frame control device 120A. It is a diagram. Here, the distance between two points for each part, which is not mentioned above, will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the distance (height, width, )L2 is the distance (height, width) is larger than H9.

The distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the RWM clear switch 111a (the top surface of the operating section) to the back surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker 208) is , is larger than the distance (height, width) H7 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209). .

The distance (height, width) H4 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200 is as follows: It is larger than the distance (height, width) H10 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the RWM clear button 111b to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200.

As shown in FIG. 22(b), the distance (height, Width) H10 is the distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. is also getting bigger.

The distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is determined by the number of game ball clear switch 121. The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end (top surface of the operation unit) to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 is greater than M13. There is.

Distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the game ball count clear switch 121 (top surface of the operating section) to the back surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) M13 is a board from the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (chip information printed surface, frame chip model information sticker 120m2) to the back surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308). The distance in the thickness direction (height, width) is larger than M6.

Distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the game ball count clear switch 121 (top surface of the operating section) to the back surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) M13 is the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the bulb removal switch 122 (the top surface of the operation part) to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. ) It is substantially the same or the same as M15.

Also, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the bulb removal switch 122 (the top surface of the operating section) to the back surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308). M15 is the distance in the board thickness direction (height, width ) It is substantially the same or the same as M17.

The distance (height, width) M9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the back side of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is the number of game balls cleared. It is larger than the distance (height, width) M14 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the button 121b to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300.

The distance (height, width) M14 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the game ball number clear button 121b to the back surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is the ball removal button. 122b to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) M16.

The distance (height, width) M16 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the ball removal button 122b to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 is the distance M16 of the error release button 123b. It is approximately the same or the same as the distance (height, width) M18 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a) and 22(b), the distance in the board thickness direction from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the surface (operation guide sticker 309) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. (Height, width) K1 is the distance (height, width) L1 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the surface (model information sticker 209) of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200. It is larger than.

The distance (height, width) K2 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the back surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is the surface of the main control board 110. It is larger than the distance (height, width) L2 in the thickness direction of the board from the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200 to the back surface (main management number sticker 208).

Thickness of the board from the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip model information sticker 120m2) to the back surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) The distance in the horizontal direction (height, width) M6 is the thickness of the board from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the surface of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200 (model information sticker 209) The distance in the direction (height, width) is larger than H3.

Thickness of the board from the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip model information sticker 120m2) to the back surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) The distance in the horizontal direction (height, width) M6 is the thickness of the board from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the back surface of the top plate part 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker 208). The distance in the horizontal direction (height, width) is larger than H4.

The distance (height, width) L4 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main control section 110m is the distance (height, width) L4 from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the top surface (chip) of the main body of the frame control section 120m. The printed surface of the information 120m1 is larger than the distance (height, width) K6 in the thickness direction of the board to the frame chip model information sticker 120m2).

The distance (height, width) M9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 is the main inspection connector 116 to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) H8.

The distance (height, width) M10 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the surface (operation guide sticker 309) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 is equal to It is larger than the distance (height, width) H7 in the board thickness direction from the upper end of the main control board case 200 to the surface of the top plate section 202 (model information sticker 209).

Distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the game ball count clear switch 121 (top surface of the operating section) to the back surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) M13 is the distance in the board thickness direction (height, width ) is larger than H9.

The distance (height, width) M15 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the bulb removal switch 122 (the top surface of the operation part) to the back surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is , the distance in the board thickness direction (height, width) from the upper end of the RWM clear switch 111a (the top surface of the operating section) to the back surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker 208) H9 It is larger than.

The distance (height, width) M17 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the error release switch 123 (top surface of the operation unit) to the back surface (frame management number sticker 308) of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 is , the distance in the board thickness direction (height, width) from the upper end of the RWM clear switch 111a (the top surface of the operating section) to the back surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker 208) H9 It is larger than.

The distance (height, width) M14 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the game ball count clear button 121b to the back side of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker 308) is the RWM clear button. 111b to the back surface (main management number sticker 208) of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) H10.

In this way, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the model information sticker 209 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200. and the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the operation guide sticker 309 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300. I try to make it different. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (improving identifiability), and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk, and also to It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as incorrect installation position during inspection at a store.

In addition, the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the main management number sticker 208 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker affixing section 207) distance (height, width) and the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker affixing section 307). ) in the thickness direction of the board (height, width). Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (improving identifiability), and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk, and also to It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as incorrect installation position during inspection at a store.

In addition, from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the model information sticker 209 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker affixing area 207). The distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) and the top plate part of the frame control board case 300 from the top surface of the main body of the frame control part 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip model information sticker 120m2) The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the board 302 (frame management number sticker affixing portion 307) is made to be different. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (improving identifiability), and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk, and also to It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as incorrect installation position during inspection at a store.

The board from the upper end of the main control section 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the main control number sticker 208 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main control number sticker affixing section 207) distance in the thickness direction (height, width) from the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip model information sticker 120m2) to the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300. The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the surface (frame management number sticker affixing portion 307) of the board is made to be different. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (improving identifiability), and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk, and also to It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as incorrect installation position during inspection at a store.

Also, the thickness of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the model information sticker 209 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker affixing section 207). The distance in the direction (height, width) and the operation guide sticker 309 ( pasted from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker pasting part 307 ) The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the identification mark) is made different. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (improving identifiability), and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk, and also to It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as incorrect installation position during inspection at a store.

Also, the thickness of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the main control number sticker 208 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main control number sticker affixing section 207). The distance in the horizontal direction (height, width) and the frame management number sticker affixed from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker pasting part 307) The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate up to 308 (identification display) is made to be different. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (identifiability can be improved), and inconveniences such as incorrect installation positions during manufacturing of the gaming machine 1 or during inspection at a gaming parlor are suppressed. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, a main management number sticker 208 (identification display) is affixed from the upper end of the RWM clear switch 111a (the top surface of the operation unit) to the surface of the top plate portion 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker pasting portion 207). The distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) from the upper end of the game ball count clear switch 121 (the top surface of the operation part) to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the affixing portion 307) is made to be different. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (improving identifiability), and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk, and also to It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as incorrect installation position during inspection at a store.

In addition, a main management number sticker 208 (identification display) is affixed from the upper end of the RWM clear switch 111a (the top surface of the operation unit) to the surface of the top plate portion 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker pasting portion 207). The distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) from the top end of the bulb removal switch 122 (the top surface of the operation part) to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (the part where the frame management number sticker is attached) The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the frame management number sticker 307) is made to be different. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (improving identifiability), and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk, and also to It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as incorrect installation position during inspection at a store.

In addition, a main management number sticker 208 (identification display) affixed from the upper end of the RWM clear button 111b (top surface of the operation unit) to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker pasting section 207) The distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) from the upper end of the error release switch 123 (the top surface of the operation part) to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (the part where the frame management number sticker is attached) The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the frame management number sticker 307) is made to be different. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (improving identifiability), and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk, and also to It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as incorrect installation position during inspection at a store.

Note that the distance (height, width) L1 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the model information sticker 209 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 is , the distance in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the operation guide sticker 309 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker affixing section 307). (Height, width) may be larger than K1.

In addition, the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the main management number sticker 208 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker affixing section 207) distance (height, width) L2 from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification (indication) in the thickness direction of the substrate (height, width) may be larger than K2.

In addition, from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the model information sticker 209 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker affixing area 207). The distance (height, width) H3 in the thickness direction of the board is calculated from the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (chip information printing surface, 120m1) to the surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the number sticker affixing portion 307) may be larger than M6.

Also, from the upper end of the main control unit 110m (one-chip microcomputer) to the main control number sticker 208 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate portion 202 of the main control board case 200 (main control number sticker affixing portion 207). The distance (height, width) H4 in the thickness direction of the board from the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip model information sticker 120m2) to the top of the frame control board case 300. The distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the plate part 302 (frame management number sticker affixing part 307) may be larger than M6. .

Also, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the model information sticker 209 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200. H7 is the distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width ) may be larger than M10.

Also, the thickness of the board from the upper end of the main inspection connector 116 to the main control number sticker 208 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main control number sticker affixing section 207). The horizontal distance (height, width) H8 from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the frame management number affixed to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker pasting part 307) The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the seal 308 (identification display) may be greater than M9.

In addition, a main management number sticker 208 (identification display) is affixed from the upper end of the RWM clear switch 111a (the top surface of the operation unit) to the surface of the top plate portion 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker pasting portion 207). The distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the game ball count clear switch 121 (the top surface of the operation part) to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the sticker affixing portion 307) may be greater than M13.

In addition, a main management number sticker 208 (identification display) is affixed from the upper end of the RWM clear switch 111a (the top surface of the operation unit) to the surface of the top plate portion 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker pasting portion 207). The distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the bulb removal switch 122 (the top surface of the operation part) to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker affixed) The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the part 307) may be larger than M15.

In addition, a main management number sticker 208 (identification display) is affixed from the upper end of the RWM clear switch 111a (the top surface of the operation unit) to the surface of the top plate portion 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker pasting portion 207). The distance (height, width) H9 in the thickness direction of the board from the upper end of the error release switch 123 (the top surface of the operation part) to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker pasted) The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the portion 307) may be larger than M17.

In addition, a frame management number sticker 308 (identification Paste the distance (height, width) M13 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker pasting part 307) to The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) may be greater than K2.

Also, from the top surface of the main body of the frame control section 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip model information sticker 120m2) to the surface of the top plate section 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker pasting section 307). The distance (height, width) M6 in the thickness direction of the board from the affixed frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) to the frame control board case from the upper end of the game ball count clear switch 121 (top surface of the operation unit) The distance in the thickness direction of the board (height, width) from the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate portion 302 (frame management number sticker affixing portion 307) of 300 is greater than M13. You can.

In addition, the board from the upper end of the game ball count clear button 121b to the frame management number sticker 308 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker pasting part 307) The distance (height, width) M14 in the thickness direction is measured from the upper end of the frame inspection connector 126 to the frame control board affixed to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker pasting part 307). The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the number sticker 308 (identification display) may be greater than M9.

Also, the distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the frame control board 120 to the top surface of the main body of the frame control unit 120m (printed surface of chip information 120m1, frame chip model information sticker 120m2) K6 may be made larger than the distance (height, width) L4 in the thickness direction of the board from the surface of the main control board 110 to the upper end of the main control section 110m.

Also, the thickness of the board from the upper end of the RWM clear button 111b to the main management number sticker 208 (identification display) affixed to the surface of the top plate section 202 of the main control board case 200 (main management number sticker affixing section 207). The distance in the direction (height, width) H10 is calculated from the upper end of the number of game balls clear button 121b to the frame management number affixed to the surface of the top plate part 302 of the frame control board case 300 (frame management number sticker pasting part 307). The distance (height, width) in the thickness direction of the substrate to the seal 308 (identification display) may be greater than M14.

(Positional relationship between each seal of each control device and each operation part)
The positional relationship between each seal and each operation section of each control device (main control device 110A, frame control device 120A) will be explained using FIG. 23. FIG. 23(a) is a rear view of the vicinity of each control device, and FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between each seal and each operating section.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), the frame management number sticker 308 affixed to the frame control board case 300 is larger than the main management number sticker 208 and model information sticker 209 affixed to the main control board case 200. 23 (toward the right side in FIG. 23(a)).

Furthermore, the operation guide sticker 309 affixed to the frame control board case 300 is closer to the rotation axis of the inner frame 3 (to the right in FIG. 23(a)) than the model information sticker 209 affixed to the main control board case 200. ), which is closer to the free rotation end of the inner frame 3 than the end of the main control number sticker 208 attached to the main control board case 200 that is located on the rotation axis side of the inner frame 3 (FIG. 23 (a) toward the left).

In addition, the game ball number clear switch 121 (game ball number clear button 121b), ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b), and error release switch 123 (error release button 123b) mounted on the frame control board 120 are as follows: The RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) mounted on the main control board 110 is arranged closer to the free rotation end of the inner frame 3 (to the left in FIG. 23(a)).

As shown in FIG. 23(b), the main management number sticker 208 and model information sticker 209 attached to the main control board case 200 are arranged so that the model information sticker 209 is located on the rear side of the gaming machine. Of the frame management number sticker 308 and operation guide sticker 309 attached to the frame control board case 300, the operation guide sticker 309 is placed on the rear side of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the frame management number sticker 308 and operation guide sticker 309 affixed to the frame control board case 300 are located closer to the rear of the gaming machine than the main management number sticker 208 and model information sticker 209 affixed to the main control board case 200. It is located.

In addition, since the frame control board 120 is arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine than the main control board 110, the number of game ball clear switch 121, the ball removal switch 122, and the error release switch mounted on the frame control board 120 are 123 is arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine rather than the RWM clear switch 111a mounted on the main control board 110.

In addition, the game ball count clear button 121b, ball removal button 122b, and error release button 123b, which are loosely fitted in the frame control board case 300, are more effective than the RWM clear button 111b, which is loosely fitted in the main control board case 200. It is located at the rear of the aircraft.

Here, each operation section (production button 17, counting button 20) arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and each operation section arranged on the back side of the gaming machine (RWM clear button 111b, game ball count clear button 121b, ball The operation amount and operation force for the release button 122b and the error release button 123b will be explained.

Necessary for the switches (production button detection switch 17a, counting button switch 20a, RWM clear switch 111a, game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, error release switch 123) in each operation section to turn from the OFF state to the ON state. The required amount of operation is in the following relationship: RWM clear button 111b = game ball count clear button 121b = ball removal button 122b = error release button 123b < counting button 20 < production button 17.

In addition, compared to the initial operating force when you start pressing the buttons on each operation section (production button 17, counting button 20, RWM clear button 111b, game ball count clear button 121b, ball extraction button 122b, error release button 123b), The final stage immediately before the switches in each operation section (production button detection switch 17a, counting button switch 20a, RWM clear switch 111a, game ball number clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, error release switch 123) switch from the OFF state to the ON state. The operating force is greater.

In addition, the initial operating force when you start pressing the buttons on each operation section (production button 17, counting button 20, RWM clear button 111b, game ball count clear button 121b, ball extraction button 122b, error release button 123b) is RWM The relationship is as follows: clear button 111b = game ball count clear button 121b = ball removal button 122b = error release button 123b < counting button 20 < production button 17.

In addition, immediately before the switches in each operation section (production button detection switch 17a, counting button switch 20a, RWM clear switch 111a, game ball count clear switch 121, ball removal switch 122, error release switch 123) switch from the OFF state to the ON state. The final operating force is in the relationship: RWM clear button 111b = game ball number clear button 121b = ball removal button 122b = error release button 123b < counting button 20 < performance button 17.

In this way, the frame management number sticker 308 affixed to the frame control device 120A disposed below the main control device 110A is greater than the main management number sticker 208 and model information sticker 209 affixed to the main control device 110A. and the operation guide sticker 309 are arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is opened while the gaming machine 1 is installed in the island equipment, the main management number sticker 208 and model information sticker 209 of the main control device 110A located below the line of sight of the gaming clerk, and the frame control It becomes easier to check the slot management number sticker 308 and the operation guide sticker 309 of the device 120A at the same time, making it possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

In addition, the tip of the operation part of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) provided in the main control device 110A is more than The other side is located at the rear of the gaming machine. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is opened while the gaming machine 1 is installed in the island equipment, the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the number of game balls clear button 121b (the number of game balls clear switch 121) can be pressed at the same time. In addition to making it easier to confirm, it is also possible to improve the distinguishability of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the number of game balls clear button 121b (number of game balls clear switch 121), which improves the convenience of the game clerk. becomes possible.

Moreover, the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) provided on the frame control device 120A is more convenient for gaming than the tip of the operation part of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) provided on the main control device 110A. It is located at the rear of the aircraft. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is opened while the gaming machine 1 is installed in the island equipment, it becomes easier to check the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) at the same time. At the same time, it becomes possible to improve the distinguishability of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122), and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Moreover, the error release button 123b (error release switch 123) provided on the frame control device 120A is more convenient for gaming than the tip of the operation part of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) provided on the main control device 110A. It is located at the rear of the aircraft. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is opened while the gaming machine 1 is installed in the island equipment, it becomes easier to check the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the error release button 123b (error release switch 123) at the same time. At the same time, it becomes possible to improve the distinguishability of the RWM clear button 111b (RWM clear switch 111a) and the error release button 123b (error release switch 123), and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

In addition, the required operation amount on each operation part is in the relationship of RWM clear button 111b = game ball number clear button 121b = ball removal button 122b = error release button 123b < counting button 20 < production button 17. Therefore, it becomes easier to operate the operation parts operated by the game clerk (RWM clear button 111b, game ball count clear button 121b, ball removal button 122b = error release button 123b), and the operation part operated by the player (counting button 20). , the performance button 17) can be improved to give a sense of satisfaction to the player by improving the operational feeling (real feeling of pressing it).

In addition, the final operating force of each operating unit is higher than the initial operating force of each operating unit (production button 17, counting button 20, RWM clear button 111b, game ball count clear button 121b, ball extraction button 122b, error release button 123b). is larger. Therefore, the momentum of operating each operating section weakens at the final stage of operation, making it possible to suppress the inconvenience that each operating section (each switch) becomes easily damaged.

In addition, the frame management number sticker 308 and operation number sticker 308 and the model information sticker 209 that are attached to the frame control device 120A, which are arranged below the main control device 110A, are higher than the main control number sticker 208 and the model information sticker 209 that are attached to the main control device 110A. The guide sticker 309 may be placed on the front side of the gaming machine.

Moreover, the number of game balls clear button 121b (number of game balls clear switch 121) provided on the frame control device 120A, The ball removal button 122b (ball removal switch 122) and the error release button 123b (error release switch 123) may be arranged on the front side of the gaming machine.

Further, the required amount of operation in each operation section may be different between the RWM clear button 111b, the number of game balls clear button 121b, the ball removal button 122b, and the error release button 123b, or the RWM clear button 111b and the number of game balls Any one or two of the clear button 121b, the ball removal button 122b, and the error release button 123b may be made different. Even in this case, if the required operation amount of the counting button 20 and the production button 17 is made larger than that of the RWM clear button 111b, the number of game balls clear button 121b, the ball extraction button 122b, and the error release button 123b. good.

(Relationship of distance from power switch to each element of control device)
The relationship between the distances from the power switch 164 to each element of the control device (main control device 110A, frame control device 120A) will be explained using FIG. 24.

As shown in FIG. 24, the distance LS1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame management number sticker 308 is the same as the distance LS2 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the operation guide sticker 309. distance).

Further, the distance LB1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball number clear switch 121 (game ball number clear button 121b) is the distance LH (straight line distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125. distance and/or plane distance).

Further, the distance LB2 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the bulb removal switch 122 (bulb removal button 122b) is the distance LH (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125. plane distance).

Furthermore, the distance LB3 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the error release switch 123 (error release button 123b) is the distance LH (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125. plane distance).

The distance (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 increases in the order of distance LS1<distance LB1<distance LS2<distance LB2<distance LB3<distance LH.

Further, the distance LS5 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the main management number sticker 208 is shorter than the distance LS4 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the model information sticker 209. It has become.

Further, the distance LB4 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) is the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115. distance).

Further, the distance LK (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the setting key switch 112a is shorter than the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115. ing.

The distance (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 increases in the order of distance LB4<distance LS5<distance LK<distance LJ<distance LS4.

Further, the distance LS1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame management number sticker 308 is longer than the distance LS5 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the main management number sticker 208. It's shorter.

Further, the distance LS1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the operation guide sticker 309 is shorter than the distance LS5 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the main management number sticker 208. It has become.

Also, the distance LB1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball number clear switch 121 (game ball number clear button 121b) is from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b). is shorter than the distance LB4 (straight line distance and/or plane distance).

Further, the distance LB2 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b) is the distance LB4 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b). straight line distance and/or plane distance).

Furthermore, the distance LB3 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the error release switch 123 (error release button 123b) is the distance LB4 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b). straight line distance and/or plane distance).

Further, the distance LH (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 is shorter than the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115. It has become.

Then, the distance from the power switch 164 (straight line distance and/or plane distance distance) is becoming longer.

In this way, the distance LB1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball number clear switch 121 (game ball number clear button 121b), and the distance LH from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125. (straight line distance and/or plane distance). Therefore, when the game clerk operates or is about to operate the game ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b), the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player is displayed. Inconveniences such as the frame control display 125 being hidden by the hand or arm of the game store clerk are less likely to occur, and convenience for the game store clerk can be improved.

Further, the distance LB2 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the bulb removal switch 122 (bulb extraction button 122b), and the distance LH (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 (plane distance) are different. Therefore, when the game clerk operates or is about to operate the ball extraction switch 122 (ball extraction button 122b), the frame control display 125 on which specific information is displayed during the ball extraction operation is displayed in the game clerk's hand. Also, the inconvenience of being hidden by the arm is less likely to occur, making it possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Also, the distance LB3 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the error release switch 123 (error release button 123b), and the distance LH (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 (plane distance) are different. Therefore, when the game clerk operates or is about to operate the error release switch 123 (error release button 123b), the frame control display 125, which displays an error code according to the type of error that has occurred, is activated. Inconveniences such as being hidden by the store clerk's hands or arms are less likely to occur, and convenience for the game store clerk can be improved.

In addition, the distance LB4 (straight distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) provided on the main control board 110, and the game distance provided from the power switch 164 to the frame control board 120. The distance LB1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) to the ball count clear switch 121 (game ball count clear button 121b) is different. Therefore, the distinguishability of the two types of switches (buttons) can be improved due to the difference in distance, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk who operates the two types of switches (buttons).

Also, the distance LB4 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) provided on the main control board 110, and the ball distance provided from the power switch 164 to the frame control board 120. The distance LB2 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) to the extraction switch 122 (ball extraction button 122b) is different. Therefore, the distinguishability of the two types of switches (buttons) can be improved due to the difference in distance, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk who operates the two types of switches (buttons).

Also, the distance LB4 (straight distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) provided on the main control board 110, and the error distance provided from the power switch 164 to the frame control board 120. The distance LB3 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) to the release switch 123 (error release button 123b) is different. Therefore, the distinguishability of the two types of switches (buttons) can be improved due to the difference in distance, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk who operates the two types of switches (buttons).

Further, the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115 provided on the main control board 110 and the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 provided on the frame control board 120 The distance LH (straight line distance and/or plane distance) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the distinguishability of the two types of display devices due to the difference in distance, and it is possible to improve the convenience for the game store clerk who has to operate two types of switches (buttons).

Furthermore, the distance LB3 (straight distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the error release switch 123 (error release button 123b) that does not require simultaneous operation with the power switch 164 is longer than the distance LB3 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) The distance LB1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) to the game ball number clear switch 121 (game ball number clear button 121b) that requires simultaneous operation is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the game clerk when operating the game ball number clear switch 121 (game ball number clear button 121b), which needs to be operated simultaneously with the power switch 164.

Furthermore, the distance LB3 (straight distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the error release switch 123 (error release button 123b) that does not require simultaneous operation with the power switch 164 is longer than the distance LB3 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) The distance LB2 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b), which requires simultaneous operation, is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk when operating the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b), which needs to be operated simultaneously with the power switch 164.

Note that the distance LS2 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the operation guide sticker 309 is shorter than the distance LS1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame management number sticker 308. You can.

In addition, the distance LH (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 is changed to the distance LB1 (straight line distance) from the power switch 164 to the number of game balls clear switch 121 (number of game balls clear button 121b). distance and/or plane distance).

In addition, the distance LH (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 is changed to the distance LB2 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b). (distance) may be shorter than that.

Also, the distance LH (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125 is changed to the distance LB3 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the error release switch 123 (error release button 123b). (distance) may be shorter than that.

Also, the distance LB2 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b) is set to the distance LB2 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the game ball number clear switch 121 (game ball number clear button 121b). It may be shorter than distance LB1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance).

Also, the distance LS4 (straight distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the model information sticker 209 is shorter than the distance LS5 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the main management number sticker 208. You can.

In addition, the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115 is changed to the distance LB4 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b). ) may be shorter.

Also, the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115 is made shorter than the distance LK (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the setting key switch 112a. Good too.

Also, the distance LS5 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the main management number sticker 208 is shorter than the distance LS1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame management number sticker 308. You may.

Also, the distance LB4 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) is calculated from the power switch 164 to the game ball number clear switch 121 (game ball number clear button 121b). It may be shorter than distance LB1 (straight line distance and/or plane distance).

In addition, the distance LB4 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) is changed to the distance LB2 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the ball removal switch 122 (ball removal button 122b). distance and/or plane distance).

Also, the distance LB4 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the RWM clear switch 111a (RWM clear button 111b) is changed to the distance LB3 (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the error release switch 123 (error release button 123b). distance and/or plane distance).

Furthermore, the distance LJ (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the information display 115 is made shorter than the distance LH (straight line distance and/or plane distance) from the power switch 164 to the frame control display 125. You can.

(Modified example of main controller)
A modification of the main control device 110A will be described using FIG. 25. FIG. 25(a) is a front view of the main controller 110A in a modified example, and FIG. 25(b) is a diagram showing a main management number sticker 208 in the modified example. Note that the description of the same parts as in the embodiment described above will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

As shown in FIG. 25(a), at one longitudinal end of the main control board case 200 (left side in FIG. 25(a)), there is an upper case member 201 and a lower case member in which the main control board 110 is accommodated. A main caulking portion 204A is provided for sealing the main control board case 200 with the main control board case 200 closed.

The main caulking part 204A includes an upper caulking part 204 connected to the upper case member 201 via the broken part, a lower caulking part 214 connected to the lower case member 211 via the breaking part, and a lower part from the upper caulking part 204 to the lower case member 211. It has a fixing member that is press-fitted into the caulking part 214 and fixing the upper caulking part 204 and the lower caulking part 214.

The upper crimping part 204 includes a first upper crimping part 204a used to first seal the main control board case 200, and a first upper crimping part 204a used to seal the main control board case 200 again after the main control board case 200 is first opened. and a third upper crimping part 204c for resealing the main control board case 200 after the second opening of the main control board case 200. The second upper crimp portion 204b and the third upper crimp portion 204c are arranged side by side in the lateral direction of the main control board case 200.

The lower crimping part 214 includes a first lower crimping part 214a used to first seal the main control board case 200, and a first lower crimping part 214a used to seal the main control board case 200 again after the main control board case 200 is first opened. a second lower crimped part 214b, and a third lower crimped part 214c for resealing the main control board case 200 after the second opening of the main control board case 200; The second lower crimped part 214b and the third lower crimped part are arranged side by side in the lateral direction of the main control board case 200.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), the main management number sticker 208 is a transparent rectangular sticker with a watermark (pattern) to prevent forgery. , a main management information printing section 208b on which management information of the main control device 110A is printed, an opener entry column 208c for entering the person who opened the main control board case 200, and the date of opening of the main control board case 200. an information printing section 208e on which predetermined character information is printed, a line section 208f printed along the outline of the main management number sticker 208, and a main management number. A transparent window portion 208g is provided that allows the rear side of the seal 208 to be seen through.

The opening person entry field 208c is a rectangular white printed area (opaque area) that is long from side to side, and is provided at a position to the left of the vertical center of the main management number sticker 208, and is used to write the opening person first. A first opener entry field 208c1 is provided below the first opener entry field 208c1, and a second opener entry field 208c2 is provided to enter the second opener. The third opening person entry field 208c3 is provided below the second opening person entry field 208c2 with an interval between them, and is used to enter the third opening person.

The opening date entry field 208d is a white printed part (opaque part) on a horizontally long rectangle, and is located to the right of the main management number sticker 208 and to the right of the first opening person entry field 208c1. At the same time, there is a space between the first opening date entry field 208d1 for first entering the opening date, the right side of the second opening date entry field 208c2, and the lower part of the first opening date entry field 208d1. In addition, there is a second opening date entry field 208d2 for entering the opening date, and a second opening date entry field 208d2 on the right side of the third opening person entry field 208c3 and a second opening date entry field 208d2. It has a third opening date entry column 208d3 provided at a spaced interval below and thirdly for entering the opening date.

In this way, the number of crimped parts of the frame crimped part 304A provided in the frame control board case 300 (two) and the number of crimped parts of the main crimped part 204A provided in the main control board case 200 (three). It's different. Therefore, the number of possible opening inspections of the main control device 110A, which is more susceptible to fraud than the frame control device 120A, can be increased, and the security of the gaming machine 1 can be ensured.

Furthermore, the number of fields for opening by the person who opened the package and the field for writing the date of opening provided on the main management number sticker 208 corresponds to the number of crimped parts (three) of the main crimped part 204A provided in the main control board case 200. It has become. Therefore, each time the main control board case 200 is opened, opening information such as the opening person and the opening date can be entered, and the security of the gaming machine 1 can be ensured.

Furthermore, the number of opener entry columns and opening date entry columns provided on the main management number sticker 208 is greater than the number of opener entry columns and opening date entry columns provided on the frame management number sticker 308. The number is increasing. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of entries of opening information for the main control device 110A, which is more prone to fraud than for the slot control device 120A, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine 1.

Although the number of crimped parts of the main crimped part 204A provided in the main control board case 200 is three, it may be greater than three, and the number of crimped parts of the frame crimped part 304A provided in the frame control board case 300 may be increased. The number may be less than the number of copies (two).

Further, although the number of crimped parts of the frame crimped part 304A provided in the frame control board case 300 is two, it may be greater than two, or the number of crimped parts of the main crimped part 204A provided in the main control board case 200 may be more than two. The number may be greater than the number of copies (three).

(Block diagram of entire gaming machine)
Next, a block diagram of the gaming machine 1 and peripheral devices in this embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 26 and 27.

First, the game machine 1 uses game balls (game media) that are used in conventional pachinko game machines, but the game balls are not ejected outside the game machine 1 (into the player's hand) and the game Players cannot touch the game balls as they circulate inside the machine. Therefore, the total number of game balls displayed on the "game ball number display 135" or the "frame control display 125" is recorded by an electromagnetic method (for example, addition by ball lending or prize ball, subtraction by shooting). It is information. In this embodiment, for convenience, the term "payout" of game balls is used, but this does not mean paying out game balls outside the game machine in a conventional pachinko game machine, but refers to the above-mentioned addition. .

This makes it possible to prevent players from bringing game balls into game parlors to play games. In addition, it is possible to prevent illegally acquiring game balls by tampering with the game balls (for example, attaching thread to the game balls, applying oil to the game balls, using game balls of a different size than the specified size, etc.) .

The game balls used in the game machine 1 may be the game balls used in conventional pachinko game machines (game balls that respond to magnets), or game balls that do not respond to magnets (for example, made of stainless steel). May be used. If it is the former, it is possible to reduce the cost of manufacturing new game balls, and if it is the latter, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that is more resistant to fraud. In addition, when using game balls that do not respond to magnets, in order to prevent game balls that respond to magnets from being mixed in, a magnet detector should be placed on the ball path to monitor game balls that respond to magnets. You can.

The main control board 110 centrally controls the progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 includes a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer that includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is equipped with an input port for main control, an output port, etc. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. device), and sends a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the production control board 130 and the like. Further, predetermined information (described later) is transmitted to the frame control board 120.

In this embodiment, "RAM" and "RWM" may be written, but the two terms have the same meaning.

Here, communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is configured so that information can be communicated bidirectionally, and communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is performed from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. It is configured so that information can be communicated only in one direction to the control board 130.

Various SWs, various sensors, frame control board 120, etc. are connected to the input port of the main control board 110, and detection signals etc. from the various SWs and various sensors are sent to the main control board 110 via the input port. When the detection signal is input, control processing is performed according to the detection signal.

The various SWs include a general winning hole detection switch 43a for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the general winning hole 43, a gate detection switch 44a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the regular gate 44, A first starting port detection switch 45a for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the first starting port 45, and a second starting port detection switch 45a for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47. A switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting a game ball that has won (entered a ball) into the big winning opening 50, an out ball detection switch for detecting a gaming ball flowing down the most downstream part of the out ball flow path 39a, RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for clearing the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or updating the setting value at the stage of the gaming advantage (differentiating the gaming advantage); a setting key; The setting key switch 112a is a setting key switch 112a that inputs a signal to change the setting value or to confirm the setting value by operation using the They are a detection sensor 53a and a second magnetic detection sensor 53b.

In this embodiment, the out ball detection switch 39a counts the number of game balls fired by the player. The number of fired balls may be counted by providing a detection switch at the position), or the number of fired balls may be counted by providing a detection switch on the launched ball guide path 38 (the position where a fired ball may become a foul ball after a fired ball is detected). You may. In the case where a detection switch is provided on the launched ball guide path 38, if a foul ball is detected after the launched ball is detected, the launched ball may be added by 1 and then subtracted by 1.

A main information display device 59, various solenoids, an information display 115, a frame control board 120, a performance control board 130, etc. are connected to the output port of the main control board 110. The frame control board 120 outputs a drive control signal for controlling the frame control board 120, outputs a display control signal for controlling various display devices, and transmits predetermined information to the frame control board 120.

The various solenoids are the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b and the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, and the main information display device 59 includes a special symbol display 60, a special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, and a special symbol. They are a reservation display 63, a special symbol reservation display 64, a normal symbol reservation display 65, a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a status confirmation display 68, and the information display 115 is used to display setting values, etc. This is a display (4-digit, 7-segment display) for displaying.

The frame control board 120 functions as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a frame control CPU 120a that performs arithmetic processing, a frame control ROM 120b that stores operation programs of the frame control CPU 120a, and a frame control RAM 120c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It includes a frame control section 120m, an input port for frame control, an output port, and the like. The frame control CPU 120a reads the program stored in the frame control ROM 120b in response to an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the frame control RAM 120c as a work area. and various displays), performs electronic communication (described later) with the main control board 110, and transmits predetermined information (described later) to the dedicated unit 170.

The input port of the frame control board 110 includes a touch sensor 15a that detects when a player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, and a firing volume consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 15b, a ball removal switch 122 that detects that the ball removal button 122b has been operated, an error release switch 123b that detects that the error release button 123b has been operated, and a dedicated unit 170 that is installed in parallel with the gaming machine 1. A rental device connection terminal board 100 for performing subtraction, a launch pad switch 92a for detecting game balls parked on the launch pad, a subtraction entrance switch 91b for detecting game balls flowing down the ball passage unit 94, and a subtraction entrance switch 91b for detecting game balls flowing down the ball passage unit 94. A subtraction port switch 91c for detecting game balls sent to the firing device 95 by the operation of the solenoid 91a, a counting button switch 20a for detecting operation of the counting button 20, and detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4. glass frame open detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the inner frame 3; a radio wave detection sensor 54a, a lifting polishing device 95 for hoisting game balls while polishing them, a game ball number clear switch 121 that detects that the game ball number clear button 121b has been operated, various passage units 93, 94, etc. is connected to the frame control board 120, and when detection signals from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the frame control board 120 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

Note that the glass frame open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 may be turned on when the glass frame 4 is open (in this case, the glass frame open detection switch 31a may be turned ON when an ON input is received). ), or it may be turned ON when the glass frame 4 is closed (in this case, if there is no ON input, it is determined that it is open). The same applies to the inner frame open detection switch 31b.

The various passage units 93 and 94 detect game balls flowing down foul ball passages that allow game balls (foul balls) that have returned without flying into the game area 5a to merge into the ball passage unit 94. A winning ball path (not shown) for detecting game balls (winning balls) flowing down a winning ball path (not shown) that collects and flows down winning game balls from various winning holes provided in the gaming area 5a. A count switch 94a, a non-winning ball for detecting game balls (out balls) flowing down a non-winning ball path (not shown) that collects and flows down game balls that have not entered the various winning holes and have flowed into the out port 39. A passage count switch 94b, a lift switch 94c for detecting the gaming balls lifted by the lifting polishing device 95 at the upstream end of the lifting ball passage, and a lift switch 94c for detecting the gaming balls that have flown down the winning ball passage and the non-winning ball passage. The game balls that have flowed down and the game balls that have flowed down the foul ball path are combined and supplied to the lifting polishing device 95 at the downstream end of a merging passage (not shown) for supplying the ball to the lifting polishing device 95. A lower lift switch 94d for detecting game balls is provided in the midstream part of the lifting ball passageway (downstream part of the lifting upper switch 94b), and game balls waiting in the lifting ball passageway (circulating game balls) An excess sensor 94e is provided downstream of the lifting ball flow path (downstream of the excess sensor 94e) to detect an excess of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifting ball passage. ) is provided with an insufficiency sensor 94f for detecting an insufficiency (insufficiency) of

The output port of the frame control board 120 includes a performance control board 130, a rental device connection terminal board 100, and a firing solenoid for operating a firing mallet (not shown) for firing the game balls parked on the launching pad. 92b, a subtraction solenoid 91a for sending game balls to the firing device 95, a lifting polishing device 95, a game ball number display 135, a frame control display 125, etc. are connected to the firing device 95, and various solenoids are connected to the firing device 95 through the output port. A drive control signal for controlling is outputted, and a display control signal for controlling various display devices is outputted.

Communication between the frame control board 120 and the production control board 130 is configured such that information can be communicated only in one direction from the frame control board 120 to the production control board 130. Thereby, for example, when an error is detected in the frame control board 120, the production control board 130 can notify regarding the error. Note that communication between the frame control board 120 and the production control board 130 may be performed via the main control board 110. That is, the frame control board 120 and the effect control board 130 do not need to be directly connected.

The "game ball number display 135" is a display for displaying the total number of game balls that the player can shoot (hereinafter simply "total number of game balls"), and for example, a 6-digit 7-segment Consists of a display. Note that it may also be used as a display for displaying an error code indicating the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. In this case, in a state where no error has occurred, only the total number of game balls may be displayed, and in a state where an error has occurred, the total number of game balls and the error code may be displayed alternately. Note that the error code display will be described in detail later.

The "frame control display 125" is a display for displaying the total number of game balls, and is composed of, for example, a 6-digit, 7-segment display. For example, if "100" is displayed as the total number of game balls on the "game ball number display 135", the total number of game balls displayed on the "frame control display 125" will also be "100", and if If the total number of game balls cannot be displayed due to a malfunction of the "ball count display 135", the total number of game balls owned by the player can be determined by checking the total number of game balls displayed on the "frame control display 125". (It is responsible for displaying information for insurance purposes in the event of a breakdown.)

It should be noted that it may also be used as a display for displaying an error code indicating the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, or it may be used as a display for displaying an error code indicating the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. It may also be used as a display device to display the calculation process (see "Calculation Process"). In this case, when no error occurs, the total number of game balls and "display performance information (normal base value)" are displayed alternately, and when an error occurs, the total number of game balls and "display performance information (normal base value)" are displayed alternately. The "display performance information (normal base value)" and the error code may be displayed alternately.

The “counting button 20” is a button for transmitting data on the total number of game balls to the dedicated unit 170. The frame control CPU 120a determines whether it is a "short press" or a "long press" depending on the pressing time of the "count button 20". Specifically, if the button is pressed for less than 0.5 seconds, it is determined to be a "short press," and if the button is pressed for 0.5 seconds or more, it is determined to be a "long press."

When the frame control CPU 120a determines that it is a "short press," it counts one game ball, and when it determines that it is a "long press," it counts 250 game balls at a count notification timing every 0.3 seconds. Note that if the total number of game balls is less than 250 (for example, 200), all 200 balls are counted by the "long press" determination. Note that a countable lamp may be provided that is turned on when the count is possible and turned off when the count is not possible.

The "game ball number clear button 121b" is a button for clearing the number of game balls recorded by an electromagnetic method. For example, a game ball may be recorded on the game machine 1 when it is shipped from a manufacturing factory to a game store, or a small number of game balls (for example, one ball) may be recorded on the game machine 1 after it is installed at the game store. It is assumed that players will stop playing in such situations. In such a case, a problem arises in that it is difficult for a new player who wants to start a game to play (this may give the misunderstanding that the previous player may be playing a game). In order to solve this problem, by turning on the power switch 164 while pressing down the number of game balls clear button 121b, the recorded game balls can be cleared.

Note that the game ball count clearing process may be performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), or in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), the (game ball count clear button) Even if 121b is pressed), the game ball count clearing process may not be performed. In addition, if the game ball count clearing process is performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game balls have been cleared will be sent from the gaming machine 1. Alternatively, if no game balls are recorded (0 balls), the number of game balls may be sent to the gaming machine information center (even if the number of game balls clear button 121b is pressed). If the clearing process is not to be performed, it may be possible to prevent the gaming machine 1 from transmitting "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game ball has been cleared. If the game ball count clearing process is performed in a situation where no game balls are recorded (0 balls), the control related to clearing the game ball number can be made uniform regardless of the recording status of game balls. The load can be reduced. On the other hand, if the game ball count is not recorded (0 balls), if you want to prevent the game ball count clearing process from being performed (even if the game ball count clear button 121b is pressed), you should clear the game ball count clear button 121b. It is possible to prevent the game ball count clearing process (meaningless process) from being performed even though there are no game balls.

When the recorded game balls are cleared, a notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is provided by audio output under the control of the audio control section 148, display control under the control of the image control section 145, and light emission control under the control of the lamp control section 150. I do. Note that the notification will be detailed later.

Further, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game ball has been cleared is finally transmitted from the gaming machine 1 to the gaming machine information center. As a result, the game machine information center can also know that the number of game balls has been cleared on the game machine 1.

Note that the number of game balls is cleared only when the power switch 164 is turned on while pressing the number of game ball clear button 121b. That is, even if the "game ball number clear button 121b" is pressed while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1, the number of game balls will not be cleared. In this case, the state of the gaming machine 1 does not change, and no notification is given by sound, display, or light emission. For example, even if the "game ball count clear button 121b" is pressed during execution of the variable display, the variable display continues, and the audio output, display control, and light emission control corresponding to the variable display are continued. Thereby, even if the game clerk accidentally presses the "game ball count clear button 121b" during the variable display, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

Further, the "game ball number clear button 121b" is a button used to clear the number of game balls, and has no other functions. For example, the error cannot be canceled by operating the button, the game ball cannot be ejected (rejected) from the gaming machine 1 by operating the button, and the main RAM 110c and frame cannot be removed by operating the button. Control RAM 120c cannot be initialized.

The "ball removal button 122b" is a button for ejecting a game ball to the outside of the gaming machine 1. Although game balls are not touched by players' hands, regular inspection, cleaning, or replacement is recommended. In such a case, by turning on the power switch 164 while pressing the ball removal button 122b, the game ball can be ejected from the gaming machine 1.

When a game ball is being ejected to the outside of the gaming machine 1, an audio notification under the control of the audio control section 148 and a screen notification under the control of the image control section 145 notify that the ball removal mode is in progress. Note that the notification will be detailed later.

Note that the game balls are ejected to the outside of the game machine 1 only when the power switch 164 is turned on while pressing the ball removal button 122b. That is, even if the "ball ejection button 122b" is pressed while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1, the gaming balls will not be ejected outside the gaming machine 1. In this case, the state of the gaming machine 1 does not change, and no notification is given by voice or display. For example, even if the "bulb removal button 122b" is pressed during execution of the variable display, the variable display continues, and the audio output, display control, and light emission control corresponding to the variable display continue. This prevents the player from suffering any disadvantages even if, for example, the game store clerk accidentally presses the "ball removal button 122b" during the variable display.

Further, the "ball removal button 122b" is a button used to eject the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine 1, and has no other function. For example, the error cannot be canceled by operating the button, the number of game balls cannot be cleared by operating the button, and the main RAM 110c and frame control RAM 120c cannot be initialized by operating the button. .

When the glass frame open detection switch 31a detects that the glass frame 4 is opened, the game ball cannot be launched by operating the launch handle 15. Similarly, when the inner frame opening detection switch 31b detects the opening of the inner frame 3, it becomes impossible to shoot the game ball by operating the shooting handle 15. This prevents the game balls circulating inside the game machine from jumping out of the game machine and causing a disadvantage to the player due to not being able to secure (circulating) game balls necessary for the game. Note that the game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, 45 game balls.

In addition, in order to make it easier to win a prize in each winning hole, a small ball detection switch (or sensor) may be provided in order to prevent fraud using game balls smaller than the specified size.

The dedicated unit 170 includes a U (unit) board 171, a U (unit) control section 172, a hall control output section 173, and a display section (touch panel) 174.

The U board 171 and the rental device connection terminal board 100 of the frame control board 120 are electrically connected by dedicated PIF wiring, and the U board 171 and the frame control board 120 are connected to "predetermined information" (described later). communication is possible. Note that the rental device connection terminal board 100 can be used in common for a pachinko game machine that uses game balls (the game machine 1 of this embodiment) and a medalless drum-type game machine. For example, when using a pachinko game machine, operate the switch SW to select the pachinko game machine, and when using a medalless reel-type game machine, operate the switch SW to select the medal-less reel-type game machine. do.

The U board 171 has a function (security function) of encrypting and transmitting the predetermined information received from the frame control board 120 in order to finally send the predetermined information to the gaming machine information center (described later). . Furthermore, when the predetermined information received from the gaming machine information center is finally sent to the frame control board 120, it has a function (security function) of decoding and transmitting the predetermined information.

The U control unit 172 includes a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores programs and control data for the CPU to operate, and a RAM (not shown) that functions as a work area. .

The U control unit 172 has a function of reading and storing the card ID of the inserted member card or visitor card, and has a function of transmitting the stored card ID to the management computer. Upon receiving the card ID, the management computer transmits the card ID to a card company data center (described later) and a gaming machine information center.

The U control unit 172 has a function of storing game balls (held balls) owned by the player while the player is playing a game, displays the balls held on the display unit (touch panel) 174, and displays banknotes. If it is inserted, it has a function of displaying the remaining amount on the display section (touch panel) 174.

In addition to displaying the balls held and the remaining amount, the display unit (touch panel) 174 can display a ball rental button image for renting game balls and a return button image for returning a membership card or visitor card. The U control unit 172 can input an operation signal when the ball lending button image is operated by the player, and can input an operation signal when the return button image is operated by the player. When these operation signals are input, processing corresponding to the operation signals (ball rental, return) is performed. Further, the display unit (touch panel) 174 can display an error code, which will be described later. This will be discussed later.

Note that although the display section (touch panel) 174 displays the ball lending button image and the return button image so that the player can operate them, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the gaming machine 1 may be provided with a ball lending button and a return button.

While the membership card is inserted, the U control unit 172 can count and store the gaming time and the number of games played (for example, the number of visits to the gaming parlor), and can also count and store the number of gaming media stored in the membership card. It is possible to store information such as the amount of money spent on games and the number of gaming media used for games. The stored information is finally transmitted to the gaming machine information center and stored in the addiction countermeasure server of the gaming machine information center (used for countermeasures against player's gaming addiction).

The U control unit 172 includes a hole-con output section 173, which outputs hole-con information (for example, information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high-probability game is in progress, Information indicating that the variable time reduction function is in operation, information indicating the number of winning balls in each winning hole, etc.) are output. The Hall controller output section 173 includes an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1, an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 2, an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3, and an external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 4.

The hall computer is a dedicated computer installed in a gaming parlor, is communicably connected to the gaming machine 1 via a relay device, etc., and is a device capable of collecting hall player information.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an effect control unit 130m, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), third image display device 72 (left image display device), fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc. An image control unit 145 that controls the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the board drive device 75, the board lighting device 76, etc., and a lamp control unit 150 that controls the display control input port, output port, etc. ing.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby processing commands received from the main control board 110. Controls various control units (image control unit 145, lamp control unit 150) to execute various effects (outputs data and commands) according to input signals from the display button detection switch 17a and joystick detection switch 19a. do).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a joystick detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), etc. are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. In the production control board 130, a production button detection signal indicating that the production button 17 has been operated is input from the production button detection switch 17a, and a joystick detection signal (upper) indicating that the joystick 19 has been operated is input from the joystick detection switch 19a. When a button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The image control unit 145 receives the command from the production control unit 130m, and displays the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and the third image display device 72 ( The fourth image display device 73 (left image display device) and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) are controlled to display a predetermined image.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m. Audio data and music data (BGM, SE) etc. are output from the audio output device 9.

In addition, between the production control section 130m, the image control section 145, and the audio control section 148, there is a general control section that collectively controls image display and audio output based on reception of production control commands from the production control section 130m. (not shown), and the image control unit 145 reads out a CGROM (not shown) in which image data etc. are stored based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the central control unit. The audio control unit 148 controls the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72 (left side image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right side image display device). , reads out the audio ROM in which audio data etc. are stored and controls the audio output device 9 based on the reception of the audio control command from the general control unit.

The VRAM (not shown) provided in the image control unit 145 is a display list storage area that temporarily stores the display list output from the overall control unit (main CPU), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , and frame buffer areas corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), etc. have.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM in the “drawing frame buffer” of the frame buffer area of the VRAM based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit, and The drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer", a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), a third image display device 72 (left image display device), and a fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) to display various images.

Note that the image control unit 145 is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by frequency-dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 ( Generates synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) display device). In this embodiment, the frame rate of VDP is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second; (image display) may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU (not shown) that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM (not shown) in which a lamp control program is stored, a lamp RAM (not shown) that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and a lamp CPU (not shown) that performs calculation processing. Equipped with output ports, etc.

The lamp CPU receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM as a work area. In response to performance instruction commands and the like, control is performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined performances (data and commands are output).

A frame lighting device 10, a button driving device 17b, a board driving device 75, a board lighting device 76, and a sub-information display device 80 are connected to the input/output port of the lamp control section, and the production control section 130m Based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the (sub CPU 130a), various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, board drive device 75, board lighting device 76, and sub information display device 80 are lit. It also performs drive control of drive sources such as the button drive device 17b and the motor and solenoid of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and supplies the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120, production control (substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power outage detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power outage (power outage). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 during a power outage (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120, production control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch 164 is provided so as to be operable by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch 164 is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch 164 is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a becomes operational when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, and the main CPU 110a enters an operational state when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores power when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 and frame control. It is supplied to the frame control RAM 120c of the board 120. As a result, even in the event of a power outage (power outage), the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and frame control RAM 120c are retained, and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the game control status and the number of game balls owned by the player (gaming value) can be restored to the state before the power cut (power outage). Note that backup power may be supplied to the production control board 130.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to the special game determination (jackpot determination) include a "low probability game state" and the "high probability game state", and the state related to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 is "non-time-saving game". ``state'' and ``time-saving gaming state.'' Therefore, in this embodiment,
(1) “Low probability non-time-saving gaming state” which is a low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state;
(2) “Low-probability time-saving gaming state” which is a low-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state;
(3) A "high-probability time-saving game state" is provided, which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "low-probability, non-time-saving gaming state," and this gaming state will be referred to as a "normal gaming state" in this embodiment. In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot game will also be set to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state", but it will be a different gaming state from the normal gaming state.

Here, the "low probability gaming state" means, for example, when the set value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the advantage of the game, is "1", the first starting port 45 or the second starting port In a special game determination (jackpot determination) performed on the condition that a game ball enters the opening 47, it is a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set as low as about 1/300.

On the other hand, "high probability gaming state" means that when the setting value is "1", the probability of winning the jackpot is set as high as approximately 1/60, and the player is more likely to win than in the low probability gaming state. A gaming state that is advantageous to Note that the transition from the low probability gaming state to the high probability gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, the "non-time-saving gaming state" means that in the auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the winning probability of winning is set as low as 1/16, and it is normal. This refers to a gaming state in which the average time of fluctuating symbol display is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 in the event of a winning is set to 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, in the "time saving gaming state" (fluctuation time reduction function operating state), the winning probability is set as high as 15/16, the average time of fluctuating display of normal symbols is set to about 3 seconds, and This is a game state advantageous to the player in which the consumption of game balls is suppressed compared to the non-time-saving game state by setting the opening time of the second starting port 47 to 5 seconds when a winning is won. Note that the transition from the non-time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the "time-saving gaming state" is set to be more advantageous than the "non-time-saving gaming state" in terms of the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of winning the winning lottery. , the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery may be set to be advantageous.

In addition, the probability of winning in the auxiliary game judgment in the non-time-saving gaming state does not change depending on the setting value and remains the same, but it is changed depending on the setting value so that the larger the setting value is, the more advantageous the winning probability becomes. Good too. In addition, the probability of winning in the auxiliary game judgment in the time-saving gaming state remains the same regardless of the setting value, but it is changed depending on the setting value so that the larger the setting value is, the more advantageous the winning probability becomes. Good too.

(Memory map of main control section and frame control section)
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a memory map of a memory area consisting of the main ROM 110b and main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m, and a memory map of a memory area consisting of the frame control ROM 120b and frame control RAM 120c of the frame control unit 120m.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area (8000H to FFFFH) allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory area of the main ROM 110b is a gaming ROM area (8000H to 9FFFH) where programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information area where programs and data related to the acquisition limit device (described later) of the gaming machine are stored. ROM area (A000H to A52EH), unused area of 16 bytes or more (A52FH to A6FFH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and ROM comments where data such as program title and version are stored. area (A700H to A77FH), a vector table area (A780H to A7A7H) where the start address of timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later, are set, and HW parameters where parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set. Areas (A7A8H to A7FFFH) are arranged in order.

The gaming ROM area includes a gaming program area (8000H to 8BDCH) where programs related to the progress of the game are stored, and a first unused area (8BDDH to 8FFFH) where access is prohibited and where "0" is stored. ), a game data area (9000H to 9976H) where data related to the progress of the game is stored, and a second unused area (9977H to 9FFFH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored. It is located.

The information ROM area consists of an information program area (A000H to A437H) where the program related to the acquisition limit device of the gaming machine is stored, and an unused area (A438H to A47FH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored. ) and an information data area (A480H to A52EH) in which data related to the acquisition upper limit device of the gaming machine are stored are arranged in this order.

The memory area of the main RAM 110c includes a gaming RWM area (0000H to 018FH) used as a work area when executing a gaming program, and an information RWM area used as a work area when executing an information program. (0190H to 01FFH) are arranged in order.

The gaming RWM area includes a gaming work area (0000H to 0128H) used by the gaming program as work, and a first unused area (0129H to 0171H) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored. A gaming stack area (0172H to 017FH) for temporarily saving data being processed by a gaming program, and a second unused area (0180H to 018FH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored. ) are arranged in order.

The gaming work area includes a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum to be described later) for judging abnormalities in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes as the game progresses. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area (0190H to 01E8H) used by the information program as work, an unused area (01E9H to 01EAH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the information program. Information stack areas (01EBH to 01FFH) for temporarily saving data being processed are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a game media acquisition information area for storing information regarding the upper limit of acquisition of game media for the gaming machine 1, and an error information area for storing information regarding various error determinations are arranged in this order. There is.

Note that the memory map of the memory area consisting of the frame control ROM 120b and the frame control RAM 120c of the frame control unit 120m is configured in the same manner, so a description thereof will be omitted. The main control section 110m, main ROM 110b, and main RAM 110c may be replaced with the frame control section 120m, frame control ROM 120b, and frame control RAM 120c, respectively.

(Relationship between gaming area and information area)
FIG. 29 shows a gaming area (gaming ROM area, gaming RWM area) that performs processing based on a gaming program, and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on an information program. FIG. Note that FIG. 29 is common to the main control section 110m and the frame control section 120m.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), when performing processing based on a gaming program, the main CPU 110a basically refers to the gaming data area and uses the gaming RWM area as a work. The contents of the RWM area are referenced and updated. Additionally, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referenced, and the contents of the information RWM area are referenced and updated while using the information RWM area as work. ing.

However, in the processing based on the gaming program, although the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, they can be referenced. Furthermore, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the gaming RWM area cannot be updated, but they can be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), when performing processing based on the information program, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area in the processing based on the gaming program, and then the information program is called and Processing based on the program is executed, and the flag register is returned from the gaming RWM area immediately after the processing based on the information program is completed and the gaming program is returned.

In addition, immediately after starting the information program, the stack pointer of the gaming stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all registers used in the gaming program are transferred to the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program immediately before the end of the information program are restored from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, it is possible to protect the data used by the gaming program when performing processing based on the information program, and prevent inconveniences from occurring when returning from the information program to the gaming program. Things will go away.

(system configuration diagram)
FIG. 30 is a system configuration diagram (overall schematic diagram) of the gaming machine 1 and peripheral devices.

A combination of a gaming machine 1 and a dedicated unit 170 installed in parallel with the gaming machine 1 is installed in the gaming parlor, and games can be played by connecting the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170. Furthermore, a hall computer and a management computer are installed in the office of the game parlor.

When the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are not connected, or when the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are connected but the dedicated unit 170 is powered off, the count button 20 is operated. Counting of game balls and firing of game balls by operating the firing handle 15 become impossible.

The management computer is communicably connected to a card company data center, and the card company data center is communicably connected to a gaming machine information center.

The gaming machine information center is equipped with a machine history server, a fraud monitoring server, a performance information server, and a dependency countermeasure server. It is also communicably connected to an association (Nikkogumi) to which a plurality of pachinko machine manufacturers belong, an anti-addiction organization, and a card company organization. Furthermore, the gaming machine information center is capable of collecting (integrated management) the information described below from all the gaming parlors where gaming machines 1 are installed.

Next, the details and flow of information (the above-mentioned "predetermined information") and the flow of objects will be explained.
Of the information transmitted from the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120), information to be sent to the gaming machine information center is encrypted by the U board 171. The encrypted and transmitted information can only be decrypted by the gaming machine information center. As a result, the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" included in the information transmitted from the gaming machine 1 become information that cannot be known by a third party. This can make it difficult to obtain information on the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number". As a result, the information on the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" is fraudulently obtained, and the obtained information is installed on the fraudulent main control board 110 or frame control board 120. It is possible to prevent the act of being installed in a game parlor.

When the lending button for game media provided in the dedicated unit 170 is operated, a "ball lending signal" is transmitted in the flow of the dedicated unit 170 -> the lending device connection terminal board 100 -> the frame control board 120 ((1) in the figure). )). When the "ball rental signal" is input, the frame control board 120 updates the number of game balls (gaming value amount) owned by the player displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125.

When the counting button 20 is operated by the player, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player displayed on the game ball number display 135 is displayed on the number of game balls (playing value) owned by the player, and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is displayed on the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135. In order to store it in the storage medium, "counting information" is transmitted in the flow of frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 ((2) in the figure). When the dedicated unit 170 inputs the "count information", it stores the number of game balls (game value) in a storage medium such as a membership card or a visitor card (prepaid card). Note that the number of game balls (game value) may be stored in the hall computer in association with the identification information of the member card or visitor card.

When power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, the flow is as follows: main control board 110 → frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center The "gaming machine installation information" is transmitted ((2), (4), and (7) in the figure).

"Game machine installation information" refers to the "main control chip manufacturer code", "main control chip product code", "main control chip ID number" (serial number) attached to the main control unit 110m, and the frame control There are a total of six pieces of information attached to the section 120m: "frame control chip maker code", "frame control chip product code", and "frame control chip ID number" (serial number). The "gaming machine installation information" will be explained in more detail later.

After power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, when it becomes possible to play (a state in which all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main processing described below), the main control board 110→ "HC/fraud monitoring information" is transmitted in the flow of frame control board 120 → rental device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center ((2) and (4) in the figure) (7)).

"HC/fraud monitoring information (hole con/fraud monitoring information)" is information that mainly indicates the status of the gaming machine 1, such as information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high probability game is in progress, , information indicating an error occurring in the gaming machine 1, information indicating fraud occurring in the gaming machine 1, various winning openings (first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, general winning opening 43, Examples include information indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the grand prize opening 50). Note that "HC/fraud monitoring information" will be explained in more detail later.

After power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, when it becomes possible to play (a state in which all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main process described below), the frame control board 120→ "Gaming machine performance information" is transmitted in the flow of rental device connection terminal board 100→dedicated unit 170→management computer→card company data center→gaming machine information center ((2), (4), and (7) in the figure).

"Game machine performance information" is mainly information related to the balls put out by the game machine 1, such as information indicating the total number of game balls fired, information indicating the total number of game balls acquired, and information indicating the total number of game balls won. Examples include information showing the object ratio, information showing the continuous winning object ratio, and information showing the maximum payout. The "gaming machine performance information" will be explained in more detail later.

When a membership card owned by a player is inserted, "player information related to addiction countermeasures" is transmitted in the flow of: dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center (addiction countermeasure server) ( (4)(7)) in the figure.

"Player information related to addiction countermeasures" refers to player information stored on the membership card, gaming media information stored on the membership card, information indicating playing time, and number of games played (for example, the number of games played (for example, the number of games played) Examples include information indicating the number of times played, information indicating the amount of money spent on the game, and information on the game media used for the game. When the game machine information center (addiction countermeasure server) receives the information, it updates the player information corresponding to the information. In this way, by acquiring and managing "player information related to addiction countermeasures," it is possible to prevent players from becoming too absorbed in games.

The dedicated unit 170 is equipped with an output terminal (not shown) for outputting to the hall computer, and outputs "hall control information" based on "HC/fraud monitoring information" from the output terminal ((3) in the figure). )). "Hole con information" includes information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high probability game is in progress, information indicating that a variable time reduction function is in operation, information indicating the number of winning balls in each winning hole, and the like.

When a visitor card (prepaid card) is inserted into the dedicated unit 170, "prepaid card information" is transmitted in the flow from the dedicated unit 170 to the management computer to the card company data center ((4) and (6) in the figure). The card company data center collects the received "prepaid card information" and can check, for example, whether an unregistered visitor card (prepaid card) is in circulation.

The gaming machine information center accumulates the received "gaming machine installation information", "HC/fraud monitoring information", and "gaming machine performance information" on the server, determines whether there is an abnormality, and sends the "verification/security results". It is transmitted in the flow of gaming machine information center→management computer→dedicated unit 170 ((8) and (5) in the figure).

The gaming machine information center has a "machine history server," "fraud monitoring server," "performance information server," and "addiction countermeasure server," and is equipped with a "main control chip" from a gaming machine management control chip supplier. The "frame control chip" is supplied to each gaming machine maker ((12) in the figure), and when the gaming machine is manufactured by each gaming machine maker (ready to be shipped), the above-mentioned information is stored in the "machine history server". "Main control chip manufacturer code", "Main control chip product code", "Main control chip ID number" (serial number), "Frame control chip manufacturer code", "Frame control chip product code", "Frame control chip ID" Registration of installation information such as "serial number" (serial number) and shipping information such as shipping date and time ((11) in the diagram) is completed, and when the registration is completed, each gaming machine manufacturer will ship the gaming machine to the gaming parlor. .

Similarly, when the U board is manufactured by the U board manufacturing company (it becomes ready for shipping), the gaming machine information center registers the manufacturing information of the U board (for example, registering the serial number) on the "fraud monitoring server". , and the installation information is registered ((10) in the figure), and when the registration is completed, the U-board manufacturing company ships the U-board to the dedicated unit manufacturing company ((9) in the figure).

As a result, when a gaming machine is installed at a gaming parlor and "gaming machine installation information" is received, it is checked against the shipping information registered in the "machine history server" and the gaming machine installed at the gaming parlor is checked. It is now possible to determine whether the machine's "main control chip" and "frame control chip" are legitimate (determine whether there is an abnormality).

Note that the U board 171 puts the gaming machine 1 into a playable state if the "verification/security result" is normal, but if the "verification/security result" is abnormal, the gaming machine 1 can be rendered unplayable. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 from being replaced with fraudulent ones and attempting to fraudulently obtain balls.

In addition to registering the above-mentioned installation information and shipping information, the "machine history server" also stores used movement information when a gaming machine is moved between gaming parlors, and disposal information when a gaming machine is discarded. This allows for detailed tracking of gaming machines from the time they are installed at a game parlor until they are disposed of. This can help prevent illegal dumping of gaming machines.

In addition to registering the manufacturing information and installation information of the U board mentioned above, the "fraud monitoring server" also generates "security result information" indicating the "verification/security results" mentioned above, and prevents falsification of "security result information". In order to prevent this from happening, an "encryption key/communication key" is generated. This can prevent the "security result information" from being tampered with in the process (8) in the figure.

Further, the "fraud monitoring server" stores fraud/error information that occurs in the gaming machine 1. For example, if a magnet detection error occurs in gaming machine 1, by receiving the error code corresponding to the magnet detection error and "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating a fraud detection signal, gaming machine 1 detects a magnet. It is designed to remember that an error has been detected.

The "performance information server" displays the "display performance information (normal base value)" calculated by the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 and displayed on the frame control display 125, and the "display performance information (normal base value)" calculated by the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1. and stores gaming machine performance information etc. that are not displayed on the frame control display 125.

Furthermore, the information stored in the "machine history server," "fraud monitoring server," and "performance information server" is sent to an association (Nikkogumi) to which a plurality of gaming machine manufacturers belong. As a result, the gaming machine 1 is placed under the control of the gaming machine information center and the Nikko Group, and for this reason is also called a "managed gaming machine."

The ``addiction prevention server'' stores the membership number, playing time, amount spent, and number of games played for each player who is registered as a member, and the stored information is sent to the ``addiction prevention organization.'' It is set to be sent. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that if any of the playing time, amount of money spent, and number of games exceeds a specified value, the game becomes impossible.

Furthermore, in the transmission and reception of each of the above-mentioned information, it is preferable that the sending side records the sending date and time, and the receiving side is configured to be able to record the receiving date and time. With this configuration, for example, when the gaming machine information center receives a "settings changing signal" or "RWM clear signal" (HC/fraud monitoring information), it is possible to check whether the reception time is during the gaming parlor's business hours. It is also possible to check whether it is outside business hours, and to monitor whether "setting changes" or "RWM clear" are being performed during business hours.

(Flow of information transmission)
FIG. 31 is a diagram specifically explaining the flow of information transmission and reception described in FIG. 30.

First, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, a "verification phase" begins. In the "verification phase," the main control board 110 sends the "main control chip ID number" to the frame control board 120, and the frame control board 120 sends the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" to the U board 171. The U board 171 encrypts the information related to the "main control chip ID number" and the "frame control chip ID number."

Then, information related to the encrypted "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" is transmitted to the gaming machine information center via the U control unit 172, the management computer, and the card company data center. .

When the gaming machine information center receives the encrypted information regarding the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number," it decrypts it and checks it against the installation information stored in the machine history server. Then, the presence or absence of an abnormality described above is determined.

Then, "security result information" indicating the "verification/security result" is generated, encrypted, and transmitted to the U board 171 via the card company data center, management computer, and U control unit 172.

When the U board 171 receives the "security result information", it decodes it and checks whether there is an abnormality as described above. If there is no abnormality, the ``verification phase'' is ended and the process moves to the ``status communication phase,'' and if there is an abnormality, the game machine 1 is placed in a non-gaming state without moving to the ``status communication phase.''

In the "status communication phase", first, when a player takes a seat to play the game machine 1, inserts valuables (banknotes or a membership card storing game media), and operates the lending button, the user The control unit 172 transmits the number of rental balls (for example, 125 balls) corresponding to one press of the rental button to the U board 171, and furthermore, the number of rental balls corresponding to one press of the rental button is transmitted from the U board 171 to the frame control board 120. number (for example, 125 balls) is transmitted.

When the frame control board 120 receives the number of rental balls (for example, 125 balls), it displays the number of rental balls (for example, 125 balls) on the game ball number display 135. Thereby, when the firing handle 15 is rotated, it becomes possible to launch a game ball into the game area 5a.

When the counting button 20 is operated with the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 as a result of a game, the counted number of balls is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171. be done. For example, when the count button 20 is operated when the number of game balls 1000 is displayed on the game ball number display 135, "1000" is transmitted as the counted number of balls.

Similarly, the number of pitches counted is transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. When the U control unit 172 receives the counted number of pitches, it stores the counted number of pitches in the membership card or visitor card.

When the U control unit 172 finishes storing the number of balls counted on the member card or visitor card, it is possible to return the member card or visitor card to the player. In other words, when the return button image on the display section 174 is operated after the number of pitches has been memorized, the membership card or visitor card can be returned to the player. On the other hand, even if the return button image on the display section 174 is operated in a state where the number of pitches has not been memorized (in the middle of memorization or not memorized at all), the membership card or visitor card is not returned to the player. It looks like this. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from leaving the game machine 1 (or leaving the store) with game balls remaining in the game machine 1.

When the return button image on the display section 174 is operated before the number of pitches counted has yet to be memorized, the U control section 172 displays a message on the display section 174 prompting counting, for example, "Press the counting button 20 to start counting." "Please go" message is displayed. Thereby, the operating method can be made easier to understand for players who are unfamiliar with the game.

Note that the notification to prompt counting is not limited to display, and may be made by sound, lamp, or a combination of these. Alternatively, the gaming machine 1 may provide the notification. Thereby, the operating method can be made easier to understand.

The number of game balls owned by the player (gaming value amount) displayed on the game ball number display 135 is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 every 300 ms as "HC/fraud monitoring information", and It is transmitted from the board 171 to the U control section 172. Thereby, the dedicated unit 170 can also grasp the number of game balls owned by the player.

The number of game balls fired in the game machine 1 (for example, game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 every 300 ms as "HC/fraud monitoring information", and further , is transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. Thereby, the dedicated unit 170 can also grasp the number of game balls fired by the player.

The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls in each winning hole (general winning hole 43, starting hole 45, 47, big winning hole 50) in the gaming machine 1 is determined by "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring)". Information)" is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. Furthermore, "HC/fraud monitoring information" is sent from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 every 300 ms. It is transmitted from the U control unit 172. Thereby, the dedicated unit 170 can also grasp the number of prize balls generated in the gaming machine 1.

The dedicated unit 170 displays the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135, the number of game balls fired at the game machine 1, and the prizes obtained by placing game balls in each winning slot on the game machine 1. By acquiring the number of balls, for example, even if the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 is falsified, the number of game balls fired and the number of prize balls, which are obtained separately, can be checked. From the information, it can be determined that the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 is not regular.

The frame control board 120 periodically transmits "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)", and the dedicated unit 170 transmits "hole control information" based on the "HC/fraud monitoring information". Thereby, the state of the gaming machine 1 (during a jackpot game, in a high probability game state, in a variable time reduction function operating state, and the number of winning balls in each winning hole) can be grasped in the hall computer.

The frame control board 120 transmits "gaming machine performance information" to the U board 171, and upon receiving the "gaming machine performance information", the U board 171 encrypts it and sends it to the U control unit 172, the management computer, It is sent to the gaming machine information center via the card company data center. As a result, in the game machine information center, for example, information indicating the total number of game balls fired, information indicating the total number of game balls acquired, information indicating the accessory ratio, and information indicating the consecutive accessory ratio. You can grasp information such as information and information indicating the maximum ball payout.

When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 transmits "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120 (installation information notification), and the frame control board 120 sends "gaming machine installation information" to the U board 171. , "gaming machine installation information" is transmitted every 300ms (installation information). Then, the "gaming machine installation information" is encrypted on the U board 171 and finally transmitted to the gaming machine information center. Thereby, the gaming machine information center can also periodically receive the "gaming machine installation information", and can constantly monitor whether the regular main control board 110 and frame control board 120 are installed.

The main control board 110 transmits "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. As will be described later, "HC/fraud monitoring information" includes "main control state 1", "main control state 2", "gaming machine error state", "fraud detection state 1", etc. For example, information regarding an error detected by the main control board 110 or an error detected by the frame control board 120 is also periodically transmitted in the "gaming machine error state" (error notification). The U board 171 encrypts the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (error notification) received from the main control board 110 and frame control board 120, and finally sends it to the gaming machine information center. Information regarding the error is also transmitted to the management computer of the game parlor. As a result, the gaming machine information center can also periodically receive information related to errors that occur in gaming machines, and can constantly monitor errors that occur in the main control board 110 and frame control board 120. Furthermore, since the management computer can also receive information related to errors that occur in gaming machines, game parlors can quickly grasp information related to errors, and can promptly resolve errors. . Note that the same flow applies to the "fraud information" transmitted in the "fraud detection state 1".

Furthermore, in "main control state 1" and "main control state 2", for example, the state of the gaming machine (during jackpot, in high probability gaming state) is periodically transmitted. Then, on the U board 171, the HC/fraud monitoring information is encrypted and finally sent to the gaming machine information center.As a result, the gaming machine information center also periodically receives the gaming machine status. For example, if information indicating that a jackpot is in progress is frequently received, it is possible to know that there is a possibility of fraud.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35.

(Jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 32(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , FIG. 32(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and (b), the jackpot judgment table corresponds to the current setting value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot judgment, and the jackpot judgment result (jackpot, loss). As a reference, the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" is listed in the far right column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 32(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 32(b), and determines the current set value, probability state, and jackpot. Based on the random number value for determination, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 32(a), when the set value is "1" and the normal gaming state is, 200 jackpots of "100" to "299" will be won. The random number value for determination is determined to be a "jackpot". Then, random numbers for jackpot determination other than those determined to be jackpots are determined to be "losses".

In addition, although the jackpot determination table of this embodiment uses four stages of setting values, it is not limited to this, and six stages of setting values may be used, or two stages of setting values may be used. , one-level setting values may be used, or the setting function may not be installed.

In addition, the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c, The special figure determination information acquired based on the winning is stored in the second special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when making a jackpot determination, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information retention storage area or the second special symbol determination information retention storage area is shifted to the special symbol determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , jackpot determination will be performed using the shifted special figure determination information.

In addition, the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part, and the reservation corresponding to the special figure judgment information stored in these first storage part to fourth storage part is divided into the first to fourth storage parts. The icons are displayed on the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special figure determination information reservation storage area is divided into first to fourth storage sections, and the reservation icons corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first to fourth storage sections are They are displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 33(a) is a special symbol determination table for jackpot for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 33(b) is a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined. This is a special symbol determination table for losing to determine the type.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the information corresponding to the determination result. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result are associated.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which a jackpot game is not executed. Special symbols "01" and "04" are special jackpot symbols that execute the first jackpot game, and special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot symbols that execute the second jackpot game. , special symbols "03" and "06" are jackpot symbols for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to six times. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed. Further, after the first jackpot game ends, the low-probability non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. Furthermore, after the second jackpot game ends, the high accuracy time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game in which the second jackpot 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the jackpot is closed for two seconds is executed up to four times. Furthermore, after the third jackpot game ends, the highly accurate time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Although one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of losing special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 33(a) to 33(b), and determines the type of special symbol based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random value for special symbol determination. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the type of jackpot special symbol and the type of loss special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player can play the game with peace of mind without having complicated gameplay.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 34(a) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time saving states for determining the variation pattern of special symbols in non-time saving states, and FIG. 34(b) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table in non-time saving states. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 34, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening) that performs variable display, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and the reach determination Random value, first special figure reservation number (U1) or second special figure reservation number (U2), random value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, special symbol fluctuation time and a special figure variation pattern designation command indicating a special figure variation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be one that can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 Determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern based on the number of special pattern reservations (U2) and the random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination, and send the special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command according to the special pattern fluctuation pattern to the production control board 130 It looks like this.

In addition, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbols 70a, in accordance with the fluctuation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.), as will be described later. Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34, the production contents that can be executed with the variation production are described for reference.

As for the production contents shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34, "normal variation", "shortened variation", "ultra shortened variation", and "long variation" are the three production symbols 70a that vary at high speed apart. , which means stopping without reaching.

In addition, "reach" means that the player expects a jackpot game to be executed in which a part of the combination of presentation symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other presentation symbols 70a change. means the manner in which it changes. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot, the same performance symbols 70a in the left and right regions temporarily stop at "7". , refers to a mode in which the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (not completely stopped). refers to the manner in which the

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a changes in the center area, and the expectation level of jackpot is the lowest. This is a reach production.

Moreover, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects that have a higher expectation of a jackpot than normal reach effects, and are performed after the normal reach effect and the extended effect. For example, the two performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used to perform a special reach performance. . Note that in the "Special SP Reach", a more special effect than in the "SP Reach" is executed.

Furthermore, "SPSP reach" and "SPSP '7' reach" are special reach performances that have higher expectations for a jackpot than super reach performances, and are executed after the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. For example, a normal reach performance is performed to a development performance, and then the three performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to a corner of the first image display device 70, using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is designed to perform a special reach effect than "SP reach". In addition, in "SPSP reach", a reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP "7" reach", a reach effect is performed with a pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after the normal reach effect. For example, a development effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and change at a low speed, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is designed to have a special reach effect (reach effect that guarantees a jackpot) than "SPSP '7' Reach".

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the type of special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discern the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

A second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discern the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The third feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that when the number of reserved first special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during a non-time saving state, shortening fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. On the other hand, even if the second special symbol reservation number increases to 2 or 3 during the non-time saving state, the shortening variation is not determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of special symbols when hitting left than when hitting right in a non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The fourth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that even if the number of reserved first special symbols increases from 1 to 3 during the time saving state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is (super) shortened. While the fluctuation is not determined, when the second special symbol reservation number increases from 1 to 3 during the time saving state, the (long) shortening fluctuation becomes easier to be determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of special symbols when hitting right than when hitting left in the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 35(a) is a preliminary judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (pre-reading) the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 during the non-time-saving state. , FIG. 35(b) is a preliminary determination table for the time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 35, the preliminary determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. , a special figure scheduled variation pattern as a determination result and a prefetch designation command indicating the special figure scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, the "special pattern scheduled variation pattern" can be said to be able to specify the type of special symbol, the result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 35, and determines the planned special pattern fluctuation based on the random value for jackpot determination, the random value for special symbol determination, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. The pattern is determined and a prefetch designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern is sent to the production control board 130.

Next, a modified example of the specifications of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIGS. 36 and 37. In this embodiment, as described in FIGS. 32 and 33 and in the description of the gaming state, the so-called "variable loop type" is used. "Probability variable loop type" means, for example, if it is determined to be a "jackpot" in the "normal gaming state (low probability non-time-saving gaming state)" and the special symbol "02" or "03" is determined, the jackpot game ends. Later, it becomes a "high-probability gaming state (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state)," but from then on, in the "high-probability gaming state," the special symbol "04" (or "01") is not determined, and the special symbol "04" (or "01") is not determined. 05" or special symbol "06" is determined, the "high probability gaming state" continues.

FIG. 36 shows the so-called "1 type 2 type". "Type 1 type 2 type" has the gaming states of "normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state)" and "time saving gaming state (low probability time saving gaming state)", and in the "normal gaming state" When it is determined that it is a “jackpot” (for example, the jackpot probability is “1/199”), as shown in (1), “Jackpot Game 1 (4 rounds)” or “Jackpot Game 2 (8 rounds)” will be played at a predetermined ratio. round).

Then, when the "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" is finished, the state shifts to the "time saving game state 1". The upper limit number of times of this "time saving game state 1" is "1". However, during the "time saving game state 1", by placing a game ball into the second starting port 47, the special figure determination information is stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the second special figure determination information retention storage area, respectively. It is possible to memorize it, and it is possible to perform "big hit determination" and "small hit determination" up to "5" times using the special figure determination information obtained by placing a game ball into the second starting port 47. It becomes.

On the other hand, when the "jackpot game 2 (8 rounds)" ends, the state shifts to the "time saving game state 2". The upper limit of the number of times of this "time saving game state 2" is "7" times. However, during the "time-saving gaming state 2", by placing a game ball into the second starting port 47, special figure determination information is stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the second special figure determination information retention storage area, respectively. It is possible to memorize it, and it is possible to perform a maximum of 11 “big hit determinations” and “small hit determinations” using the special figure determination information obtained by placing a game ball into the second starting port 47. It becomes.

The detailed control flow will be omitted, but as a result of executing the "jackpot determination", if it is determined to be a "jackpot", the "small hit determination" will not be executed, and as a result of executing the "jackpot determination", a "jackpot" will be determined. If it is not determined to be a "small hit", a "small hit determination" is executed, and if the "small hit determination" is not determined to be a "small hit", the process is a "loss".

The special figure determination information acquired by placing a game ball into the second starting hole 47 is determined to be a "jackpot" with a probability of "1/199", for example, and when it is not determined to be a "jackpot", for example, " A small win is determined with a probability of 1/8. In addition, with the special figure determination information acquired by placing a game ball into the first starting opening 45, it may be made such that a "small win" is not won, or it may be made difficult to win.

Between the "time-saving game state 1" and the "time-saving game state 2", the "time-saving game state 2" is more advantageous to the player because the upper limit number of times of the time-saving game state is greater. Therefore, on the image display device 70, etc., "RUSH acquisition challenge mode" is displayed when "time saving gaming state 1" is displayed, and "RUSH mode" is displayed when "time saving gaming state 2" is displayed. Advantages and disadvantages for the player can also be identified from the display format.

The gaming state during the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode" is the "time-saving gaming state 1" until the end of the first fluctuating display, and the "normal gaming state" from the start of the second fluctuating display. Furthermore, the gaming state during the "RUSH mode" is the "time-saving gaming state 2" until the end of the seventh fluctuating display, and the "normal gaming state" from the start of the eighth fluctuating display.

If a "small win" is determined during the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode", the game shifts to "big win game 3 (4 rounds)" as shown in (2). However, the first round of "Jackpot Game 3 (4 Rounds)" is a small winning game, and if you can make the game ball win in the "specific area" set in the big winning opening during the small winning game, , a jackpot game (second to fourth round) will be executed. On the other hand, if the game ball cannot land in the "specific area" during the small winning game, the jackpot game (second to fourth round) will not be executed.

Furthermore, if a "big hit" is determined during the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode", as shown in (1), the game shifts to "jackpot game 4 (8 rounds)". When "Jackpot Game 3 (4 rounds)" and "Jackpot Game 4 (8 rounds)" are completed, the game shifts to "RUSH mode".

On the other hand, if during the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode" it is not determined as a "big hit" or "small win", the "RUSH acquisition challenge mode" ends and the "normal" mode.

During the "RUSH mode", if a "small win" is determined, the game will move to "Jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)" as shown in (2), and if a "big win" is determined, (1) As shown in the figure, the game moves to "Jackpot Game 4 (8 rounds)". When "Jackpot Game 3 (4 rounds)" and "Jackpot Game 4 (8 rounds)" are completed, the game shifts to "RUSH mode".

On the other hand, if during the "RUSH mode" there is no determination of a "big hit" or a "small win", the "RUSH mode" ends and the game shifts to the "normal mode". do.

The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned "probable variable loop type", but may be of such "one kind, two kinds" type.

FIG. 37 is a so-called "small hit RUSH type". "Small hit RUSH type" is divided into "normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state)", "time saving gaming state (low probability time saving gaming state)" and "high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state)". , and if it is determined to be a "jackpot" in the "normal gaming state" (for example, the jackpot probability is "1/319"), as shown in (1), "jackpot game 1 ( 4 rounds)" or "Jackpot Game 2 (16 rounds)".

Then, when the "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" is finished, the state shifts to the "time-saving game state". The upper limit number of times of this "time-saving gaming state" is, for example, "50" times. When the "jackpot game 2 (16 rounds)" is completed, the state shifts to the "high probability game state".

When it is determined that there is a "jackpot" in the "time-saving gaming state" (for example, the jackpot probability is "1/319"), as shown in (1), "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" is played at a predetermined rate, or Shift to "Jackpot Game 3 (16 Rounds)". When the "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" is finished, the game shifts to the "time saving game state", and when the "jackpot game 3 (16 rounds)" is finished, the game shifts to the "high probability game state". Furthermore, if the variable display is executed ``50'' times without being determined as a ``big hit,'' the ``time-saving gaming state'' is ended and the transition is made to the ``normal gaming state.''

When a "jackpot" is determined in the "high probability gaming state" (for example, the jackpot probability is "1/77"), as shown in (2), "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" is played at a predetermined rate, or , the game shifts to "Jackpot Game 3 (16 Rounds)".

In addition, if it is determined that there is a "small win" in the "high probability game state" (for example, the small win probability is "1/2.5"), as shown in (3), the state shifts to the "small win game" and the corresponding In the "small winning game", the small winning large prize opening is open for a predetermined time, and for example, in "1" small winning game, it is possible to put about 3 game balls into the small winning large winning hole. It is now possible to do so. After the "small winning game" ends, the state shifts to the "high probability game state".

For example, the small winning probability is 1/2.5, so it can be said that it is very easy to win. Then, after the "small win game" ends, the "high probability game state" will be entered again, so in the "high probability game state", for example, without winning the jackpot probability "1/77", the small win probability "1/77" will not be won. It is advantageous for the player to continue winning "/2.5" because he can increase the number of game balls he owns through the "small winning game".

The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned "probable variable loop type", but may be such a "small hit RUSH type".

In addition, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the "probability variable loop type", "1 type 2 type", "small hit RUSH type", and the upper limit of "high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state)" It may be the so-called "ST probability variable type" in which the number of times is set to, for example, "100", or the "high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state)" is set to "normal gaming state (low probability non-probability)" with a predetermined probability. It may be a so-called "probability variable fall type" in which the player falls into a "time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" or a "time-saving gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state)."

Next, details of "gaming machine installation information" and "HC/fraud monitoring information" will be explained using FIGS. 38 to 43.

FIG. 38 shows a list of messages related to communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the message name "gaming machine installation information notification", the transmission direction "main control board 110→frame control board 120", the command "0x01", and the message summary "notification of gaming machine installation information". Also, No. 2 has the message name "gaming machine installation information response", the transmission direction "frame control board 120→main control board 110", the command "0x11", and the message summary "response with gaming machine installation information reception result". Also, No. 3 has the message name "gaming machine information notification", the transmission direction "main control board 110→frame control board 120", the command "0x02", and the message summary "notifying gaming machine information". Note that the "gaming machine information" here refers to "HC/fraud monitoring information." Also, No. 4 has the message name "gaming machine information response", the transmission direction "frame control board 120 → main control board 110", the command "0x12", and the message summary "response with gaming machine information reception result and frame control status". There is.

The "gaming machine installation information" is configured as shown in FIG. 39. No. 1 has the data name "telegram length" and the content "0x19". Also, No. 2 has the data name "command" and the content "0x01". Also, No. 3 has the data name "communication serial number" and the content "fixed at 0". Also, No. 4 is a data name "gaming machine type" related to gaming machine installation information, the contents of which will be described later. Also, No. 5 is a data name "main control chip ID number" related to gaming machine installation information, the contents of which will be described later. Also, No. 6 has the data name "main control chip manufacturer code" and the content "manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control chip" related to the gaming machine installation information. Also, No. 7 has the data name "main control chip product code" and the content "product code written in the management area of the main control chip" related to the gaming machine installation information. Also, No. 8 has the data name "checksum" and the content "-".

No. As shown in Figure 39, the data name 4 "gaming machine type" is composed of 1 byte, and Bit3 to Bit0 indicate the gaming machine type. If Bit3 to Bit0 are "0001", it is "Pachinko". If Bit3 to Bit0 are "0010", it indicates a "reel type gaming machine"; if Bit3 to Bit0 are "0011", it indicates an "arranged ball gaming machine", and if Bit3 to Bit0 are " 0100'' indicates a ``jumpball game machine,'' and the others are unused.

Bits 6 to 4 indicate the group classification of the association; if Bits 6 to 4 are "000", it indicates "Nikkogumi" (an organization mainly related to pachinko machines), and if Bits 6 to 4 are "001" "Nichidenkyo" (an organization mainly related to reel-type gaming machines) is shown, and the others are unused.

Bit7 indicates a management medium, and if Bit7 is "0", it indicates a game ball, and if Bit7 is "1", it indicates a game medal. For example, if the gaming machine 1 is a Pachinko gaming machine, the data will be 1-byte data such as Bit 7 is "0", Bit 6 to Bit 4 are "000", and Bit 3 to Bit 0 are "0001".

Although the "main control chip ID number" is omitted in the drawing, the ID for each main control chip manufacturer is sent in a telegram.For example, if the main control chip is from manufacturer A, the chip individual number is A total of 9 bytes of data consisting of "23456789" + identification code will be sent as a telegram, and if it is a main control chip from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "45678912" + identification code will be sent as a telegram. It has become.

The “gaming machine installation information response” is a response from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 after the “gaming machine installation information” is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the data name "telegram length" and the content "0x05". Also, No. 2 has the data name "command" and the content "0x11". Also, No. 3 has the data name "communication serial number" and the content "fixed at 0". Also, No. 4 is the data name "gaming machine installation information reception result", if the content is "0x00", it is "reception OK", and if the content is "0x01", it is the "ball removed state" indicating that the frame control board 120 is in the ball removed state. ”. No. 5 has the data name "checksum" and the content "result of addition from the message length to the data part." It should be noted that the main control board 110 does not enter a game-enabled state unless it receives the content "0x00" (reception OK) as the "gaming machine installation information reception result" from the frame control board 120. This point will be explained in detail later using a flowchart.

The "HC/fraud monitoring information" is configured as shown in FIG. 40. No. 1 has the data name "telegram length" and the content "0x0B to 0x15". Also, No. 2 has the data name "command" and the content "0x02". Also, No. 3 has the data name "communication serial number" and the content "sequence number (0 to 255)". Also, No. 4 is the data name "Main control state 1", and the contents are Bit 0 "Jackpot 1", Bit 1 "Jackpot 2", Bit 2 "Jackpot 3", Bit 3 "Game machine status signal 1", Bit 4 "Game machine status signal 2" , Bit 5 "gaming machine status signal 3", Bit 6 "gaming machine status signal 4", and Bit 7 "unused". For example, during the execution of a jackpot game corresponding to "Jackpot 1", Bit0 and Bit1 are ON ("1"), and finally Bit0 and Bit1 of main control state 1 are ON ("1"). Sent to the gaming machine information center.

Also, No. 5 is the data name "Main control state 2", the contents are Bit 0 "During jackpot + time saving or advantageous state", Bit 1 "High probability", Bit 2 "Time saving or advantageous state", Bit 3 to Bit 7 "Not yet "use". For example, during the high probability gaming state, Bit1 is ON (“1”), and the fact that Bit1 in the main control state 2 is ON (“1”) is finally transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

Also, No. 6 is the data name "gaming machine error state", the contents are Bit0 to Bit5 are "error code", and Bit6 is "0 = frame control, 1 = main control" (if 0, it is an error detected by frame control board 120) , if it is 1, an error detected by the main control board 110), if Bit 7 is "0 = alarm only, 1 = alarm + output to hall controller" (if 0, only error alarm is issued, if it is 1) In addition to issuing error notifications, it also outputs to the hall controller). For example, if an error corresponding to Bit 0 has occurred, Bit 0 will be ON (“1”), and the gaming machine information center will eventually know that Bit 0 of the gaming machine error state is ON (“1”). Sent.

Also, No. 7 is the data name “Fraud detection status 1”, and the contents are Bit 0 “Setting change signal”, Bit 1 “Setting confirmation signal”, Bit 2 “RWM clear signal”, Bit 3 “Fraud detection signal 1”, Bit 4 “Fraud detection Bit 5 is ``Signal 2,'' Bit 5 is ``Illegal Detection Signal 3,'' Bit 6 is ``Signal that upper limit acquisition device is in operation,'' and Bit 7 is ``Unused.'' For example, if the settings are being changed as described later, Bit0 is turned ON (“1”), and the fact that Bit0 of Fraud Detection State 1 is ON (“1”) is finally transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

Also, No. 8 has the data name ``number of prize balls activated by accessory object'' and the content ``number of prize balls activated by accessory object'' (for example, the number of prize balls obtained by placing game balls into the second starting port 47). Also, No. 9 has the data name "Number of prize balls due to continuous role actuation device operation" and the content "Number of prize balls due to continuous role actuation device operation" (for example, the number of prize balls due to winning the game ball into the grand prize opening 50). ing.

Also, No. 10 has a data name related to game information "number of game information" and content "number of type information/count information (n) (n)=0 to 5 (variable length)". Also, No. 11 has the data name "Type Information 1" and the content "Type Information 1" related to game information. Also, No. 12 has a data name "count information 1" and a content "count information 1" related to game information.

In the first example, when one game ball enters the first starting port 45, the count information is "data indicating the first starting port 45" and "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)". , "data indicating the number of prize balls (3)". In addition, in the second example, when one game ball enters the grand prize opening 50, "data indicating the grand prize opening 50", "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)", "number of prize balls" (15). In addition, in the third example, when one game ball passes through the out ball detection switch 39a, "data indicating the out ball detection switch 39a" and "data indicating the number of passing balls (1)" be. Then, these data are finally transmitted to the game machine information center in the form of a telegram.

Also, No. 13 has a data name "type information n" and a content "type information n" related to game information. Also, No. 14 has a data name "count information n" and a content "count information n" related to game information. Also, No. 15 has the data name "checksum" and the content "result of addition from the message length to the data part."

FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating details of the above-mentioned "main control state 1", "main control state 2", and "fraud detection state 1".

"Main control state 1" is the name of Bit 0 "Jackpot 1" and the details "Jackpot 1 information Set 1 during jackpots to be notified", and the name of Bit 1 is "Jackpot 2" and details "Jackpot 2 information All jackpots" The name of Bit 2 is "Jackpot 3", the details are "Jackpot 3 information, set 1 in the state of small win RUSH, special time saving, etc.", and the name of Bit 3 is "Game machine status signal 1", The details are “gaming machine status signal Set 1 while gaming machine status signal 1 is ON”, the name of Bit 4 is “gaming machine status signal 2”, and the details are “gaming machine status signal Set 1 while gaming machine status signal 2 is ON”. The name of Bit 5 is ``gaming machine status signal 3'', the details are ``gaming machine status signal, set 1 while gaming machine status signal 3 is ON'', and the name of Bit 6 is ``gaming machine status signal 4'', details. "Game machine status signal: set to 1 while gaming machine status signal 4 is ON", the name of Bit 7 is "unused", and the details are "fixed at 0".

“Game machine status signal 1” corresponds to the external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1 of the hall console output unit 173, and “gaming machine status signal 2” corresponds to the external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 2 of the hall console output unit 173. "gaming machine status signal 3" corresponds to the external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3 of the hall controller output section 173, and "gaming machine status signal 4" corresponds to the external terminal board pulse output signal terminal of the hall controller output section 173. It corresponds to output signal terminal 4.

Note that the small hit RUSH is as described in FIG. 37. Special time saving means, for example, if you play a low probability game state a specified number of times (for example, 1000 fluctuating displays) after the end of a jackpot game, a time saving game state that operates as a relief (so-called ceiling time saving) or a jackpot judgment. This corresponds to a time-saving gaming state (so-called symbol time-saving) that operates with a predetermined probability when a loss is determined.

"Main control state 2" is the name of Bit 0 "Jackpot + time saving or advantageous state", details "gaming state information set to 1 during jackpot and time saving or advantageous state", and the name of Bit 1 "High probability "Medium", details "Game state information set 1 during high probability", Bit 2 name "Set 1 during time reduction or advantageous state", details "Game state information set 1 during time reduction or advantageous state", Bit 3 ~The name of Bit7 is “unused” and the details are “fixed at 0”.

"Fraud detection status 1" has the name of Bit 0 "signal changing settings" and details "0 = normal, 1 = changing settings", and the name of Bit 1 "signal checking settings" and details "0 = normal, 1 = Checking settings", Bit 2 name "RWM clear signal", details "0 = normal, 1 = RWM clear (RWM initialization) occurred", Bit 3 name "fraud detection signal 1", details " Urgency: Weak 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal Occurrence", the name of Bit 4 is "Fraud Detection Signal 2", details are "Urgency: Medium 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal Occurrence", and the name of Bit 5 is "Fraud Detection". Signal 3'', details ``Urgency level: strong 0 = normal, 1 = abnormal occurrence'', Bit 6 name ``Acquisition upper limit device operating signal'', details ``0 = not activated, 1 = activated'', Bit 7 The name is "unused" and the details are "0 fixed".

FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating details of the above-mentioned "gaming information".

"Game information" has a 2-byte structure consisting of "type information (1 byte)" and "count information (1 byte)." Furthermore, "type information (1 byte)" is composed of "data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" and "data number (Bit0 to Bit3)."

For "Data type (Bit4 to Bit7)", for example, Bit4 to Bit7 "0000" has the type name "Unused" and the content is "-", and Bit4 to Bit7 "0001" has the type name "Starting entrance prize" and the content It is "notification that a prize has been won in the starting slot", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0010" is the type name "big winning slot won by special electric accessory operation", and the content is "notification that a winning slot has been won in the big winning slot", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0011" is the type name "Winning in the winning slot" and the content is "Notification of winning in the winning slot", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0100" is the type name "Winning in all starting slots" and the content is "Related to gaming". Bit4 to Bit7 "0101", "0110", "0111", and "1000" are the type name "unused" and the content is "-", and Bit4 to Bit7 " 1001" is the type name "Number of confirmed symbols" and the content is "Notification of the number of variations in symbols related to the game", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1010" is the type name "Number of jackpot hits" and the content is "The accessory continuous operating device has been activated. Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1011" are the type name "Unused" and content is "-", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1100" are the type name "Number of accessories (number of times the big prize opening is opened)", Contents: “If you want to set the number of openings of the jackpot opening at the time of a small win as the start number, notify the opening of the opening of the jackpot when the accessory continuous activation device is not activated” (“Jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)” in Figure 36) The first round is a small winning game), and Bit4 to Bit7 "1101" are the type name "passing through a specific area" and the content "notifying passing through a specific area" (see "specific area" in Figure 36). ), and Bit4 to Bit7 "1110" is the type name "external terminal board pulse output", the content is "instruction to output pulse from the dedicated unit (Hall controller output section 173)", and Bit4 to Bit7 "1111" The type name is "Performance information status notification" and the content is "Notification of status required to calculate performance information."

"Data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" is the content (starting port number) if "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "starting port prize", Bit0 to Bit3 "0001" (starting port 1) (Win), "0010" (Win to starting slot 2), "0011" (Win to starting slot 3) (other than the above are unused). For example, when a game ball enters the first starting slot 45, the type information (1 byte ) is sent.

If "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Win to the grand prize opening due to special electric accessory operation", the content (grand prize opening number) is Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (winning to the grand prize opening 1). , "0010" (winning into the grand prize opening 2), (other than the above are unused). For example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 50, the type information (1 byte) consists of "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0010" and "data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001". is sent.

If "Data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "Winning slot prize", the content (winning slot number) is Bit0 to Bit3 "0001" (winning to winning slot 1), "0010" (to winning slot 2). 1111 (winning in prize opening 15) ("0000" is not used). For example, if a game ball wins in the general winning hole 43 provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 40, the "data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "0011" and the "data number (Bit0 to Bit3)" is Type information (1 byte) consisting of "0001" is transmitted.

If the "data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "all starting slots won", Bit0 to Bit3 "0001" (win or pass) is transmitted as the content (others are unused). For example, when a game ball enters the first starting slot 45, the type information (1 byte ) is transmitted and the game ball passes through the general gate 44, the type information ( 1 byte) is sent.

If "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of confirmed symbols", send Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (Number of confirmed symbols related to the game (special symbols, normal symbols)) as the content (Others) is unused). For example, when the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the type information (1 byte) consisting of "1001" for "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" and "0001" for "Data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" is sent. Similar type information is also transmitted when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, similar type information is also transmitted when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

If the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "number of jackpots", Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (accessory continuous actuation device is activated) is transmitted as the content (others are not used). For example, when the first jackpot (see Figure 33) is executed, the type information (1 bytes) are sent.

If "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of accessory items (number of times the big prize opening is opened)", send Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (accessory item 1) as the content (others are not used) . For example, when "Jackpot Game 3" explained in FIG. 36 is executed, the type information consists of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1100" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001". (1 byte) is sent.

If the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "pass through specific area", Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (specific area 1) is transmitted as the content (others are unused). For example, when "Jackpot Game 3" explained in FIG. 36 is executed and the game ball passes through a specific area, "Data Type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "1101" and "Data Number (Bit0 to Bit3)" Type information (1 byte) consisting of "0001" is transmitted.

In addition, to mention the count information in the case of "passing through a specific area", as shown in Figure 43, Bit4 to Bit7 are "unused" and "fixed at 0", and Bit0 to Bit3 are "0001". ”, it transmits that “the number of passes through the specific area is 1” (others are unused). In other words, as shown in example 1) in FIG. 43, when the game ball passes through the specific area 1 once, the game information "0xD101" is transmitted, and the breakdown is that "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is " 1101", "Data number (Bit0 to Bit3)" is "0001", type information (1 byte), "Unused (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "0000", and "Number of passes (Bit0 to Bit3)" is It is composed of count information (1 byte) consisting of "0001" (once).

If the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "external terminal board pulse output", the content indicates that a pulse is output from the dedicated unit (hole controller output section 173).
If the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "performance information status notification", the status (fixed to 1) required for calculating performance information is transmitted as the content (others are unused).

Note also on the count information in the case of "performance information status notification", as shown in Figure 43, Bits 4 to 7 are "fixed at 0", and Bit 0 is used to indicate the "base". If it is "0", it indicates "medium low base" (for example, low probability non-time saving gaming state), and if it is "1", it indicates "medium high base" (for example, low probability time saving gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state). condition). Bit 1 is to indicate "hitting a jackpot"; "0" indicates "normal time" (for example, low probability non-time-saving gaming state), and "1" indicates "hitting a jackpot". . Bit 2 is for indicating "medium high probability"; if it is "0", it indicates "low probability" (for example, low probability non-time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state), and if it is "1", it indicates " "high probability" (for example, a high probability time-saving gaming state). Note that Bit 3 is unused.

As shown in example 2) in FIG. 43, when the state changes to high base, game information "0xF101" is transmitted, and the details include "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" "1111", "data number Type information (1 byte) consisting of "(Bit 0 to Bit 3)" is "0001", "Unused (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "0000", and Bit 0 of "Status flag" is "1" (Bit 1 to 3 are " 0") and count information (1 byte).

The “HC/fraud monitoring information response” in FIG. 43 is a response from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 after the “HC/fraud monitoring information” is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the data name "telegram length" and the content "0x05". Also, No. 2 has the data name "command" and the content "0x12". Also, No. 3 has the data name "communication serial number" and the content "communication sequence number (0 to 255)". Also, No. 4 indicates that if the data name is "HC/fraud monitoring information reception result" and the content is "0x00", "reception is OK". No. 5 has the data name "checksum" and the content "result of addition from the message length to the data part." Note that the main control board 110 will not be able to play unless the content "0x00" (reception OK) is received from the frame control board 120 as "HC/fraud monitoring information reception result". This point will be explained in detail later using a flowchart.

Next, a list of functions and implementation areas of the gaming machine will be explained using FIGS. 44 and 45. The "use area" corresponds to the "gaming area" described in FIGS. 28 and 29, and the "outside the use area" corresponds to the "information area" described in FIGS. 28 and 29.
In the figure, "◎" indicates a mounting area, "○" indicates a mounting area, and "x" indicates that mounting is impossible.

No. 1 Regarding the "function for controlling game execution", the "use area" of the "main control section 110m" is "◎", and the "outside of the use area" of the "main control section 110m" and the "frame control section 120m" “Used area” and “Outside used area” are “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and the "function to control the execution of the game" means, for example, the "main control board timer interrupt" described later. This corresponds to the process executed in "Processing".

No. 2 Regarding "Control the gaming state", the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", "Outside the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m". ”, “Outside usage area” is “x”. In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and "controlling the gaming state" refers to the above-mentioned "normal gaming state", "time-saving gaming state", This corresponds to a function that controls the "high probability gaming state."

No. 3 Regarding "control related to launch", the "use area" of "main control section 110m" is "◎", "outside use area" of "main control section 110m", "use area" of "frame control section 120m" ”, “Outside usage area” is “x”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and the "control related to firing" corresponds to the control for firing the game ball into the game area 5a. do.

No. 4 Regarding "Generation of random numbers for internal drawing", the "Used area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is "◎", "Outside the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and " "Used area" and "Outside used area" are "×". In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and "generation of random numbers for internal drawing" is executed in the "main control board timer interrupt processing" described later. This corresponds to the generation of random numbers used in each process executed.

No. 5 Regarding "game ball winning detection/prize ball payout", the "use area" of "main control section 110m" is "◎", "outside use area" of "main control section 110m", "frame control section 120m" “Used area” and “Outside used area” are “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and "detection of winning of game balls and payout of prize balls" refers to the "main control board timer interrupt" described later. This corresponds to step S200 and step S500 of "Processing".

No. 6 Regarding "control related to special symbol display device", the "use area" of "main control section 110m" is "◎", "outside use area" of "main control section 110m" and "frame control section 120m" “Used area” and “Outside used area” are “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and the "control related to the special symbol display device" refers to the "main control board timer interrupt processing" described later. This corresponds to step S700 and step S750.

No. 7 Regarding "control related to special electric accessories", the "use area" of "main control section 110m" is "◎", "outside use area" of "main control section 110m" and "frame control section 120m" “Used area” and “Outside used area” are “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and "control related to special electric accessory" refers to the step of "special figure special electric control process" described later. This corresponds to S340.

No. 8 Regarding "control related to normal symbol display device", the "use area" of "main control section 110m" is "◎", "outside the use area" of "main control section 110m" and "frame control section 120m" “Used area” and “Outside used area” are “×”. In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and the "control related to the normal symbol display device" refers to the "main control board timer interrupt processing" described later. This corresponds to step S700 and step S750.

No. 9 Regarding "control related to normal electric accessories", the "use area" of "main control section 110m" is "◎", "outside use area" of "main control section 110m" and "frame control section 120m" “Used area” and “Outside used area” are “×”. In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and "control related to normal electric accessories" refers to step S250 of "input control processing" described later. Equivalent to.

No. 10 Regarding "Other controls related to game execution", the "use area" of "main control section 110m" is "◎", "outside use area" of "main control section 110m", "frame control section 120m" "Used area" and "Outside used area" are "×". In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m".

No. 11 Regarding the "function to control the game ball count display device", the "use area" of the "frame control section 120m" is "◎", and the "use area", "outside the use area" of the "main control section 110m", “Outside the usage area” of “frame control unit 120m” is “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "function to control the number of game balls display device" refers to the "frame control board timer" described later. This corresponds to steps W650 and W700 of "Interrupt Processing".

No. 12 Regarding "electromagnetically record the number of game balls", the "use area" of "frame control section 120m" is "◎", and the "use area", "outside use area", " "Outside the use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" is "x". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "recording the number of game balls electromagnetically" means "updating the number of game balls on the frame control board" described later. "Processing" corresponds to this.

No. 13 Regarding "Display the number of game balls", the "Used area" of the "Frame control section 120m" is "◎", and the "Used area", "Outside the used area", and "Frame control section" of the "Main control section 110m" are 120m” is “outside the usage area” is “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "displaying the number of game balls" is a step of "frame control board timer interrupt processing" described later. This corresponds to step W650 and step W700.

No. 14 Regarding "Add the number of rented game balls", the "Usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", the "Usage area" of "Main control unit 110m", "Outside usage area", “Outside the usage area” of “frame control unit 120m” is “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "adding the number of rented game balls" means "frame control board game ball rental", which will be described later. "Processing" corresponds to this.

No. 15 Regarding "subtract the number of counted game balls", the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", "outside the usage area", “Outside the usage area” of “frame control unit 120m” is “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "subtracting the number of counted game balls" means "frame control board game ball counting" which will be described later. "Processing" corresponds to this.

No. 16 Regarding "subtract the number of fired game balls", the "use area" of "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "use area" of "main control unit 110m", "outside use area", “Outside the usage area” of “frame control unit 120m” is “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "subtract the number of fired game balls" means "the number of game balls on the frame control board" described later. This corresponds to steps W301 and W302 of "update processing".

No. 17 Regarding "Add the number of game balls (foul balls) that were not fired onto the board and returned to the board", the "Usage area" of "Frame control section 120m" is "◎", and the "Usage area" of "Main control section 110m" is "◎". ", "Outside the usage area", and "Outside the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "x". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "adding the number of game balls (foul balls) that have returned without being fired onto the board" will be described later. This corresponds to steps W303 and W304 of "frame control board game ball number update processing".

No. 18 Regarding "add the number of paid game balls", the "use area" of the "frame control section 120m" is "◎", the "use area" of the "main control section 110m", "outside the use area", “Outside the usage area” of “frame control unit 120m” is “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "adding the number of paid out game balls" means "the number of game balls on the frame control board" described later. This corresponds to steps W305 to W311 of "update processing".

No. 19 Regarding "Initialize the number of game balls with the number of game balls clear button", the "Used area" of the "Frame control section 120m" is "◎", and the "Used area" and "Used area" of the "Main control section 110m" are "Outside" and "Outside use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "x". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "initialize the number of game balls with the number of game balls clear button" means that the number of game balls is set when power is supplied. This corresponds to the process in which the frame control unit 120m clears the number of game balls when an input is made from the clear sw 121.

No. 20 Regarding "Function to control communication with game ball lending device", "Usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", "Usage area" and "Usage area" of "Main control unit 110m" "Outside" and "Outside use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "x". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "function to control communication with the gaming ball etc. lending device" refers to the communication with the dedicated unit 170. This corresponds to the control related to

No. 21 Regarding "VL power supply monitoring", the "Usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" is "○", and the "Usage area" of "Main control unit 110m", "Outside usage area", and "Frame control unit 120m" “Outside the used area” is “×”. In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "VL power supply monitoring" corresponds to the connection confirmation power supply input from the dedicated unit 170.

No. 22 Regarding "communication control, communication timer management", the "use area" of "frame control section 120m" is "◎", and the "use area", "outside use area", "frame control" of "main control section 110m" 120m” is “outside the use area”. In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "communication control, communication timer management" corresponds to time management related to communication with the dedicated unit 170. do.

No. 23 Regarding the "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine performance information)" message generation and transmission, the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" is " "Outside the usage area" and "Outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "x". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine performance information)" message generation and transmission is performed by the "frame control section" described later. This corresponds to the process in step W507 of "Board gaming machine information notification process".

No. 24 Regarding the message generation and transmission of "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information)", the "usage area" of "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of "main control unit 110m" is " "Outside the usage area" and "Outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "x". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information)" message generation and transmission is performed by the "frame control section" described later. This corresponds to the processing of steps W505 and W509 of "Board gaming machine information notification processing".

No. 25 Regarding the "gaming machine information notification (HC/fraud monitoring information)" message generation and transmission, the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", “Outside the usage area” and “Outside the usage area” of the “frame control unit 120m” are “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "gaming machine information notification (HC/fraud monitoring information)" message generation and transmission is performed in the "frame control section 120m" described later. This corresponds to the process of step W513 of ``control board game machine information notification process''.

No. 26 Regarding "Count notification message generation/transmission", the "Used area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Used area", "Outside usage area", and "Frame control" of the "Main control unit 110m" are 120m” is “outside the use area”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "count notification message generation/sending" is the same as "frame control board game ball counting process" described later. This corresponds to step W567.

No. 27 Regarding "Rental Notification Reception", the "Usage Area" of "Frame Control Unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Usage Area" of "Main Control Unit 110m", "Outside Usage Area", and "Frame Control Unit 120m" “Outside the used area” is “×”. In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "rental notification reception" means that step W601 of the "frame control board game ball rental process" described later is executed. Equivalent to.

No. 28 Regarding "Lending receipt result response message generation/transmission", the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and the "Usage area", "Outside usage area", and "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are "Outside the use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" is "x". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "generating and transmitting a response message for lending reception results" refers to the "frame control board game ball lending process" described later. ” corresponds to step W609 and step W610.

No. 29 Regarding “communication control between main control unit and frame control unit”, the “use area” of “main control unit 110m” and the “use area” of “frame control unit 120m” are “◎”, and “main control unit 110m” is “use area”. "Outside the usage area" and "Outside the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are "×". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the This corresponds to overall processing related to communication (for example, "gaming machine installation information notification" and "gaming machine installation information response" of "main control board main processing").

No. 30 Regarding "Aggregation of gaming machine performance information", "Outside usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎", and "Usage area", "Outside usage area", "Frame The "use area" of "control unit 120m" is "x". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and "summarization of gaming machine performance information" refers to "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation" described later. "Processing" corresponds to this.

In addition, No. 30~No. 38 is data for one day from the power ON to the power OFF of the gaming machine 1, and the total data is started from the power ON and is cleared when the power is OFF. In other words, this value is different from the value calculated in the "frame control board display performance information calculation process" described later.
Furthermore, the aggregated data is not displayed on a display (for example, the frame control display 125) or the like, but is transmitted to the gaming machine information center and shared and managed with Nikkogumi.

No. 31 Regarding the "Total number of game balls fired", "Outside usage area" of "Frame control section 120m" is "◎", "Usage area", "Outside usage area", "Frame control" of "Main control section 110m" The "Used area" of "Part 120m" is "x". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "total number of game balls fired" refers to the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described later. ” corresponds to step W451.

No. 32 Regarding the "Total number of game balls acquired", "Outside usage area" of "Frame control section 120m" is "◎", "Usage area", "Outside usage area", "Frame control" of "Main control section 110m" The "Used area" of "Part 120m" is "x". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "total number of game balls acquired" refers to the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described later. ” corresponds to step W452.

No. 33 Regarding "ball output rate", "outside use area" of "frame control section 120m" is "◎", "use area", "outside use area", "frame control section 120m" of "main control section 110m" “Used area” is “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "ball output rate" refers to the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described later. This corresponds to step W453.

No. 34 Regarding "Number of game balls acquired per minute (low base)", "Outside usage area" of "Frame control section 120m" is "◎", "Usage area" and "Outside usage area" of "Main control section 110m" , the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "x". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "number of game balls acquired per minute (low base)" refers to the "frame control board gaming machine" described later. This corresponds to step W454 of "Performance Information Calculation Process".

No. 35 Regarding "Accessory ratio", "Outside usage area" of "Frame control section 120m" is "◎", "Usage area", "Outside usage area", "Frame control section 120m" of "Main control section 110m" “Used area” is “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "accessories ratio" is the same as the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described later. This corresponds to step W455.

No. 36 Regarding "Continuous role object ratio", "Outside usage area" of "Frame control section 120m" is "◎", "Usage area", "Outside usage area", "Frame control section" of "Main control section 110m" 120m” is “Used Area” is “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "continuous accessory ratio" refers to the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described later. This corresponds to step W456.

No. 37 Regarding "Number of operations of accessory continuous operating device", "Outside usage area" of "Frame control section 120m" is "◎", "Usage area", "Outside usage area" of "Main control section 110m", The "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "x". In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "number of operations of the accessory continuous actuation device" refers to the "frame control board gaming machine performance" described later. This corresponds to step W457 of "Information Calculation Process".

No. 38 Regarding "maximum ball output", "outside use area" of "frame control section 120m" is "◎", "use area", "outside use area", "frame control section 120m" of "main control section 110m" “Used area” is “×”. In addition, in this embodiment, the function is executed "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m", and the "maximum ball output" refers to the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described later. This corresponds to step W458.

No. 39 Regarding "Generation of gaming machine installation information", both "Area of use" and "Outside of use area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Area of use" and "Outside of use area" of "Frame control part 120m" It is marked "○". In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control section 110m" and the "use area" of the "frame control section 120m." Specifically, the following No. 40~No. The information No. 42 is generated in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and the information No. 42 below is generated in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m". 43~No. The information No. 45 is generated in the "use area" of the "frame control section 120m", and the "frame control section 120m" uses the information No. 45 received from the "main control section 110m". 40~No. 42 information and the No. 42 that you generated. 43~No. 45 pieces of information, a total of six pieces of information are transmitted to the U board 171 (ultimately to the gaming machine information center). In other words, "generation of gaming machine installation information" corresponds to step S5 of "main control board main processing" described later, and steps W505 and W509 of "frame control board gaming machine information notification processing" described later.

No. 40 Regarding the "main control chip ID number", the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control section 110m" are "○", and the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control section 120m" are "○". ” is “x (exclusion)”. In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m". The "main control chip ID number" will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

No. 41 Regarding the "main control chip manufacturer code", the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control section 110m" are "○", and the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control section 120m" are "○". ” is “x (exclusion)”. In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m". The "main control chip maker code" will be described later with reference to FIG.

No. 42 Regarding the "main control chip product code", the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control part 110m" are "○", and the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control part 120m" are "○". ” is “x (exclusion)”. In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m". The "main control chip product code" will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

No. 43 Regarding "Frame control chip ID number", "Used area" and "Outside usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Used area" and "Outside usage area" of "Main control unit 110m" are "○". ” is “x (exclusion)”. In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". The "frame control chip ID number" will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

No. 44 Regarding the "Frame control chip manufacturer code", the "Used area" and "Outside the used area" of the "Frame control section 120m" are "○", and the "Used area" and "Outside the used area" of the "Main control section 110m" are "○". ” is “x (exclusion)”. In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". The "frame control chip maker code" will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

No. 45 Regarding the "frame control chip product code", the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control section 120m" are "○", and the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control section 110m" are "○". ” is “x (exclusion)”. In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". The "frame control chip product code" will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

No. 46 Regarding "Generation of HC/fraud monitoring information", both the "Used area" and "Outside the used area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Used area" and "Outside the used area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked "○". In this embodiment, the "usage area" of the "main control section 110m" and the "usage area" of the "frame control section 120m" are used. This will be explained in detail below.

No. 47 Regarding "Number of game balls", "Usage area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Outside usage area" of "Main control unit 110m". , "Outside use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" is "x". The "number of game balls" refers to the "balls held" by the player, and in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". For example, this corresponds to the "frame control board game ball number update process" described later.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" that can be implemented. Of course, the function may be executed in the "use area" of the "main control section 110m", but the information related to the "number of game balls" must be sent from the "frame control section 120m" to the "main control section 110m". Since this will be realized, in view of the control load, it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

No. 48 Regarding "number of balls fired", the "use area" of "main control section 110m" and "use area" of "frame control section 120m" are "○", and "outside use area" of "main control section 110m". , "Outside use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" is "x". The "number of balls fired" refers to the number of game balls fired by the player, and in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m". For example, this corresponds to the "frame control board game ball number update process" described later.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" that can be implemented. Of course, the function may be executed in the "use area" of the "main control section 110m", but information related to the "number of balls fired" may be sent from the "frame control section 120m" to the "main control section 110m". Since this will be realized, in view of the control load, it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

No. 49 Regarding the "total number of prize balls," the "Usage area" of "Main control section 110m" and "Usage area" of "Frame control section 120m" are "○", and the "Usage area" of "Main control section 110m" is "O". "Outside" and "Outside use area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "x". The "total number of prize balls" is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". . For example, this corresponds to the "frame control board game ball number update process" described later.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" that can be implemented. Of course, the function may be executed in the "use area" of the "main control section 110m", but information related to the "total number of prize pitches" is sent from the "frame control section 120m" to the "main control section 110m". Therefore, in view of the control load, it can be said that it is more efficient to execute this function in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

No. 50 "Main control state 1" (see FIG. 40), "Usage area" of "Main control section 110m" is "○", "Outside usage area" of "Main control section 110m", "Frame control section 120m" “Used area” and “Outside used area” are “×”. In this embodiment, the function (processing to turn each bit ON/OFF in main control state 1, processing related to message generation/transmission in main control state 1) is executed in the "use area" of "main control unit 110m". are doing.

No. 51 Regarding "main control state 2", the "usage area" of "main control section 110m" is "○", "outside the use area" of "main control section 110m", and "usage area" of "frame control section 120m". ”, “Outside usage area” is “x”. In this embodiment, the function (processing to turn each bit ON/OFF in main control state 2, processing related to message generation/transmission in main control state 2) is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m". are doing.

No. 52 "Game machine error state", "Used area" and "Outside usage area" of "Main control unit 110m", "Used area" and "Outside usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are all "○" ”. The "gaming machine error state" corresponds to, for example, a communication abnormality between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and a communication abnormality between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned communication abnormality is monitored in the "usage area" of the "main control section 110m" and the "usage area" of the "frame control section 120m", and the "usage area" of the "main control section 110m" is monitored. The above-mentioned communication abnormality is not monitored in "Outside area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Outside usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m", but "Outside usage area" of "Main controller 110m" and "Outside usage area" of The above-mentioned communication abnormality may be monitored by "outside area".

No. 53 Regarding "Fraud detection status 1", "Used area" and "Outside usage area" of "Main control unit 110m" are "○", and "Used area" and "Outside usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" is "x". In this embodiment, for example, the processing of "setting change", "setting confirmation", and "RWM clear" of Bit0 to Bit2 in "fraud detection state 1" (FIG. 40) is performed by "main control unit 110m". The function is executed in the "Used area" of the "Main control unit 110m", and the "Fraud detection" of Bits 3 to 5 and the "acquisition upper limit device" processing of Bit 6 (counting of game balls, etc.) are performed in the "Used area of the main control unit 110m". The function is being performed outside the home. Further, the generation of an 8-bit message called "fraud detection state 1" is performed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m". This makes it possible to efficiently use the "used area" and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m", and prevent processing from being concentrated in any one area.

Note that the use of "use area" and "outside use area" for "fraud detection state 1" is merely an example, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, a process that is being executed in the ``used area'' may be executed ``outside the used area,'' or a process that is being executed ``outside the used area'' may be executed in the ``used area.'' Good too. Further, all the operations may be executed in the "used area" or all may be executed "outside the used area." Further, it may be executed in the "use area" or "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". For example, the processing of the "acquisition upper limit device" (counting of game balls, etc.) may be executed in the "use area" or "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

No. 54 "Fraud detection status 2 (frame control)", "Used area" and "Outside usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Used area" and "Outside usage area" of "Main control unit 110m" are "○". "Outside used area" is "x". In this embodiment, for example, among the "fraud detection state 2" (see FIG. 72), the processing of "glass frame opening", "inner frame opening", and "fraudulent radio wave detection" of Bit0 to Bit2, and the "winning of prize" processing of Bit4 to Bit5 are performed. Regarding the processing of "abnormal number of pitches notification" and "abnormal number of fired balls notification", the relevant functions are executed "outside the usage area" of "frame control unit 120m", and the processing of "game pitch number clear detection" of Bit 3 is executed. The function is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". Further, the generation of an 8-bit message called "fraud detection state 2" is performed "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m". Note that when the frame control unit 120m generates a message "outside the usage area," for example, a program "outside the usage area" refers to the RWM in the "usage area" and generates a message "outside the usage area." It is realized by doing. As a result, the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" can be used efficiently, and processing can be prevented from being concentrated in any one area.

Note that the use of "use area" and "outside use area" for "fraud detection state 2" is merely an example, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, a process that is being executed in the ``used area'' may be executed ``outside the used area,'' or a process that is being executed ``outside the used area'' may be executed in the ``used area.'' Good too. Further, all the operations may be executed in the "used area" or all may be executed "outside the used area."

No. 55 Regarding "Fraud detection status 3 (frame control)", "Used area" and "Outside usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Used area" and "Outside usage area" of "Main control unit 110m" are "O". "Outside used area" is "x". In this embodiment, for example, for the processing of "small ball detection" and "iron ball detection" of Bit0 to Bit1 in "fraud detection state 3" (see FIG. 72), "use area" of "frame control unit 120m" is The relevant function is executed in the "outside of the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" for generating the 8-bit message "fraud detection state 3". As a result, the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" can be used efficiently, and processing can be prevented from being concentrated in any one area.

Note that the use of "use area" and "outside use area" for "fraud detection state 3" is merely an example, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, a process that is being executed in the ``used area'' may be executed ``outside the used area,'' or a process that is being executed ``outside the used area'' may be executed in the ``used area.'' Good too. Further, all the operations may be executed in the "used area" or all may be executed "outside the used area."

No. 56 Regarding the "function to control the setting change device", the "use area" of "main control section 110m" is "○", "outside the use area" of "main control section 110m" and "frame control section 120m" “Used area” and “Outside used area” are “×”. In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and the "function to control the setting change device" refers to the "setting change processing" and "setting confirmation" described later. "Processing" corresponds to this.

No. 57 Regarding "Function to send information related to the performance to peripheral board", "Usage area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Main control unit 110m" is "outside the usage area" and "frame control unit 120m" is "outside the usage area". In addition, in this embodiment, the function of transmitting information to the production control board 130 is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m", and the function of transmitting information to the production control board 130 is executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". 130. For example, a "special figure variation pattern specification command" is transmitted from the "main control unit 110m" to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 creates a variation production pattern based on the received "special figure variation pattern specification command". (game performance) is determined. In addition, information regarding the "error" detected by the "main control section 110m" is transmitted from the "main control section 110m" to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 responds to the received information regarding the "error". Execute the notification. Similarly, information regarding the "error" detected by the "frame control section 120m" is transmitted from the "frame control section 120m" to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 responds to the received information regarding the "error". Execute the corresponding notification.

No. 58 Regarding "Function to send game machine information to peripheral board", "Usage area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" are "○", and "Main control unit 110m" is "outside the usage area" and "frame control unit 120m" is "outside the usage area". In addition, No. 58 is the above-mentioned No. Since it is the same as No. 57, the explanation will be omitted.

No. 59 Regarding "Unauthorized monitoring (excluding Nos. 60 and 61)", "Used area" and "Outside usage area" of "Main control section 110m" are "○", and "Used area" of "Frame control section 120m" , "Outside use area" is "×". "Fraud monitoring (excluding Nos. 60 and 61)" corresponds to, for example, monitoring so-called "dangling" fraud in which a jackpot random number is fraudulently obtained by installing counterfeit wiring or fraudulent parts. In this embodiment, the monitoring is performed "outside the area used" by the "main control unit 110m". Note that the monitoring may be performed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m".

No. 60 Regarding "Unauthorized monitoring related to the payout of game balls", which of the "usage area" and "outside the usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", and the "usage area" and "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" Also, it is marked "○". In this embodiment, the monitoring is executed in the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". Note that instead of the two-chip configuration of the "main control unit 110m" and the "frame control unit 120m" as in this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 may be configured with a one-chip configuration of only the "main control unit 110m", for example. If it is possible and configured with a one-chip configuration, the monitoring may be performed in the "use area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m".

No. 61 Regarding "monitoring of fraud related to the rental of game balls", which of the "usage area" and "outside the usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" and "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" Also, it is marked "○". In addition, No. 61 is the above-mentioned No. Since it is the same as 60, the explanation will be omitted.

No. 62 Regarding "Error processing (gaming stop)", "Used area" of "Main control unit 110m" is "○", "Outside usage area" of "Main control unit 110m", "Frame control unit 120m" is " "Used area" and "Outside used area" are "×". In this embodiment, the processing is executed in the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m". For example, after completing the process of step S9 in FIG. 51, after completing the process of step S10 in FIG. 51, after completing the unrecoverable error process in step S17 of FIG. 67 corresponds to "error processing (game stop)".

No. 63 Regarding "Error processing (notification only)", both "Used area" and "Outside used area" of "Main control unit 110m" and "Used area" and "Outside used area" of "Frame control unit 120m" It is marked "○". Note that the details of "error processing (notification only)" will be described in detail in "Display priority order of error codes" (FIG. 99), which will be described later.

No. 64 Regarding "Function to control the display of the performance display monitor", "Area of use" and "Outside of use area" of "Main control section 110m" and "Outside of use area" of "Frame control section 120m" are "○". , the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "x". The “function for controlling the display of the performance display monitor” corresponds to the “frame control board display performance information calculation process” (FIG. 100) described later, and in this embodiment, the process itself is also displayed on the frame control display 125. The processing is also executed "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

No. 65 Regarding "Function to generate signals necessary for testing gaming machines", "Usage area" and "Outside usage area" of "Main control unit 110m", "Usage area" and "Usage area" of "Frame control unit 120m" ``Outside'' are all marked ``○''. In this embodiment, the "main control unit 110m" executes the function "outside the usage area", and the "frame control unit 120m" executes the relevant function using both the "usage area" and "outside the usage area". Running.

In addition, the above No. 1~No. Regarding No. 65, the locations marked with "x" are considered to be impossible to implement, but the locations marked with "x" may be implemented (various processes may be executed in the regions marked with "x"). Furthermore, the process that is being executed in the "use area" or "outside the use area" of the main control unit 110m may be executed by the "frame control unit 120m", or the process executed in the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m". Alternatively, the process that is being executed "outside the usage area" may be executed in the "usage area" or "outside the usage area" of the main control unit 110m.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board that enables gaming after the game machine starts up)
Using FIG. 46, a communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 (in the case where the frame control board 110 is not in the ball-extracted state) will be described, which enables playing after the gaming machine is started. Note that the "gaming machine information" in FIG. 46 corresponds to the "HC/fraud monitoring information" described in FIGS. 40 to 43.

First, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 start to start up, and the start-up of the frame control board 120 is completed before the main control board 110. After that, when the activation of the main control board 110 is completed within a maximum of 3 minutes, a game machine installation information notification (communication serial number = 0) is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 as the first message. Ru. If a gaming machine installation information response (communication serial number = 0, reception result = reception OK) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 as the second message within 10ms from there, the main control board 110 The machine installation information reception results are confirmed. Here, since the reception result=reception OK, the main control board 110 allows the firing of the game ball and becomes ready for playing.

Then, after 108 ms has elapsed from the transmission of the first gaming machine installation information notification, a gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 1) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 as the third message. If a gaming machine information response (communication serial number = 1, reception result = reception OK) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 as the fourth message within 10ms, the main control board 110 The machine installation information reception results are confirmed. Thereafter, the communication sequence of transmitting and receiving messages in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated at a cycle of 108 ms.

In addition, if the frame control board 120 cannot receive the gaming machine installation information within 3 minutes from startup, it will display an error code on the frame control display 125 as a communication line abnormality, or issue an error specification command to the performance control board 130. If the gaming machine installation information notification is successfully received after the communication line becomes abnormal, the error notification is terminated.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and frame control board that does not allow gaming after the game machine is started)
Using FIG. 47, a communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 in which the game is not possible after the gaming machine is started (case where the frame control board 110 is in a ball-ejected state) will be explained.

First, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 start to start up, and the frame control board 120 completes starting up before the main control board 110, and the ball extraction operation starts. The ball is out. After that, when the activation of the main control board 110 is completed within a maximum of 3 minutes, a game machine installation information notification (communication serial number = 0) is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 as the first message. Ru. If a gaming machine installation information response (communication serial number = 0, reception result = ball removed state) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 as the second message within 10ms from there, the main control board 110 The gaming machine installation information reception result is confirmed. Here, since the reception result is in the ball-out state, the main control board 110 permits the firing of game balls, but performs an infinite loop process without making the game possible.

Note that the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 do not communicate after transmitting and receiving the gaming machine installation information response indicating that the reception result = ball removed state, and the frame control board 120 does not communicate with the gaming machine 1 when the power supply is turned off. The ball continues to be removed until the ball is turned off.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board that enters the setting change/setting confirmation state after the game machine starts up)
Using FIG. 48, a communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 that enters the setting change/setting confirmation state after the gaming machine is started (case where the frame control board 110 is not in the ball-extracting state) will be described.

First, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 start to start up, and the start-up of the frame control board 120 is completed before the main control board 110. After that, when the activation of the main control board 110 is completed within a maximum of 3 minutes, a game machine installation information notification (communication serial number = 0) is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 as the first message. Ru. If a gaming machine installation information response (communication serial number = 0, reception result = reception OK) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 as the second message within 10ms from there, the main control board 110 The machine installation information reception results are confirmed.

Here, when the main control board 110 detects that both the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a are operated, or that only the setting key switch 112a is operated, the setting change state (setting change mode) or the setting The mode shifts to a confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), and the setting values are displayed on the information display 115 mounted on the main control board 110.

Then, after entering the setting change state or setting confirmation state and after 108 ms has elapsed from the transmission of the first gaming machine installation information notification, a third message is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 to request a game machine installation information notification. Machine information notification (communication serial number = 1) is sent. When a gaming machine information response (communication serial number = 1) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 as the fourth message within 10ms, the main control board 110 receives the gaming machine installation information reception result. It is confirmed. Thereafter, regardless of whether it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the communication sequence of transmitting and receiving messages in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated at a cycle of 108 ms.

Then, when the setting key switch 112a is operated and the setting change state or setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 110 launches the game ball because the reception result of the gaming machine installation information response that was already received was OK. You will be able to play. Thereafter, the communication sequence of transmitting and receiving messages in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated at a cycle of 108 ms.

(Communication procedure for determining that the main control board has disconnected the communication line)
A communication procedure in which the main control board 110 determines that the communication line is disconnected will be described using FIG. 49.

First, when a notification message (gaming machine installation information notification, gaming machine information notification) is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120, a response message (gaming machine installation information notification) is sent from the frame control board 120 within 10ms. information response, gaming machine information response) should be sent, but a situation occurs where the main control board 110 is unable to receive the response message.

This is the first time that the main control board 110 sends a notification message to the frame control board 120 at a cycle of 108 m, but if the state in which a response message cannot be received from the frame control board 120 continues for 10 times, the main control board 110: An error notification is performed by, for example, transmitting an error designation command to the performance control board 130, assuming that a communication line disconnection has occurred. Thereafter, by turning off and on the power of the gaming machine 1, the communication line is recovered from the disconnection.

(Communication procedure for determining that the frame control board has disconnected the communication line)
A communication procedure in which the main control board 120 determines that the communication line is disconnected will be described with reference to FIG.

First, when a notification message (gaming machine installation information notification, gaming machine information notification) is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120, a response message (gaming machine installation information notification) is sent from the frame control board 120 within 10ms. information response, gaming machine information response) is transmitted. Thereafter, when the timing for transmitting the notification message that arrives every 108 ms comes, the main control board 110 transmits the notification message to the frame control board 120, but a situation occurs where the frame control board 120 cannot receive the notification message.

Thereafter, a notification message is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 at a cycle of 108 ms, but if the period during which the frame control board 120 cannot receive the notification message continues for 1000 ms from the timing when the frame control board 120 receives the last notification message, The frame control board 120 reports an error by displaying an error code on the frame control display 125 or transmitting an error designation command to the performance control board 130, indicating that the communication line has been disconnected. Thereafter, if the notification message from the main control board 110 is successfully received, the error notification is terminated.

Note that when the game machine 1 is in the ball-ejecting state, information indicating that it is in the ball-ejecting state may be transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a disables all interrupts in step S1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and performs startup wait processing for other boards in step S3. Specifically, in order to ensure that no command is missed from the main control board 110, it waits for one second for the frame control board 120 and the production control board 130 to start up. Furthermore, in step S4, access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is permitted.

The main CPU 110a notifies gaming machine installation information in step S5. Specifically, "gaming machine installation information" (see FIG. 39) is transmitted to the frame control board 120. That is, when power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, "gaming machine installation information" is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S7, it is determined whether or not the result of receiving the gaming machine installation information notification has been responded. If the result of receiving the notification of gaming machine installation information is responded, the process moves to step S10, and if the result of receiving the notification of gaming machine installation information is not responded, the process moves to step S8. That is, as a result of transmitting the "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120, it is determined whether the receipt result is responded to (received) from the frame control board 120.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it is determined that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", the process moves to step S9, and if it is determined that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (less than 10), The process moves to step S5.

The main CPU 110a performs processing for notifying an error in step S9. Specifically, it is determined that there is an abnormality (for example, disconnection) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and a "game machine communication abnormality start designation command" is sent to the production control board 130, and the production is started. Under the control of the control board 130, an "intra-gaming machine communication abnormality error" is notified (see FIG. 115). Then, it waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of the gaming machine installation information 10 times but fails to respond with the result of receiving the gaming machine installation information notification, the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 If there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred, an error notification will be made and the game will not be possible. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game from being played even though there is a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

Note that, like this process, a process may be performed to determine whether there is an abnormality (for example, disconnection) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120; It can be said that the control program (main control program) that determines that a response cannot be received is a detection means that detects whether there is an abnormality (for example, a disconnection) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ball is being removed. Specifically, referring to the reception result of the notification of gaming machine installation information, if it is "0x00", it is determined that "reception is OK", and if it is "0x01", it is determined that "ball is out" (Figure 39 reference). If it is in the "bulb removed state", it waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

If the bulb is unplugged, after completing the process in step S10, the process will wait until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off, so the process from step S11 onwards will not be executed (the process related to power restoration will not be performed). (and the control state before the power cut is not restored). That is, since the "power restoration designation command" is no longer sent to the production control board 130 in step S24, the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification of "power restoration" (described later) are no longer executed. In this case, an audio notification and a screen notification of "ball extraction operation in progress" (described later) will be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the user from being unable to concentrate on the ball extraction work due to notifications of "power restoration" being executed during the ball extraction state or initial operations described below being executed. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is denied (if the bulb is not removed), the process moves to step S24 and a "power restoration designation command" is sent to the effect control board 130, so that the "power restoration" (described later) Audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification will be executed.

Similarly, when the bulb is removed, even if the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed and the power supply sw164 is turned on, the process does not proceed to the "RWM clear process" in step S19, so the "RWM clear process" is executed. Also, the "RWM clear designation command" is not sent to the production control board 130. As a result, the voice notification, screen notification, and illumination notification of "power on (RWM clear)" (described later) will not be executed. In this case, an audio notification and a screen notification of "ball extraction operation in progress" (described later) will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from being unable to concentrate on the ball extraction work due to the notification of "power on (RWM clear)" being executed during the ball extraction state. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is negative (if the ball is not removed), the process moves to the "RWM clear process" in step S19, the "RWM clear process" is executed, and the "RWM clear designation command" is used to control the production. Since the signal is transmitted to the board 130, audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification of "power on (RWM clear)" (described later) will be executed.

Similarly, when the bulb is removed, even if the power switch 164 is turned on with a setting change operation described later, the process does not proceed to the "setting change process" in step S14, so the "setting change process" is not executed. , "setting change designation command" is also not transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification of "setting change" (described later) will no longer be performed. In this case, an audio notification and a screen notification of "ball extraction operation in progress" (described later) will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from being unable to concentrate on the ball extraction work due to notification of "setting change" being executed during the ball extraction state. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is negative (if the ball is not in a state where the ball is not removed), the process moves to the "setting change process" in step S14, the "setting change process" is executed, and the "setting change designation command" is used to control the effect. Since the information is transmitted to the board 130, audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification of "setting change" (described later) will be executed.

Similarly, when the bulb is removed, even if the power sw164 is turned on with the setting confirmation operation described below, the process does not proceed to the "setting confirmation process" in step S22, so the "setting confirmation process" is not executed. , "setting confirmation designation command" is also not transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification for "setting confirmation" (described later) will no longer be performed. In this case, an audio notification and a screen notification of "ball extraction operation in progress" (described later) will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from being unable to concentrate on the ball extraction work due to the notification of "setting confirmation" being executed during the ball extraction state. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is negative (if the ball is not removed), the process moves to the "setting confirmation process" in step S22, the "setting confirmation process" is executed, and the "setting confirmation designation command" is used to control the production. Since the information is transmitted to the board 130, audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification of "setting confirmation" (described later) will be executed.

Similarly, if the ball is out, the state does not go to "all interruptions permitted" in step S33, so the game is not possible. Thereby, even though the ball is not drawn, the game can be played, and it is possible to prevent the ball picking operation from being delayed. For example, if a game becomes possible while a game ball is being ejected out of the game machine during the ball extraction state, the game ball will be ejected into the game area 5a, and the game ball will be placed at a position where it can be ejected again ( Although it is assumed that the ball extraction operation cannot be completed until the player returns to the position where the ball extraction is possible, this situation can be prevented. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is denied (if the ball is not in the unballed state), "all interruptions are permitted" is executed in step S33, and the game becomes possible.

Similarly, when the ball is out, the process does not proceed to "all interrupts allowed" in step S33 and does not proceed to the "error control process" of the main interrupt process, so the "error control process" is not executed, and for example "Magnet detection" and "abnormal prize detection" are not executed. As a result, the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification for "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" and "Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Winning Error)" (all of which will be described later) will not be executed. In this case, an audio notification and a screen notification of "ball extraction operation in progress" (described later) will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from being unable to concentrate on the ball extraction work due to the notifications of "fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)" and "fraud detection 2 (abnormal prize winning error)" being executed during the ball extraction state. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is denied (if the bulb is not removed), "all interrupts are permitted" is executed in step S33, and the "error control process" of the main interrupt process can be executed. "Magnet detection" and "abnormal prize detection" will also be possible.

Note that even if the ball is in the unballed state, the process may proceed to step S11 and subsequent steps. In other words, "power recovery", "power on (RWM clear)", "setting change", "setting confirmation", and "all interrupt permission" are processes executed by the main control board 110, and "bulb removed state" Since the control related to this is a process executed by the frame control board 120, "power recovery", "power on (RWM clear)", "setting change", "setting confirmation", and "all interrupts" are executed during the bulb removal state. ``permission'' may be performed.
In addition, when these are performed simultaneously, the effect control board 130 may notify the event with a higher priority according to the priority order shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, or may notify both events regardless of the priority order. Alternatively, the notification may always give priority to the ball-out state.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power has been restored, and the process moves to step S12; if the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that the power is turned on for the first time, and the process moves to step S13.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S14 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S15.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S14. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing is performed to change (update) the setting value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the advantage of the game. Note that details of the setting change process will be described later using FIG. 54. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S19.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S15. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S12. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), the process moves to step S16, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), The process moves to step S17. Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value (during game) area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value (during game) area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S18, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value (during game) area is not within the appropriate range. , the process moves to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing as an RWM abnormality. Specifically, Bit 5 of “Fraud Detection State 1” (see Figure 40) is set to “1”, and “HC/Fraud Monitoring Information” for which Bit 5 of the “Fraud Detection State 1” is “1” is controlled by the frame. Processing for transmitting data to the board 120 is performed. In addition, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 115 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130, the timer assignment is performed. Sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit interrupts, and performs a process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for notifying an unrecoverable error.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.
Note that although the "unrecoverable error" is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be cleared when RWM clear is executed without the setting change process.

The main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed in step S18. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be executed and the process moves to step S19, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S21.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S19. Specifically, processing is performed to initialize the gaming control state (initialize the gaming RWM area other than the setting value area). Note that details of the RWM clear processing will be described later using FIG. 56. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S20.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command to the production control board 130 indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state). Send. As a result, the production control board 130 performs processing for executing power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135" ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit up in a predetermined color (for example, red) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to indicate that the device has been initialized.
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70, a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the first image display device 70.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S22 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S23.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S22. Specifically, processing is performed to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during game) area of the gaming RWM area on the information display 115. Note that details of the setting confirmation process will be described later using FIG. 57.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the gaming RWM area, and sets the gaming RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for terminating setting confirmation notification, etc., which will be described later, and executing power recovery notification.

The “power recovery notification” is a notification to make the user recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the first image display device 70 displays the initial screen (background image and The frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds), the audio output device 9 A power restoration notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power outage) is output for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power restoration notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the first image display device 70.

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (such as a special symbol storage designation command and a normal symbol storage designation command, which will be described later) to the production control board 130 in step S25. This makes it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and also performs processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70. .

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S26. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. In addition to the timing of this step S26, this setting value designation command may be sent every time the variable display of the special symbol starts, or every time the jackpot game starts. It's okay.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether the acquisition upper limit device activation flag is ON. Specifically, with reference to the main RAM 110c, it is determined whether the acquisition upper limit device activation flag is ON (for example, 0=OFF, 1=ON). If the acquisition upper limit device activation flag is OFF (eg, 0), the process moves to step S28, and if the acquisition upper limit device activation flag is ON (eg, 1), the process moves to step S29.

Note that the "acquisition upper limit device activation flag" refers to the flag that is determined in the later-described "acquisition upper limit activation determination process" when the maximum increase number (also referred to as "maximum MY") satisfies a predetermined value (for example, 95,000). This is a flag that turns ON when In other words, the "acquisition upper limit device" is a device that is activated when it is determined that the maximum increase number has met a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) (during a jackpot, it is activated after the jackpot ends). When activated, it becomes impossible to play on the gaming machine, and after the gaming parlor closes, the main RAM 110c of the gaming machine is initialized, making it virtually impossible to play on the gaming machine until the next day's opening time. It is a device that performs In addition, "the maximum increase number met a predetermined value (for example, 95,000)" is intended to mean, for example, "more than" 95,000, and depending on the situation, it may be exactly "95,000" It may be determined that the value of "95005" (for example, 95,000) is satisfied, or it may be determined that the predetermined value (for example, 95,000) is satisfied with "95005".

In step S28, the main CPU 110a turns on (outputs) a firing permission signal that allows the main control board 110 to fire the game ball to the firing device. Thereby, when the firing permission signal from the frame control board 120 is turned on (output), the firing device can fire the game ball. Note that the frame control board 120 does not output a launch permission signal, but the main control board 110 outputs a launch permission signal, and by outputting the launch permission signal from the main control board 110, the game with the launch device is prevented. It may also be possible to shoot the ball.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits to the performance control board 130 an acquisition upper limit device operating command indicating that the “acquisition upper limit device” has been activated. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for notifying that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated. Then, when the acquisition upper limit device operation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, the process moves to step S30.

"Notification that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated" is a notification to make the user recognize that it is impossible to continue the game any longer, and the first image display device 70, for example, displays white on a black background. This is to display a text message such as ``The acquisition limit device has been activated. Today's game is over.''

As mentioned above, an example of the operation of the "acquisition upper limit device" is the maximum increase in the number of prize balls (also known as "maximum MY") that occurs when a game ball enters the big winning hole 50 or the general winning hole 43 during a jackpot. ) satisfies a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the acquisition upper limit device is activated after the jackpot ends. For example, in a jackpot awarded for 10 rounds, if the maximum increase number meets a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) in the 5th round, you can continue playing the jackpot until the 10th round, but After finishing the jackpot ending, the acquisition cap device will be activated. Thereby, while providing a healthy game, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from ending midway and causing discomfort to the player.

Another example of the operation of the "acquisition upper limit device" is that regardless of the gaming state, during a variable display or a customer waiting state (or during a customer waiting demonstration performance), the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, the general When the maximum increase in the number of prize balls generated by winning game balls in the winning hole 43 satisfies a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the acquisition upper limit device is activated immediately.

Another example of the operation of the "acquisition upper limit device" is that in the case of the above-mentioned "small win RUSH type", the game ball is placed in the small win big prize opening by the "small win game" (see Figure 37). If the maximum increase in the number of prize balls generated by this method satisfies a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the acquisition upper limit device is activated after the "small winning game" is completed. Thereby, while providing a healthy game, it is possible to prevent the small winning game from ending midway and causing discomfort to the player.

As another example of the operation of the "acquisition upper limit device", in the case of the above-mentioned "Type 1 type 2 type", for example, in the small winning game of the 1st round of "Jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)" If the maximum increase in the number of prize balls generated by winning a game ball in the "specific area" established in The acquisition upper limit device is activated after the activated jackpot game (2nd to 4th round) is completed. On the other hand, in the first round of the small winning game of "Jackpot Game 3 (4 Rounds)", the game ball could not be won in the "specific area" set in the big winning hole, and it ended up in the "non-specific area". In the case where a game ball is placed in a prize, and the maximum increase in the number of prize balls generated by placing a game ball in the "non-specific area" satisfies a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), , the acquisition upper limit device is activated after the first round of small winning games is completed (the second to fourth round of jackpot games are not activated). As a result, if you win in a "specific area", the acquisition limit device will operate after the jackpot game ends, and if you win in the "non-specific area", the acquisition limit device will operate after the small win game ends. In either case, it is possible to prevent the players from feeling uncomfortable without doing things half-heartedly.

Furthermore, if a player who is not familiar with gaming machines plays a game without knowing the existence of the "earning cap device" and the "gain capping device" is activated, it may cause confusion and dissatisfaction to the player. . Therefore, it is preferable to actively notify that the gaming machine 1 is equipped with an "acquisition upper limit device." For example, on the customer waiting demo screen during the customer waiting demo performance, the first image display device 70 (main LCD) may display something like "Equipped with an acquisition limit device", or the third image display device 72 (left image display ) or the fourth image display device 73 (right side image display device). Alternatively, it may be displayed at the ending of a jackpot game.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a clears (initializes) an increase number counter (also referred to as "MY counter"), and the increase number counter will be described later. Then, when the increase number counter is cleared, the process moves to step S31.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), in step S32, permits all interrupts, and moves the process to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol determination to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S35, updates the random number value for jackpot determination. An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

In step S36, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether a power outage detection signal is input from the power outage detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power outage detection signal is not input, the process moves to step S34, and the power outage detection is performed. If a signal is input, the process moves to step S37.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step S37, clears the output port in step S38, and clears the gaming RWM area (setting value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S39. In step S40, a process is performed to save a backup flag in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S41, Processing is performed to prohibit RAM access, and the process waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a notifies the HC/fraud monitoring information in step S14-1. Specifically, Bit 0 of "Fraud Detection State 1" (see Figure 40) is set to "1", and "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" for which Bit 0 of the "Fraud Detection State 1" is "1" is controlled by the frame. Processing for transmitting data to the board 120 is performed.

In step S14-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S14-3, it is determined whether the reception result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded. If the result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification is responded, the process moves to step S14-6, and if the result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification is not responded, the process goes to step S14-4. Migrate. That is, as a result of transmitting the "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120, it is determined whether the frame control board 120 has responded (received) the reception result.

In step S14-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it is determined that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", the process moves to step S14-5, and if it is determined that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (less than 10) Then, the process moves to step S14-1.

The main CPU 110a performs processing for notifying an error in step S14-5. Note that the process for notifying the error is the same as step S9, so the explanation here will be omitted. Then, it waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times, but cannot respond with the result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, the main control board 110 and the frame control board Since there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred between 120 and 120, an error notification is made and the game is not possible. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game from being played even though there is a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the production control board 130 in step S14-6. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing setting change notification to notify that the setting value is being changed.

"Setting change notification" means displaying a setting change screen on the first image display device 70 indicating that the setting value is being changed, or displaying a setting change screen on the first image display device 70, or displaying a setting change screen on the first image display device 70, or displaying a setting change screen on the first image display device 70 while changing the settings of the frame lighting device 10 or panel lighting device 76. This means that all the lights are turned on with a predetermined emission color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a settings change notification sound (“Settings are being changed”) indicating that settings are being changed. This makes it possible for the game store clerk to understand that settings are being changed by checking the first image display device 70, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the audio output device 9.

In step S14-7, the main CPU 110a subtracts the setting value in the setting value (playing) area by 1 and saves it in the setting value (changing) area. Initialize (clear to 0) the setting value (during game) area.

In step S14-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value (currently being changed) area is within an appropriate range (here, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S14-11, and it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area is not within the appropriate range. If so, the process moves to step S14-10.

In step S14-10, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value "0" to the setting value in the setting value (currently being changed) area. Then, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113 in step S14-11. Specifically, with reference to the setting value in the setting value (currently being changed) area, a value added by +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 115. This allows the game store clerk to check the information display 115 and understand the setting value before the change.

In step S14-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a setting value update operation, the process moves to step S14-13, and if there is no setting value update operation, the process moves to step S14-16.

The main CPU 110a updates the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area by +1 in step S14-13, and performs setting value correction processing in step S14-14. Specifically, when the updated set value is "4", which exceeds the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3), a process is performed to correct the set value to "0".

The main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 115 in step S14-15. Specifically, with reference to the setting value in the setting value (currently being changed) area, a value added by +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 115. This allows the game store clerk to check the information display 115 to understand the setting value before it is finalized.

In step S14-16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting value confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a setting value confirmation operation, it is assumed that the setting value is fixed (setting change mode is ended) and the process moves to step S14-17; if there is no setting value confirmation operation, the setting value is updated. The process moves to step S14-12 assuming that there is a possibility that this will occur.

In step S14-17, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area and saves it in the setting value (currently playing) area, and in step S14-18, the main CPU 110a increases the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area. Initialize the value (clear to 0).

In step S14-18, the main CPU 110a ends displaying the setting values on the information display 115, and ends the current setting change process. Note that the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on with the start of the setting change process, and the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned off with the end of the setting change process. Thereby, the game store clerk can check the status confirmation display 68 to know that the settings are being changed.

(Modified example of main control board setting change processing)
A setting change process (modified example) of the main control board 110 will be described using FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110. In addition, in FIG. 55, only the parts different from FIG. 54 will be explained.

In step S14-5, the main CPU 110a sets an error notification flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. After setting the error notification flag, the process moves to step S14-6. That is, in FIG. 54, the error notification process is performed and the game is stopped in step S14-5, but in FIG. 55, only the error notification flag is set, the error notification process is not executed, and the game is not stopped. The difference is that the process moves to step S14-6 instead.

Then, in step S14-20, the main CPU 110a refers to a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c and determines whether the error notification flag is set. For example, if the bit indicating the error notification flag is ON, it is determined that the error notification flag is set, and if the bit indicating the error notification flag is OFF, it is determined that the error notification flag is not set. If it is determined that the error notification flag is set, the process moves to step S14-21, and if it is determined that the error notification flag is not set, the current setting change process is ended. That is, in FIG. 54, the current setting change process is ended in step S14-19, but in FIG. 55, the error notification flag is set in step S14-20 without ending the process in step S14-19. If it is set, a "gaming machine communication abnormality start designation command" is set and transmitted to the production control board 130, thereby notifying the "gaming machine communication abnormality error". They differ in some respects.

In other words, in the modified example of FIG. If it cannot be received (for example, if there is a high probability that a disconnection has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120), step S14-20 and step S14 after completing the main processing in the setting change processing. -21 now notifies you of an "internal communication error within the gaming machine." As a result, the notification of the ``intra-gaming machine communication abnormality error'' is executed after the notification of the ``setting change'' is completed, so it is possible to prevent the notification from being difficult to understand due to being made at the same time. Further, since it is possible to deal with the "intra-gaming machine communication abnormality error" after completing the setting change process, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the employees.

Note that the setting change process is performed after the main control board main process in FIG. It can be said that the frame control board 120 and the frame control board 120 were in a state where they could communicate normally (a state in which there was no disconnection or the like). On the other hand, in FIGS. 54 and 55, the fact that the reception result of HC/fraud monitoring information cannot be received normally means that the main control board 110 and the frame control board It can be said that the state has become such that normal communication with 120 is not possible (a state in which a disconnection, etc. has occurred). In this way, by periodically monitoring whether the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 are in a state where they can communicate normally even after step S7 is completed, the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 can be maintained. It is possible to prevent disadvantageous situations for players due to lack of coordination.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a notifies the HC/fraud monitoring information in step S19-1. Specifically, Bit 2 of "Fraud Detection State 1" (see Figure 40) is set to "1", and the "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" for which Bit 2 of the "Fraud Detection State 1" is "1" is controlled. Processing for transmitting data to the board 120 is performed.

In step S19-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S19-3, it is determined whether the reception result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded. If the result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification is responded, the process moves to step S19-6, and if the result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification is not responded, the process goes to step S19-4. Migrate. That is, as a result of transmitting the "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120, it is determined whether the frame control board 120 has responded (received) the reception result.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it is determined that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", the process moves to step S19-5, and if it is determined that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (less than 10) Then, the process moves to step S19-1.

The main CPU 110a performs processing for error notification in step S19-5. Note that the process for notifying the error is the same as step S9, so the explanation here will be omitted. Then, it waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times, but cannot respond with the result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, the main control board 110 and the frame control board Since there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred between 120 and 120, an error notification is made and the game is not possible. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game from being played even though there is a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value saved in the setting value (during game) area of the gaming RWM area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the setting value is within the appropriate range (setting change processing has been performed in the past), the process moves to step S19-7, and the setting value is not within the appropriate range (setting change processing has not been performed in the past). If so, the process moves to step S19-9.

In step S19-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c other than the set value area. As a result, the game progress state will be initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of gaming machine 1), and the data (other than the setting values) in the gaming RWM area before RWM clear will not be carried over. Become.

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is ON. Specifically, with reference to the main RAM 110c, it is determined whether the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is ON (for example, 1). If the acquisition upper limit actuation device flag is ON, the process moves to step S19-9, and if the acquisition upper limit actuation device flag is not ON, the process moves to step S19-10.

The main CPU 110a turns off the acquisition upper limit operating device flag in step S19-9. Specifically, the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is turned OFF (for example, set to 0) in the main RAM 110c. In this way, when the acquisition upper limit device is activated, if the RWM clearing process of the main control board is performed, the acquisition upper limit device is deactivated and the game becomes possible. Therefore, if the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the player cannot deactivate the acquisition upper limit device, and it must be deactivated by the RWM clearing process of the main control board by the game parlor manager. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing even when the maximum number of increases reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), and to realize a healthy game.

In step S19-10, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear designation command to the frame control board 120 and the production control board 130, and ends the current RWM clear processing.

In the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, when the RWM clear processing (initialization of the main RAM 110c) of the main control board 110 is performed, the RWM clear designation command is sent to the frame control board 120, and the frame control board 120 also performs the frame control board 120. Control RAM 120c is initialized. As a result, if you press the power sw 164 while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (performing the RWM clear operation), both the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c are initialized, so the main control board 110 and the frame There is no need to perform an RWM clear operation on each of the control boards 120, and work efficiency can be improved.

The area (information) that is initialized in the frame control RAM 120c by the RWM clear operation is each information of the "data type" (see FIG. 42) in the HC/fraud monitoring information received from the main control board 110. If the information is temporarily stored in a buffer before being processed, the information stored in the buffer is cleared. The information in "Data Type" (see Figure 42) includes "Starting Port Winning", "Big Winning Port Winning in Special Electric Accessory Activation", "Winning Port Winning", "All Starting Port Winning", and "Design Confirmed". ``Number of times'', ``Number of jackpot wins'', ``Number of accessory items (number of times the big winning hole is opened)'', ``Specific area passage'', ``External terminal board pulse output'', and ``Performance information status notification''.

On the other hand, the areas (information) that are not initialized in the frame control RAM 120c by the RWM clear operation include the game ball number storage area, the storage area related to "display performance information (normal base value)", and the area from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171. This is a buffer in which information to be sent to is temporarily stored. This can prevent necessary information from being initialized.

In addition, by sending the RWM clear designation command to the production control board 130, notification that RWM clear has been performed (error notification of "power on (RWM clear)" described later) is controlled by the production control board 130. This is executed, but in this notification, the audio notification "RWM has been cleared" and the BGM "Insertion BGM" are repeatedly output. In other words, the RWM clearing operation initializes the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c, but the presentation control board 130 simply outputs a voice saying "RWM has been cleared", for example, " Notifications such as "The main RWM has been cleared" or "The frame control RWM has been cleared" are not made. As a result, only one piece of audio data is required, and there is no need to create new audio data for the frame control RAM 120c, so it is possible to efficiently notify that RWM clearing has been performed. .

Note that it is also possible to output a voice saying "Main RWM has been cleared" or "Frame control RWM has been cleared." With this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that all RWMs have been initialized, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for employees to understand.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S19-11. Specifically, after displaying the setting value error information "E" on the information display 115 and transmitting a non-recoverable error designation command indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130, the timer interrupt is executed. Sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit interrupts, and performs a process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a notifies the HC/fraud monitoring information in step S22-1. Specifically, Bit 1 of "Fraud Detection State 1" (see Figure 40) is set to "1", and "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" for which Bit 1 of the "Fraud Detection State 1" is "1" is controlled by the frame. Processing for transmitting data to the board 120 is performed.

In step S22-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S22-3, it is determined whether the reception result of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been responded. If the result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification is responded, the process moves to step S22-6, and if the result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification is not responded, the process goes to step S22-4. Migrate. That is, as a result of transmitting the "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120, it is determined whether the frame control board 120 has responded (received) the reception result.

In step S22-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it is determined that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", the process moves to step S22-5, and if it is determined that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (less than 10) Then, the process moves to step S22-1.

The main CPU 110a performs processing for error notification in step S22-5. Note that the process for notifying the error is the same as step S9, so the explanation here will be omitted. Then, it waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times, but cannot respond with the result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, the main control board 110 and the frame control board Since there is a possibility that a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) has occurred between 120 and 120, an error notification is made and the game is not possible. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game from being played even though there is a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S22-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value saved in the setting value (during game) area of the gaming RWM area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the setting value is within the appropriate range (setting change processing has been performed in the past), the process moves to step S22-7, and the setting value is not within the appropriate range (setting change processing has not been performed in the past). If so, the process moves to step S22-11.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the production control board 130 in step S22-7. Thereby, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 will be performed.

“Setting confirmation notification” means displaying a setting confirmation screen on the first image display device 70 indicating that the settings are being confirmed, or displaying a setting confirmation screen on the first image display device 70, or displaying a setting confirmation screen for the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 while the settings are being confirmed. This means that all the lights are turned on with a predetermined luminescent color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Setting values are being confirmed”) indicating that the settings are being confirmed. This makes it possible for the game store clerk to understand that settings are being confirmed by checking the first image display device 70, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the audio output device 9.

The main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 115 in step S22-8. Specifically, with reference to the setting value in the setting value (playing) area, a number (1 to 4 in this case) indicating the setting value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 115. This allows the game store clerk to check the information display 113 to understand the current set value.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S22-9 whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process moves to step S27-7, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S22-9 is repeated.

In step S22-10, the main CPU 110a ends displaying the setting values on the information display 115, and ends the current setting change process. Note that the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on with the start of the setting confirmation process, and the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation process. Thereby, the game store clerk can check the status confirmation display 68 to know that the settings are being confirmed.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S22-11. Specifically, after displaying the setting value error information "E" on the information display 115 and transmitting a non-recoverable error designation command indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130, the timer interrupt is executed. Disables interrupts and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the "setting change operation" is performed, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 0 of "fraud detection status 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S14-1, and " If "RWM clear operation" is performed, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 2 of "Fraud detection status 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S19-1, and "Setting confirmation operation" is performed. If this has been done, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 1 of "fraud detection state 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S22-1. This makes it possible for the gaming machine information center to understand that each operation that affects the game has been performed. It is possible to monitor whether the RWM clear operation has been performed outside of business hours after the acquisition upper limit device has been activated.

In addition, even when the power sw164 is turned on while pressing the number of game balls clear button 121b (when the process to clear the number of game balls is performed), Bit 3 of the fraud detection state 2 of the frame control board 120 is Information indicating that the number is "1" is transmitted to the gaming machine information center.
On the other hand, when the power supply sw 164 is turned on while pressing the ball extraction button 122b (when the ball extraction operation process is performed), there is no communication from the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120 to the gaming machine information center. No information is sent.
In other words, the main purpose of the ball removal operation, which is to eject the game ball outside the game ball, is to maintain the game ball, and there is also a low probability that it is a fraudulent act, so compared to the above-mentioned ``setting change operation,'' etc. It can be said that the degree of influence and security level are low. Therefore, even if the ball extraction operation is not subject to management at the gaming machine information center, no problems will arise, and it is possible to draw a line between information that is necessary to properly manage the gaming machine 1 and information that is unnecessary. By having the gaming machine information center receive all kinds of information (receiving everything), it is possible to prevent the amount of information to be managed from becoming negligent.

In summary, if the first operation (for example, "setting change operation", "RWM clear operation", "setting confirmation operation", "game ball count clear operation") is involved when the power sw164 is turned on, each operation Information indicating that the operation has been performed is transmitted to the gaming machine information center, but if a second operation (for example, "ball removal operation") is involved when the power sw 164 is turned on, it is determined that the operation has been performed. This means that information indicating this is not sent to the gaming machine information center.
Note that when the power sw 164 is turned on and a second operation (for example, "ball removal operation") is involved, information indicating that the operation has been performed is transmitted to the gaming machine information center. There is no problem.

Note that although a modification of the setting confirmation process is omitted, the setting confirmation process may also be configured as in the modification of the setting change process (FIG. 55). Specifically, in step S22-5, only the error notification flag is set, the process moves to step S22-6, and after completing the process of step S22-10, the error notification flag is set in step S22-11. is set, and if the error notification flag is set, in step S22-12, a "gaming machine communication abnormality start designation command" is set and transmitted to the production control board 130. It may also be configured such that an "intra-gaming machine communication abnormality error" is notified. Thereby, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described in the description of the modified example of the setting change process (FIG. 55).

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt processing, after all interrupts are permitted in step S33 in FIG. Executed by input.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area in step S100, and performs time control processing in step S105. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric accessories.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a refers to the main RAM 110c and determines whether the acquisition upper limit device activation flag is OFF. If the acquisition upper limit device operation flag is OFF, the process moves to step S120 to perform game progress control (specific control processing), and if the acquisition upper limit device operation flag is ON, game progress control (specific control processing) is performed. The process moves to step S500, assuming that the process) is not performed. Note that the acquisition upper limit device and the acquisition upper limit device activation flag will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs specific random number update processing in step S120. Specifically, random values for jackpot determination, special symbol determination random values, special pattern fluctuation pattern determination random values, hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, and regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination random values are updated. Specifically, processing is performed to update each random value and random number counter by adding +1 to them. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial random value is set as a new initial value for each cycle, and the random value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process in step S130. Specifically, similar to step S35 in FIG. 53, processing is performed to update the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, it is determined whether there is an input to various switches such as the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. It performs processing to set predetermined data if there is an input. Note that details of the input control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure special electric control processing in step S300. Specifically, the determination of the special pattern determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and the big winning hole. 50, opening/closing, setting of gaming status, etc. In addition, the details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs general electric power control processing in step S400. Specifically, processing such as determination of the obtained normal pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44, variable display of the normal pattern, and opening/closing of the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game) is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs acquisition upper limit management processing in step S450. Specifically, when there is an input to the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the out detection switch 39a, the corresponding switch will be activated. Update the counter. Note that details of the acquisition upper limit management process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process in step S500. Specifically, with reference to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, payouts corresponding to various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50) are made. Processing for transmitting a number designation command to the frame control board 120 is performed. As a result, the frame control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls (a process for adding up the number of game balls (gaming value) owned by the player).

The main CPU 110a performs error control processing in step S550. For example, if a magnet is detected, a command indicating magnet detection may be sent to the production control board 130 in order to set Bit 3 of Fraud Detection Status 1 (FIG. 40) to "1" or to notify that a magnet has been detected. Perform processing for sending. As a result, the production control board 130 executes processing for notifying magnet detection. Note that details of the error control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information management processing in step S600. Specifically, processing is performed to transmit HC/fraud monitoring information to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. For example, in step S550, if Bit 3 of Fraud Detection State 1 (FIG. 40) is set to "1", HC/Fraud Monitoring indicates that Bit 3 of Fraud Detection State 1 (FIG. 40) is set to "1". The information is transmitted to the slot control board 120 and ultimately to the gaming machine information center. Note that details of the HC/fraud monitoring information management process will be described later.

Main CPU 110a performs data creation processing in step S700. Specifically, the starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing data output to the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first special symbol display 60, and the second special symbol display 61. Special symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, special symbol reserve display data output to the first special symbol reserve display 63, second special symbol reserve display 64, normal symbol reserve Processing is performed to create data such as normal symbol pending display data to be output to the display 65.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S750. Specifically, the port output process outputs signals such as the starting opening opening/closing data and the big winning opening opening/closing data created in step S600, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol pending display data, and normal symbol. Display output processing that outputs signals such as pending display data to various indicators, payout command transmission processing that sends commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the frame control board 120, and production of the main RAM 110c A production command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) to the frame control board 120 and production control board 130 is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and processing for paying out the prize ball is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the big winning hole detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 50, and processing for paying out the winning ball is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 45, and a process for paying out the prize ball is performed. At the same time, processing for acquiring and storing special figure determination information is performed. Note that details of the first starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and a process for paying out a prize ball is performed. At the same time, processing for acquiring and storing special figure determination information is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, it is a process for determining whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing normal pattern determination information. I do.

The main CPU 110a performs out detection switch input processing in step S260. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the out detection switch 39a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the out port 39, and the current input control process is ended.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for 3-prize balls by adding data indicating 3-prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination Information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than four. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first starting opening Detection switch input processing ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first reserved number of special drawings (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the first reserved number of special drawings (U1) is updated. A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to (U1) is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the first pending icons of the number corresponding to the first special symbol pending number (U1) are displayed on the first image display device 70. Become.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for empty storage sections in order from the first storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol acquired in step S230-3 in the vacant storage section. Store figure determination information.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current non-time saving gaming state is in progress. If it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state, the current first starting opening detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-9. In this first preliminary determination process, the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. A first starting opening winning designation command is generated for notifying the performance control board 130 of the scheduled fluctuation pattern.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting opening winning designation command generated in step S230-9 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first starting winning information can be sent to the production control board 130 as a first starting opening winning specifying command, and the sub CPU 130a of the producing control board 130 that has received the first starting opening winning specifying command Even before the start of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning-in-place prize designation command, a pre-reading notice (e.g., continuous notice performance, icon It becomes possible to perform a change performance).

In addition, since the same processing as the first starting opening detection switch input processing is performed for the second starting opening detection switch input processing, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the three prize ball counter, and the first special symbol pending number (U1), 1st special figure judgment information holding storage area, non-time-saving gaming state, 1st advance judgment process, 1st starting opening winning designation command part, 2nd starting opening detection switch 47a, 2 prize ball counter, It may be read as the second special figure reservation number (U2), the second special figure determination information reservation storage area, the time-saving gaming state, the second preliminary determination process, and the second starting opening winning designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "4", but it may be greater or less than this. Moreover, the upper limit value of the second special figure reservation number may be made smaller than the upper limit value of the first special figure reservation number. Furthermore, the second reserved storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special symbol determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol determination information storage area.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric line processing data = 0, a special symbol memory determination process (step S310) is executed to start the variable display of special symbols based on the reserved memory, and the special figure special electric line processing data = If it is 1, special symbol fluctuation processing (step S320) is executed to stop and display the special symbol as the fluctuation time elapses, and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the special symbol is displayed as the stop time elapses and the special symbol is stopped. A special symbol stop process (step S330) for transferring the jackpot game is executed according to the type of If the special figure special electric processing data=4, the jackpot game ending process (step S350) for ending the jackpot game is executed. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

This "special figure special electric line processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control process as described later, so the subroutines necessary for the game will be processed as appropriate. .

(Special symbol memory determination processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S310-4. move.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1," and in step S310-6, the second special figure reservation number (U2) corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after the subtraction. A special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the second special figure determination information storage area. A shift process is performed on the stored data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S319-1. move.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a updates the special figure reservation number (U1) corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. A symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol holding storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction is stored in the main RAM 110c. set in a predetermined area. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the second special figure reservation number is However, in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special drawing judgment information holding storage area is It may be shifted (subtracting the number of reserved 1st special symbols and the number of reserved 2nd special symbols in the winning order), or the 1st special symbol determination information retention storage area may be prioritized over the 2nd special symbol determination information retention storage area. You may also shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number with priority over the second special figure reservation number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a jackpot and the stop special symbol data of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. Execute jackpot determination processing.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern variation pattern determination process that determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. I do. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variable performance pattern which is a performance mode of a variable performance performed during the variable display of special symbols is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , starts changing display of special symbols. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S750, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

(Acquisition upper limit management process for main control board)
The acquisition upper limit management process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing acquisition upper limit management processing in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an increase counter update process in step S450-1. Specifically, the number of payouts (number of acquired balls) that will be paid out by winning game balls into various winning holes, and the number of outs (fired balls fired into the game area) from the game area 5a. ), etc., performs processing to update the increment counter. Note that details of the increment number counter updating process will be described later using FIG. 64.

The main CPU 110a performs maximum increase number update processing in step S450-2. Specifically, by referring to the increase number counter (also referred to as "MY counter") provided in the main RAM 110c, the value of the increase number counter is determined to be the (current) maximum increase number (also referred to as "maximum MY") value. If it is larger than , the maximum increase number (information regarding the maximum increase number stored in the main RAM 110c) is updated.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S450-3. Specifically, in order to transmit information regarding the maximum increase number to the effect control board 130, a maximum increase number command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

The maximum increase number command may be sent to the production control board 130 periodically, or may not be sent before the maximum increase number reaches a specified value (for example, 90000), and the maximum increase number command may be sent to the production control board 130. It may be sent periodically later.

The main CPU 110a performs acquisition upper limit device operation determination processing in step S450-4. Specifically, it is determined whether the maximum number of increases satisfies a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), and if the maximum number of increases satisfies a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the acquisition Perform processing to activate the upper limit device. The details of the acquisition upper limit device operation determination process will be described later using FIG. 65. Then, the current acquisition upper limit device operation determination process ends.

(Main control board increment counter update processing)
The increment counter updating process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the increment counter update process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S450-1-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is general winning hole winning information indicating that a game ball has won in the general winning hole 43. Specifically, it is determined whether the five prize ball counter updated in the general winning a prize opening detection switch input process of step S210 described above is greater than zero. If there is no general winning opening winning information, the process moves to step S450-1-3, and if there is general winning opening winning information, in step S450-1-2, the increase number counter (MY counter) is The number of prize balls in the winning hole 43, "5", is added.

In step S450-1-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is grand prize opening winning information indicating that a game ball has won in the grand winning opening 50. Specifically, it is determined whether the 15 prize balls counter updated in the big winning opening detection switch input process of step S220 described above is greater than 0. If there is no big winning opening winning information, the process moves to step S450-1-5, and if there is big winning opening winning information, in step S450-1-4, a large number is added to the increase number counter (MY counter). The number of prize balls in the prize opening 50, "15", is added.

In step S450-1-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is first starting hole winning information indicating that a game ball has won in the first starting hole 45. Specifically, it is determined whether the three prize ball counter updated in the first starting opening detection switch input process of step S230 described above is greater than zero. If there is no first starting opening winning information, the process moves to step S450-1-7, and if there is first starting opening winning information, in step S450-1-6, the increase number counter (MY counter) "3", which is the number of prize balls in the first starting port 45, is added to the number.

In step S450-1-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is second starting hole winning information indicating that a game ball has won in the second starting hole 47. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the two prize ball counter updated in the second starting port detection switch input process in step S240 described above is greater than zero. If there is no second starting opening winning information, the process moves to step S450-1-9, and if there is second starting opening winning information, in step S450-1-8, the increase number counter (MY counter) ``2'', which is the number of prize balls in the second starting port 47, is added to .

In step S450-1-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is out-ball detection information indicating that a game ball has won in the out-hole 39. Specifically, it is determined whether the out ball detection counter updated in the out detection switch input process in step S260 described above is greater than zero. If there is no out ball detection information, the current increment number counter update process is ended, and if there is out ball detection information, the increment number counter (MY counter) is set to "0" in step S450-1-10. Determine whether it is larger than . If the increase number counter is not greater than "0", that is, if it is "0", the current increase number counter update process is ended; if the increase number counter is greater than "0", step S450- At step 1-11, "1" is subtracted from the increase number counter, and the current increase number counter updating process is completed.

Note that the "increase number counter" is a counter for calculating the maximum increase number (also referred to as "maximum MY"), and when the gaming parlor is opened (when the gaming machine 1 is powered on), the increase number counter is The value of is "0", and the value of the maximum increase number is also "0". For example, after the opening of the game parlor, a game is started and game balls launched into the gaming area 5a enter various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50). Then, the increment counter is incremented by the number of prize balls. On the other hand, when the game ball launched into the game area 5a flows into the out port 39, if the increase number counter has a value larger than "0", the increase number counter is subtracted by 1, and the increase number counter becomes "0". In this case, the increment counter is not subtracted and remains at "0". Therefore, when a jackpot game in which a game ball can be won in the jackpot opening 50 is executed, the value of the increase number counter changes greatly. For example, if 1,500 prize balls are awarded as a result of firing 100 game balls during a jackpot game that started with the increase number counter set to "0," then 1,400 game balls will be earned. Therefore, the value of the increase number counter becomes "1400". In the maximum increase number update process (step S450-2) executed at this time, if the stored maximum increase number is smaller than "1400", the maximum increase number is updated to "1400". After that, by executing multiple jackpot games before the value of the increase number counter is subtracted to "0", the value of the increase number counter gradually increases to "95000" or more, and the maximum increase number When the amount exceeds 95,000, the acquisition limit device will be activated.

The increment counter is set in the information RWM area, and the upper limit value that can be stored is "95013". For example, if one game ball is fired when the value of the increase number counter is "94999", the value of the increase number counter is updated to "94998", and at this time, the big prize opening 50 (10 prize balls) When one game ball wins, the value of the increase number counter becomes "95008". As described above, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the condition for the acquisition upper limit device to operate is that the value of the increase number counter reaches "95000", but the difference in the number of prize balls for each winning hole, In reality, depending on the prize winning situation, etc., it is rare for the increment number counter to end counting at exactly "95,000", and there are cases where the increment number counter exceeds "95,000". Therefore, for example, it is possible to store counts up to "95013" (with a certain width), and it is not possible to store counts exceeding "95013". The reason why it is "95013" is that when the value of the increase number counter is "94999", one game ball is fired and the value of the increase number counter is updated to "94998", and then according to the rules of the gaming machine. This is because it is designed to be compatible with gaming machines equipped with specifications that can award a maximum number of prize balls of ``15'' for a stipulated 1 winning. Since the maximum number of prize balls of the gaming machine in this embodiment is "10" (prize balls of 50 big winning holes), originally the upper limit that can be counted and stored in the increase number counter should be "95008", but As mentioned above, if you are planning to develop or design a gaming machine in the future that is equipped with specifications that can award the maximum number of prize balls of "15", the upper limit that can be stored in the increment counter from the beginning will be set to "95013". By doing so, you can reduce the effort required to make design changes. However, the upper limit value that can be stored in the increase number counter may be set for each gaming machine to a value that takes into account the maximum number of prize balls of that gaming machine.

It should be noted that although it has been stated that a count that exceeds "95013" is not stored (an upper limit is set for the value that can be stored as a count), it is not necessary to set an upper limit. For example, if a jackpot game is started when the increase number counter is "94990", "1400" in the above example may be added and the increase number counter may become "96390". That is, even after the increase number counter reaches "95000" during the jackpot game, the increase number counter may continue to be updated until the jackpot game ends (until the acquisition upper limit device is activated).

When the increase number counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90000), the value of the increase number counter is displayed on the third image display device 72 (advance notification is performed). The value of the increase number counter is displayed in real time in conjunction with the value of the increase number counter. For example, if there is 1 prize, an updated display corresponding to the 1 prize will be displayed. This makes it easier to see how long it will take for the acquisition limit device to activate before it activates, so it is possible to prevent players from being surprised by the acquisition limit device suddenly activating without any prior warning. .

Note that the display (advance notification) of the value of the increase number counter is not limited to the third image display device 72, but can also be performed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the fourth image display device 72. It may be displayed on any of the display devices 73 (right side image display device).

Also, although we assumed that the value of the increase number counter would be displayed, instead of displaying the value of the increase number counter, for example, a display (countdown type advance notification) such as ``Acquisition limit device will be activated in 〇〇〇〇 rounds left will be displayed. You may. In this case, the display of "XXX more shots" may be added and subtracted by winning and winning.

In addition, after the advance notification is displayed when the increase number counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90000), it will continue to be displayed until the power switch is turned off, regardless of how the value changes. Good too. For example, if the disadvantageous situation continues for the player after the value of the increase number counter is displayed, for example, even if the value of the increase number counter reaches 80,000, the display continues. This makes it possible to recognize that the player has reached the point where the acquisition upper limit device is activated.

On the other hand, if the player becomes disadvantageous after displaying the value of the increase number counter, the display of the value of the increase number counter may be erased. For example, if the player becomes disadvantageous after displaying the value of the increase number counter and, for example, the increase number counter reaches 89,000, the display of the value of the increase number counter may be erased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the user from giving a misunderstanding that the acquisition upper limit device will be activated soon (compared to the case where the display continues until the power is turned off after being displayed once).

Further, the advance notification may continue to be displayed even when a notification event type (for example, an error), which will be described later, is being notified. Further, the display may be continued even during a variable display, a jackpot game, or a demonstration performance. As a result, the player has more opportunities to see the advance notice, and it becomes easier to predict when the acquisition upper limit device will operate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden activation of the acquisition limit device.

On the other hand, it is preferable to interrupt the display during SP reach or SPSP reach. This allows players to concentrate on SP reach and SPSP reach. Furthermore, depending on the type of notification event (for example, error), which will be described later, the display may be continued or the display may be interrupted. For example, if a magnet detection error, unauthorized radio wave detection error, or RWM abnormality error occurs, the display may be interrupted, and if a glass frame opening error or inner frame opening error occurs, the display may be continued. Thereby, advance notification can be properly performed.

(Main control board acquisition upper limit device operation determination process)
The acquisition upper limit device operation determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the acquisition upper limit device operation determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S450-4-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the value of the maximum increase number stored in the main RAM 110c. Then, when the value of the maximum increase number is referred to, the process moves to step S450-4-2.

In step S450-4-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the maximum increase number has satisfied a predetermined value (for example, 95,000). If it is determined that the maximum number of increases satisfies a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the process moves to step S450-4-3, and the maximum number of increases satisfies a predetermined value (for example, 95,000). 1,000) is not satisfied, the process moves to step S450-4-9.

Note that, as in this process, the main CPU 110a uses a control program (main control program) that determines whether the maximum increase number has satisfied a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) to perform counting based on the establishment of counting conditions. It can also be said that it is a detection means for detecting specific information that is displayed.

In step S450-4-3, the main CPU 110a refers to the value of the special figure special electric line processing data and determines whether the value of the special figure special electric line processing data is "3" (during a jackpot game). Then, if the value of the special figure special electric line processing data is "3" (during a jackpot game), the process moves to step S450-4-4, and the value of the special figure special electric line processing data is "3" (during a jackpot game). Otherwise, the process moves to step S450-4-5. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned type 1, type 2, or small win RUSH type, in the process, it may be determined whether or not a small win game or a big win game is in progress.

In step S450-4-4, the main CPU 110a turns on the operation recognition flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is assumed that during the jackpot game, the process will be executed multiple times, but once the activation recognition flag is turned on, it is not necessary to turn it on each time the process is executed (in this process, You don't need to do anything). Then, when the operation recognition flag is turned ON, the current acquisition upper limit device operation determination process ends.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the operation recognition flag is ON in step S450-4-9. If the operation recognition flag is ON, the process moves to step S450-4-3, and if the operation recognition flag is not ON, the current acquisition upper limit device operation determination process ends.

In addition, the "operation recognition flag" is used when the maximum increase number meets a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), but the acquisition limit device cannot be activated immediately (for example, during a jackpot game). This is a flag that is turned ON. By providing this flag, for example, the value of the increase number counter can be adjusted in conjunction with the end of the jackpot game (for example, by setting the value of the increase number counter to less than "95000"), and the increase at the end of the jackpot game can be adjusted. It is possible to prevent a situation where the acquisition upper limit operating device does not operate because the value of the number counter is "94900". In other words, once the maximum increase number meets a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the acquisition upper limit device will operate even if the value of the increase number counter at the end of subsequent jackpot games is less than "95,000". It turns out. This can lead to healthy gaming.

In step S450-4-5, the main CPU 110a turns on the acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the main RAM 110c. As mentioned above, the flag will not turn OFF unless the main RAM 110c is initialized (RWM clear processing), so even if the control state before the power outage is restored (power is restored), the flag will remain. It remains as it is.

In step S450-4-5, the main CPU 110a turns off (outputs) a firing permission signal that allows the main control board 110 to fire the game ball to the firing device. This makes it impossible for the firing device to fire the game balls.

The main CPU 110a sets an acquisition upper limit device activation command in step S450-4-7. Specifically, in order to transmit information that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated to the effect control board 130, an acquisition upper limit device activation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it displays, for example, on the first image display device 70, in white letters on a black background, ``The acquisition limit device has been activated. Today's game is over.'' . This allows the player to recognize that he or she is unable to continue playing the game any longer.

In step S450-4-8, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated. Specifically, Bit 6 of "Fraud detection state 1" (see Figure 40) is set to "1", and "HC/Fraud monitoring information" for which Bit 6 of the "Fraud detection state 1" is "1" is controlled by the frame. Preparations for transmission to the board 120 are made. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be transmitted to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. As a result, the gaming machine information center can finally recognize that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated.

In addition, after completing the process of step S450-4-6, game progress control (specific control process) is not performed until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off, and it is impossible to launch the game ball. However, the process of detecting an error in the main control board 110, the process of detecting an error in the frame control board 120, and the process of notifying an error in the production control board 130 are executable. For example, if a magnet is detected on the main control board 110 after completing the process of step S450-4-6, an audio notification, image notification, and illumination notification will indicate "Unauthorized detection 1 (magnet detection error)" (described later). It is possible to notify. Further, after completing the process of step S450-4-6, if the frame control board 120 detects unauthorized radio waves, an "unauthorized radio wave detection error" (described later) will be notified by audio notification, image notification, and illumination notification. It is possible. Thereby, the security level can be maintained even after the "acquisition upper limit device" is activated.

Note that after completing the process in step S450-4-6, the process related to the error may also be stopped. In other words, after completing the process of step S450-4-6, no prize balls will be generated even if a game ball is placed in each prize opening, so there will be little to be gained even if a fraudulent attempt is made using a magnet or the like. (or there is none), so the process of detecting errors in the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and the process of receiving and notifying commands related to errors in the production control board 130 may be stopped. Thereby, the control load on each control board can be reduced.

In addition, after completing the process of step S450-4-6, the game progress control (specific control process) is not performed and it becomes impossible to launch the game ball, but the volume adjustment on the effect control board 130 The function of adjusting the light amount (volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the player) is executable. This increases the degree of freedom in volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment.

After the acquisition upper limit device is activated, turn off the power sw 164, and then turn on only the power sw 164 without pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, the notification "The acquisition upper limit device has activated. Please clear RWM" will be displayed. However, for example, if it is determined that the checksum is not normal in step S15 of the main process executed by turning on the power sw164, an unrecoverable error will occur in step S17, so the acquisition upper limit device The process of step S29 for transmitting the activation command (command for executing the above-mentioned notification) is not executed. That is, if there is an abnormality in the main RAM 110c, even if the power is turned on after the acquisition upper limit device has been activated, the above-mentioned notification (notification of operation of the acquisition upper limit device) is not executed, and an RWM abnormality error is notified. In this case, since the process of step S29 is not executed, the operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device is not performed, including audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification. As a result, even in a situation where it is necessary to clear the RWM after the acquisition upper limit device is activated, it is possible to preferentially notify an abnormal RWM error and prompt the employee to respond.

(Error control processing of main control board)
Error control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing error control processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S550-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the magnet detection flag is not set and abnormal magnetism has been detected for a predetermined period by the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that abnormal magnetism has been detected for a predetermined period of time, the process proceeds to step S550-2, and if it is determined that abnormal magnetism has not been detected for a predetermined period of time, the process proceeds to step S550-2. Processing moves to -4.

In step S550-2, the main CPU 110a sets a magnet detection flag in the main RAM 110c, and sends a magnet detection designation command to the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in order to transmit information on detecting a magnet to the production control board 130. Set. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it notifies the magnet detection error. Details of the magnet detection error will be described later.

In step S550-3, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that a magnet detection error has occurred. Specifically, Bit 3 of “Fraud Detection State 1” (see Figure 40) is set to “1”, and “HC/Fraud Monitoring Information” for which Bit 3 of the “Fraud Detection State 1” is “1” is controlled. Preparations for transmission to the board 120 are made. Note that the HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be transmitted to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This allows the game machine information center to finally know that magnet detection has been performed.

In step S550-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a mismatch between the number of winning balls and the number of ejected balls. Specifically, the number of game balls that have won in various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50) and the number of winning balls that are discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow down are determined. It is determined whether or not there is a mismatch between the number of game balls (game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a) and the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a. If a mismatch occurs, the process moves to step S550-5, and if a mismatch does not occur, the current error control process ends.

In step S550-5, the main CPU 110a sets an abnormal winning detection flag in the main RAM 110c, and sets an abnormal winning detection flag in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in order to transmit information on detecting the abnormal winning to the production control board 130. Sets the specified command. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it notifies the abnormal prize winning error. Details of the abnormal winning error will be described later.

In step S550-6, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred. Specifically, Bit 4 of "Fraud Detection State 1" (see Figure 40) is set to "1", and the "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" for which Bit 4 of the "Fraud Detection State 1" is "1" is controlled. Preparations for transmission to the board 120 are made. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be transmitted to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This allows the game machine information center to finally know that magnet detection has been performed. Then, the current error control process ends.

(HC/fraud monitoring information management processing of main control board)
The HC/fraud monitoring information management process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing HC/fraud monitoring information management processing in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines whether 108 ms have elapsed in step S600-1. For example, in the time control process of step S110 of the main control board timer interrupt process (every 4 milliseconds), the counter is updated, and when it counts 27 (4 mm x 27 = 108 mm), it is determined that 108 ms has elapsed. Incidentally, updating of the counter may be started in the first time control process after the interrupt is permitted, and after that, when the count reaches 27, it may be cleared (to 0) and counted again. If it is determined that 108 ms has elapsed, the process moves to step S650-2, and if it is determined that 108 ms has not elapsed, the current HC/fraud monitoring information management process ends.

The main CPU 110a notifies gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) in step S600-2. In other words, "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" is transmitted to the slot control board 120 every 108 ms. Although the HC/fraud monitoring information management process is executed in the main control board timer interrupt process, it may be executed in the main control board main process.

In step S600-3, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S600-4, it is determined whether the receipt result of gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) has been responded. If the result of receiving gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) is returned, the current HC/fraud monitoring information management process is completed, and the result of receiving gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) is returned. If not, the process moves to step S600-5. That is, as a result of transmitting the "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" to the frame control board 120, it is determined whether the receipt result is responded to (received) from the frame control board 120.

In step S600-6, the main CPU 110a sets a communication line disconnection error specification command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the communication line with the frame control board 120 in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and The HC/fraud monitoring information management process ends. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it notifies the communication line disconnection error.

In addition, if there is a possibility that there is a disconnection (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, the game progress control (specific control processing) may be prevented from being executed, or the firing permission signal may be disabled. It is also possible to turn off the game ball so that the game ball cannot be fired. In this way, it is possible to prevent a game from being played even though there is a disconnection or the like (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(Telegram related to communication between frame control board and dedicated unit)
The message related to the communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

As shown in FIG. 68, No. 1 has the message name "gaming machine information notification", the transmission direction "frame control board 120 → dedicated unit 170", the command "0x01", and the message summary "notifying gaming machine information". ing. Also, No. 2 has the message name "count notification", the transmission direction "frame control board 120→dedicated unit 170", the command "0x02", and the message summary "notify counting information". Also, No. 3 has the message name "Rent Notification", the transmission direction "Dedicated unit 170→frame control board 120", the command "0x13", and the message summary "Notify rental information". In addition, No. 4 has the message name ``Response to the result of receipt of loan'', the transmission direction ``Frame control board 120→dedicated unit 170'', the command ``0x03'', and the summary of the message ``Reply with result of receipt of loan information''. Note that the "gaming machine information" here refers to "HC/fraud monitoring information" and "gaming machine performance information."

(Game machine information notification sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The gaming machine information notification transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing gaming machine information notification.

“Game machine information notification” is configured as shown in FIG. 69. No. 1 is the data name "telegram length" and the content is "0x12 to 0x39". Also, No. 2 has the data name "command" and the content "0x01". Also, No. 3 is the data name "communication serial number" and the content is "sequence number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". No. 4 is the data name "gaming machine type" related to gaming machine information, and the content is "gaming machine type". Note that the gaming machine types are the same as those explained in the above-mentioned gaming machine installation information. No.5. is the data name "gaming machine information type" and the contents are "0x00: gaming machine performance information, 0x01: gaming machine installation information, 0x02: hall console/fraud monitoring information". No.6. The data names related to gaming machine installation information are "gaming machine performance information," "gaming machine installation information," and "hole console/fraud monitoring information." The contents of the gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hole control/fraud monitoring information will be described later. No. 7 has the data name "checksum" and the content "-".

(Game machine performance information sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The gaming machine information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing gaming machine performance information.

The gaming machine performance information is composed of 10 pieces of data, and the first one has the data name "Total number of game balls fired" and the content "0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 to 16777215 balls)". The second data name is "total number of game balls acquired (total number of prize balls)" and the content is "0x000000 to 0xFFFFFFF (0 to 16777215 balls)." The third data has the data name "ball output rate" and the content "0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0% to 65535%)." The fourth data name is "Number of game balls acquired per minute (low base: non-time saving state)" and the content is "0x00 to 0xFFFF (0 balls to 65535 balls)". The fifth data has the data name "accessory ratio" and the content "0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%)." The sixth data has the data name "Continuous character ratio" and the content "0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%)." The seventh item is "number of jackpots", with the content being "0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535 times)". The eighth data has the data name "Maximum Ball Output" and the content "0x00000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 balls to 16777215 balls)." The ninth one has the data name "Reserve" and the content "Reserve (fixed at 0x00)". The tenth data name is "Reservation" and the content is "Used on SC board (fixed at 0x00)".

In addition, the "ball output rate" is a value calculated by the total number of game balls acquired ÷ the total number of game balls fired x 100, and the "number of game balls acquired per minute" is the value calculated by dividing the total number of game balls acquired ÷ the total number of game balls fired x 100. The "accessory ratio" is the number of game balls acquired in one minute, and the "accessory ratio" is the number of game balls acquired that is not due to winnings in the general prize opening (the number of game balls acquired from auxiliary games, small winning games, and jackpot games) It is a value calculated by ÷ total number of game balls acquired x 100, and the "continuous role ratio" is a value calculated by ÷ total number of game balls acquired in jackpot games ÷ total number of game balls acquired x 100, "Maximum ball output" means that the number of prize balls (number of acquired game balls) will be added each time a prize ball is awarded based on a winning hole, and each time a game ball is launched into the playing area. The largest positive value (difference in the number of balls) while the counter is a positive value (greater than or equal to "1") (until it becomes "0"), which is subtracted by 1 with "0" as the lower limit. be. In other words, if we compare it to a slump graph that goes up when a prize ball is given and goes down when a game ball is fired, the slump graph will start again from the point where it starts going up when a prize ball is given. This is the value of the number of game balls (difference number of balls) obtained when the slump graph reaches the peak before returning.

(Game machine installation information sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine installation information is composed of six pieces of data, the first being the data name "main control chip ID number" and the content "main control chip ID number of the gaming machine". The second data name is "main control chip manufacturer code" and the content is "manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control chip." The third data name is "main control chip product code" and the content is "product code written in the management area of the main control chip." Although the main control chip ID number is omitted in the drawing, it is an ID number for each manufacturer of the main control chip. For example, if it is a main control chip from manufacturer A, it is the chip individual number "23456789" + identification number. A total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the code is transmitted by telegram, and if it is a main control chip from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "45678912" + identification code is notified by telegram.

The fourth data name is "Frame control chip ID number" and the content is "Frame control chip ID number of gaming machine." The fifth one has the data name "frame control chip maker code" and the content "manufacturer code written in the management area of the frame control chip". The sixth data name is "Frame control chip product code" and the content is "Product code written in the management area of the frame control chip." Although the frame control chip ID number is omitted in the drawing, it is an ID number for each frame control chip manufacturer. For example, if it is a frame control chip from manufacturer A, it is the chip individual number "34567891" + identification number. A total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the code is transmitted by telegram, and if it is a frame control chip from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "56789123" + identification code is notified by telegram.

(Hole control/fraud monitoring information sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
Hall control/fraud monitoring information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing hole control/fraud monitoring information.

Hole con/fraud monitoring information consists of 10 pieces of data, the first is the data name “Number of gaming balls” and the content “Current number of gaming balls (owned by the player): 0x000000 to 0x301B0F (0 to 990,000 pitches). The second data name is "Number of balls fired" and the content is "Number of balls fired: 0x80 to 0x7F (-128 to 127 balls)." The third data has the data name ``total number of prize balls'' and the content ``count information 1 to n number of prize balls x total number of winning balls: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)''.

The fourth is the data name "main control state 1" and the content "Bit0: jackpot 1, Bit1: jackpot 2, Bit2: jackpot 3, Bit3: gaming machine status signal 1, Bit 4: gaming machine status signal 2, Bit 5: gaming Machine status signal 3, Bit 6: Gaming machine status signal 4, Bit 7: Unused. Specifically, a jackpot game is not executed using ON "1" and OFF "0" of Bit 0 to Bit 2. It notifies which of seven types of jackpot games is being executed, and which of 16 types of game states is being executed using ON/OFF of Bits 3 to 6. Note that since the details of main control state 1 have been described above, the explanation here will be omitted.

The fifth is the data name "Main control state 2" and the content "Bit 0: During jackpot game + time saving or advantageous state, Bit 1: high probability, Bit 2: time saving or advantageous state, Bits 3 to 7: unused" It becomes. For example, during a jackpot game, Bit0 is ON "1" and Bit1 and Bit2 are OFF "0", and during a time saving game state, Bit0 and Bit2 are ON "1" and Bit1 is OFF "0". Become. Note that since the details of main control state 2 have been described above, the explanation here will be omitted.

The sixth data name is "gaming machine error state" and the contents are "Bit 0 to Bit 5: error code, Bit 6: frame control/main control, Bit 7: alarm only/report + hole control output". For example, in the case of an error detected by the frame control board 120, Bit 6 becomes OFF "0", and in the case of an error that causes an alarm + hall control output, Bit 7 becomes ON "1".

The seventh is data name "Fraud detection status 1 (main control)", content "Bit 0: Setting change signal, Bit 2: Setting confirmation signal, Bit 2: RWM clear signal, Bit 3: Fraud detection signal 1, Bit 4: Fraud. Detection signal 2, Bit 5: Fraud detection signal 3, Bit 6: Acquisition upper limit device operating signal, Bit 7: Unused. Specifically, it indicates whether or not an event controlled or detected by the main control board 110 has occurred. For example, if the settings are being changed, Bit 0 will be ON "1" and the fraud detection signal 1 will be turned on. If a corresponding error occurs, Bit 3 turns ON to "1". Note that the details of Fraud Detection State 1 have been described above, so the explanation here will be omitted.

The 8th is the data name "Fraud detection state 2 (frame control)" and the content "Bit 0: Glass frame opened, Bit 1: Inner frame opened, Bit 2: Fraudulent radio wave detected, Bit 3: Number of game balls cleared detected, Bit 4: Winning balls. Detection of an abnormality in the number of balls fired, Bit 5: Detection of an abnormality in the number of balls fired, Bits 6 to 7: Unused. Specifically, it indicates the presence or absence of an event detected by the frame control board 120. For example, when the glass frame 4 is being opened, Bit 0 becomes ON "1" and the number of game balls is cleared. When this is performed, Bit 3 becomes ON “1”. Note that details of fraud detection state 2 will be described later.

The ninth data has the data name "Fraud detection status 3 (frame control)" and the contents "Bit 0: Small ball detected, Bit 1: Iron ball detected, Bit 2 to Bit 7: Unused." For example, when a small ball, which is a game ball of a smaller size than a normal size game ball, is detected, Bit 0 becomes ON "1". Note that details of fraud detection state 2 will be described later.

The tenth data has the data name "gaming information." Specifically, data name "Number of game information", content "Number of type information/count information (n): n = 0x00 to 0x0F (0 to 15 pieces)", data name "Type information 1", content " Type information 1'', data name ``Count information 1'', content ``Count information 1'', data name ``Type information n'', content ``Type information n'', data name ``Count information n'', content ``Count information n''. It has become.

Specifically, in the first example, when one game ball wins in the first starting port 45, "count information" includes "data indicating the first starting port 45" and "number of winning balls." (1)" and "data indicating the number of prize pitches (3)." In addition, in the second example, if one game ball wins in the big winning hole 50, "data indicating the big winning hole 50", "data showing the number of winning balls (1)", "number of prize balls" (15). In addition, in the third example, when one game ball passes through the out ball detection switch 39a, "data indicating the out ball detection switch 39a" and "data indicating the number of passing balls (1)" be. Note that the details of the game information have been described above, so the explanation here will be omitted.

(Fraud detection status of hall con/fraud monitoring information)
The fraud detection state of the hall con/fraud monitoring information will be explained using FIG. 73. FIG. 73(a) is a diagram showing fraud detection state 2, and FIG. 73(b) is a diagram showing fraud detection state 3.

"Fraud detection status 2" has the name of Bit 0 "Glass frame open" and the details "0 = Normal, 1 = Glass frame open detection", and the name of Bit 1 "Inner frame open" and details "0 = Normal, 1 = The name of Bit 2 is "Unauthorized radio wave detection", the details are "0 = Normal, 1 = Unauthorized radio wave detection", and the name of Bit 3 is "Game ball count clear detection", details are "0 = Normal, 1 = Detection of number of winning balls cleared", Bit 4 name: "Number of winning balls abnormal detection", details "0 = normal, 1 = abnormal number of winning balls detected", Bit 5 name: "Number of fired balls abnormal detection", details "0 = normal, 1 = abnormality detected in number of fired balls", and the names of Bits 6 and 7 are "unused" and the details are "fixed at 0".

"Fraud detection status 3" has the name of Bit 0 "Small ball detection" and details "0 = Normal, 1 = Small ball detected", and the name of Bit 1 "Iron ball detection" and details "0 = Normal, 1 = Iron The name of Bit2 to Bit7 is "Unused" and the details are "Fixed to 0."

(Game information on hole con/fraud monitoring information)
The game information of hole con/fraud monitoring information will be explained using FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing game information.

"Game information" has a 2-byte structure consisting of "type information (1 byte)" and "count information (1 byte)." Furthermore, "type information (1 byte)" is composed of "data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" and "data number (Bit0 to Bit3)."

For "Data type (Bit4 to Bit7)", for example, Bit4 to Bit7 "0000 (=0)" is the type name "unused" and content is "-", and Bit4 to Bit7 "0001 (=1)" is the type. The name is "starting slot prize", the content is "notification that you have won the starting slot", and Bit4 to Bit 7 "0010 (= 2)" is the type name "big winning slot winning", and the content is "notifying that you have won the opening slot". Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0011 (= 3)" is the type name "Winning slot prize", the content is "Notification that you won the prize slot", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0100 (= 4)" is The type name is "All starting gates won", the content is "notification of passage of starting gates or standard gates related to games", and Bit4 to Bit7 are "0101 (=5)", "0110 (=6)", "0111 (= 7)", "1000 (=8)" is the type name "unused" and the content is "-", and Bits 4 to 7 "1001 (=9)" are the type name "number of symbols confirmed" and the content "related to the game" Bit4 to Bit7 "1010 (=10)" is the type name "Number of jackpot hits" and the content is "Notification that the accessory continuous activation device has activated", and Bit4 to Bit7 "1011 (=11)" is the type name "Unused" and the content is "-", and Bit4 to Bit7 "1100 (=12)" is the type name "Number of accessories (number of times the big prize opening is opened)" and the content is "Small win. If you want to set the number of openings of the jackpot at the time as the start number, notify the opening of the jackpot when the accessory continuous activation device is not activated.'' (1st round of ``Jackpot Game 3 (4 rounds)'' in Figure 36 is a small winning game), and Bit4 to Bit7 "1101 (=13)" is the type name "passing through a specific area" and the content is "notifying passing through a specific area" (see "specific area" in Figure 36). ), and Bit4 to Bit7 "1110 (=14)" is the type name "Reserve" and the content is "Used when notifying data other than data types 1 to 4, 9, 10, 12, and 13." Bit4 to Bit7 “1111 (=15)” have the type name “unused” and the content “-”.

"Data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" is set to "0001 (= 1)" (start We will notify you of one of the following: (Win to opening 1), ``0010 (= 2)'' (Win to opening 2), ``0011 (= 3)'' (Win to opening 3) (other than the above are not yet announced). use). For example, when a game ball enters the first starting slot 45, the type information (1 byte ) will be notified.

If “Data Type (Bit4 to Bit7)” is “Big Winning Slot Winning”, the contents (Big Winning Slot Number) are Bit0 to Bit3 “0001 (=1)” (Winning to Grand Winning Slot 1), “ 0010(=1)" (winning into grand prize opening 2)" (the others other than the above are unused). For example, when a game ball enters the big prize opening 50, the "data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "0010 (=2)" and the "data number (Bit0 to Bit3)" is "0001 (=1)". The type information (1 byte) consisting of is notified.

If "Data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "Winning slot prize", the contents (winning slot number) are Bit0 to Bit3 "0001 (= 1)" (winning to winning slot 1), "0010 (= 2)" (winning in prize opening 2) ... "1111 (=15)" (winning in prize opening 15), any one of them will be notified ("0000 (=0)" is not used). For example, if a game ball wins in the general winning hole 43 provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 40, the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "0011 (= 3)" and the "data number (Bit 0 to Type information (1 byte) consisting of "0001 (=1)" in "Bit 3)" is notified.

If the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "all starting slots won", Bit0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (winning or passing) is notified as the content (others are unused). For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the "data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "0100 (=4)" and the "data number (Bit0 to Bit3)" is "0001 (=1)". ” is notified, and when the game ball passes through the standard gate 44, the “data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)” is “0100 (=4)” and the “data number (Bit 0 to Type information (1 byte) consisting of "0001 (=1)" in "Bit 3)" is notified.

If "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of confirmed symbols", the contents are Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (= 1)" (number of confirmed symbols related to the game (special symbols, normal symbols)). Notify (others are unused). For example, when the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the "data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "1001 (=9)" and the "data number (Bit0 to Bit3)" is "0001 (=1)". Type information (1 byte) is notified, and the same type information is also notified when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, similar type information is also notified when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

If "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of jackpot hits", the content will be notified as Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (= 1)" (accessory continuous activation device is activated) (others are not used) . For example, when the first jackpot (see Figure 33) is executed, "Data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "1010 (=10)" and "Data number (Bit0 to Bit3)" is "0001 (=1)". )" type information (1 byte) is notified.

If "Data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of accessory items (number of times the big prize opening is opened)", Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (= 1)" (accessory item 1) will be notified as the content (other is unused). For example, when "Jackpot Game 3" explained in FIG. Type information (1 byte) consisting of "=1)" is notified.

If the "data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "passing through a specific area", Bit0 to Bit3 "0001 (=1)" (specific area 1) is notified as the content (others are unused). For example, when the "Jackpot Game 3" explained in FIG. The type information (1 byte) in which "0001 (=1)" is "0001 (=1)" is notified.

In addition, to mention the count information in the case of "passing through a specific area", as shown in Figure 43, Bit4 to Bit7 are "unused" and "fixed at 0", and Bit0 to Bit3 are "0001". (=1)", it is notified that "the number of passes through the specific area is 1" (others are unused). In other words, as shown in example 1) in FIG. 43, when the game ball passes through the specific area 1 once, the game information "0xD101" is notified, and the breakdown is that "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is " Type information (1 byte) consisting of "1101 (=13)", "Data number (Bit0 to Bit3)" is "0001 (=1)", and "Unused (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "0000 (=0)" ”, and count information (1 byte) in which “number of passes (Bit 0 to Bit 3)” is “0001 (=1)” (once).

If "Data type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "Reserve", the contents of Bit0 to Bit3 are "0001 (=1)", "0010 (=2)", "0011 (=3)", "0100 ( =4)" (reserve number) (the others are unused).

(Counting notification sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The counting notification sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a count notification.

The “count notification” is configured as shown in FIG. 75. No. 1 is the data name "telegram length" and the content is "0x07". Also, No. 2 has the data name "command" and the content "0x02". Also, No. 3 has the data name "counting serial number" and the content "sequence number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". Also, No. No. 4 has the data name "Number of pitches counted" and the content "Number of pitches counted: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)." No. 5 has the data name "Number of cumulative pitches counted" and the content "Number of cumulative pitches counted". Number of balls: 0x00 to 0xFFFF (0 balls to 65535 balls).No. 6 has the data name "checksum" and the content "-".

(Lending notification sent from the dedicated unit to the frame control board)
The lending notification sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a lending notice.

The “rental notification” is configured as shown in FIG. 76. No. 1 has the data name "telegram length" and the content "0x05". Also, No. 2 has the data name "command" and the content "0x13". Also, No. 3 has the data name "loan serial number" and the content "sequence number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". Also, No. No. 4 has the data name "Number of rental balls" and the content "Number of rental balls: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 balls to 255 balls)". Also, No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-" It becomes.

(Lending receipt result response sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The lending reception result response transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described using FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a loan receipt result response.

The “loan receipt result response” is configured as shown in FIG. 77. No. 1 has the data name "telegram length" and the content "0x05". Also, No. 2 has the data name "command" and the content "0x03". Also, No. 3 is the "rental serial number" and the content is "sequence number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". Also, No. 4 is "Rental ball number reception result", the content is "Rental ball number reception result: 0x00 = normal, 0x01 = abnormal (during ball extraction operation, when the number of game balls owned by the player = 100,000 or more)" . Also, No. 5 has the data name "checksum" and the content "-".

(Basic communication sequence between frame control board and dedicated unit)
The basic communication sequence between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using FIG. 78.

First, when the timing for transmitting gaming machine information notifications that arrive at a cycle of 300 ms comes, a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the first message, and from there ~100ms later, a counting notification (counting serial number=m) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as a second message. Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification (serial number = k) is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as a third message, and within 10 ms, a loan notification (serial number = k) is sent from the dedicated frame control board 120 as a fourth message. A rental reception result response (rental serial number=k) is transmitted to the unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the reception result of the number of rental balls.

Thereafter, after 20 ms or more have passed since the transmission of the fourth lending receipt result response and 300 ms have passed since the transmission of the first gaming machine information notification, a fifth message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. A gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1) is sent to the player. Thereafter, messages are sent and received in the order of count notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response, thereby repeating the first to fourth communication sequences at a 300 ms cycle.

(Startup sequence 1 of frame control board and dedicated unit)
Activation sequence 1 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case where the gaming machine 1 is activated first) will be described using FIG. 79.

First, when the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 are powered off, the VL (connection confirmation power supply) of the frame control board 120 is OFF, and the VL (connection confirmation power supply) and PSI (count valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are OFF. ) is OFF. Then, when the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 are powered on at the same time, the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 start up.

Thereafter, when the startup of the gaming machine 1 is completed before the dedicated unit 170, telegrams such as gaming machine information notification, count notification, etc. are sequentially transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence described above. However, since the dedicated unit 170 is activated, the transmitted message cannot be received.

When the startup of the dedicated unit 170 is completed, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are turned on, and the gaming machine 1 can launch game balls and press the counting button. 20 operations are valid. After that, as shown in the basic communication sequence of 300 ms period shown in FIG. It will be repeated.

(Startup sequence 2 of frame control board and dedicated unit)
A startup sequence 2 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where the dedicated unit 170 starts up first) will be described using FIG. 80.

First, when the dedicated unit 170 is powered on prior to the gaming machine 1, the dedicated unit 170 starts to start up, and when the dedicated unit 170 starts up, the dedicated unit 170's VL (connection confirmation power supply) and PSI (counting The valid signal) is turned on, and the game machine 1 enters a waiting state for connection to the gaming machine 1.

After that, when the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming machine 1 starts to start up, and when the gaming machine 1 is started up, the gaming machine 1 can shoot game balls and the counting button 20 cannot be operated. It becomes effective. Thereafter, as shown in the basic communication sequence of 300 ms period shown in FIG. 78, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, lending reception result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. will be carried out.

(Game machine information notification sequence 1 of frame control board and dedicated unit)
Referring to FIG. 81, gaming machine information notification sequence 1 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where gaming information related to the game is not held at the timing of transmitting the gaming machine information notification) will be described.

First, the dedicated unit 170 is in a waiting state for connection with the gaming machine 1. After that, when the gaming machine is started up, the gaming machine 1 is able to fire game balls and the counting button 20 cannot be operated. It becomes effective. Then, as shown in the basic communication sequence of 300 ms cycle shown in FIG. 78, telegrams (game machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, rental receipt result response) are repeatedly transmitted and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. be exposed.

Then, when the notification timing for the gaming machine installation information is reached 60 seconds after the startup of the gaming machine 1 is completed and 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, a dedicated message is sent from the frame control board 120 as the tenth message shown in the figure. A gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine installation information is transmitted to the unit 170. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, rental receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence of 300ms period shown in FIG. It will be done.

In addition, if the two notification timings of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information overlap after 180 seconds have passed since the startup of the gaming machine 1 has been completed and 300 ms have passed since the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, A gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine installation information with a high priority is transmitted as the th message. After that, messages are sent and received in the order of counting notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response, and after 300ms have passed since the previous gaming machine information notification, gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine performance information with low priority is sent. be exposed. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, rental receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence of 300ms period shown in FIG. It will be done.

(Game machine information notification sequence 2 of frame control board and dedicated unit)
With reference to FIG. 82, gaming machine information notification sequence 2 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where gaming information related to the game is held at the timing of transmitting the gaming machine information notification) will be described.

First, the dedicated unit 170 is in a waiting state for connection with the gaming machine 1. After that, when the gaming machine is started up, the gaming machine 1 is able to fire the gaming balls and the counting button 20 cannot be operated. It becomes effective. Then, as shown in the basic communication sequence of 300 ms cycle shown in FIG. 78, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, lending reception result response) are repeatedly transmitted and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. be exposed.

Then, the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information is 60 seconds after the gaming machine 1 is started up and 300 ms has passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent. However, since the game information related to the game is held at this point, the frame control board 120 sends a message from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth message shown in the figure, not the game machine installation information, but the hall controller including the game information. - A gaming machine information notification consisting of fraud monitoring information is sent. Thereafter, messages are sent and received in the order of counting notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response, and a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine installation information is transmitted 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, rental receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence of 300ms period shown in FIG. It will be done.

Further, the notification timing of the gaming machine performance information comes after 180 seconds have passed since the gaming machine 1 has been started up and 300 ms has passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent. However, since the game information related to the game is held at this point, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 as the 15th message shown in the figure, not the game machine performance information, but the hall controller including the game information. - A gaming machine information notification consisting of fraud monitoring information is sent. Thereafter, messages are sent and received in the order of counting notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response, and a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine performance information is transmitted 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, rental receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence of 300ms period shown in FIG. It will be done.

(Counting notification sequence 1 of frame control board and dedicated unit)
A count notification sequence 1 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case in which a communication abnormality does not occur between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170) will be described using FIG. 83.

First, the counting button 20 of the gaming machine 1 is pressed when the number of game balls owned by the player is 1000 and the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is 100. After that, when the timing for transmitting gaming machine information notifications that arrive at a cycle of 300 ms arrives, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification to the dedicated unit 170 as the first message (serial number = n, number of game balls = 1000). is sent. After 100ms have passed, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player, resulting in 750 balls, and a second message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 stating that the game balls (gaming value) have been counted. When the counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative number of balls counted = 250) is sent, 250 balls are added to the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170. The total number is 350.

Then, within 170ms from receiving the counting notification, a rental notification (rental serial number = k, number of rental balls = 0) is transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the third message, and within 10ms from there. As the fourth message, the frame control board 120 sends a rental reception result response (rental serial number = k, rental ball number reception result = normal) to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the rental ball number reception result. be done.

Furthermore, after 300 ms has elapsed since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of game balls = 750) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the fifth message. . After 100ms elapsed, 250 balls were subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player, resulting in 500 balls, and the game balls (gaming value) were counted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth message. When a counting notification (counting serial number = m + 1, number of balls counted = 250, cumulative number of balls counted = 500) is sent, the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is increased to 250 balls for the count. This adds up to 600 pieces.

Then, within 170ms from receiving the counting notification, a rental notification (rental serial number = k + 1, number of rental balls = 0) is transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the seventh message, and within 10ms from there. As the eighth message, the frame control board 120 sends a rental reception result response (rental serial number k+1, rental ball number reception result = normal) to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the rental ball number reception result. Ru.

Thereafter, after the counting button 20 of the gaming machine 1 is released and 300 ms has elapsed since the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 notifies the dedicated unit 170 of the gaming machine information as the ninth message. (serial number=n+2, number of game balls=500) is transmitted. After 100 ms has elapsed, a counting notification (counting serial number = m+2, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 500) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the tenth message.

Then, within 170ms from receiving the counting notification, a rental notification (rental serial number = k + 2, number of rental balls = 0) is transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the 11th message, and within 10ms from there. As the twelfth message, the frame control board 120 sends a rental reception result response (rental serial number k+2, rental pitch number reception result = normal) to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the rental pitch number reception result. Ru. Thereafter, as shown in the basic communication sequence of 300 ms period shown in FIG. 78, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, lending reception result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. It will be done.

(Counting notification sequence 2 of frame control board and dedicated unit)
A count notification sequence 2 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where a communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170) will be described using FIG. 84.

First, the counting button 20 of the gaming machine 1 is pressed when the number of game balls owned by the player is 1000 and the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is 100. After that, when the timing for transmitting gaming machine information notifications that arrive at a cycle of 300 ms arrives, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification to the dedicated unit 170 as the first message (serial number = n, number of game balls = 1000). is sent. After 100ms have passed, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player, resulting in 750 balls, and a second message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 stating that the game balls (gaming value) have been counted. When the counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative number of balls counted = 250) is sent, 250 balls are added to the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170. The total number is 350.

Then, within 170ms from receiving the counting notification, a rental notification (rental serial number = k, number of rental balls = 0) is transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the third message, and within 10ms from there. As the fourth message, the frame control board 120 sends a rental reception result response (rental serial number = k, rental ball number reception result = normal) to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the rental ball number reception result. be done.

Furthermore, after 300 ms has elapsed since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of game balls = 750) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the fifth message. . After 100ms elapsed, 250 balls were subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player, resulting in 500 balls, and the game balls (gaming value) were counted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth message. A counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of balls counted = 250, cumulative number of balls counted = 500) is sent, but due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 cannot receive the counting notification, and the dedicated unit 170 does not store it. This means that the number of balls held by the player playing the game will not be updated.

Thereafter, after 300ms have elapsed since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+2, number of game balls = 500) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the seventh message. However, due to the occurrence of a communication abnormality, the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the count notification, and the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is not updated.

Then, 300 ms after the dedicated unit 170 detects a communication abnormality for notification of gaming machine information, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 is turned off, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the dedicated unit 170 and the PSI ( The counting enable signal) is turned OFF, the game machine 1 stops firing game balls, and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes invalid.

After that, 100ms have elapsed since the sending of the gaming machine information notification, and the timing for sending the counting notification is reached, but since the operation of the counting button 20 is invalid at this point (it is considered that the counting button 20 has been released), the counting is not started. A counting notification with the number of pitches = 0 (counting serial number m+2, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of counted balls = 500) is sent, but the dedicated unit 170 cannot receive the counting notification due to a communication error, and the dedicated unit 170 The number of balls held by the player, which is stored by the player, will not be updated. At this time, the dedicated unit 170 is waiting for the error recovery of the CU board, and waits until the error is recovered by the process of the game store clerk, and when the error is recovered, VL (connection confirmation power supply) and PSI (count valid signal) are activated. ) is turned ON.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit rental notification sequence 1)
Referring to FIG. 85, lending notification sequence 1 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case in which a communication abnormality does not occur between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170) will be described.

First, when the number of game balls owned by the player is 50, the lending button of the dedicated unit 170 is pressed. After that, when the timing for transmitting gaming machine information notifications that arrive at a cycle of 300 ms arrives, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification to the dedicated unit 170 as the first message (serial number = n, number of game balls = 50). is sent. After 100 ms has elapsed, a counting notification (counting serial number=m, number of counted balls=0, cumulative number of balls counted=0) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as a second message.

Then, within 170 ms after receiving the counting notification, a third message is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 to instruct the lending of game balls (gaming value) (rental serial number = k, number of rental balls = 125) is transmitted, the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control board 120 is added to the loaned number of 125 balls, resulting in 175 balls. Within 10ms thereafter, a rental reception result response (rental serial number = k, number of rental balls received result = normal) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the fourth message, and the dedicated unit 170 sends the rental ball The number receipt results are confirmed.

Thereafter, after 300 ms has elapsed since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification (serial number n+1, number of game balls 175) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the fifth message. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, rental receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence of 300ms period shown in FIG. It will be done.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit rental notification sequence 2)
Referring to FIG. 86, lending notification sequence 2 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where a communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170) will be described.

First, when the number of game balls owned by the player is 50, the lending button of the dedicated unit 170 is pressed. After that, when the timing for transmitting gaming machine information notifications that arrive at a cycle of 300 ms arrives, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification to the dedicated unit 170 as the first message (serial number = n, number of game balls = 50). is sent. After 100 ms has elapsed, a counting notification (counting serial number=m, number of counted balls=0, cumulative number of balls counted=0) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as a second message.

Then, within 170 ms after receiving the counting notification, a third message is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 to instruct the lending of game balls (gaming value) (rental serial number = k, number of rental balls = 125) is transmitted, the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control board 120 is added to the loaned number of 125 balls, resulting in 175 balls. Within 10ms thereafter, a lending reception result response (rental serial number = k, rental ball number reception result = normal) is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the fourth message, but a communication error occurs. Therefore, the dedicated unit 170 cannot receive the lending reception result response, and 10 ms after the lending notification, the dedicated unit 170 determines that the lending is not completed because the lending reception result response has not been received.

Furthermore, after 300 ms has passed since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of game balls = 175) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the fifth message. . After 100 ms has elapsed, a counting notification (counting serial number=m+1, number of counted balls=0, cumulative number of balls counted=0) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth message.

Then, within 170 ms after receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a seventh telegram to the slot control board 120, instructing the lending notification (rental value) to lend out the same game balls (gaming value) as the lending notification sent last time. Serial number = k, number of rental balls = 125) is transmitted (retransmitted). However, since the slot control board 120 has already added the loaned amount to the number of game balls (gaming value) owned by the player based on the rental notification with rental serial number = k, the slot control board 120 sends the slot control board as the 8th message within 10ms. A rental reception result response (rental serial number=k, rental ball number reception result=abnormal) is transmitted from the board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. As a result, the dedicated unit 170 confirmed the result of receiving the number of rental balls, and since the serial number matched the previous rental notification, it was determined that the previous rental notification had arrived at the slot control board 120, and it was considered incomplete. Complete the loan.

Thereafter, after 300 ms have elapsed since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification (serial number n+2, number of game balls 175) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the ninth message. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, rental receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence of 300ms period shown in FIG. It will be done.

(Recovery sequence when the dedicated PIF that connects the frame control board and the dedicated unit is disconnected)
A recovery sequence when the dedicated PIF that connects the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is disconnected will be described using FIG. 87.

First, when the number of gaming balls owned by the player is 1000, and the timing for transmitting gaming machine information notifications that arrive at a cycle of 300 ms comes, the frame control board 120 sends a message to the dedicated unit 170 as the first message. Machine information notification (serial number = n, number of game balls = 1000) is transmitted. After 100 ms has elapsed, a counting notification (counting serial number=m, number of counted balls=0, cumulative number of balls counted=0) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as a second message. Then, within 170ms from receiving the counting notification, a rental notification (rental serial number = k, number of rental balls = 0) is transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the third message, and within 10ms from there. As the fourth message, the frame control board 120 sends a rental reception result response (rental serial number = k, rental ball number reception result = normal) to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the rental ball number reception result. be done.

Thereafter, after 20 ms or more have passed since the transmission of the fourth lending receipt result response and 300 ms have passed since the transmission of the first gaming machine information notification, a fifth message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. A gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of game balls = 1000) is transmitted to. When a disconnection of the dedicated PIF is detected, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 is turned OFF, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (count valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are turned OFF. In the gaming machine 1, the firing of game balls stops and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes invalid.

Then, 100ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth message (counting serial number = m+1, number of balls counted = 0, cumulative number of balls counted = 0). is transmitted, but due to the PIF disconnection, the dedicated unit 170 cannot receive the count notification. Furthermore, after 300 ms have elapsed since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+2, number of game balls = 1000) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the seventh message. However, due to the PIF disconnection, the dedicated unit 170 will not be able to receive the gaming machine information notification. After 100 ms has passed, a counting notification (counting serial number = m + 2, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative number of balls counted = 0) is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the eighth message, but the PIF is disconnected. This means that the dedicated unit 170 cannot receive the count notification.

Then, when the disconnection of the dedicated PIF is restored (the connection is confirmed), the VL (connection confirmation power supply) of the frame control board 120 is turned on, and the VL (connection confirmation power supply) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are turned on. ) is turned ON, the game machine 1 is permitted to shoot game balls, and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes valid.

Thereafter, after 300ms have elapsed since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+3, number of game balls = 1000) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the ninth message. . After 100 ms have elapsed, a counting notification (counting serial number=m+3, number of counted balls=0, cumulative number of counted balls=0) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the tenth message. Then, within 170ms from receiving the counting notification, a rental notification (rental serial number = 0, number of rental balls = 0) is transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the 11th message, and within 10ms from there. As the 11th message, a rental reception result response (rental serial number = k, rental ball number reception result = abnormal) is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the rental ball number reception result. be done.

Furthermore, after 300 ms has elapsed since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+4, number of game balls = 1000) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the 12th message. . After 100 ms has elapsed, a counting notification (counting serial number=m+4, number of counted balls=0, cumulative number of counted balls=0) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the 13th message. Then, within 170ms from receiving the counting notification, a rental notification (rental serial number = k+1, number of rental balls = 0) is transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the 14th message, and within 10ms from there. As the 15th message, a rental reception result response (rental serial number = k+1, rental ball number reception result = normal) is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the rental ball number reception result. be done.

(Notification sequence of frame control board and dedicated unit hall control/fraud monitoring information)
The notification sequence of hole control/tamper monitoring information (number of fired balls, returned balls) of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using FIG. 88.

First, when the number of game balls owned by the player is 1,000 and the cumulative number of fired balls stored in the dedicated unit 170 is 100, when the timing for transmitting the game machine information notification that arrives at a cycle of 300 ms comes, As the first message, a gaming machine information notification (serial number=n, number of game balls=1000) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. After 90 to 100 ms, a count notification is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as a second message.

After that, one game ball is fired and the number of game balls owned by the player becomes 999, and within 170ms from the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a lending notification to the frame control board 120 as the third message. Then, within 10 ms from there, a rental reception result response is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as a fourth message, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the reception result of the number of rental balls.

Then, when the timing for transmitting gaming machine information notifications that arrive at a cycle of 300 ms comes, a fifth message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 with gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+1, game The number of balls = 999 and the number of fired balls = 1) are transmitted, and the cumulative number of fired balls stored in the dedicated unit 170 becomes 101. After 90 to 100 ms, a count notification is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the sixth message.

After that, one return ball is generated and the number of game balls owned by the player becomes 1000, and within 170 ms from the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification to the frame control board 120 as the seventh telegram. Then, within 10 ms from there, a rental reception result response is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the eighth message, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the reception result of the number of rental balls.

Then, when the timing for transmitting gaming machine information notifications that arrive at a cycle of 300 ms comes, the ninth message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 with gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+2) reflecting one of the returned balls. , number of game balls = 1000, number of fired balls = -1), and the cumulative number of fired balls stored in the dedicated unit 170 becomes 100. After 90 to 100 ms, a count notification is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the tenth message.

Further, within 170 ms from the count notification, a lending notification is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the 11th message, and within 10 ms from there, as the 12th message, the loan notification is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. A rental reception result response is transmitted to the player, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the reception result of the number of rental balls.

Thereafter, at the timing of sending gaming machine information notifications that arrive at a cycle of 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+3, number of game balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the 13th message. Sent. After that, one game ball is fired and the number of game balls owned by the player becomes 999, and 90 to 100 ms after the transmission of the game machine installation information, a 14th message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. A counting notification is sent to the recipient.

Furthermore, one return ball is generated, and the number of game balls owned by the player becomes 1000, and within 170 ms from the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a lending notification to the frame control board 120 as the 15th telegram. Then, within 10 ms, a rental reception result response is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the 16th message, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the reception result of the number of rental balls.

Thereafter, at the timing of sending gaming machine information notifications that arrive at a cycle of 300ms, the frame control board 120 sends gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+4, number of game balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the 17th message. Sent. Thereafter, messages are sent and received in the order of count notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response, thereby repeating the first to fourth communication sequences at a 300 ms cycle.

(Main processing of frame control board)
The main processing of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the frame control board 120.

First, the frame control CPU 120a prohibits all interrupts in step W1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step W2, and allows access to the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W3. do.

In step W4, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c. If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that the power has been turned on for the first time, and the process moves to step W8. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power has been restored, and in step W5, frame control is performed. A checksum of the RWM area of the RAM 120c is calculated.

In step W6, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c matches the calculated checksum. If the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step W9, and if the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), in step W7, Clear the backup flag and checksum saved in the RWM area and set the RWM area.

In step W8, the frame control CPU 120a initializes (clears to 0) the number of game balls storage area for storing the number of game balls (gaming value) owned by the player, which is set in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c. , In step W9, the initialization target area (excluding the game ball number storage area, etc.) in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c is initialized (cleared to 0).

In step W10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the game ball number clear switch 121 is operated. If the number of game balls clear switch 121 is not operated, it is assumed that the player does not clear the number of game balls (gaming value) owned by the player, and the process moves to step W15, and the number of game balls clear switch 121 is operated. In this case, the number of game balls (gaming value) owned by the player stored in the game ball number storage area of the RWM area is cleared.

In step W12, the frame control CPU 120a sets a game ball number clear start designation command indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared in the production transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W13, the frame control CPU 120a sets the command to start clearing the number of game balls, which indicates that the number of game balls has been cleared. A game ball count clear flag indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is set in ”). As a result, a game ball number clear start designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for executing a game ball number clear notification is performed.

In step W14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the number of game balls clear flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c. If the number of game balls clear flag is not set, it is assumed that the error code corresponding to clearing the number of game balls is not displayed and the process moves to step W16, and if the number of game balls clear flag is set, step W16 is performed. At W15, "0" is displayed on the game ball number display 135, and "H67", which is an error code corresponding to clearing the number of game balls, is displayed on the frame control display 125.

Note that the game ball number clear flag set in the frame control RAM 120c is not cleared until the game balls are fired or the number of game balls is counted, and the error code "H64" is displayed on the frame control display 125. will continue to be displayed. On the other hand, when the game balls are fired or the number of game balls is counted, the game ball number clear flag is cleared and the display of the error code "H64" on the frame control display 125 ends.

In step W16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ball removal switch 122 is operated. If the ball removal switch 122 is not operated, it is assumed that the ball removal operation is not performed and the process moves to step W20, and if the ball removal switch 122 is operated, in step W17, it is determined that the ball removal operation is not being performed. A command indicating that a ball is being removed during the ball extraction operation is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a ball extraction operation designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a process for executing a ball extraction operation notification is performed.

Note that after step W16, it is not determined whether or not the ball removal switch 122 is operated. In other words, even if the ball extraction switch 122 is operated while the power is being supplied after the power is turned on, the ball extraction operation designation command is set and a notification that the ball extraction operation is in progress is performed, or the ball extraction operation flag is set. Once set, the ball will not be removed or the specific information "-" will not be displayed.

In step W18, the frame control CPU 120a sets a flag in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that the ball extraction operation is in progress. The ball picking operation in progress flag set here will be referred to in the ball picking operation processing described later, and the ball picking operation will be performed on the condition that the ball picking operation in progress flag is set.

In step W19, the frame control CPU 120a causes the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 to display specific information "-" indicating that the ball extraction operation is in progress. In addition, if the error code "H67" indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed on the frame control display 125, that display will be given priority and the specific information "H67" will be displayed on the frame control display 125. -" is no longer displayed.

In step W20, the frame control CPU 120a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) and permits all interrupts.

In step W21, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether an RWM clear designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the RWM clear designation command has not been received, the process moves to step W25, and if the RWM clear designation command has been received, interrupts are prohibited in step W22, and in step W23, the RWM of the frame control RAM 120c is Among the areas, the area to be initialized (storage area excluding the storage area for the number of game balls and storage area related to display performance information, etc., and mainly storage area related to gaming machine information (hole control/fraud monitoring information)) It is initialized (cleared to 0), and interrupts are permitted in step W24.

In step W25, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a power outage has occurred. If a power outage has not occurred, the process moves to step W21; if a power outage has occurred, interrupts are prohibited in step W26, and in step W27, various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) The output port is cleared in order to stop the operation of various displays (frame control display 125, game ball number display 135, etc.), and to stop outputting the firing permission signal.

In step W28, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the checksum of the frame control RAM 120c and saves it in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W29, the frame control CPU 120a calculates a checksum of the frame control RAM 120c and saves the checksum in the frame control RAM 120c. The flag is saved in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W30, processing is performed to prohibit RWM access, and the process waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, it is possible for the player to clear the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player on the condition that the ball removal switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the game machine 1 is shipped from a manufacturing factory to a game parlor, the number of game balls is stored in the game machine 1, or the game machine 1 stores a small number of game balls (for example, 1 ball). When a player stops playing, a new player can play the game, and the convenience of the game parlor can be improved.

Additionally, when the number of game balls has been cleared, clear information (error code "H64") indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed on the frame control display 125 that is visible to the game clerk. It looks like this. Therefore, the gaming clerk can easily understand that the number of game balls has been cleared, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the gaming clerk.

In addition, if the power supply is restarted and the control status of the game is restored without firing the game balls or counting the number of game balls after the number of game balls has been cleared, the game store staff will be able to visually check the number of game balls. Clear information (error code "H64") indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed on the frame control display 125 again. Therefore, the evidence that the number of game balls has been cleared does not disappear when the power is restored, making it possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Furthermore, even if the number of game balls clear switch 121 is operated while the power is being supplied after the power is turned on, the number of game balls will be cleared, the number of game balls cleared will be notified, or the number of game balls will not be cleared. The clearing information (error code "H64") indicating that this has been done is not displayed. Therefore, even if the game ball count clear switch 121 is unintentionally operated during inspection of the game machine, no inconvenience will occur, and the convenience of the game parlor will not be improved.

Furthermore, on the condition that the ball removal switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, a ball removal operation is performed to remove (discharge) the game balls that are circulated within the game machine 1 to the outside of the machine. ing. Therefore, the game balls that are circulated within the gaming machine 1 can be replaced, and it is possible to prevent games from being played with dirty game balls and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the ball extraction operation is in progress, specific information indicating that the ball extraction operation is in progress is displayed on the frame control display 125 that is visible to the game clerk and the game ball number display 135 that is visible to the player. ' is now displayed. Therefore, the game store clerk can easily understand that the ball extraction operation is in progress, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Furthermore, even if the bulb removal switch 122 is operated while the power is being supplied after the power is turned on, a notification indicating that the ball is being removed, a ball removal operation being performed, or specific information indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress is generated. "-" is no longer displayed. Therefore, even if the ball removal switch 122 is unintentionally operated during inspection of the gaming machine, no inconvenience will occur, and the convenience of the gaming parlor will not be improved.

In addition, when an RWM clear designation command is received from the main control board 110, the storage area excluding the storage area for the number of game balls and the storage area related to display performance information, etc. ) is initialized (cleared to 0). Therefore, with the RWM clear of the main control board 110, the gaming machine information stored in the frame control board 120 (information sent to the dedicated unit 170) is initialized, so that the gaming machine information of the main control board 110 and the gaming machine information stored in the frame control board 120 are initialized. There is no discrepancy with the gaming machine information on the frame control board 120, and it becomes possible to transmit gaming machine information corresponding to the RWM clear of the main control board 110 to the dedicated unit 170.

Further, the RWM area to be initialized is different depending on whether the checksum is not normal (data in the RWM area is abnormal) or when an RWM clear designation command is received from the main control board 110. Therefore, it is possible to initialize the RWM area appropriately depending on the type of initialization factor.

In addition, if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the initialization target area excluding the game ball count storage area, game ball count clear flag storage area, etc. of the frame control RAM 120c is initialized (cleared to 0). ), but if the checksum is not normal, the game ball count storage area, game ball count clear flag storage area, etc. may be initialized (cleared to 0).

In addition, the RWM area is initialized by determining in the main processing whether or not an RWM clear designation command has been received from the main control board 110. The RWM area may be initialized by determining in the main process whether or not an RWM clear designation command has been received from the controller.

(Timer interrupt processing of frame control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120. This timer interrupt processing is executed by inputting clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 ms) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the frame control unit 120m.

First, in step W100, the frame control CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W150, performs a ball extraction operation process. Specifically, the lifting polishing device 95 (ball lift) is driven to lift the game balls collected from the gaming area 5a to the lifting ball path, and the lifted game balls are placed in the middle of the lifting ball path. Processing is performed to discharge the balls from the gaming machine through the provided ball extraction port. The details of the ball extraction operation process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine installation information reception processing in step W200. Specifically, when receiving gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board 110, processing such as transmitting a gaming machine installation information response to the main control board 110 is performed. Note that details of the gaming machine installation information receiving process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine information reception processing in step W250. Specifically, when gaming machine information (hole control/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the gaming machine information stored in the slot control RAM 120c is updated, and the gaming machine information is sent to the main control board 110. Processing such as transmitting a gaming machine information response to the gaming machine information is performed. Note that details of the gaming machine information receiving process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a game ball number update process in step W300. Specifically, the number of game balls is subtracted according to the firing of game balls, and the number of game balls is added according to the occurrence of foul balls or winnings of game balls in various winning holes. Note that details of the game ball number update process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs error control processing in step W350. Specifically, the frame control board 120 detects the occurrence of various errors to be monitored, and performs error notification according to the type of error that has occurred (displayed on the frame control display 125). settings of error codes to be executed, settings of error notification commands to be sent to the production control board 130, etc.). Note that details of the error control process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs display performance information calculation processing in step W400. Specifically, the number of game balls fired into the game area 5a (number of out balls), the number of game balls awarded to the player as a result of the game (number of prize balls), etc. are counted, and the counted number of game balls is calculated. Based on this, processing is performed to calculate display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125. Note that details of the display performance information calculation process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine performance information calculation processing in step W450. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 and the information regarding the game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the game balls are displayed on the dedicated unit 170 without being displayed on the frame control display 125. Performs processing to calculate gaming machine performance information to be transmitted. Note that details of the gaming machine performance information calculation process will be described later.

The slot control CPU 120a performs gaming machine information notification processing in step W500. Specifically, the game machine installation information regarding the game machine 1, the game machine performance information calculated by the game machine performance information calculation process, the hall console/fraud monitoring information etc. generated from the game machine information received from the main control board 110, etc. Processing for transmitting (data transfer) to the dedicated unit 170 is performed. Note that details of the gaming machine information notification process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs game ball counting processing in step W550. Specifically, based on the player's operation of the counting button 20, processing is performed to transmit (data transfer) part or all of the number of game balls owned by the player to the dedicated unit 170. The details of the game ball counting process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs game ball lending processing in step W600. Specifically, based on the lending notification sent when the player's valuable value (balance of cash inserted into the dedicated unit) is consumed by the player's lending operation on the dedicated unit 170, the player performs a process of adding (renting) the number of game balls notified in the rental notification to the number of game balls owned by the player. Note that details of the game ball lending process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs output control processing in step W650. Specifically, commands stored in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c are transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the ball feeding unit 91, firing device 92, lifting polishing device 95, etc. are driven from the output port. Performs processing to output data.

The frame control CPU 120a performs display control processing in step W700. Specifically, the frame control display 125 displays the number of game balls owned by the player, the error code set in the error control process described above, and the performance information (normal base value) calculated in the display performance information calculation process described above. At the same time, processing is performed to display the number of game balls owned by the player on the game ball number display 135. In addition, if the error code is not set, the number of game balls and performance information are switched and displayed every 5 seconds (number of game balls → performance information of the current game section → number of game balls → the previous game section performance information → number of game balls → performance information of the two previous game sections → number of game balls → repeat of the performance information of the three previous game sections), and if an error code is set, the number of game balls , performance information, and error code are switched and displayed every 5 seconds.

In step W750, the frame control CPU 120a restores the information saved in the stack area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W100 to the register, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In addition, in the display control process, when the acquisition upper limit device is operating, the error code, the number of game balls, and performance information (normal base value) corresponding to the acquisition upper limit device are displayed on the frame control display 125. However, when the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the performance information (normal base value) is not displayed, and the error code and the number of game balls corresponding to the acquisition upper limit device are displayed. Alternatively, the number of game balls and performance information (normal base value) may not be displayed, and an error code corresponding to the acquisition upper limit device may be displayed.

(Ball removal operation processing of frame control board)
The ball extraction operation process of the frame control board 120 will be described using FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the ball extraction operation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W151, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that the ball extraction operation is in progress. If there is no ball extraction operation in progress flag, the current ball extraction operation processing is completed, and if there is a ball removal operation flag, a lift polishing device driving process is performed in step W152. Specifically, in order to discharge game balls out of the game machine from a ball extraction port located in the middle of a lifting ball path that is part of the circulation path for game balls and slopes downward toward the ball feeding device, The upper polishing device 95 (ball lift) is driven to lift the game balls to the lifting ball path.

In step W153, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a ball removal lever operation error flag (indicating a ball removal lever operation error), which will be described later. If there is no ball removal lever operation error flag, it is assumed that no ball removal lever operation error has occurred, and the process moves to step W154, and if there is a ball removal lever operation error flag, it is assumed that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred. Assuming that this has occurred, the process moves to step W157.

In step W154, the frame control CPU 120a determines that the on-lift switch 94c, which is provided in the middle of the lifting ball path and at a position upstream of the ball extraction port, remains in the ON state (the state in which a game ball is detected) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 (seconds) to determine whether it has continued. If the on-lift switch 94c has not been in the ON state for a predetermined period of time, the process moves to step W156, and if the on-lift switch 94c has been in an ON state for a predetermined period of time, the bulb removal operation is in progress. However, it is assumed that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred in which the ball removal lever is not operated and the ball removal port is in a closed state (ball ejection impossible state), and the process moves to step W154.

In step W155, the frame control CPU 120a sets a ball removal operation lever error flag in the frame control RAM 120c, which indicates that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred, and in step W156, sets a ball removal operation lever error flag indicating that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred. A pull lever operation error start designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current ball pull operation process is completed. As a result, a ball removal lever operation error start designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting ball removal lever operation error notification is performed.

In step W157, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the lift switch 94c, which is provided in the middle of the lifting ball path and at a position upstream of the ball extraction port, is in the OFF state (a state in which no game ball is detected). . If the on-lift switch 94c is not in the OFF state, the current ball extraction operation process is finished, and if the on-lift switch 94c is in the OFF state, the ball extraction lever operation error flag is set in step W158. In step W159, a ball removal lever operation error end designation command indicating that the ball removal lever operation error has ended is set, and the current ball removal operation processing is completed. As a result, a ball removal lever operation error termination designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the ball removal lever operation error notification is performed.

In this way, based on the flag being set during the ball extraction operation when the power is turned on (loop preprocessing of the main processing), the ball extraction operation that discharges the game balls that are used for circulation to the outside of the gaming machine 1 is performed. It is designed to run until the power is turned off. Therefore, it becomes possible to reliably discharge the game balls that are circulated in the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1. Furthermore, since no special operation is required to end the ball extraction operation, it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

In addition, the ON state of the switch 94c on the lift continues for a predetermined period (30 seconds), that is, the time necessary to discharge all the game balls that would normally be used in circulation to the outside of the gaming machine 1. Even though the ball removal operation is performed, if the switch 94c on the lift detects a game ball and the ejection of the game ball is not completed, a ball removal lever operation error notification is started. There is. Therefore, it is possible to notify the game store clerk that he has forgotten to operate the ball removal lever or that the ball removal operation is not completed, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Furthermore, when the lift switch 94c is turned OFF, the ball removal lever operation error notification is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game balls circulated in the game machine 1 have been ejected to the outside of the game machine 1 by the end of the ball removal error operation error, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store staff. Become.

(Receiving processing of gaming machine installation information on frame control board)
The gaming machine installation information receiving process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine installation information receiving process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W201, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not gaming machine installation information has been received from the main control board 110. If the gaming machine installation information has not been received, the process moves to step W210, and if the gaming machine installation information has been received, the communication serial number included in the gaming machine installation information is set to "0 (fixed value)" in step W202. )". If the communication serial number is "0", the process moves to step W203, and if the communication serial number is not "0", it is assumed that abnormal gaming machine installation information has been received and the gaming machine installation information is discarded. , the current game machine installation information reception process ends.

In step W203, the frame control CPU 120a sets a gaming machine communication abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c, which indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. Determine whether or not there is. If there is no intra-gaming machine communication error flag, the process moves to step W206, and if there is an intra-gaming machine communication error flag, the intra-gaming machine communication error flag is cleared in step W204, and in step W205, the intra-gaming machine communication error flag is cleared. A gaming machine communication abnormal termination designation command indicating that the communication has been terminated (resolved) is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a gaming machine communication abnormality termination designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the gaming machine communication abnormality notification is performed.

In step W206, the frame control CPU 120a stores the main control chip information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) specified by the received gaming machine installation information in the frame control unit 120m. New gaming machine installation information is generated from the frame control chip information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) and stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W207, it is stored in the frame control RAM 120c. It is determined whether there is a flag indicating that a ball extraction operation is in progress. If there is no ball extraction operation flag, the process moves to step W209, and if there is a ball extraction operation flag, at step W208, a gaming machine installation information response ( The reception result (ball removed state) is transmitted to the main control board 110, and the current game machine installation information reception process is completed.

In step W209, the frame control CPU 120a sends a game machine installation information response (reception result = reception OK) indicating that the reception result is OK (starting game progress control is allowed because the ball extraction operation is not in progress). is transmitted to the main control board 110, and in step W210, the frame control board 120 outputs (ON) a firing permission signal that allows the firing device to fire the game ball, and ends the current gaming machine installation information reception process.

In step W211, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the period during which gaming machine installation information has not been received after the frame control board 120 is activated has reached a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes). If the period for which gaming machine installation information has not been received has not reached the predetermined period, the current gaming machine installation information receiving process is finished, and if the period for which gaming machine installation information has not been received has reached the predetermined period, step In step W212, a gaming machine communication abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W213, a gaming machine communication abnormality start designation command indicating that a communication abnormality in the gaming machine has started (occurred) is stored in the performance transmission data in the frame control RAM 120c. area, and completes the current game machine installation information reception process. As a result, an in-gaming machine communication abnormality start designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting an in-gaming machine communication abnormality notification is performed.

Note that, like this process, a process may be performed to determine whether there is an abnormality (for example, a disconnection) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. The control program (frame control program) that determines that the game machine installation information (for example, gaming machine installation information) could not be received detects whether there is an abnormality (for example, disconnection, etc.) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. It can also be said to be a detection means.

In this way, even if the game machine installation information is received from the main control board 110, if the frame control board 120 is processing the ball extraction operation, the main control board 110 will not be able to control the progress of the game. A gaming machine installation information response (reception result = ball removed state) that will not be performed is transmitted. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by controlling the progress of the game during the ball extraction operation.

Further, when receiving gaming machine installation information from the main control board 110, if the frame control board 120 is not processing the ball extraction operation, the main control board 110 will control the progress of the game. A gaming machine installation information response (reception result=reception OK) is transmitted. Therefore, it is possible to cause the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 to control the progress of the game while ensuring communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In addition, if the gaming machine installation information cannot be received even after a predetermined period of time (3 minutes, which is the maximum startup time of the main control board 110) has passed since the frame control board 120 was started, an internal communication error notification within the gaming machine is started. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to inform the game store clerk that an abnormal communication error within the gaming machine has occurred in which communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 cannot be performed, and it is possible to have the game store clerk take appropriate measures.

Furthermore, even if the gaming machine internal communication error flag is set and communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is not being performed, if gaming machine installation information is subsequently received from the main control board 110. In this case, the in-gaming machine communication abnormality flag is cleared to end the in-gaming machine communication abnormality error notification. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that game progress control is not performed even though communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is ensured.

(Game machine information reception processing of frame control board)
The gaming machine information receiving process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information receiving process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W251, the slot control CPU 120a determines whether or not gaming machine information (hole console/fraud monitoring information) scheduled to be received from the main control board 110 in 108 ms has been received. If the gaming machine information has not been received, the process moves to step W261, and if the gaming machine information has been received, in step W252, it is determined whether there is an intra-gaming machine communication error flag in the frame control RAM 120c (intra-gaming machine communication error flag). is occurring). If there is no intra-gaming machine communication error flag, the process moves to step W255, and if there is an intra-gaming machine communication error flag, the intra-gaming machine communication error flag is cleared in step W253, and in step W254, the intra-gaming machine communication error flag is cleared. A gaming machine communication abnormal termination designation command indicating that the communication has ended is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a gaming machine communication abnormality termination designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the gaming machine communication abnormality error notification is performed.

In step W255, the frame control CPU 120a stores main control state 1 and main control state 2 generated by the main control unit 120m (usage area) in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W256, the frame control CPU 120a stores the main control state 1 and main control state 2 generated in the main control unit 120m (usage area). The gaming machine error state generated in step W257 is stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W257, the fraud detection state 1 generated in the main control section 120m (used area) is stored in the frame control RAM 120c. The number of bonus balls and consecutive bonus balls generated by the part 120m (use area) are stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W259, various games generated by the main control part 120m (use area) are stored. The information is stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W260, a gaming machine information response (reception result = reception OK) indicating that the reception result is OK (received normally) is transmitted to the main control board 110, and the current The game machine information reception process ends.

The various gaming information included in the received gaming machine information (hole control/fraud monitoring information) includes the number of starting slot wins, the number of big winning slots won by special electric accessory activation, the number of winning slots winnings, and all starting slot wins. number, number of confirmed symbols, number of jackpots, number of accessories (number of times the big winning hole is opened), number of passes through a specific area, external terminal board pulse output, performance information status notification, etc.

In step W261, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not settings are currently being changed or settings are being confirmed. If settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed, the current gaming machine information reception process is terminated without determining whether or not a communication error within the gaming machine has occurred; if settings are not being changed or settings are being confirmed, The process moves to step W262.

In step W262, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the information non-reception period after receiving the gaming machine information last time has reached a predetermined period (for example, 1000 ms). If the information non-reception period is not the predetermined period, the current gaming machine information reception process is ended, and if the information non-reception period is the predetermined period, in step W263, the information in the gaming machine is stored in the frame control RAM 120c. A communication abnormality flag within the gaming machine indicating that a communication abnormality has occurred is set, and in step W264, an intra-gaming machine communication abnormality start designation command indicating that a communication abnormality within the gaming machine has occurred is stored in the production transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. and completes the current game machine information reception process. As a result, an in-gaming machine communication abnormality start designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting an in-gaming machine communication abnormality notification is performed.

In this way, when there is a communication error flag in the gaming machine (an error in the communication in the gaming machine has occurred), when gaming machine information (hole control, fraud monitoring information, etc.) is received from the main control board 110, an error in the communication in the gaming machine is detected. The error notification is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience in which an abnormal communication error within the game machine is notified even though communication with the main control board 110 is being performed normally, and it is possible to perform appropriate error notification. becomes.

Furthermore, when the period of not receiving gaming machine information after receiving the gaming machine information last time reaches a predetermined period (a period during which the main control board 110 can transmit gaming machine information multiple times), a communication abnormality error notification within the gaming machine is started. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to inform the gaming store clerk that communication with the main control board 110 is not being performed normally, and it is possible to have the gaming store clerk take appropriate measures.

Further, various gaming information grasped by the slot control board 120 is updated based on gaming machine information (hole control/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110. Therefore, in the gaming machine performance information calculation process and the gaming machine information notification process, which will be described later, it becomes possible to calculate and transmit detailed gaming machine performance information in accordance with the actual game.

In addition, if the settings are currently being changed or settings are being confirmed, the internal communication within the gaming machine may be controlled by sending a command to start communication within the gaming machine from the frame control board 120 without determining whether or not an internal communication abnormality has occurred. Execution of communication abnormality error notification is restricted (regulated), and after setting change or setting confirmation is completed, it is determined whether or not a communication abnormality in the gaming machine has occurred, and a command for specifying the start of communication abnormality in the gaming machine is transmitted from the frame control board 120. It is possible to notify an abnormal communication error within the game machine. Therefore, by notifying the gaming machine communication abnormality error while changing or checking the settings, it will no longer interfere with changing or checking the settings, making it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming store staff. Become.

Note that even if the settings are being changed or the settings are being confirmed, the error notification of the communication abnormality within the gaming machine can be made by determining whether or not an internal communication abnormality has occurred and transmitting a command to specify the start of the internal communication abnormality from the frame control board 120. It may be possible to execute a communication error within a gaming machine, and when executing a communication abnormality error notification within a gaming machine while changing settings or confirming settings, a communication error within a gaming machine whose notification level is lower than that when changing settings or confirming settings. Error notification (for example, any one or two of displaying an error code on the frame control display 125, outputting an error notification sound from the audio output device 9, and emitting error light from the frame lighting device 10) You can.

Further, even if the gaming machine information (hole control/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that the acquisition upper limit device is operating, the slot control unit 120m does not control the firing device. However, if information indicating that the acquisition upper limit device is activated is included, the frame control unit 120m It is also possible to stop outputting a firing permission signal that allows the firing device to fire the game ball.

(Updating the number of game balls on the frame control board)
The game ball number update process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the game ball number update process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W301, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a detection signal from the subtraction port switch 91c has been input (there has been a ball feed in which a game ball is sent to the launch pad). If the detection signal from the subtraction port switch 91c is not input, it is assumed that the game ball will not be fired, and the process moves to step W303, and if the detection signal from the subtraction port switch 91c is input, Assuming that game balls are to be fired, in step W302, the number of game balls owned by the player is subtracted by 1.

In step W303, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a detection signal from the foul ball switch 93a has been input (a foul ball that was fired but returned without flying into the game area 5a has occurred). If the detection signal from the foul ball switch 93a is not input, it is assumed that no foul ball has occurred, and the process moves to step W305; if the detection signal from the foul ball switch 93a is input, the foul ball is determined to have not occurred. Assuming that a ball has been generated, one is added to the number of game balls owned by the player in step W304.

The slot control CPU 120a determines whether a game ball has won in the general winning hole 43 in step W305. Specifically, it is determined whether the number of winning holes included in the gaming machine information (hole console/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 is 1 or more. If no game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, the process moves to step W307, and if a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, in step W306, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole The number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings is added to the number of game balls owned by the player.

The frame control CPU 120a determines whether a game ball has won in the big winning hole 50 in step W307. Specifically, it is determined whether the number of big winning slots won included in the gaming machine information (hole con/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 is 1 or more. If no game ball has entered the grand prize opening 50, the process moves to step W309, and if a game ball has entered the grand prize opening 50, in step W308, the number of prize balls corresponding to the grand prize opening is The number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings is added to the number of game balls owned by the player.

In step W309, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. Specifically, it is determined whether the total number of starting opening winnings included in the gaming machine information (hole console/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 is 1 or more. If no game balls have entered the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the current game ball number update process is finished, and no game balls have entered the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. If so, the process moves to step W310.

In step W310, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the number of winnings for each type of starting opening. Specifically, the number of wins in the first starting hole 45 is identified from the number of winnings in the starting hole included in the gaming machine information (hole console/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110, and the number of winnings in the starting hole is determined. The number of winnings to the second starting opening 47 is calculated from the number of winnings of all starting openings.

In step W311, the frame control CPU 120a adds the number of prize balls according to the type of starting hole and the number of prize balls according to the number of winnings to the number of game balls owned by the player, and ends the current game ball number update process. Specifically, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first starting port 45 and the number of winning balls in the first starting port 45 calculated in step W310, the number of prize balls in the second starting port 47 and the step A number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prizes entered into the second starting port 47 calculated in W310 is added to the number of game balls owned by the player.

In this way, the number of game balls owned by the player is subtracted by 1 in response to the firing of game balls, and the number of game balls owned by the player is increased by 1 in response to the occurrence of a foul ball. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately update the number of game balls owned by the player, taking into account foul balls, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that would put the player at a disadvantage.

In addition, the frame control board 120 does not monitor the winnings in various winning openings, but the main control board 110 adds prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings to each winning opening to the number of game balls owned by the player. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, there is no need to connect detection switches provided at various winning ports to both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and it is possible to prevent complicated wiring.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a ball feed in which a game ball is sent to the launch pad occurs, the game ball is always fired, so the timing when the detection signal from the subtraction port switch 91c is input is when the player owns the ball. The number of game balls is decremented by 1, but when the launch pad switch 92a turns from ON to OFF, it is detected that a game ball has been launched, and this detection allows the player to calculate the number of game balls owned by the player. It is also possible to subtract 1.

(Error control processing of frame control board)
Error control processing of the frame control board 120 will be described using FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing error control processing of the frame control board 120.

First, the frame control CPU 120a executes severe error notification control processing in step W351. Specifically, based on the occurrence of a severe error with a high security alert level, processing is performed to start error notification according to the type of severe error. Note that details of the severe error notification control process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a executes hardware error notification control processing in step W352. Specifically, based on the occurrence of a hardware error caused by hardware, error notification according to the type of hardware error is started, and based on the hardware error being resolved, the hardware error notification is started. Performs processing to end error notification depending on the type. Note that details of the hardware error notification control process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a executes a minor error notification control process in step W353. Specifically, based on the occurrence of a minor error whose security level of alertness is lower than that of a major error, error notification according to the type of minor error is started, and based on the minor error being resolved, a minor error Performs processing to end error notification according to the type of error notification. Note that details of the minor error notification control process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a executes error code display setting processing in step W354. Specifically, if any of the various errors (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120 are occurring, the most common error among the errors currently occurring on the frame control display 125 is determined according to the priority order of the various errors. A process of setting to display an error code (notification event code) corresponding to a high-priority error, and not displaying the error code on the frame control display 125 unless an error detected by the frame control board 120 is occurring. I do. Note that details such as the priority order of errors for displaying error codes will be described later.

In step W355, the frame control CPU 120a determines that the frame control unit 120m is outputting a launch permission signal that allows the launch device to launch the game ball, and that a launch disallowance error that restricts the launch of the game ball is occurring. Determine whether or not. If the launch permission signal is being output and a launch disallow error is not occurring, the process moves to step W357, and if the launch permit signal is being output and a launch disallow error is occurring, In step W356, the frame control unit 120m stops outputting the firing permission signal that allows the firing device to fire the game ball. As a result, the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 (ball feeding to the launching pad and/or firing of the game ball from the launching pad) is stopped, and the firing of the game balls is restricted. .

The "launch disallowance error" in the frame control unit 120m is described in detail later, but includes an entrance switch disconnection error, an entrance switch abnormality error, a communication line abnormality error, a glass frame opening error, an inner frame opening error, and a ball being removed. , a ball removal lever operation error, a notification of a counting process in which the number of game balls is less than 1000, etc.

In step W357, the frame control CPU 120a determines that while the frame control unit 120m is outputting a firing permission signal that allows the firing device to fire the game ball, a firing disallowance error that restricts the firing of the game ball has occurred. Determine whether or not the If the launch permission signal is not stopped or a launch disable error is occurring, the current error control process is terminated, and if the launch permit signal is stopped and a launch disallow error is not occurring, In step W358, the frame control unit 120m resumes outputting the firing permission signal to the firing device to permit firing of game balls, and ends the current error control process. As a result, driving of the firing device (sending the game balls to the launch pad and/or firing the game balls from the launch pad) is permitted, and the game balls can be fired.

In addition, when the output of the firing permission signal is stopped and the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 is stopped, it is necessary to stop the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 after the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the feeding operation of one game ball) is completed. When the firing device 92 is in the unit operation (the firing operation of one game ball), after the unit operation of the firing device 92 is completed, the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 is stopped. In addition, when the ball feeding unit 91 is in the unit operation (feeding one game ball), the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the subsequent unit operation of the firing device 92 (the firing of one game ball) are performed. After the operation) is completed, driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 is stopped.

In this way, error codes (notification event codes) corresponding to various errors (notification events) detected by the slot control board 120 are displayed on the slot control display 125 that can be visually recognized by the game store clerk. Therefore, it is possible to notify the game store clerk of the occurrence of various errors, and it is possible to have the game store clerk take appropriate measures.

Furthermore, among the various errors (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120, errors with lower priority are given priority, and error codes of higher priority errors are displayed on the frame control display 125 that can be viewed by game store staff. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, the game store clerk can deal with the errors in order of priority, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience from being caused to the player.

In addition, error codes (notification event codes) corresponding to various errors (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120 are displayed on the frame control display 125 that can be viewed by game store staff, while errors detected by the main control board 110 are displayed. The error code corresponding to the error code is not displayed on the frame control display 125 that is visible to the game store clerk. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing various errors (notification events) detected by the main control board 110 with various errors (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120 and not being able to take appropriate measures. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of game store staff.

In addition, if a firing disallowance error (notification event) occurs that causes inconvenience when firing a game ball, the frame control unit 120m stops outputting the firing permission signal that permits the firing of the game ball, and the game starts. It is designed to stop the ball from firing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience (disadvantageous to the gaming parlor or the player) from occurring due to the firing of game balls during the occurrence of a firing disallowance error (notification event).

In addition, when the firing disallowance error (notification event) that makes it inconvenient to fire the game ball is resolved, the frame control unit 120m resumes outputting the firing permission signal that permits the firing of the game ball, and the game starts. The ball is now allowed to be fired. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience (disadvantage to the game parlor or the player) from occurring due to the inability to shoot the game ball.

Further, the error control process is executed regardless of whether or not the frame control board 120 is executing the ball extraction operation. In other words, various error notifications (severe errors, hardware errors, minor errors) can be performed even when the ball is not being extracted or during the ball extraction operation. Therefore, various error notifications are not restricted due to the execution of the ball extraction operation, and it becomes possible to have the game store clerk take appropriate measures based on the various error notifications.

(Serious error notification control processing of frame control board)
The severe error notification control process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the severe error notification control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W351-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the radio wave detection sensor 54a has detected an unauthorized radio wave when there is no unauthorized radio wave detection flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred. Determine. If there is a fraudulent radio wave detection flag or if fraudulent radio waves are not detected, the process moves to step W351-3, and if fraudulent radio waves are detected without the fraudulent radio wave detection flag, proceed to step W351-2. , an unauthorized radio wave detection flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an unauthorized radio wave detection designation command indicating that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an unauthorized radio wave detection designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting unauthorized radio wave detection error notification is performed.

In step W351-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the winning path count switch 94a has been turned from OFF to ON (or a game ball has passed). If the winning passage count switch 94a has not changed from OFF to ON, the process moves to step W351-5, and if the winning passage counting switch 94a has changed from OFF to ON, frame control is performed in step W351-4. The number of winning passage passages stored in the RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the difference between the number of notified winnings notified from the main control board 110 and the number of passing through the winning passage is a specified number (for example, 100) or more. If the number is not more than the specified number, it is assumed that no abnormal error has occurred in the number of winning balls, and the process moves to step W351-8. If the number is more than the specified number, in step W351-6, the prize winning ball is stored in the frame control RAM 120c. It is determined whether there is an abnormal number of winning pitches flag indicating that an abnormal number of pitches error has occurred. If there is an abnormal number of winning balls flag, the process moves to step W351-8, and if there is no abnormal number of winning balls flag, it is assumed that an abnormal number of winning balls error has occurred, and frame control is performed in step W351-7. A winning pitch abnormality flag is set in the RAM 120c, and a winning pitch abnormality designation command indicating that an abnormal prize winning pitch error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a winning ball number abnormality designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting winning ball number abnormal error notification is performed.

In step W351-8, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction port switch 91c has been turned from OFF to ON (or a game ball has passed). If the subtraction port switch 91c has not changed from OFF to ON, the process moves to step W351-10, and if the subtraction port switch 91c has changed from OFF to ON, in step W351-9, data is stored in the frame control RAM 120c. Update the memorized number of fired balls by +1.

In step W351-10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the foul ball switch 93a has been turned from OFF to ON (or a game ball has passed). If the foul ball switch 93a has not changed from OFF to ON, the process moves to step W351-12, and if the foul ball switch 93a has changed from OFF to ON, in step W351-11, the frame control RAM 120c is Update the stored number of fired balls by -1.

In step W351-12, the frame control CPU 120a activates the winning path count switch 94a or the non-winning path count switch provided in the collected ball channel (a part of the ball path unit 94) through which the game balls collected from the gaming area 5a flow down. It is determined whether or not 94b is turned on (whether the game ball has passed). If the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage counting switch 94b is not turned on, the process moves to step W351-14, and if the winning passage counting switch 94a or the non-winning passage counting switch 94b is turned on, the process proceeds to step W351-14. At W351-13, the total number of returned pitches stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the difference between the number of fired balls and the total number of returned balls is equal to or greater than a specified number (for example, 100 balls). If the number is not more than the specified number, it is assumed that no abnormal error has occurred in the number of fired balls, and the current severe error notification control process is terminated. If the number is more than the specified number, in step W351-15, the frame control RAM 120c is It is determined whether there is an abnormal number of fired balls flag indicating that an abnormal number of fired balls error has occurred. If there is an abnormal number of fired balls flag, the current severe error notification control process is ended, and if there is no abnormal number of fired balls flag, it is assumed that an abnormal number of fired balls error has occurred, and in step W351-16, The abnormal number of fired balls flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, the abnormal number of fired balls specification command indicating that an abnormal number of fired balls error has occurred is set in the production transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and this severe error notification is executed. Control processing ends. As a result, a firing ball number abnormality designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting firing ball number abnormality error notification is performed.

In this way, based on the occurrence of a severe error with a high security level, error notification is started in accordance with the type of severe error. Therefore, the security of the gaming machine can be ensured, and it is possible to prevent disadvantages such as disadvantages to the gaming parlor or the players.

(Hardware error notification control processing of frame control board)
The hardware error notification control process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the hardware error notification control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W352-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a disconnection of the subtraction port switch 91c has occurred. If the wire breakage of the subtraction exit switch 91c has not occurred, the process moves to step W352-3, and if the wire breakage of the subtraction exit switch 91c has occurred, it is determined in step W352-2 that an exit switch wire breakage error has occurred. An exit switch disconnection flag indicating that an exit switch disconnection error has occurred is set, and an exit switch disconnection designation command indicating that an exit switch disconnection error has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an exit switch disconnection designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting exit switch disconnection error notification is performed.

In step W352-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction port switch 91c is turned on within a specified time from the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a. If the subtraction port switch 91c is turned on within the specified time, it is assumed that no exit switch abnormality error has occurred, and the process moves to step W352-5; if the subtraction port switch 91c is not turned on within the specified time In step W352-4, an exit switch abnormality flag indicating that an exit switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an exit switch abnormality designation command indicating that an exit switch abnormality error has occurred is sent to the frame control RAM 120c. Set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, an exit switch abnormality designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting exit switch abnormality error notification is performed.

In step W352-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a disconnection of the subtraction entrance switch 91b has occurred. If the subtraction entrance switch 91b has not been disconnected, the process moves to step W352-7, and if the subtraction entrance switch 91b has a disconnection, in step W352-6, the inlet switch disconnection is stored in the frame control RAM 120c. An entrance switch disconnection flag indicating that an error has occurred is set, and an entrance switch disconnection designation command indicating that an entrance switch disconnection error has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an entrance switch disconnection designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting entrance switch disconnection error notification is performed.

In step W352-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b (the time during which no game balls are detected) has continued for a specified time (for example, 10 seconds). If the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b does not continue for the specified time, it is assumed that no entrance switch abnormality error has occurred, and the process moves to step W352-9, and the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b continues for the specified time. If so, in step W352-8, an inlet switch abnormality flag indicating that an inlet switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an inlet switch abnormality designation command indicating that an inlet switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c. Set it in the performance transmission data storage area of the control RAM 120c. As a result, an entrance switch abnormality designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting entrance switch abnormality error notification is performed.

In step W352-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a disconnection of the foul ball switch 93a has occurred. If the foul ball switch 93a is not disconnected, the process moves to step W352-11, and if the foul ball switch 93a is disconnected, in step W352-10, the foul ball switch is stored in the frame control RAM 120c. A foul ball switch disconnection flag indicating that a disconnection error has occurred is set, and a foul ball switch disconnection designation command indicating that a foul ball switch disconnection error has occurred is set in the production transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a foul ball switch disconnection designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting foul ball switch disconnection error notification is performed.

In step W352-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines that the abrasive confirmation switch for detecting that an abrasive for polishing the game ball being lifted into the lifting polishing device 95 is attached is OFF (the abrasive is not attached). If the abrasive confirmation switch is not OFF, it is assumed that no abrasive not installed error has occurred (abrasive is installed), and the process moves to step W352-14, where the abrasive confirmation switch is OFF. If so, in step W352-12, it is determined whether or not there is an abrasive not installed flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an abrasive not installed error has occurred. If there is an abrasive not installed flag, the process moves to step W352-14, and if there is no abrasive not installed flag, it is determined in step W352-13 that an abrasive not installed error has occurred in the frame control RAM 120c. An abrasive not installed flag indicating that an abrasive not installed error has occurred is set, and an abrasive not installed designation command indicating that an abrasive not installed error has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an abrasive material non-installation designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting an abrasive material non-installation error notification is performed.

In step W352-14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the processing path switches (winning path count switch 94a, non-winning path count switch 94b, radio wave detection sensor 54a) are disconnected. If the processing path switch is not connected, it is assumed that no path switch disconnection error has occurred, and the process moves to step W352-16. If the processing path switch is not connected, the process proceeds to step W352-15. , a passage switch disconnection designation command indicating that a passage switch disconnection error has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a passage switch disconnection designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting passage switch disconnection error notification is performed.

In step W352-16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the abrasive confirmation switch has been turned from OFF to ON (abrasive has been installed). If the abrasive confirmation switch has not changed from OFF to ON (abrasive has not been installed), the process moves to step W352-18, and the abrasive confirmation switch has changed from OFF to ON (abrasive has not been installed). ), in step W352-17, the abrasive material not installed flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and the frame control RAM 120c issues an abrasive material not installed end designation command indicating that the abrasive material not installed error has been resolved. Set in the transmission data storage area. As a result, an abrasive material non-installation end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for terminating the abrasive material non-installation error notification is performed.

In step W352-18, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the processing path switches (winning path count switch 94a, non-winning path count switch 94b, radio wave detection sensor 54a) have changed from the unconnected state to the connected state. If the processing path switch has not changed from the unconnected state to the connected state, the process moves to step W352-20, and if the processing path switch has changed from the unconnected state to the connected state, in step W352-19, A process path switch disconnection end designation command indicating that the process path switch disconnection error has been resolved is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a processing path switch disconnection termination designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the processing path switch disconnection error notification is performed.

In step W352-20, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the error release switch 123 has been turned from OFF to ON (operated). If the error release switch 123 has not changed from OFF to ON, the current hardware error notification control process is terminated as the target error state is not canceled, and when the error release switch 123 has changed from OFF to ON. In step W352-21, it is determined whether or not there is an exit switch disconnection flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no exit switch disconnection flag, the process moves to step W352-23, and if there is an exit switch disconnection flag, the exit switch disconnection flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c in step W352-22, and the exit switch disconnection flag is cleared. An exit switch disconnection end designation command indicating that the error has been resolved is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an exit switch disconnection termination designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the exit switch disconnection error notification is performed.

In step W352-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an exit switch abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no exit switch abnormality flag, the process moves to step W352-25, and if there is an exit switch abnormality flag, the exit switch abnormality flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c in step W352-26, and the exit switch abnormality flag is cleared. An exit switch abnormal termination designation command indicating that the error has been resolved is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an exit switch abnormal termination designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the exit switch abnormality error notification is performed.

In step W352-25, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the frame control RAM 120c has an entrance switch disconnection flag. If there is no inlet switch disconnection flag, the process moves to step W352-27, and if there is an inlet switch disconnection flag, the inlet switch disconnection flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c in step W352-26, and the inlet switch disconnection flag is cleared. An entrance switch disconnection end designation command indicating that the error has been resolved is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an entrance switch disconnection end designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and processing is performed to end the entrance switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-27, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an entrance switch abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no entrance switch abnormality flag, the process moves to step W352-29, and if there is an entrance switch abnormality flag, the entrance switch abnormality flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c in step W352-28, and the entrance switch abnormality flag is cleared. An entrance switch abnormal termination designation command indicating that the error has been resolved is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an entrance switch abnormal termination designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the entrance switch abnormality error notification is performed.

In step W352-29, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a foul ball switch disconnection flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no foul ball switch disconnection flag, the current hardware error notification control process ends, and if there is a foul ball switch disconnection flag, the foul ball switch disconnection flag is retrieved from the frame control RAM 120c in step W352-30. A foul ball switch disconnection end designation command indicating that the foul ball switch disconnection error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current hardware error notification control process is ended. As a result, a foul ball switch disconnection end designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the foul ball switch disconnection error notification.

In this way, based on the occurrence of a hardware error caused by the hardware of the gaming machine 1, error notification is started according to the type of hardware error. Therefore, it is possible to have the game clerk take appropriate measures, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player suffers a disadvantage due to not being able to play the game properly.

Further, based on the fact that the hardware error caused by the hardware of the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, error notification according to the type of the resolved hardware error is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continued notification of the resolved hardware error from interfering with the game, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience to the game parlor or the player.

In addition, for certain hardware errors (exit switch disconnection error, exit switch abnormality error, inlet switch disconnection error, entrance switch abnormality error, foul ball switch disconnection error, etc.), the error will be cleared after the cause of the hardware error is removed. It is possible to terminate the error notification by operating the switch 123. Therefore, it is possible to end the error notification and restart the game without turning off the power of the gaming machine 1, and it is possible to improve the convenience for the gaming parlor and the players.

(Minor error notification control processing of frame control board)
The minor error notification control process of the frame control board 120 will be described using FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the minor error notification control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W353-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines that there is no communication line abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred in which there is an abnormality in the communication line with the dedicated unit 170; It is determined whether the VL (connection confirmation power supply) input from the unit 170 is OFF. If there is a communication line abnormality flag or if VL is ON, it is assumed that no communication line abnormality error has occurred, and the process moves to step W353-3. If the power supply for connection confirmation) is OFF, in step W353-2, a communication line abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a communication line abnormality designation command indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred is sent to the frame control RAM 120c. Set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, a communication line abnormality designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting communication line abnormality error notification is performed.

Note that, like this process, a process to determine whether there is an abnormality (for example, disconnection) in the communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 may be performed, but such a control program (frame It can also be said that the control program) is a detection means for detecting whether there is an abnormality (for example, a disconnection, etc.) in communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

In step W353-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether there is a response within a specified time from the transmission of the specific message to the dedicated unit 170. If there is a response within the specified time, it is assumed that a communication no-response error has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W353-5. If there is no response within the specified time, a communication line abnormality flag indicating that a communication no response error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c in step W353-4, and it is determined that a communication no response error has occurred. A communication no-response designation command indicating this is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a communication no-response designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting a communication no-response error notification is performed.

In step W353-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines that the overload sensor 94e is turned ON during a customer waiting state in which a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or a jackpot game is not being executed, and during a firing stop where game balls are not being fired. Determine whether or not. If the excessive number sensor 94e is not turned on, it is assumed that an excessive ball error in which the number of game balls circulating in the ball circulation mechanism is excessive has not occurred, and the process moves to step W353-7, and the excessive number sensor 94e is turned on. If it is turned ON, in step W353-6, an excessive balls error flag indicating that an excessive balls error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an excessive balls error designation command indicating that an excessive balls error has occurred is sent. It is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the excessive ball error designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting the excessive ball error notification is performed.

In step W353-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines that the insufficient sensor 94f is turned OFF while the player is waiting for a customer, where a special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or a jackpot game is being executed, and during a firing stop where game balls are not being fired. Determine whether or not. If the insufficient number sensor 94f is not turned off, it is assumed that an insufficient ball error in which the number of game balls circulating in the ball circulation mechanism is too small has not occurred, and the process moves to step W353-9, where the insufficient number sensor 94f is turned off. If it is OFF, in step W353-8, a ball shortage error flag indicating that a ball shortage error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a ball shortage error specification command indicating that a ball shortage error has occurred is issued. It is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an insufficient ball error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for starting notification of an insufficient ball error is performed.

In step W353-9, the frame control CPU 120a performs a retry operation of the lift polishing device 95 (a state in which the lower lift switch 94d provided around the inlet of the lift polisher 95 at the downstream end of the recovery ball flow path is ON). The operation of driving the lifting mechanism to lift the game ball to the lifting ball path) failed three times in a row. It is determined whether the lift switch 94c provided around the exit of the device 95 has not been turned on for a specified period of time. If the retry operation has not failed three times in a row, it is assumed that a lifting mechanism error that prevents the lifting and polishing device 95 from lifting the game ball has not occurred, and the process moves to step W353-11, where the retry operation is performed. If the process fails three times in a row, in step W353-10, a lifting mechanism error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a lifting mechanism error has occurred. A lifting mechanism error designation command is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a lifting mechanism error designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting lifting mechanism error notification is performed.

In step W353-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame open detection switch 31a has been turned from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 has been opened). If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has not changed from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 is not opened), it is assumed that a glass frame open error in which the glass frame 4 is opened has not occurred, and step W353- When the process moves to step W353-13 and the glass frame open detection switch 31a changes from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 is opened), in step W353-12, the glass frame is changed to indicate that a glass frame open error has occurred. A release designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a glass frame opening designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting glass frame opening error notification is performed.

In step W353-13, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the inner frame open detection switch 31b has been turned from ON to OFF (the inner frame 3 has been opened). If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has not changed from ON to OFF (inner frame 3 is not open), it is assumed that an inner frame open error in which inner frame 3 is opened has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W353- 15, and if the inner frame open detection switch 31b changes from ON to OFF (inner frame 3 is opened), in step W353-14, an inner frame is displayed indicating that an inner frame open error has occurred. A release designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an inner frame opening designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting inner frame opening error notification is performed.

In step W353-15, the frame control CPU 120a determines that the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c is "0" and the launch pad switch 92a is ON (no game balls are placed on the launch pad). There is a ball). If the number of game balls owned by the player is not "0" or if the launch pad switch 92a is not ON (there are no game balls on the launch pad), the number of game balls owned by the player is "0". Despite this, the game ball to be fired remains on the launch pad. Assuming that the launch pad remaining ball error has not occurred, the process moves to step W353-17, and the number of game balls owned by the player is "0". And if the launch pad switch 92a is ON, in step W353-16, a launch pad remaining ball error flag indicating that a launch pad remaining ball error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and the launch is started. A launch pad remaining ball error designation command indicating that a platform remaining ball error has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a launch pad remaining ball error designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for starting launch pad remaining ball error notification is performed.

In step W353-17, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c exceeds a specified number (for example, 40,000 balls). If the number of game balls does not exceed the specified number, it is assumed that the number of game balls exceeding the specified number has not occurred, and the process moves to step W353-19, where the number of game balls exceeds the specified number. If the number of game balls has exceeded, in step W353-18, a game ball number over flag indicating that the number of game balls has exceeded is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a game ball number over flag indicating that the number of game balls has been exceeded is set in the frame control RAM 120c. The specified command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a game ball number over designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130.

In step W353-19, the frame control CPU 120a determines that there is a communication line abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred, and that there is a VL (connection confirmation power supply) input from the dedicated unit 170. is ON. If there is no communication line abnormality flag or if VL is OFF, it is assumed that the communication line abnormality error has not been resolved, and the process moves to step W353-21. If the connection confirmation power supply) is ON, in step W353-20, the communication line abnormality flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a communication line abnormal termination designation command indicating that the communication line abnormality error has been resolved is issued. is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a communication line abnormal termination designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the communication line abnormality error notification is performed.

In step W353-21, the frame control CPU 120a determines that there is a communication line abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a communication no-response error has occurred, and that a message has been received from the dedicated unit 170 (communication with the dedicated unit 170). is normal). If there is no communication no response flag or no message has been received, it is assumed that the communication no response error has not been resolved, and the process moves to step W353-23. If a message is received from , in step W353-22, the communication no response flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a communication no response end designation command indicating that the communication no response error has been resolved is sent to the frame. Set it in the performance transmission data storage area of the control RAM 120c. As a result, a communication no-response termination designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the communication no-response error notification is performed.

In step W353-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines that the frame control RAM 120c has an excess ball error flag, and the excess sensor 94e has changed from ON to OFF (the number of game balls in the ball circulation mechanism has decreased to an appropriate number). Determine whether or not. If the too many balls error flag is not present, or if the too many balls sensor 94e has not been turned from ON to OFF, it is assumed that the too many balls error has not been resolved, and the process moves to step W353-25, where the too many balls error flag is detected. , and when the excessive ball sensor 94e changes from ON to OFF, the excessive ball error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared in step W353-24, and the excessive ball error flag indicating that the excessive ball error has been resolved is cleared. An end designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an excessive ball error termination designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the excessive ball error notification is performed.

In step W353-25, the frame control CPU 120a determines that the frame control RAM 120c has an insufficient ball error flag, and the insufficient ball sensor 94f has been turned from OFF to ON (the number of game balls in the ball circulation mechanism has increased to an appropriate number). Determine whether or not. If there is no insufficient balls error flag, or if the insufficient balls sensor 94f has not been turned from OFF to ON, it is assumed that the insufficient balls error has not been resolved, and the process moves to step W353-27, where there is an excessive balls error flag. , and when the insufficient number of balls sensor 94f turns from OFF to ON, in step W353-26, the insufficient number of balls error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and the number of balls error indicating that the number of balls error has been resolved is cleared. An end designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an insufficient ball error end designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the insufficient ball error notification is performed.

In step W353-27, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame open detection switch 31a has been turned from OFF to ON (the glass frame 4 has entered the closed state). If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has not changed from OFF to ON, the process moves to step W353-29, and if the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from OFF to ON, the glass frame 4 is in the closed state. In step W353-28, a glass frame opening end designation command indicating that the glass frame opening error has ended is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a glass frame opening end designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing is performed to end the glass frame opening error notification.

In step W353-29, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the inner frame open detection switch 31b has been turned from OFF to ON (the inner frame 3 has entered the closed state). If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has not changed from OFF to ON, the process moves to step W353-31, and if the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from OFF to ON, the inner frame 3 is in the closed state. In step W353-30, an inner frame opening end designation command indicating that the inner frame opening error has ended is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, an inner frame opening end designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the inner frame opening error notification is performed.

In step W353-31, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has a launch pad remaining ball error flag and the launch pad switch 92a is OFF (there are no game balls on the launch pad). If there is no launch pad remaining ball error flag or if the launch pad switch 92a is not OFF, the process moves to step W353-33, and if there is a launch pad remaining ball error flag and the launch pad switch 92a is not OFF. If so, in step W353-32, the launch pad remaining ball error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a launch pad remaining ball error end designation command indicating that the launch pad remaining ball error has been resolved is sent to the frame control. Set it in the performance transmission data storage area of the RAM 120c. As a result, a launching pad remaining ball error termination designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for terminating the launching pad remaining ball error notification is performed.

In step W353-33, the frame control CPU 120a determines that the frame control RAM 120c has an over-number of game balls flag, and that the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c is less than the specified number (40,000 pieces). Determine whether the amount has decreased. If there is no over-number of game balls flag, or if the number of game balls exceeds the specified number, the minor error notification control process ends, and if there is an over-number of game balls flag and the number of game balls exceeds the specified number. When the number of game balls exceeds , the flag for overage of game balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a command indicating that the number of game balls has been exceeded is transmitted to the frame control RAM 120c for production purposes. It is set in the data storage area, and the current minor error notification control process ends. As a result, a game ball count over end designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130.

In this way, based on the occurrence of a minor error with a low security level, error notification is started according to the type of minor error. Therefore, the game store staff can be made to take appropriate measures, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience to the game store or the players.

Furthermore, based on the fact that a minor error with a low security level of vigilance has been resolved, error notification according to the type of minor error that has been resolved is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continued error notification that has been resolved from interfering with the game, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience to the game parlor or the player.

(Display content and display priority of frame control display when various notification events occur)
The display contents and display priority of the frame control display 125 when various notification events (notification events such as errors) occur will be explained using FIG. 99.

The table shown in FIG. 99 includes the priority order of each notification event (notification event), the notification event (notification event) type, the detection board (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that detects the occurrence of the notification event, and the notification The main control areas used to perform (the area used by the main control unit 110m, the area outside the area used by the main control unit 110m, the area used by the frame control unit 120m, and the area outside the area used by the frame control unit 120m), the number of game balls Error code display on the display 135, error code display on the frame control display 125, operation restrictions (ball sending operation to the launch pad, game ball launch operation, game progress control), notification event (notification event) occurrence The state of the dedicated unit 170 (loan of game balls within the range of the player's deposit balance based on the operation of the loan button on the dedicated unit 170/inserted by the player based on the operation of the replay button on the dedicated unit 170) Replay within the range of the number of game balls owned by the player stored in association with the identification information of the membership card, game balls stored in the frame control board 120 based on the operation of the counting button 20 of the gaming machine 1 Counting from numbers (memorizing the number of game balls associated with the identification information of membership cards and visitor cards), card operation (inserting membership cards and visitor cards into the dedicated unit 170, and operating the return button of the dedicated unit 170) (return of membership card or visitor card), control over deposits to the dedicated unit 170), etc.

For example, "clear the number of game balls" has the highest priority, and the frame control board 120 detects the occurrence of clearing the number of game balls, and performs the detection and notification of the occurrence of the clearing of the number of game balls. In this case, the usage area of the frame control unit 120m is mainly used, and the area outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m is used as an auxiliary, and the game ball number display 135 displays an error code for clearing the number of game balls. is not displayed, and the error code "H67" is displayed on the frame control display 125. When the number of game balls is cleared, the operation restrictions include ball sending operation, firing operation, and game progress control. The state of the dedicated unit 170 is such that it is possible to control lending/replay, counting, card operation (insertion/return), and deposit.

In addition, if a notification event (notification event) that allows ball sending action, firing action, or game progress control such as "game ball count clear" occurs, or if the corresponding notification is being executed. Also, if a notification event that restricts (restricts) one or more of the ball sending action, firing action, and game progress control occurs simultaneously or in parallel, the ball sending action , firing operation, and game progress control are restricted (regulated).

In addition, if a notification event (notification event) that allows lending/replay, counting, card operation, or deposits such as "game ball count cleared" occurs, or if a corresponding notification is being executed. Also, if a notification event that restricts (restricts) one or more of the controls related to lending/replay, counting, card operations, and deposits occurs at the same time or in parallel, the lending / Corresponding controls among controls related to replay, counting, card operations, and deposits are restricted (regulated).

In this way, "game ball count clear", which clears the number of game balls owned by the player, has a higher priority than various notification events (notification events) detected by the main control board 110. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify (display an error code) on the frame control display 125 that the number of game balls (gaming value) owned by the player, which is most important to the player, has been cleared.

Furthermore, among the various notification events (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120, "game ball count clear", in which the player clears the number of game balls owned by the player, has the highest priority. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify (display an error code) on the frame control display 125 that the number of game balls (gaming value) owned by the player, which is most important to the player, has been cleared.

In addition, when "clearing the number of game balls" is performed, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 that is visible to the game store clerk, but the number of game balls owned by the player is When the counting is completed, the display of the error code corresponding to "number of game balls cleared" on the frame control display 125 is terminated. Therefore, the display of the error code for clearing the number of game balls can be terminated while ensuring that the player has performed the lending operation or played the game, and it is possible to suppress the number of game balls from being cleared inadvertently. becomes possible.

In addition, when the "game ball number clear" is performed, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 that is visible to the game store clerk, but after the "game ball number clear" is performed, firing or counting is not possible. If the power failure recovery is performed without being performed, the error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 again. Therefore, the evidence that the number of game balls has been cleared does not disappear when the power is restored, making it possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Furthermore, when various notification events detected by the main control board 110 occur, an error code is not displayed on the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120, but the error code is detected by the frame control board 120. When various notification events occur, an error code is displayed on a frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120. Therefore, various notification events (notification events) detected by the main control board 110 and various notification events (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120 can be dealt with separately, which improves convenience for game store staff. becomes possible.

In addition, in the case of "ball extraction operation in progress", not only the frame control display 125 provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1 and visible to the gaming clerk, but also the frame control display 125 provided on the front side of the gaming machine 1 and visible to the player. An error code ("-") is also displayed on the game ball number display 135, which is visible. Therefore, even if the inner frame is closed during the ball extraction operation, it is possible to know that the ball extraction operation is in progress, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

Furthermore, among the various notification events (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120, certain notification events (ball removal lever operation error, ball remaining on the launch pad error) that do not directly disadvantage the player , counting process notification, and counting process completion), the event notification is executed by the production control board 130, but the error code is not displayed on the frame control display 125 (regulated/restricted). There is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the game store clerk becoming flustered due to the fact that excessive event notification is not performed.

In addition, among various notification events (notification events), specific notification events that cause inconvenience due to the firing of game balls (setting change, setting confirmation, RWM abnormal error, acquisition upper limit device activation, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance If a switch abnormality error, communication line abnormality error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, ball extraction operation error, ball extraction lever operation error, etc.) occurs, the ball feeding operation and/or firing operation will not be executed ( regulated and restricted). Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences caused by firing of game balls when a specific notification event occurs.

In addition, among various notification events (notification events), certain notification events that cause inconvenience due to game progress control (setting change, setting confirmation, RWM abnormal error, acquisition upper limit device activation, ball removal operation, ball removal, etc.) If a pull-out lever operation error, etc.) occurs, game progress control is not executed (regulated/restricted). Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences caused by controlling the progress of the game when a specific notification event occurs.

In addition, when a counting process notification occurs, if the number of game balls owned by the player is 1000 or more, the ball feeding operation or firing operation is executed, while the number of game balls owned by the player is If the number is less than 1000, the ball feeding operation and the firing operation are not executed (regulated/restricted). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the counting process and the ball feeding or firing operation collide and the counting process cannot be completed normally.

In addition, during the occurrence or notification of a notification event (for example, a notification event such as clearing the number of game balls) that allows ball feeding or firing, the ball feeding operation may be performed regardless of whether the priority is lower or higher than that. In the event that a notification event that limits the firing operation or firing operation occurs (e.g. acquisition upper limit device activation, communication line abnormality error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error notification event), the ball feeding operation or firing operation will not be executed. (regulated/restricted). Therefore, it is possible to restrict the ball feeding operation and the firing operation at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences caused by the execution of the ball feeding operation and the firing operation. Furthermore, the occurrence of a notification event (notification event) with a high priority will not invalidate the restrictions on the ball sending operation or firing operation caused by a notification event (notification event) with a low priority.

Also, while a notification event (notification event) that allows lending/replay is occurring or being announced, a notification event (notification event) that restricts lending/replay, regardless of whether it has a lower or higher priority than that event, may ) occurs, lending/replaying is restricted (regulated/restricted). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences caused by lending/replaying. In addition, the lending/replay restrictions caused by low-priority notification events (notification events) are not invalidated by the occurrence of high-priority notification events (notification events), and the dedicated unit 170 can be operated appropriately. becomes possible.

In addition, while a notification event (notification event) in which card operation (insertion/return) is permitted is occurring or being notified, card operation (insertion/return) is restricted regardless of whether the priority is lower or higher than that. When a notification event (notification event) occurs, card operations (insertion/return) are restricted. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences caused by the execution of manufacturer's operations. In addition, the restriction on card operations (insertion/return) due to a low priority notification event (notification event) is not invalidated by the occurrence of a high priority notification event (notification event), and the dedicated unit 170 can be properly controlled. It becomes possible to operate it.

In addition, if a notification event (notification event) that restricts deposits occurs while a notification event (notification event) that allows deposits occurs, regardless of whether the priority is lower or higher than that, the deposit will be is now restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences caused by the execution of deposits. In addition, the occurrence of a notification event (notification event) with a high priority does not invalidate the restriction on deposits due to a notification event (notification event) with a low priority, making it possible to operate the dedicated unit 170 appropriately. Become.

In addition, the priority of "game ball count clear" may be placed under "setting change", "setting confirmation", or "power on (RWM clear)". However, it may be placed under "Power Recovery", it may be placed under "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)", it may be placed under "Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Winning Error)", It may be placed under "Fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)", it may be placed under "Acquisition limit device activated", it may be placed under "Illegal radio wave detection error", or it may be placed under "Number of winning balls". You can put it under "Abnormal Error", "Abnormal Number of Balls Fired Error", "Abnormal Communication Error in Game Machine", or "Exit Switch Disconnection Error". It can be placed under "Exit switch abnormal error", "Entrance switch disconnection error", "Entrance switch abnormal error", or "Foul ball". It can be placed under ``Switch disconnection error,'' ``Communication line abnormal error,'' ``Communication no response error,'' or ``Too many balls error.'' It can be placed under "Low Ball Error", "Lifting Mechanism Error", "Abrasive Not Installed Error", or "Passway Switch Not Connected". It can be placed under "Error", "Glass frame opening error", "Inner frame opening error", or "Ball removal in progress". However, it may be placed under "Ball removal lever operation error" or under "Launching pad remaining ball error."

Further, error codes of various notification events detected by the main control board 110 may be displayed on the frame control display 125. In this case, various notification events (notification events) detected by the main control board 110 are specified so that they can be distinguished from the error codes (“H〇〇”) of various notification events (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120. It is recommended to set the error code to "P〇〇". Specifically, "P64" is displayed for "setting change", "P65" is displayed for "setting confirmation", and "P66" is displayed for "power on (RWM clear)". , "P67" is displayed if "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)" is displayed, "P68" is displayed if "Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Winning Error)" is detected, and "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" is displayed. ”, it is preferable to display “P69”, and if “the acquisition upper limit device is activated”, “P70” is displayed.

In addition, when the acquisition upper limit device is activated, an error code (( "P70") may be displayed. When displaying an error code indicating that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated on the frame control display 125, it is recommended to repeatedly display the number of game balls → performance information → error code; may display the number of game balls → error code repeatedly, or if the number of game balls owned by the player is "0" (if the number of game balls becomes "0" after firing game balls, The error code may be displayed only when the number of game balls is counted and the number of game balls becomes "0" (the number of game balls → the error code is repeated, or only the error code is displayed).

Also, during the ball extraction operation, instead of displaying the same error code (“-”) on the frame control display 125 and the number of game balls display 135, the frame control display 125 and the number of game balls display 135 display the same error code (“-”). Different error codes may be displayed on the frame control display 125 and the number of game balls display 135, or the error code may be displayed on only one of the frame control display 125 and the number of game balls display 135.

Furthermore, when an "entrance switch disconnection error" or "entrance switch abnormality error" occurs, the game ball firing operation may not be executed, and when an "inner frame opening error" occurs, the ball feeding operation or firing operation may be disabled. The action may be performed.

In addition, if the number of game balls owned by the player is 1,000 or more when a "count processing notification" occurs, instead of enabling ball feeding and firing actions, even if the number of balls exceeds 1,000. The number may be less than 1000. However, if the number is less than 1000, it is better to set it to 250 or more, which can be counted with one counting operation (single press).

Further, when a "counting process notification" is generated, the ball sending operation or firing operation may not be executed regardless of the number of game balls owned by the player.

(Frame control board display performance information calculation process)
The display performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the display performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W401, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is not in the normal gaming state, the process moves to step W405, and if it is in the normal gaming state, it is determined in step W402 whether or not the gaming information has been updated. Specifically, in step W259 of the gaming machine information receiving process described above, it is determined whether various gaming information has been updated based on the gaming machine information (hole console/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110. If the game information has not been updated, the process moves to step W405, and if the game information has been updated, the process moves to step W403.

In step W403, the slot control CPU 120a calculates the current number of prize balls from the game information (the number of prizes in each winning hole and the number of prize balls in each winning hole), and in step W404, calculates the current number of prize balls in the normal game. It is added to the normal medium prize ball counter for counting the number of prize balls in the state. For example, if the number of winning balls in the first starting port 45 is one and the number of winning balls in the first starting port 45 is three, it is assumed that there are 1 x 3 = 3 winning balls. These three balls are calculated and added to the normal medium prize ball counter.

The frame control CPU 120a determines whether a detection signal from the winning path count switch 94a or the non-winning path counting switch 94b is input (an out ball passing through the gaming area 5a is detected). If the detection signal has not been input, the process moves to step W409, and if the detection signal has been input, in step W406, the total number of out balls is counted for all game states in the current game section. Add 1 to the number counter.

The frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the current state is a normal gaming state. If it is not in the normal gaming state, the process moves to step W409, and if it is in the normal gaming state, in step W408, the normal out number counter for counting the number of out pitches during the normal gaming state is incremented by 1. do.

In step W409, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the section counter for counting the number of the game section is the first game section value (0) indicating that it is the first game section. . If it is not the first game section, it is assumed that the current time is the second or subsequent game section for which display performance information (normal base value) is calculated, and the process moves to step W411, and if it is the first game section. In this case, it is assumed that the current time is the first game section for which display performance information is not calculated, and the process moves to step W410.

In step W410, the slot control CPU 120a determines whether the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total number of outs counter is equal to or greater than the first section update value (300). If the total number of outs is not greater than or equal to the first section update value, the current display performance information calculation process is ended, and if the total number of outs is greater than or equal to the first section update value, the process moves to step W416.

In step W411, the frame control CPU 120a calculates a normal base value, which is display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125, and rounds it to the first decimal place. "Normal base value" is the amount of gaming value that will be awarded during the game during the normal gaming state relative to the amount of gaming value used during the normal gaming state (number of out pitches that have passed through the gaming area 5a). It is the ratio (ratio) of (the number of prize balls that will be awarded as prize balls), and is calculated as "(Number of prize balls in normal play, which is the number of prize balls in normal play state) ÷ Number of out balls in normal play state. It is calculated using the following formula: (Number of outs during a certain normal period) x 100.

In step W412, the frame control CPU 120a saves the calculated normal base value in the first area of the base storage areas (first to fourth areas) set in the frame control RAM 120c. The "base storage area" is a storage area for storing the normal base value in the four game sections, and includes a first area for storing the normal base value in the current game section, and a storage area for storing the normal base value in the current game section. A first area for storing the normal base value in the gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a third area for storing the normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. and a fourth area.

In step W413, the slot control CPU 120a determines whether the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total number of outs counter is equal to or greater than the second section update value (60,000). If the total number of outs is not greater than or equal to the second section update value, the current display performance information calculation process is terminated as the game section is not updated, and if the total number of outs is greater than or equal to the second section update value, As the game section is to be updated, the process moves to step W414.

In addition, the game sections after the second game section are divided by the total number of outs of 60,000, but this number of 60,000 is based on the game machine 1 that shoots 100 game balls per minute. This is a number that can guarantee approximately one day's worth of operation. Therefore, the gaming section is updated when the gaming machine 1 is in operation for about a day.

In step W414, the frame control CPU 120a shifts the contents of the first to third areas of the base storage area down one by one, and in step W415, clears the first area of the base storage area to zero. As a result, the normal base value stored in each area is stored as the normal base value for the previous game section, the normal base value for the current game section is reset, and preparations for moving to the next game section are made. You will be killed.

In step W416, the frame control CPU 120a updates the game section by adding "1" to the section counter, and in step W417, the total number of outs indicated by the above-mentioned total out number counter and the normal number indicated by the number of prize balls in the normal The number of medium prize pitches and the normal number of outs in the middle indicated by the normal out number counter are cleared to 0, a process is performed to move to the next game section, and the current display performance information calculation process is ended.

In this way, the normal base value (a type of history information) is calculated and stored as performance information for each game section from the number of outs during the normal period and the number of payouts during the normal period for each game section. Therefore, it is possible to provide information for appropriately understanding (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

Further, the base value is not normally calculated in the first game section. Therefore, the authenticity of the gaming machine may be affected by operation confirmation during pre-shipment inspection (operation confirmation of various winning opening detection switches, winning passage count switch 94a, and non-winning passage counting switch 94b due to firing of game balls and maintenance). It is no longer necessary to provide low information (displayed on the frame control display 125), and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

Further, from the second game period onwards, the normal base value is calculated. Therefore, a highly reliable normal base value that excludes the influence of pre-shipment inspection of the gaming machine can be displayed on the frame control display 125, and a highly reliable normal base value for accurately understanding the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 can be displayed. It becomes possible to provide information.

Although performance information is calculated regardless of whether or not the acquisition upper limit device is activated, performance information may not be calculated while the acquisition upper limit device is activated. is calculated, but the calculated performance information may not be displayed on the frame control display 125.

(Frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process)
The gaming machine performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120.

First, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process of calculating the total number of fired balls in step W451. Specifically, the counting is performed based on the gaming machine information (gaming information of the hole con/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information regarding gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120. Processing is performed to calculate the total number of game balls fired into the game area 5a from the establishment of the start condition to the present.

In step W452, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process of calculating the total number of game balls acquired. Specifically, the counting is performed based on the gaming machine information (gaming information of the hole con/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information regarding gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120. Processing is performed to calculate the total number of game balls acquired, which is the total number of prize balls awarded to the player from the establishment of the start condition to the present.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a ball launch rate calculation process in step W453. Specifically, the pitching rate, which is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of game balls acquired, calculated in step W452, to the total number of game balls fired, calculated in step W451, described above, is calculated as (total number of game balls acquired). A calculation process is performed using the formula: ÷total number of balls fired)×100.

In step W454, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process of calculating the number of game balls acquired per minute. Specifically, the most recent Processing is performed to calculate the number of game balls won per minute, which is the total number of prize balls given to the player in one minute.

The frame control CPU 120a performs accessory ratio calculation processing in step W455. Specifically, the above-mentioned information is based on the gaming machine information (gaming information included in the hole con/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and the information regarding the gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120. The number of game balls acquired based on the operation of various accessories (winning in the second starting hole 47 opened in the auxiliary game, winning in the big winning hole 50 opened in the jackpot game) against the total number of game balls acquired. Processing is performed to calculate the accessory ratio, which is a ratio.

The frame control CPU 120a performs continuous accessory ratio calculation processing in step W456. Specifically, the above-mentioned information is based on the gaming machine information (gaming information included in the hole con/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and the information regarding the gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120. Process for calculating the continuous role object ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls acquired based on the operation of the continuous role object (winning into the big prize opening 50 opened in the jackpot game) to the total number of game balls acquired. conduct.

The frame control CPU 120a performs jackpot number calculation processing in step W457. Specifically, the total number of jackpot games executed from the establishment of the counting start condition to the present based on the gaming machine information (gaming information of the hole con/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110. Processing is performed to calculate the number of jackpots.

In step W458, the frame control CPU 120a performs maximum payout calculation processing, and ends the current gaming machine performance information calculation processing. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information (gaming information of the hole con/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and the information regarding the gaming balls counted and managed by the slot control board 120, certain Processing is performed to calculate the maximum ball that is the largest value among the difference balls in which the total number of prize balls exceeds the total number of balls fired from a point in time (for example, the start of a jackpot game).

In this way, the frame control board 120 calculates gaming machine performance information that is not displayed on the frame control display 125 but is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170. Therefore, it is possible to provide highly reliable information for accurately grasping the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

(Game machine information notification processing of frame control board)
The gaming machine information notification process of the slot control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information notification process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W501, the frame control CPU 120a selects the main control states (main control state 1, main control state 2) or game information stored in the frame control RAM 120c from the previous notification of gaming machine information to the dedicated unit 170. Determine whether there has been an update. If the main control state or game information has not been updated, the process moves to step W508, and if the main control state or game information has been updated, the process moves to step W502.

In step W502, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 300 ms have elapsed since the activation of the frame control board 120 or the transmission timing of the previous hole control/fraud monitoring information notification. If 300 ms has not elapsed, it is assumed that it is not the timing to send the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification, and the process moves to step W504, and if 300 ms has elapsed, the timing to send the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification is reached. As one example, in step W503, a hole control/fraud monitoring information notification is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W504, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 60 seconds have elapsed since the activation of the frame control board 120 or the transmission timing of the previous gaming machine installation information notification. If 60 seconds have not elapsed, it is assumed that it is not the timing to send the notification of gaming machine installation information, and the process moves to step W506, and if 60 seconds have elapsed, it is assumed that the timing to send the notification of gaming machine installation information is reached. In step W505, a game machine installation information notification is sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W506, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 180 seconds have elapsed since the activation of the frame control board 120 or the transmission timing of the previous gaming machine performance information notification. If 180 seconds have not elapsed, it is assumed that it is not the timing to send the gaming machine performance information notification, and the current gaming machine information notification process is terminated.If 180 seconds has elapsed, the timing to send the gaming machine performance information notification is In step W507, a gaming machine performance information notification is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170, and the current gaming machine information notification process is ended.

In step W508, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 60 seconds have elapsed since the activation of the frame control board 120 or the transmission timing of the previous gaming machine installation information notification. If 60 seconds have not elapsed, it is assumed that it is not the timing to send the notification of gaming machine installation information, and the process moves to step W510. If 60 seconds have elapsed, it is assumed that the timing to send the notification of gaming machine installation information is reached, and the process proceeds to step W510. At W509, gaming machine installation information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W510, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 180 seconds have elapsed since the activation of the frame control board 120 or the transmission timing of the previous gaming machine performance information notification. If 180 seconds have not elapsed, it is assumed that it is not the timing to send the gaming machine performance information notification, and the current gaming machine information notification process is terminated.If 180 seconds has elapsed, the timing to send the gaming machine performance information notification is As one example, gaming machine performance information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 in step W511.

In step W512, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 300 ms have elapsed since the activation of the frame control board 120 or the timing of transmitting the previous hole control/fraud monitoring information notification. If 300 ms has not elapsed, it is assumed that it is not the timing to send the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification, and the process moves to step W512, and if 300 ms has elapsed, the timing to send the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification is reached. In step W513, hole control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170, and the current gaming machine information notification process is ended.

In this way, when there is an update of the main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) or game information stored in the frame control RAM 120c since the previous notification of gaming machine information to the dedicated unit 170, The main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) stored in the frame control RAM 120c from the previous notification of gaming machine information to the dedicated unit 170 or the case where the gaming information has not been updated, The transmission order of fraud monitoring information notification, gaming machine installation information notification, and gaming machine performance information notification is changed. Therefore, it is possible to transmit various information notifications to the dedicated unit 170 in an appropriate order depending on the main control state or whether or not game information has been updated.

Furthermore, the installation information of the frame control board 120 (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip The gaming machine installation information including the manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 every predetermined time period (60 seconds) (periodically). Therefore, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the frame control board 120 is appropriate in the dedicated unit 170, and it becomes possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as replacing or modifying the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120.

(Game ball counting process of frame control board)
The game ball counting process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the game ball counting process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W551, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 100 ms has elapsed since the transmission timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. If 100 ms has not elapsed, it is assumed that it is not the timing to send the counting notification, and the current game ball counting process is ended; if 100 ms has elapsed, it is assumed that it is the timing to send the counting notification, and the process proceeds to step W552. Transfer processing.

In step W552, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the counting button switch 20a is turned on due to the counting button 20 being operated. If the counting button switch 20a is not ON (OFF), the process moves to step W561, and if the counting button switch 20a is ON, the number of game balls owned by the player is determined in step W553. It is determined whether the value is larger than "0". If the number of game balls owned by the player is not greater than "0" ("0" is the number of game balls that are not transferred to the dedicated unit 170 to be counted), the process moves to step W561, and from "0" If the number of game balls is also large (there is a number of game balls to be transferred to the dedicated unit 170 and counted), the process moves to step W554.

In step W554, the frame control CPU 120a sets a counting processing flag indicating that counting is in progress in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W555, sends a counting process notification designation command indicating that counting is in progress to the frame control RAM 120c. Set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, a counting process notification designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a process for notifying during the counting process is performed.

In step W556, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 1000. If the number of game balls owned by the player is not less than (more than) 1000, the process moves to step W559, and if the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 1000, the process proceeds to step W557. , the frame control board 120 is outputting a launch permission signal that allows the launch device 92 to launch game balls, and a launch disallowance error occurs (setting change, setting confirmation, fraud detection 3, acquisition upper limit device activation, entrance switch disconnection error) , entrance switch abnormality error, communication line abnormality error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, ball extraction operation in progress, ball extraction lever operation error, etc.) is occurring. If the launch permission signal is being output and a launch disallow error is not occurring, the process moves to step W559, and if the launch permit signal is being output and a launch disallow error is occurring, In step W558, the output of the launch permission signal is stopped. As a result, the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 (ball feeding to the launching pad and/or firing of the game ball from the launching pad) is stopped, and the firing of the game balls is restricted. .

In step W559, the frame control CPU 120a subtracts 250 as the number of counted balls if the number of game balls owned by the player is 250 or more, and subtracts all as the number of counted balls if it is less than 250, and in step W560, The subtracted counted number of balls is added to the counted cumulative number of balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and the process moves to step W567.

In step W561, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a counting processing flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no counting flag, the process moves to step W567, and if there is a counting flag, the counting flag is cleared in step W562, and in step W653, the counting process is performed to indicate that the counting process is complete. A completion designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, a counting process completion designation command is transmitted to the production control board, and a process for terminating the counting process notification is performed.

In step W564, the frame control CPU 120a clears the counted cumulative number of pitches stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W565, checks whether the firing permission signal is stopped and a firing disallowance error is not occurring. judge. If the launch permission signal is being output or a launch disable error is occurring, the process moves to step W567, and if the launch permit signal is being stopped and a launch disallow error is not occurring, In step W566, the output of the firing permission signal is restarted. As a result, driving of the firing device (sending the game balls to the launch pad and/or firing the game balls from the launch pad) is permitted, and the game balls can be fired.

In step W567, the frame control CPU 120a transmits a counting notification (the counting serial number, the counted number of balls according to the subtracted counted number of balls, and the counted cumulative number of balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c) to the dedicated unit 170, and the current game Finish the ball counting process. As a result, the number of game balls owned by the player is stored in association with the identification information (card number, card ID, etc.) of the storage medium (card, coin, etc.) inserted in the dedicated unit 170.

In addition, when the output of the firing permission signal is stopped and the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 is stopped, it is necessary to stop the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 after the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the feeding operation of one game ball) is completed. When the firing device 92 is in the unit operation (the firing operation of one game ball), after the unit operation of the firing device 92 is completed, the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 is stopped. In addition, when the ball feeding unit 91 is in the unit operation (feeding one game ball), the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the subsequent unit operation of the firing device 92 (the firing of one game ball) are performed. After the operation) is completed, driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 is stopped.

In this way, when the counting process is performed, the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 (ball feeding to the launching pad and/or firing of the game ball from the launching pad) is stopped, and the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 is stopped and the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 are stopped. Firing is now restricted. Specifically, when the counting button 20 is operated and the counting process is performed, if the number of game balls owned by the player is less than the specified number (1000 balls), the output of the firing permission signal is stopped. The driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the firing device 92 is stopped. Therefore. This eliminates the inconvenience of having to count the number of game balls that are used for the firing operation, making it possible to ensure a stable number of game balls to be counted and improving the interest of the game. Become.

On the other hand, when the counting button 20 is operated and the counting process is performed, if the number of game balls owned by the player is 1000 or more, the output of the firing permission signal is not stopped and the ball sending unit 91 and the firing Driving of the device 92 is permitted. Therefore. Even if counting processing is performed, the number of game balls to be fired can be guaranteed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the counting process is completed, the driving of the launcher (sending the game ball to the launch pad and/or firing the game ball from the launch pad) is now allowed, making it possible to launch the game ball. ing. Therefore, the firing operation of the game ball is not forever restricted due to the counting process, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the number of game balls that is a condition for performing the counting process is set to be 1000 or more, but it may be set to 250 or more so that the counting process can be ensured by at least one operation (single press) of the counting button 20, or 1000. The number may be larger than that.

(Game ball rental processing of frame control board)
The game ball lending process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the game ball lending process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W601, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a rental notification transmitted within 170 ms from the previous count notification or based on the operation of the rental button provided on the dedicated unit 170 has been received. If a lending notification has not been received, the current game ball lending process is ended, and if a lending notification has been received, in step W602, the lending serial number of the received lending notification is stored in the frame control RAM 120c from the previous time. It is determined whether the value is the lending serial number +1. If the value is not the previous lending serial number + 1, the process moves to step W610, and if the value is the previous lending serial number + 1, in step W603, the lending serial number of the received lending notification is framed as the previous lending serial number. It is stored in the control RAM 120c.

In step W604, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that the ball extraction operation is in progress. If there is a ball picking flag (ball picking operation in progress), the process moves to step W610, and if there is no ball picking flag (ball picking operation is not in progress), in step W605, the player It is determined whether the number of game balls owned by (the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135) is less than 100,000. If the number is less than 100,000, the process moves to step W610 assuming that no game balls are to be lent, and if the number is less than 100,000, the process moves to step W606.

In step W606, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of rental balls in the received rental notification is a normal value (0 to 255). If the value is not normal, it is assumed that game balls will not be lent, and the process moves to step W610. If it is a normal value, in step W607, the number of lent balls in the received lent notification is set from "0" to 0. is also a large value. If the value is larger than "0", the process moves to step W608, and if the value is not larger than "0" ("0"), the current game ball lending process is ended.

In step W608, the frame control CPU 120a adds the number of rental balls included in the rental notification to the number of game balls of the player. As a result, the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135 and the frame control display 125 will be updated to the number of game balls after the addition. Then, in step W609, a rental reception result response (reception result = normal) indicating that the game balls have been lent to the dedicated unit 170 (the rental notification was successfully received) is transmitted, and the current game Finish the ball rental process. This makes it possible to know that the game balls have been lent out in the dedicated unit 170.

In step W610, the frame control CPU 120a sends a rental receipt result indicating that the dedicated unit 170 cannot receive a normal rental notification and cannot lend game balls (the rental notification could not be received normally). A response (reception result = abnormality) is sent, and the current game ball lending process is ended. This makes it possible to understand that no game balls have been lent in the dedicated unit 170.

In this way, even if a lending notification based on the operation of the lending button is received from the dedicated unit 170, the lending process of the gaming value (game ball) will not be performed if the ball extraction operation is in progress. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game value (game ball) is lent out even though the ball extraction operation is in progress and the game control is not performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, each time the lending process of gaming value (game ball) is performed, a lending reception result response (reception result = normal) indicating that the lending process has been carried out is sent to the dedicated unit 170, and the lending process of the gaming value (game ball) is If the lending process is not performed, a message indicating that the lending process was not performed (lending reception result response=abnormal) is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170. Therefore, it is possible to ascertain whether or not lending processing has been performed in the dedicated unit 170, and it becomes possible for the gaming parlor to collect necessary information such as aggregating sales data.

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control section 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

First, the sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, flags etc. stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial settings is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the production control unit 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the joystick detection switch 19a, and if there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it is determined whether various commands are being transmitted from the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and if various commands are being transmitted, the received commands are stored in the sub RAM 130c. Performs processing to store in the receive buffer.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change/confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the above-mentioned settings are A process for executing change notification is performed, and if a setting confirmation designation command is received, a process for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power-on designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power-on notification. Specifically, a power-on notification command is sent to the image control unit 145, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the third image display device 72, and the fourth image A power-on screen is displayed on the display device 73, and a power-on sound is output from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power restoration designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power failure restoration notification. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is sent to the image control unit 145, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), third image display device 72, and fourth image display device A power restoration screen is displayed on the display device 73, and a power restoration sound is output from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a transmits a "power-on command" to the lamp control unit 150 during power-on processing and power failure recovery processing. Then, the lamp control unit 150 that has received the "power-on command" drives the board drive device 75 to perform the initial operation of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b. The initial operation refers to the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b operating in the same or substantially the same operating mode as the operating mode during the variable performance when the power-on notification or the power outage recovery notification is being performed. That's true. Through this initial operation, it is possible to check the operation of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b, and to confirm whether or not they operate normally.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if a command has been received, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. conduct. To be more specific, a customer waiting effect command is sent to the image control unit 145, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the third image display device 72, and the fourth image are displayed. A customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed on the display device 73, and a customer waiting demonstration sound is output from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a gaming state update process in step E350. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received, and if it has been received, updates the gaming state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs pending information update processing in step E400. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to, and it is determined whether or not a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved or a command for specifying the number of regular drawings reserved is received, and if the command is received, it is stored (ascertained) in the sub-RAM 130c. ), the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of second reserved special symbols, the number of regular symbols, etc. are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch effect process. Specifically, the receiving buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether a prefetch designation command or a special figure variation pattern designation command is received, and if so, the icon changes as a prefetch-related effect. Performs processing related to performance, continuous preview performance, lamp change performance, and held consecutive show performance. Note that the details of the look-ahead performance processing will be described later.

The "icon change performance" is a type of pre-read preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the pending icon and the display mode of the icon. In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a pending icon may be referred to as a "hold icon change effect" and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect."

The "continuous notice performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances.
The "lamp change performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the light emission mode of the winning slot lamp over one or more variable performances.

The "holding successive game performance" is a type of look-ahead preview performance that is executed during a jackpot game. For example, in a high-accuracy time-saving game state, a jackpot is stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c. When the random number value for jackpot determination to be determined is stored, the movable production device 77 is operated at a predetermined timing, and the variable display corresponding to the above-mentioned suspended memory executed after the jackpot game is changed to indicate that it is a jackpot. This is a performance that is announced prior to the execution of the display.

The sub CPU 130a performs special figure special electric production processing in step E600. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command are executed. etc., and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In addition, if the special symbol designation command (first information signal) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command (second information signal) as a start command (start time signal) accompanying the start of fluctuation display are successfully received. , a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols (a first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, a second variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol) will be executed. However, there is an abnormality in the special symbol designation command or the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command (the relationship between loss and jackpot does not match, the type of special symbol indicated by MODE in the command does not match, the DATA side of the command is damaged. (e.g., the content has changed to something that could not have occurred in the first place), the command is invalidated and the variation effect is not executed. Also, the special symbol designation command and the special symbol variation pattern designation command cannot be received normally (the special symbol designation command is not received within a predetermined time after receiving the special symbol designation command, or the special symbol designation command is not received. Even if a special figure variation pattern designation command is received when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not executed, the command is deemed invalid and the variation effect is not executed. In the following explanation, cases where there is an abnormality in the command and cases where the command cannot be received normally are referred to as "command abnormality."

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs a general figure and general electric display process. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c and receives a normal symbol designation command, a regular symbol variation pattern designation command, a regular symbol stop designation command, a winning opening designation command, a winning ending designation command, etc. It is determined whether or not the command is received, and if the command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

The sub CPU 130a performs production mode update processing in step E800. Specifically, the production elements (background image, production image, production sound etc.) are established (changes in gaming conditions, winning of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach performance that results in a loss, etc.) are satisfied. , performs processing for updating the production mode to any one of a plurality of production modes when the update condition is satisfied.

"Production mode" includes production modes A to C set in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state), production mode D to E set in the variable probability gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state), and production mode D to E set in the variable probability gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state). A performance mode F is provided which is set in the gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). In addition, when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing settings, clearing RWM, confirming settings, etc.), the first performance mode set is always performance mode A, and when the power is turned on, When the power is turned on, the production mode that is set first is always production mode D, and when the power is turned on and the time-saving gaming state is controlled, the production mode that is first set is always production mode D. is always in production mode F.

In addition, in production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters corresponding to the numbers (decoration part) + design effect images (decoration part) that decorate the backgrounds of the numbers and characters, Numbers and character designs differ between production modes. In the performance modes D to G, the performance pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common among the performance modes. Furthermore, in the production modes A to G, the background image corresponding to each production mode scrolls left and right (reciprocating motion).

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received from the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120, and if it has been received, Processing for executing an error notification effect corresponding to a received error designation command and processing for terminating an error notification effect corresponding to a received error cancellation designation command are performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs processes such as outputting signals such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the image control section 145 and the lamp control section 150.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Pre-reading performance processing by the performance control unit)
Using FIG. 107, the pre-reading performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading performance processing in the performance control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the value of the increase number counter (MY counter) in step E505. Then, referring to the value of the increase number counter (MY counter), in step E506, it is determined whether or not it is the executable period of the look-ahead type effect. For example, if the value of the increase number counter (MY counter) referenced in step E505 exceeds "93000", it is determined that the period in which the look-ahead effect cannot be executed is reached, and the current look-ahead effect processing is terminated. However, if the value of the increase number counter (MY counter) does not exceed "93000", the process moves to step E510. That is, when the value of the increase number counter (MY counter) exceeds a predetermined number, execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to perform the icon change effect, the mode of effect of the icon change effect, and the like. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process in step E520 (changes the already displayed pending icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform execution processing.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous notice effect determination process for determining whether to execute continuous notice effects and the presentation mode of the continuous notice effect, and in step E540, performs a continuous notice effect determination process. A continuous notice performance execution process is performed to execute the continuous notice performance for which it has been decided.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (light up the prize opening lamp NR so that the display mode becomes a light emitting mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed).

In step E560, the sub CPU 130a performs a pending consecutive game performance determination process for determining whether to execute the pending consecutive game performance and the performance mode of the pending consecutive game performance. Hold consecutive game performance execution processing for executing the held consecutive game performance determined to be executed in the process is performed, and the current look-ahead type performance processing is ended.

In addition, while the decision and execution of the look-ahead effect is allowed in the situation immediately before the "number of game balls exceeds" described below, the decision and execution is restricted in the situation immediately before the "acquisition upper limit device" is activated as described above. be done. The situation immediately before the "number of game balls exceeds" is assumed to be, for example, a state in which the game value displayed on the number of game balls display 135 exceeds "38,000." On the other hand, the situation immediately before the operation of the "acquisition upper limit device" is assumed to be, for example, a state in which the value of the maximum increase number exceeds "93,000", as described above. That is, during the period in which the maximum increase number is "93,000" to "95,000", determination and execution of look-ahead effects are restricted. Note that "38000" and "93000" are just examples, and may be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine. Restrictions on the determination and execution of look-ahead effects will be described in detail later.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E510-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of icon change performance" refers to a case where a jackpot game is not being executed, an icon change performance is not being executed, or an icon change performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, if the received prefetch designation command is based on winning at the first starting port 45, it is a normal gaming state, and the received prefetching designation command is based on winning at the second starting port 47. In some cases, it may be provided that the game is in a specific gaming state (a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), or the like.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 109) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the icon final display modes.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) in which an icon change effect is executed. If the display mode is such that an icon change effect is executed, the process moves to step E510-9, and if the display mode is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (not shown) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the change scenario determination table, multiple change scenarios are selected based on the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. Decide on one change scenario from among them.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and displays the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is ended. As a result, an icon display command is sent to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode. The type of notification sound when the icon is generated for each type is described.

The final icon display mode includes a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game will be executed). has been done.

The expectation level of winning a jackpot related to special icons increases in the order of (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that is guaranteed to be a jackpot.

When the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first occurrence alarm sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output. , the third occurrence notification sound is output, and when the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth occurrence notification sound is set to be output.

Here, the main feature of the final display mode determination table is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied depending on the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the planned variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, special icons are selected at a higher rate than when the planned variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It is supposed to be done.

In addition, in the icon final display mode determination table, in the case of a jackpot, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode, but it may be selected.

Note that in this embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the notification sound when a white icon is generated, a blue icon, a red icon, and There may be two types of notification sounds, including a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow icon, or the notification sound may not be output when a white icon occurs, but the notification sound may be output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. You can. Further, for the rainbow icon that is certain to be a jackpot, a dedicated notification sound may be provided and there may be three types.

(Fluctuating performance pattern judgment table)
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. It is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states) that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in D to G.

As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the variable effect pattern determination table associates the special figure variable pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and the selected variable effect pattern. The performance configuration for each variable performance pattern is described as follows.

"Variation" in the production structure column indicates that a normal variation display in which a ready-to-win state is not formed due to the production symbol 70a is executed.
"Short variation" indicates that a shortened variation display in which a reach state is not formed is executed for a shorter time than a normal variation display.
"L fluctuation" indicates that a long fluctuation display in which a reach state is not formed for a longer time than a normal fluctuation display is executed.

"Pseudo-failure" refers to a pseudo-successful performance after the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the fluctuating display of one special symbol, and then a pseudo-sequential performance is performed to determine whether or not a pseudo-sequential performance will be executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed, which results in the failure being not performed.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that, after performing a performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed, a pseudo-successful performance that results in the pseudo-successful performance is performed.
"(Fluctuation → Pseudo Success) x 2" means a performance in which a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo consecutive performance will be executed. This shows that two sets of effects will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.
"(Fluctuation → pseudo-success) x 3" is a performance in which a pseudo-successful performance that results in a pseudo-successful performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed. This shows that three sets of performances will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.

"N reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed.
"N '7'reach" indicates that the normal reach effect described above is executed in a state where the reach state is formed by the effect pattern 70a of "7".
"SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP reach effect is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that a full rotation reach is executed is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in performances with different jackpot expectation levels will be executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Decision" indicates that a determination performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be executed is executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Failure" indicates that as a result of the deciding performance, a deciding failure performance indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed.
"Success" indicates that as a result of the winning performance, a successful winning performance that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed is executed.

"Loss" means a temporary stop after forming a losing number (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948" which is different from the initial number described later) by the performance pattern 70a that does not include a character but only numbers. It shows.
"c pattern loss" means to form a loss result (a loss display form such as ``358'' or ``948'' which is different from the initial appearance described later) by the performance pattern 70a of the display form including the character and temporarily stop. It is shown that.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is displayed on the image display device.
"Symbol alignment" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a that does not include characters and includes only numbers, and the game is temporarily stopped.
"C symbols aligned" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the production symbol 70a in a display mode including characters, and the game is temporarily stopped.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the performance symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped at a jackpot (jackpot display mode) will become a jackpot that is advantageous for the player (from an even-numbered performance symbol that normally results in a jackpot, it will become a probability-variable jackpot). (Whether it will be an odd-numbered production symbol or not, or whether it will be a "7" production symbol where the most advantageous jackpot game will be executed), a promotion success production will be performed that will result in an advantageous jackpot. , indicates that a re-lottery performance is executed, such as a promotion failure performance that does not result in an advantageous jackpot.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmed vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), if the special symbol is 00 (loss) and the variable performance pattern is 03 (normal reach performance) or 05 to 06 (SP reach performance), an even-numbered The rate at which a ready-to-win presentation is performed with the presentation pattern 70a is 70%, and the rate at which a ready-to-win presentation is performed using an odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special symbol 00 (loss) and variable performance patterns 07 to 11 (SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 65%, and odd numbers other than "7" The rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 30%, and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed by the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 5%.

In the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and variable performance patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%. .
In the case of special symbol 02 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 18 to 19 (SP reach production), the ratio of reach production with even number production symbols 70a is 60%, and odd number production patterns other than "7" The rate at which reach effects are performed in 70a is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 02 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 6%, and with odd numbered performance symbols other than "7" The rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with 70a is 4%, and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 90%.
In the case of special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 23 to 25 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, and “7 ” The proportion of reach effects performed with odd-numbered effect symbols 70a is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 10 (loss) and variable performance patterns 26 to 27 (special SP ready-to-win performance), the rate at which the ready-to-win performance is performed with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance pattern 27 (special SP ready-to-win performance), the ratio of ready-to-win performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states), in the case of special symbol 00 (loss) and variable performance pattern 32 (special SP reach performance), reach performance is achieved with even numbered performance symbol 70a. The rate of implementation is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probable variable jackpot), 03 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production pattern 33 (special SP reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even numbered production symbols 70a is 100%. It becomes.

In the case of special symbol 10 (loss) and variable performance pattern 36 (normal reach performance), 38 to 42 (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, The rate at which the reach effect is performed with odd numbered effect symbols 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of special symbol 04 (normal jackpot) and variable performance patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the rate at which reach performance is performed with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%. .

In the case of special symbol 05, special symbol 06 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 49 to 50 (SP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, and with any other than "7" The ratio of reach performance being performed with odd numbered performance symbols 70a is 40%.
In the case of special symbol 05, special symbol 06 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP reach production), the proportion of reach production performed with even numbered production symbols 70a is 3%, and other than "7" The rate at which the reach effect is performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 70a is 2%, and the rate at which the reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 95%.
In the case of special symbol 05 and special symbol 06 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 54 to 55 (full rotation reach production), the ratio of reach production with even numbered production symbols 70a is 20%, and other than "7" The ratio of the ready-to-win performance is performed with the odd-numbered performance symbols 70a is 30%, and the ratio of the reach-to-reach performance with the performance symbol 70a of "7" is 50%.

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table is that when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, an eye catch effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed, and the effect pattern 70a is An example of this is returning to a display mode that includes characters. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel strange due to the change in the display mode of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the performance symbols 70a will be stopped and displayed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variable performance pattern determination table is that in the case of a jackpot, a variable performance pattern in which a successful winning performance is executed and the symbols are aligned, and a variable performance pattern in which a successful successful performance is executed after the symbols are aligned. One point is that there is a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the case of a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable performance pattern determination table is that in the variable performance pattern that results in a jackpot, a strong vibration performance in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds when the performance symbols 70a that do not include characters are aligned. (Jackpot confirmation vibration performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table is a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second when the performance symbols 70a including characters are aligned (c symbols aligned). One point is that it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable performance pattern judgment table is that the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP The ratio of ready-to-win performances is higher than the ratio of ready-to-win performances with even-numbered performance symbols 70a (the performance symbols that usually result in a jackpot when a jackpot roll is made). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when a jackpot is achieved with an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table is that the ratio of reach performance with the even-numbered performance symbol 70a (a performance symbol that usually results in a jackpot) is higher than that of the "7" production symbol 70a. The point is that the ratio of reach performances (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) being performed is lower for (the production pattern that is the most advantageous probability variable jackpot by becoming a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when the player hits a jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable performance pattern judgment table is that the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP The reach effect (Normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is higher than the rate at which the reach effect (reach effect) is performed with the production pattern 70a of "7" (the effect pattern that is the most advantageous probability variable jackpot by becoming a jackpot). One point is that the percentage of cases where this is done is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when the player hits a jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table is that the reach performance is performed with the "7" performance pattern 70a more than when the reach performance is executed with the even numbered performance pattern 70a or the odd numbered performance pattern 70a other than "7". The expectation of a jackpot is higher when this is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to increase his or her expectations as to which type of performance symbol will be used to perform the ready-to-win performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the variable production pattern determination table is that when production modes D to G (specific gaming states) result in the most advantageous probability variable jackpot compared to production modes A to C (normal gaming states), The point is that the reach effect (SPSP reach effect) is easily executed with the effect pattern 70a of ``7'' (the effect pattern which results in the most advantageous probability-variable jackpot when it becomes a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the variable production pattern determination table is that in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), even if a reach production is executed with the production pattern 70a of "7", a jackpot is not guaranteed, but in production mode D In ~G (specific game state), if the reach effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a of "7", a jackpot is guaranteed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance is always performed, but a variable performance pattern may be provided in which the ready-to-win performance is not performed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is performed.

In addition, if you stop temporarily due to a loss after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance, it is guaranteed to be a loss, but a resurrection performance that is guaranteed to be a jackpot after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance. may also be executed.

(Jackpot preview production decision process by production control department)
The jackpot preview performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing jackpot preview performance determination processing in the performance control unit 130m, and this process includes a variable performance pattern determination process in the above-mentioned special figure special electric performance process (a variable performance pattern based on a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command). (determining process).

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, determines that the jackpot game will be executed in the performance period (high-speed fluctuation period) before reach. A ready-to-reach advance notice determination table (not shown) for determining a notice pattern of a ready-to-reach advance notice performance that makes players look forward to it is selected, and a notice pattern is determined.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a dialogue preview performance. If the dialogue preview performance is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-4, and if the dialogue preview performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Speech preview performance" means that a valid period occurs during a variable performance (high-speed fluctuation period), and according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid time, the image display device indicates the expectation of a jackpot. This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a dialogue preview pattern for the dialogue preview performance and determines a dialogue preview pattern, and in step E650-5, the dialogue preview pattern is determined. Set the dialogue preview production command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a line preview performance command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and a line preview performance according to the line preview pattern is executed during the variable performance (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a step-up preview performance. If the step-up preview effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the step-up preview effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

"Step-up notice performance" means multiple steps from the 1st step (first stage) to the 5th step (final stage) without causing the effective period of the performance button 17 during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which step performances are executed in a predetermined order until reaching one of the steps.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up notice pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice performance, and determines the step-up notice pattern, and in step E650-8. At , a step-up notice performance command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and a step-up notice performance according to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-10, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not perform a pseudo continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a pseudo continuous effect pattern of the pseudo continuous effect, and determines a pseudo continuous effect pattern, and in step E650-11. , sets a pseudo-continuous performance command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous performance pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a pseudo continuous effect command is transmitted to the image control section 145 and the lamp control section 150, and a pseudo continuous effect according to the pseudo continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation performance pattern is a variation performance pattern that executes a development performance (SP development performance, SPSP development performance, full rotation development performance). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a developed effect, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a developed effect, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects a development performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance and determines the development performance pattern, and in step E650-14, the development performance pattern Set the development performance command corresponding to the transmission buffer in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the image control section 145 and the lamp control section 150, and the development effect according to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a reach performance (post-reach performance). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the process moves to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-17, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-19.

In step E650-17, the sub CPU 130a selects a cut-in effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect, and determines the cut-in effect pattern, and in step E650-18. , a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a cut-in effect command is transmitted to the image control section 145 and the lamp control section 150, and a cut-in effect according to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a fixed performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a selects a final performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a final performance pattern for the final performance and determines a final performance pattern, and in step E650-21, the final performance pattern is determined. Set the appropriate production command in the sending buffer. As a result, a fixed effect command is transmitted to the image control section 145 and the lamp control section 150, and a fixed effect according to the fixed effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a selects a re-lottery effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, and determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and in step E650-24. , a re-lottery effect command corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a re-lottery performance command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and a re-lottery performance according to the re-lottery performance pattern is executed during the variable performance.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that can execute a confirmed performance (a performance that definitively notifies that it is a jackpot) (results in a jackpot). do. If the variable performance pattern is such that a confirmed performance can be executed, the process moves to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that allows a confirmed performance to be executed, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects a final performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance and determines the final performance pattern, and in step E650-27, the final performance pattern is determined. A confirmed performance command corresponding to the above is set in the transmission buffer, and the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended. As a result, a fixed effect command is transmitted to the image control section 145 and the lamp control section 150, and a fixed effect according to the fixed effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

(About notification event type, notification event priority, and notification mode of notification event)
The types of notification events, the priority order of notification events, and the notification mode of notification events will be described using FIGS. 113 to 115.

The notification mode is comprised of audio notification, screen notification, and electrical notification, and notification based on a combination of these is determined for each notification event type.
The notification event types include events detected by the main control board 110 and events detected by the frame control board 120, and priorities are determined for each notification event type.

Regarding audio notification, when multiple events occur at the same time, the priority order is referred to and the event with the higher priority is notified by audio.
Furthermore, at the time when the audio notification of the high-priority event ends, if it is within the notification time of the low-priority event, a new audio notification of the low-priority event is started.
Furthermore, if the same event occurs repeatedly (a specific event occurs while a specific event is being reported), a new audio notification is started.
Note that depending on the event, audio notifications may be made at the same time, and when the audio notification of a higher priority event is finished, even if it is outside the notification time for a lower priority event, a lower priority event may be announced. An audio notification of the event may also be provided.

Regarding screen notifications, when multiple events occur overlappingly, they are displayed (screen notifications) so that they do not overlap each other. In other words, when multiple events occur overlappingly, screen notification can notify all of the events at the same time.
Note that depending on the event, there may be cases in which the screen notification is performed independently without being notified simultaneously.

Regarding the illumination notification, when a plurality of events occur at the same time, the priority order is referred to and the event with the higher priority is notified by illumination.
Furthermore, at the time when the illumination notification of the high priority event ends, if the notification time of the low priority event is within the time, the illumination notification of the low priority event is newly started.
Furthermore, if the same event occurs repeatedly (a specific event occurs during notification of a specific event), a new illumination notification is started.
Note that depending on the event, some events may be illuminated at the same time, and when the illumination notification of a higher priority event is completed, even if it is outside the notification time of a lower priority event, the priority It is also possible to provide an illumination notification for events with low levels.

Note that the player cannot adjust the volume by operating the joystick 19 while the audio notification is being executed, nor can the light amount be adjusted by the player operating the joystick 19 while the illumination notification is being executed. On the other hand, while an audio notification is in progress, an employee can adjust the volume by operating a specific switch installed in a position that can only be operated by the employee (but cannot be operated by the player), or an illumination notification can be performed. It is possible for employees to adjust the amount of light by operating the specific switch inside.

The notification event type with the highest priority of priority 1 is "number of game balls cleared".
The notification of “game ball count clear” is started upon receiving the “game ball count clear start designation command”, and the notification mode is as follows.
The audio output device 9 outputs a 5-second audio message "The number of game balls has been cleared" once with "audio notification (volume MAX)",
Displaying an icon image "H67 Game ball count clear" on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal),
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

The voice output "The number of game balls has been cleared" is output once and is not output in a loop or terminated by receiving the notification end command.
In addition, the display of the icon image "H67 Clear number of game balls" and the flashing of red on the frame illumination device 10 indicate that the firing handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is fired, or that the counting button switch 20a is not connected to the counting button 20. The notification ends 30 seconds after either of the following operations is detected.

Since it is assumed that clearing the number of game balls is mainly done before the opening of the game parlor, by ending the audio notification in one go, it is possible to play while the audio notification continues even after the opening of the store. You can prevent this from making you hesitate. On the other hand, the screen notification and illumination notification will continue to notify unless firing or counting is performed, making it easier for employees to recognize that the highest priority number of game balls has been cleared. I can do it.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is provided by a rectangular icon image "H67" in the upper left display area (a position that does not overlap with the three performance symbols 70a) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). "Game ball count cleared" is displayed. As a result, even if a player starts playing a game on a game machine where an icon image indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a (until 30 seconds have passed from the time of firing). Such situations can be prevented.

To clear the number of game balls, as shown in "Frame control board main processing", after clearing the number of game balls stored in the RWM area, the "game ball number clear start designation command" is set and transmitted. Therefore, the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is positioned as a notification after the number of game balls has been cleared (post-fact notification).

Furthermore, in the past, not only players have stopped playing by completely discarding all game balls, but also some players have stopped playing without realizing that a small amount of game balls remained. Clearing the number of game balls is an act of clearing a small amount of game balls (for example, one game ball) left in the gaming machine 1 by such a player, and it is said that the player's property is cleared by the game parlor. Since this is an important act that must be completed without the customer's consent, we have given it the highest notification priority. This allows the game parlor to recognize that clearing the number of game balls is an important action.

Also, for example, if a game store opens with a small amount of game balls remaining, a new player who starts playing may end up playing with the property of another player, which can cause trouble. It's possible. Therefore, by setting the notification priority for clearing the number of playing balls to be the highest, it is possible to ensure that employees are aware that the number of playing balls has been cleared. ), it is possible to prevent such troubles from occurring.

The notification event type of priority 2 is "setting change" (see FIG. 54).
Notification of "setting change" (notification according to control related to setting values) is started upon receiving the "setting change designation command", and the notification mode is as follows.
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the sound "Settings are being changed" and the warning sound of a "siren" under "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), displaying "Settings changing" in red letters on a black background,
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification in "setting change" are terminated upon reception of the power-on designation command (see FIG. 52). Accordingly, when the setting change process is finished, all the notification means immediately finish the notification, so that it can be easily recognized that the setting change process has ended.

The notification event type with priority level 3 is "setting confirmation" (see FIG. 57).
Notification of "setting confirmation" (notification according to control related to setting values) is started upon receiving the "setting confirmation designation command", and the notification mode is as follows.
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the sound "Settings are being checked" and the warning sound of a "siren" under "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), displaying "Settings Checking" in red letters on a black background,
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification in "Setting confirmation" are terminated upon reception of the power restoration designation command (see FIG. 52). Accordingly, when the setting confirmation process is finished, all the notification means immediately finish the notification, so that it is easy to recognize that the setting confirmation process is finished.

The notification event type with priority level 4 is "power on (RWM clear)" (see FIG. 56).
Notification of "power on (RWM clear)" (notification in response to clearing of predetermined information) is started upon receiving the "RWM clear specification command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "RWM has been cleared" and the BGM "Input BGM" under "Voice notification (volume MAX)",
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) does not directly notify that the RWM has been cleared, but displays "123" as the initial roll (symbol combination) of the production symbol 70a,
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in white (40% brightness).

The voice "RWM has been cleared" and the BGM output of "Enter BGM" will end 30 seconds after the start of output, and the white lighting of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 will be turned on. It ends when 60 seconds have passed from the start.

For RWM clear, as shown in "RWM clear processing", after initializing the gaming RWM area other than the setting value area, the "RWM clear specification command" is set and sent, so there is no error in RWM clear. The notification is positioned as notification after completion of RWM clearing (post-notification). In other words, the positioning is similar to the above-mentioned "game ball count clear", but the notification time is different between "game ball count clear" and "power on (RWM clear)".

For example, the above-mentioned audio output for "game ball count clear" is outputted once for 5 seconds and ends, whereas the audio output for "RWM clear" and input BGM output are output repeatedly for 30 seconds. It ends in seconds. As a result, for example, when the power sw164 is turned on while both the RWM clear switch 111a and the number of game balls clear switch 121 are pressed, the sound output of "RWM clear" is output after the sound output of "number of game balls cleared" is completed. Since the BGM output is then started, it is possible to prevent the user from missing the fact that "RWM clear" has been performed. In other words, since "game ball count clear" and "RWM clear" may be performed at the same time, if the execution time of these audio notifications is made the same, the "RWM clear" audio notification will be executed according to the priority order. There is a risk that employees may miss what they hear. Therefore, by setting the audio output for "game ball count clear" to 5 seconds, and the audio output for "RWM clear" and input BGM output to be output repeatedly for 30 seconds, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned missed sounds from occurring at the same time. Regarding possible events (for example, clearing the number of game balls and clearing RWM), it is preferable to make the output time of the audio notification different.

Furthermore, when the power sw164 is turned on while both the RWM clear switch 111a and the number of game balls clear switch 121 are pressed down, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays the initial number of the production symbols 70a. (Screen notification of RWM clear), an icon image (screen notification of clearing the number of game balls) that notifies "game ball count clear" is displayed so as not to overlap with the initial roll display of the production pattern 70a (see FIG. 115) ). As a result, both the screen notification of RWM clear and the screen notification of game ball count clearing will be performed, so you can instantly visually see that RWM clear has been performed and that the number of game balls has been cleared. can be recognized.

In addition, the screen notification of "game ball count cleared" can continue to be displayed even after the audio notification of "game ball count clear" ends, so if the audio output of "game ball count clear" is Even if you miss it, by checking the display of the icon image, you can be made aware that the "number of game balls cleared" has been performed.
On the other hand, in the screen notification of "RWM clear", the icon image is not displayed, but the initial roll display of the production symbol 70a, the audio output that is output for 30 seconds, and the input BGM output make it possible to display the icon image without displaying the icon image. It can be recognized that "RWM clear" has been performed. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an icon image that notifies "RWM clear", and is expected to improve development efficiency and reduce storage space.

Furthermore, when the power sw164 is turned on while both the RWM clear switch 111a and the number of game balls clear switch 121 are pressed, the frame lighting device 10 flashes in red (the illumination notification of the number of game balls cleared is executed). ). On the other hand, when the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls is being executed, the illumination notification for RWM clearing is not executed. This can prevent the user from becoming confused as to which error notification is being executed in the illumination notification. Furthermore, even if the RWM clear illumination notification is not executed, the "RWM clear" screen notification is executed as described above, so that it can be recognized that the "RWM clear" has been performed.
Incidentally, the relationship between the notifications of each notification means when the power supply sw164 is turned on while both the RWM clear switch 111a and the number of game balls clear switch 121 are pressed will be explained later in the time chart.

In addition, in this embodiment, the notification time of voice notification is shorter for "game ball count clear" which has a higher priority than "power on (RWM clear)", but for "game ball count clear" The notification time of the voice notification may be longer than that of "power on (RWM clear)", or the notification time of both may be the same.

The notification event type with priority level 5 is "power restoration".
Notification of "power restoration" starts upon receiving the "power restoration designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
From the audio output device 9, the BGM of "Input BGM" is output with "Voice notification (volume MAX)",
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays "123" as the initial roll (symbol combination) of the production pattern 70a,
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in white (40% brightness).

The BGM output of "Turn on BGM" in "Power restoration" will end 30 seconds after the start of output, and the white lighting of the frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 76 will end 60 seconds after the start of lighting. do. As a result, once the power sw 164 is turned on, no further operation is required, which simplifies the work.

The notification event type with priority level 6 is "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)".
Notification of "Unauthorized Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)" is started upon receiving the "Unrecoverable Error Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice message "Please change settings" and the warning sound of a "siren" under "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), displaying "Error" in red letters on a black background and "Please change settings" in white letters,
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

After the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, if the power switch 164 is turned on without any setting change operation being performed, the error notification of "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)" is started again. That is, when "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormality error)" occurs, it is necessary to turn off the power sw 164, perform a setting change operation, and then turn on the power sw 164 to complete the setting change process.

All of the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification in "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)" continues until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification ends when the power is cut off). Thereby, it is possible to turn off the power of the gaming machine 1 and prompt the user to change the settings. Furthermore, since the RWM abnormality is resolved by changing the settings, it is necessary for the employee to take action, and it is possible to prevent the game from being played with the RWM abnormality occurring.

The notification event type with priority level 7 is "fraud detection 2 (abnormal prize winning error)".
The notification of “Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Winning Error)” starts upon receiving the “Abnormal Winning Designation Command”, and the notification mode is as follows.
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the sound "An abnormal prize has occurred" and the warning sound of a "siren" in the "audio notification (volume MAX)",
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays an icon image saying "Abnormal winning error, please turn on the power again",
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

The output of the sound "An abnormal prize has occurred" and the warning sound of the "siren" will end 180 seconds after the start of the output, and the icon image "Abnormal prize winning error. Please turn the power back on" will be displayed. , and the red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 continues to notify until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification ends when the power is cut off).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of an abnormal winning error is a rectangular icon image "Abnormal winning winning" in the upper right display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) (a position that does not overlap with the three performance symbols 70a). Error Please turn the power back on.'' is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with the production pattern 70a, and it is possible to clearly inform the employee of the occurrence of the abnormal prize winning error.

The notification event type with priority level 8 is "fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)."
The notification of “Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)” starts upon receiving the “Magnet Detection Designation Command”, and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the sound "Magnet detected" and the warning sound of "siren" with "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Displaying an icon image "magnet detection" on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification in "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" end after 180 seconds have elapsed from the start of the notification.

Even if the magnet is removed after starting the notification by voice notification, screen notification, or illumination notification, the notification will continue until 180 seconds have elapsed. Furthermore, if the "magnet detection designation command" is received again within 180 seconds, the notification will be executed for 180 seconds thereafter. This will further strengthen security.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the magnet detection error is such that a rectangular icon image "Magnet Detection" is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of a magnet detection error.

Note that the screen notification of magnet detection error may be made by displaying "Magnet detection error" in red or white text on a black background using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). good.

The notification event type with priority level 9 is "acquisition upper limit device activated."
Notification of "acquisition upper limit device activation" is started upon receiving the "acquisition upper limit device activation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Acquisition limit device has been activated" under "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays an icon image that says "The acquisition limit device has been activated. Today's game is over."
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in white (40% brightness).

The output of the voice "The acquisition limit device has activated" will end 10 seconds after the output starts, and the icon image "The acquisition limit device has activated. Today's game is over" will be displayed and the frame illumination will be displayed. The white blinking of the device 10 continues to notify until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification ends when the power is cut off).

The acquisition upper limit device stops operating if the power supply sw164 is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (if RWM clear is performed) after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. If only the power supply sw 164 is turned on after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off,
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Acquisition upper limit device in operation" under "Voice notification (volume MAX)",
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays an icon image that says "The acquisition limit device has been activated. Today's game is over."
The frame lighting device 10 is designed to flash in red (40% brightness). Thereby, after the acquisition upper limit device is activated, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming possible by simply turning the power switch 164 OFF/ON.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the operation of the acquisition upper limit device is displayed in the upper left display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) (the above-mentioned "H67 number of game balls Below the display position of the "Clear" icon image), a rectangular icon image "Earnings cap device has been activated. Today's game is over" is displayed. Note that the icon image is displayed so as to overlap a part of the left effect pattern 70a (so that the icon image is the front layer). In other words, since the game becomes impossible due to the operation of the acquisition limit device, there is no need to consider the visibility of the performance pattern 70a, and the degree of freedom in displaying the icon image (no need to worry about the display position) is increased. I can do it.

In addition, the audio notification ends after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start, the screen notification is also displayed with an icon image, and the illumination notification is also performed with white flashing to prevent excessive notification. This prevents the player from becoming addicted to the game without stirring up the gambling spirit more than necessary.

In addition, the screen notification that the acquisition limit device has been activated uses the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) to display a message in white text on a black background saying, ``The acquisition limit device has activated. Today's game is over. ” may be displayed. With this configuration, other performance images become difficult to see, making it easier for the player to recognize that the game cannot be continued any longer.

In addition, after the acquisition upper limit device is activated, when turning off the power sw164 and then turning on the power sw164, the number of game balls must be cleared at the same time (while the number of game balls clear switch 121 is pressed down, the power is turned on). It is also assumed that sw164 is turned ON). In this case, the audio notification and illumination notification will notify you that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the screen notification will display an icon image that notifies you that the number of game balls has been cleared, and an icon image that says "Acquisition limit device has activated. Please clear RWM." are displayed so that they do not overlap each other. As a result, although the voice notification and illumination notification will notify you that the number of game balls has been cleared, the icon image that says "Acquisition limit device has been activated. Please clear RWM" will be recognizable on the screen notification, so the number of game balls will be cleared. It is possible to make the user aware that the RWM clearing operation is required while also making the user aware that the clearing has been performed.
Note that the relationship between the notifications of each notification means in this situation will be explained later using a time chart.

The notification event type with priority level 10 is "unauthorized radio wave detection error."
Notification of "Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection Error" starts upon receiving the "Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the sound "Radio wave detected" and the warning sound of "siren" with "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Displaying an icon image "H66 unauthorized radio wave detection" on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

The output of the sound "Radio waves detected" and the warning sound of "siren" will end 30 seconds after the start of the output, and the icon image "H66 Unauthorized radio waves detected" will be displayed and the frame lighting device 10 will be displayed. The red flashing continues the notification until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification ends when the power is cut off).

Even if the radio waves are removed after starting the audio notification, the notification will continue until 30 seconds have elapsed. Furthermore, if the "unauthorized radio wave detection designation command" is received again within 30 seconds, voice notification will be performed for 30 seconds thereafter. This will further strengthen security.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the unauthorized radio wave detection error is displayed in a rectangular area in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "magnet detection" icon image). The icon image "H66 unauthorized radio wave detection" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of an unauthorized radio wave detection error.

The notification event type of priority 11 is "abnormal error in number of winning balls."
Notification of the "abnormal number of winning balls error" (notification in response to the detection of gaming media corresponding to the gaming value) is started upon receiving the "abnormal number of winning balls specification command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Displaying an icon image “H68 Winning Ball Number Abnormality” on the third image display device 72 (left side image display device);
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification regarding the "abnormal number of winning balls error" continues until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification ends when the power supply is cut off).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the abnormal number of winning balls is displayed in the display area above the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H66 illegal radio wave detection" icon image). ) is displayed with a rectangular icon image "H68 Winning Ball Count Abnormality". Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the abnormal number of winning pitches error.

The notification event type with priority level 12 is "abnormal number of fired balls error."
Notification of "abnormal number of fired balls error" (notification in response to detection of game media being fired into the gaming area) is started upon receiving the "abnormal number of fired balls specification command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Displaying an icon image “H69 Abnormal number of fired balls” on the third image display device 72 (left side image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification regarding the "abnormal number of fired balls error" continues until the power supply to the game machine 1 is cut off (the notification ends when the power supply is cut off).

When the power supply to the game machine 1 is cut off, the notification ends, but if the abnormality in the number of balls fired has not been resolved (for example, if a situation where a large number of game balls are parked on the game board surface has not been resolved) ) receives the "launched ball number abnormality designation command" after the power switch 164 is turned on, and the notification of "launched ball number abnormality error" is started again.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the abnormal number of balls fired is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (the display position of the above-mentioned "H68 abnormal number of winning balls" icon image). Below), a rectangular icon image "H69 Abnormal number of balls fired" is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to visually recognize because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the abnormal number of fired balls error.

The notification event type with priority level 13 is "intra-gaming machine communication abnormality error."
Notification of "gaming machine communication abnormality error" starts upon receipt of "gaming machine communication abnormality start designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" with "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Displaying an icon image "H06 Board connection error Check connection" on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

All of the voice notification, screen notification, and illumination notification regarding the "intra-gaming machine communication abnormality error" continue to be notified until the error is resolved (the notification ends when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the abnormal communication error within the gaming machine is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (the display position of the above-mentioned "H69 Abnormal number of fired balls" icon image). A rectangular icon image "H06 Board connection error, check connection" is displayed at the bottom). As a result, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of an abnormal communication error within the gaming machine.

The notification event type with priority level 14 is "exit switch disconnection error."
"Exit switch disconnection error" is an abnormality when a disconnection of the subtraction exit switch 91c is detected.
The notification of "exit switch disconnection error" is started upon receiving the "exit switch disconnection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
On the third image display device 72 (left image display device), an icon image “H14 Subtraction port SW abnormality, malfunction in launcher” is displayed,
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

The audio notification, screen notification, and electric notification for "exit switch disconnection error" will continue to be notified until the error is resolved and the error release sw 123 is operated. (The notification will end if the notification is received.)

The screen notification of the exit switch disconnection error is as shown in FIG. 115 in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (display position of the above-mentioned "H06 Board connection error Check connection" icon image) A rectangular icon image "H14 Subtraction port sw abnormality, launcher malfunction" is displayed below. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the exit switch disconnection error.

The notification event type with priority level 15 is "exit switch abnormality error."
"Exit switch abnormality error" occurs when the subtraction exit switch 91c is not turned on within a specified time after the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated (when the subtraction exit switch 91c cannot detect the passage of the ball even if the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated). It's abnormal.
The notification of "exit switch abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "exit switch abnormality specification command", and the notification mode is as follows.
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" with "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
On the third image display device 72 (left side image display device), an icon image “H14 Subtraction port SW abnormality, malfunction in launcher” is displayed,
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

The audio notification, screen notification, and electric notification for "exit switch abnormality error" continue to be notified until the error is resolved and the error release sw 123 is operated. (The notification will end if the notification is received.)

The screen notification of the exit switch abnormality error is as shown in FIG. A rectangular icon image "H14 Subtraction port sw abnormality, launcher malfunction" is displayed below. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the exit switch abnormality error.

The notification event type with priority level 16 is "entrance switch disconnection error."
The "entrance switch disconnection error" is an abnormality when a disconnection of the subtraction entrance switch 91b is detected. Specifically, this is an abnormality when it is not possible to detect OFF of the subtraction entrance switch 91b even if the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated (when the game ball is stopped).
Notification of "entrance switch disconnection error" is started upon receiving the "entrance switch disconnection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
On the third image display device 72 (left side image display device), an icon image “H15 Subtraction inlet SW abnormality, malfunction in ball feeding section” is displayed,
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

All of the voice notification, screen notification, and electrical notification for "entrance switch disconnection error" continue to notify until the error is resolved and the error release sw 123 is operated (the error is cleared and the error release sw 123 is operated (The notification will end if the notification is received.)

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the inlet switch disconnection error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (the above-mentioned "H14 Subtraction port SW abnormality, malfunction in launcher" icon image). A rectangular icon image ``H15 Subtraction inlet sw abnormality, malfunction in ball feeding section'' is displayed below the display position. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the entrance switch disconnection error.

The notification event type with priority level 17 is "entrance switch abnormality error."
The "entrance switch abnormality error" is an abnormality when the OFF time (the time when no game ball is detected) of the subtraction entrance switch 91b continues for a specified time (for example, 10 seconds) (the OFF state continues).
Notification of "entrance switch abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "entrance switch abnormality specification command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
On the third image display device 72 (left side image display device), an icon image “H15 Subtraction inlet SW abnormality, malfunction in ball feeding section” is displayed,
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

The audio notification, screen notification, and electrical notification for "entrance switch abnormality error" continue to notify until the error is resolved and the error release sw 123 is operated (the error is cleared and the error release sw 123 is operated. (The notification will end if the notification is received.)

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the entrance switch abnormality error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (the above-mentioned "H14 Subtraction port SW abnormality, malfunction in launcher" icon image). A rectangular icon image ``H15 Subtraction inlet sw abnormality, malfunction in ball feeding section'' is displayed below the display position. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to visually recognize because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the entrance switch abnormality error.

The notification event type with priority level 18 is "foul ball switch disconnection error."
Notification of "entrance switch abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "foul ball switch disconnection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows.
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
On the third image display device 72 (left side image display device), display an icon image “H24 foul ball SW abnormality check wiring of foul ball SW”;
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

The audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification for "foul ball switch disconnection error" continue to be notified until the error is resolved and the error release sw 123 is operated. (The notification will end if operated.)

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the foul ball switch disconnection error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left side image display device) (the above-mentioned "H15 Subtraction inlet sw abnormality malfunction in ball feeding section" icon) A rectangular icon image "H24 Foul ball sw abnormality, foul ball sw wiring confirmation" is displayed below the image display position. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the foul ball switch disconnection error.

The notification event type with priority level 19 is "communication line abnormal error."
The notification of "communication line abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "communication line abnormality specification command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" with "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Displaying an icon image “H04 Dedicated unit connection error, check connection” on the third image display device 72 (left side image display device);
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

All audio notifications, screen notifications, and illumination notifications for "communication line abnormality error" continue to be notified until the error is resolved and the error release sw 123 is operated (the error is cleared and the error release sw 123 is operated (The notification will end if the notification is received.)

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the communication line abnormality error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left side image display device) (the above-mentioned "H24 foul ball sw abnormality foul ball sw wiring confirmation" icon) A rectangular icon image "H04 Dedicated unit connection error, check connection" is displayed below the image display position. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of a communication line abnormality error.

The notification event type with priority level 20 is "communication no response error".
Notification of "communication no response error" is started upon receiving the "communication no response designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Displaying an icon image "H05 Dedicated unit communication error Restart unit" on the third image display device 72 (left side image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

All of the voice notification, screen notification, and electric notification regarding the "communication no response error" continue to notify until the error is resolved (the notification ends when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the communication no response error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (display of the above-mentioned “H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection” icon image) A rectangular icon image ``H05 Dedicated unit communication error, restart unit'' is displayed below the position. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly notify employees of the occurrence of a communication no response error.

The notification event type of priority 21 is "too many balls error."
Notification of "too many balls error" starts upon receiving the "too many balls error specification command", and the notification mode is as follows.
No notification is made by the audio output device 9,
On the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), an icon image "H25 Too many game balls error, please set the appropriate number of balls" is displayed,
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

Both the screen notification and the illumination notification regarding the "too many balls error" continue the notification until the error is resolved (the notification ends when the error is resolved).

The screen notification of the excessive ball error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) as shown in FIG. ``Excessive pitch error, please use appropriate number of pitches.'' is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to visually recognize because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the too many balls error.

Further, since the screen notification of the excessive ball error continues until the error is resolved (until the appropriate number of balls is reached), the situation in which the right performance pattern 70a is difficult to visually recognize continues until the error is resolved. Therefore, it is possible to call the employee and urge him/her to quickly resolve the error.

The notification event type of priority 22 is "underball error".
Notification of "too few balls error" starts upon receiving the "too many balls error designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice message "Please replenish balls in the out mouth" and the warning sound of a "siren" using "audio notification (volume MAX)".
On the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), display an icon image "H24 Game Ball Insufficient Error Replenish Balls from Out Port";
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification regarding the "underball error" continues until the error is resolved (the notification ends when the error is resolved).

The screen notification of the insufficient number of balls error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) as shown in FIG. ), and a rectangular icon image "H24 Game Ball Insufficient Error Replenish Balls from Out Port" is displayed so as to overlap a part of the right production pattern 70a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the underball error.

Further, the screen notification of the insufficient ball error continues until the error is resolved (until the balls are replenished), so the situation in which the right effect pattern 70a is difficult to visually recognize continues until the error is resolved. Therefore, it is possible to call the employee and urge him/her to quickly resolve the error.

Comparing the "too many balls error" and the "too few balls error", the difference is that the "too many balls error" does not give an audio notification, but the "too many balls error" does. If the "ball shortage error" continues, there is a risk that if a jackpot game is executed, there will be a problem such as not being able to enter the jackpot due to a shortage of game balls to be fired. Therefore, in the event of a "lack of balls error", a voice notification can also be provided to encourage the employee to promptly replenish balls, which can lead to the prevention of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

The notification event type of priority 23 is "lifting mechanism error."
The notification of "lifting mechanism error" is started upon receiving the "lifting mechanism error specification command", and the notification mode is as follows:
No notification is made by the audio output device 9,
On the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), an icon image “H29 Lift mechanism section error, please check the lift” is displayed,
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

Both the screen notification and the illumination notification regarding the "lifting mechanism error" continue to notify until the error is resolved (the notification ends when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of a lifting mechanism error is a rectangular icon displayed in the upper display area of the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). Please.” is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of a lifting mechanism error.

The notification event type of priority 24 is "abrasive material not installed error."
The notification of the "abrasive material not installed error" is started upon receiving the "abrasive material not installed designation command", and the notification mode is as follows.
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Displaying an icon image "H22 Abrasive material installation error Abrasive material is not set" on the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

The voice saying "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of the "siren" will end 30 seconds after the start of the output, and the icon image "H22 Abrasive material installation error Abrasive material is not set" will be displayed and a frame will be displayed. The red flashing of the lighting device 10 continues to notify until the error is resolved (the notification ends when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the abrasive material not installed error is displayed in the upper display area of the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) (the above-mentioned "H29 Lift mechanism section error, please check the lift") A rectangular icon image "H22 Abrasive material installation error Abrasive material is not set" is displayed below the icon image. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to visually recognize because it overlaps with other presentation images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the abrasive not installed error.

The notification event type with priority level 25 is "passage switch disconnection error."
The notification of "Aisle switch unconnected error" is started upon receiving the "Aisle switch unconnected designation command", and the notification mode is as follows.
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call the staff" and the warning sound of a "siren" at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
On the third image display device 72 (left side image display device), an icon image “H26 Frame out SW error, frame out SW wiring check” is displayed,
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification regarding the "pathway switch disconnection error" continues until the error is resolved (the notification ends when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the path switch disconnection error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (the above-mentioned "H05 Dedicated unit communication error restart unit" icon image) A rectangular icon image ``H26 Frame out SW error, frame out SW wiring check'' is displayed below. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the path switch disconnection error.

The notification event type of priority 26 is "glass frame opening error."
The notification of "Glass frame opening error" is started upon receiving the "Glass frame opening designation command", and the notification mode is as follows.
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "The door is open" with "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Displaying an icon image "H64 glass frame opening error" on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

The output of the voice "The door is open" will end when the glass frame 4 is closed or the output will take a maximum of 37 seconds from the start of the voice output, and the display of the icon image "H64 Glass frame opening error" will be as follows: The process ends when the glass frame 4 is closed, and the red blinking of the frame lighting device 10 ends 30 seconds after the glass frame 4 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the glass frame opening error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left side image display device) (the above-mentioned "H26 Frame out SW error Frame out SW wiring check" icon) A rectangular icon image "H64 Glass frame opening error" is displayed below the image. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the glass frame opening error.

The notification event type of priority 27 is "inner frame opening error."
The notification of "inner frame opening error" is started upon receiving the "inner frame opening designation command", and the notification mode is as follows.
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "The door is open" with "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Displaying an icon image “H65 Inner frame opening error” on the third image display device 72 (left side image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

The output of the voice "The door is open" will end when the inner frame 3 is closed or the output will take a maximum of 37 seconds from the start of the voice output, and the display of the icon image "H65 Inner frame open error" will be The process ends when the inner frame 3 is closed, and the red flashing of the frame illumination device 10 ends 30 seconds after the inner frame 4 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the inner frame opening error is displayed in the upper display area (below the above-mentioned "H64 glass frame opening error" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device). A rectangular icon image "H65 Inner frame open error" is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to visually recognize because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the inner frame opening error.

In addition, the voice notification mode of ``door is open'' and the termination condition of the voice notification are made common for both the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error. As a result, control processing related to audio data and error notification can be shared, and error notification can be made more efficient.

Note that while the glass frame opening error is being reported or the inner frame opening error is being reported, launching of the game ball is not permitted to prevent the game ball from flying out of the gaming machine (launching into the gaming area is prohibited). (Although limited), firing of game balls may be permitted (launching into the game area may be permitted).

The notification event type of priority 28 is "ball extraction operation in progress".
Notification of "Ball removal operation in progress" (notification according to discharge control) is started upon receiving the "Ball removal operation designation command", and the notification mode is as follows.
At the start of the ball extraction operation, the audio output device 9 outputs the voice message ``Ball extraction mode'' once for 3 seconds with the ``audio notification (volume MAX)'', and then 60 seconds later, ``Ball extraction mode is over''. " is output once for 5 seconds,
Displaying an icon image "in ball removal mode" on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal),
The illumination notification by the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 is not performed.

As mentioned above, the audio notification during "ball removal operation" is as follows: At the start of the ball removal operation, the voice message "Ball removal mode" is output once for 3 seconds with the "audio notification (volume MAX)", and then the 60 After a few seconds, a voice saying "Ball extraction mode is over" is output once for 5 seconds and the display ends, and the display of the icon image "Ball extraction mode in progress" ends 60 seconds after the start of the display.

The screen notification during the ball extraction operation is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) as shown in FIG. (also displayed at the bottom), and a rectangular icon image ``in ball extraction mode'' is displayed so as to overlap a part of the left performance pattern 70a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to visually recognize because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the ball extraction mode.

The notification event type with priority level 29 is "ball removal lever operation error."
The notification of "ball removal lever operation error" is started upon receiving the "ball removal lever operation error start designation command", and the notification mode is as follows.
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice message "Please remove the ball" using the "Voice notification (volume MAX)" setting.
Displaying on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) an icon image "Please operate the ball removal lever to remove the ball";
The frame lighting device 10 blinks in red (40% brightness).

All of the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification regarding the "ball removal lever operation error" continues until the error is resolved (the notification ends when the error is resolved).

As shown in FIG. 115, the screen notification of the ball extraction lever operation error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) (displayed below the "in ball extraction mode" icon image described above), and A rectangular icon image ``Please operate the ball removal lever to remove the ball'' is displayed so as to overlap a part of the production pattern 70a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to visually recognize because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of a ball removal lever operation error.

The notification event type with priority level 30 is "Launching pad remaining ball error."
Notification of "launching pad remaining ball error" is started upon receiving the "launching pad remaining ball error designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the message "There are balls left that can be fired" using "audio notification (volume MAX)" until the error is resolved.
Displaying an icon image "There are balls remaining that can be fired" on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal),
The illumination notification by the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 is not performed.

Both the audio notification and the screen notification regarding the "launching pad remaining ball error" continue the notification until the error is resolved (the notification ends when the error is resolved).

The screen notification of the ball remaining error on the launch pad is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) as shown in FIG. (also displayed at the bottom), and a rectangular icon image ``There are balls remaining that can be fired'' is displayed so as to overlap a part of the left performance pattern 70a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform employees of the occurrence of the launch pad remaining ball error.

The notification event type of priority 31 is "counting process notification."
Notification of "counting process notification" is started upon receiving the "counting process notification specification command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Counting process in progress" at "Voice notification (volume MAX)" for 3 seconds.
Displaying an icon image “Counting in progress” on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) for 3 seconds,
The illumination notification by the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 is not performed.

Both the audio notification and the screen notification in the "counting process notification" end when 3 seconds have elapsed from the start or when counting is completed. Note that if the counting button switch 20a detects the operation of the counting button 20 after 3 seconds have elapsed from the start, voice notification and screen notification are performed for an additional 3 seconds, and the same process is repeated thereafter. It turns out.

The screen notification of the counting process notification is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) as shown in FIG. 115 (displayed below the above-mentioned "There are balls remaining that can be fired" icon image). , a rectangular icon image ``Counting in progress'' is displayed so as to overlap a part of the left performance pattern 70a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform players and employees of the occurrence of the counting process notification.

The notification event type of priority 32 is "counting process completed."
Notification of "Counting process complete" is started upon receiving the "Counting process completion designation command", and the notification mode is as follows.
The voice output device 9 outputs the voice "Counting process completed" once for 5 seconds with "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Displaying an icon image "Counting process completed" on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal),
The illumination notification by the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 is not performed.

As mentioned above, the output of the voice saying "The counting process has been completed" ends in one output over a period of 5 seconds, and the icon image saying "The counting process has been completed" is displayed for 30 seconds from the start of the display. It ends with the passage of time.

The screen notification of the completion of the counting process is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) as shown in FIG. A rectangular icon image "Counting process completed" is displayed so as to overlap a part of the pattern 70a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image from becoming difficult to see because it overlaps with other performance images or icon images, and it is possible to clearly inform players and employees that the counting process has been completed.

The notification event type of priority 33 is "number of game balls exceeded".
When the number of game balls is exceeded, although the "command for specifying the number of game balls exceeded" and the "command for specifying the end of the number of game balls exceeded" are received, all of the voice notification, screen notification, and electric notification are ``maintaining the status quo'' (special (no notification will be made).
The main purpose of "game ball count over" is to send a message to the gaming machine information center when the number of gaming balls exceeds the specified number (40,000 balls), so it is possible to use the audio notification, screen notification, and telephone notification on the gaming machine 1. It is designed not to carry out any decorative announcements. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who is playing the game in a good mood from being offended by the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (40,000 balls). On the other hand, the gaming machine information center can obtain information on the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (40,000 balls), so for example, it is possible to obtain information that the number of game balls exceeds the specified number (40,000 balls), so for example, it is possible to obtain information that the number of game balls exceeds the specified number (40,000 balls). It is possible to recognize the change in the number of balls played, and to understand the transition in the number of balls played in a step-by-step manner. Note that the number of game balls exceeded is information that is sent when the number of game balls exceeds the specified number (40,000 balls), so depending on the number of game balls you have, it may be sent when exactly ``40,000'' is sent. If there is, it may be sent as "40005".

Note that the above-mentioned notification mode is only an example, and the start condition, end condition, notification time, and notification mode can be changed as appropriate. For example, an event whose termination condition is a power outage may be terminated with the passage of time, or an event whose termination condition is a power outage may be terminated with a power outage.

In addition, regarding screen notification, some events are notified on the screen by displaying icon images, but the screen notification is not limited to this. Screen notification may be performed using red or white characters in the background.

In addition, regarding the screen notification, when multiple events occur, icon images that notify the occurrence can be displayed together, but it is also possible to display only the event with a higher priority among the events that have occurred. Then, when the condition for ending the screen notification of a high priority event is met, and during the notification period of a low priority event, the screen notification of the event may be performed.

Further, the priority order is only an example, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, "setting change" (notification according to control related to set value), "setting confirmation" (notification according to control related to set value), "power on (RWM clear)" rather than "clear number of game balls" (Notification in response to clearing of predetermined information), "power restoration" may be given higher priority. For example, "magnet detection error" may have a higher priority than "game ball count clear", or "unauthorized radio wave detection error" may have a higher priority than "game ball count clear". You can. Also, for example, ``abnormal error in the number of winning balls'' may be given higher priority than ``number of game balls cleared'', or ``abnormal error in the number of fired balls'' is given higher priority than ``number of game balls cleared''. It may be given a higher priority. Also, for example, "Glass frame opening error" may be given a higher priority than "Game balls number cleared", or "Inner frame opening error" may be given higher priority than "Game balls number cleared". may be made higher. Also, for example, "game machine communication abnormality error" may be given higher priority than "game ball count cleared", or "communication line abnormality error" is given higher priority than "game ball count cleared". You can rank it higher. Also, for example, ``ball extraction in progress'' may be given a higher priority than ``clear the number of game balls,'' or ``acquisition upper limit device activated'' may be given a higher priority than ``clear the number of game balls.'' may be made higher. Also, ``Ball removal operation'' may be given higher priority than ``Glass frame opening error'' and ``Inner frame opening error'', and ``Acquisition limit'' may be given higher priority than ``Setting change'' and ``Setting confirmation''. "Device operation" and "Ball extraction operation in progress" may be given higher priority.

Here, when each notification event type occurs, whether the game progress control is possible or the game progress control is impossible will be explained with reference to FIG. If the "Game" column of "Game operation" in FIG. 99 is "○", it means that the progress of the game can be controlled, and if it is "x", it means that the progress of the game cannot be controlled. It shows.

Notification event types that indicate a state in which game progress cannot be controlled include "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," and "acquisition upper limit device activation (partial control (impossible)," "Ball removal operation in progress," and "Ball removal lever operation error." On the other hand, other notification event types are in a "state in which game progress control is possible." For example, while the "setting change" is being executed, execution of the main control board timer interrupt process is not permitted, and the progress of the game cannot be controlled. On the other hand, while "clearing the number of game balls" is being executed, "setting change", "setting confirmation", "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", and "acquisition upper limit device activation" must occur on the main control board 110. For example, it can be said that the game is in a state where the progress of the game can be controlled.

In addition, "setting change", "setting confirmation", "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", and "acquisition upper limit device activated (some controls are impossible)" which are "states where game progress control is impossible" '', ``Ball extraction in progress'', and ``Ball extraction lever operation error'' are characterized by the fact that ``Clearing the number of game balls'', which is a ``state in which game progress can be controlled'', has a higher priority. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to give priority to the notification of "number of game balls cleared" in any case, so it is possible to ensure that the player recognizes that the number of game balls has been cleared.

In addition, "setting change", "setting confirmation", "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", and "acquisition upper limit device activated (some controls are impossible)" which are "states where game progress control is impossible" ”, “Ball extraction operation in progress”, and “Ball extraction lever operation error” have different priorities. For example, in order to resolve "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," a "setting change" is required, but if "setting change" is not performed after "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)" occurs. For example, by prioritizing and notifying "setting change" (by not notifying "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)"), it is possible to make the employee aware that the correct operation is being performed.

Another feature is that the priority order is different for "game progress control possible state" such as "clear the number of game balls," "power on (RWM clear)," and "power restoration." For example, between "Clear the number of game balls" and "Turn on the power (RWM clear)", "Clear the number of game balls" has priority, and between "Clear the number of game balls" and "Restore power", "Clear the number of game balls" has priority. be done. As a result, it is possible to give priority to the notification of "number of game balls cleared" in any case, so it is possible to ensure that the player recognizes that the number of game balls has been cleared.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, the notification termination conditions differ depending on each notification event type. For example, events can be divided into "events in which notification ends due to power outage (notification is not restarted after power is restored)" and "events in which notification does not end due to power outage (notification is restarted after power is restored)." Examples of "events in which notification ends due to power outage (notification does not resume after power is restored)" include "abnormal number of winning balls error," "abnormal number of fired balls error," and "abnormal RWM error." Examples of "events that do not end due to power outage (notification resumes after power is restored)" include "number of game balls cleared," "setting change," "setting confirmation," and the like. For example, in the case of "game ball count clear", the notification does not end just by turning the power switch 164 OFF/ON unless firing or counting is performed. In addition, when comparing ``events in which notifications end due to a power outage (notifications are not restarted after power is restored)'' and ``events in which notifications do not end due to power outages (notifications are resumed after power is restored),'' ``notifications are Events that do not end with a power outage (notifications resume after power is restored) tend to be given a higher priority. As a result, if the number of game balls is cleared, the notification can be continued until the ball is fired or counted, so it is possible to notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and they can play. can. In addition, in the case of a setting change, the notification can be continued until the setting key sw112a is returned to the initial position (setting change end operation), so by ending the notification along with the operation, the setting change is completed. employees can be made aware of.

Another feature is that the priorities are different for ``clear the number of game balls,'' ``change settings,'' and ``confirm settings,'' which are ``events where notifications do not end due to a power outage (notifications resume after power is restored).'' It will be done. For example, between "clear the number of game balls" and "change settings", "clear the number of game balls" has priority, and between "clear the number of game balls" and "confirm settings", "clear the number of game balls" has priority. As a result, it is possible to give priority to the notification of "number of game balls cleared" in any case, so it is possible to ensure that the player recognizes that the number of game balls has been cleared.

In addition, the priority order is different for "abnormal error in the number of winning balls," "abnormal error in the number of fired balls," and "abnormal RWM error," which are "events in which notification ends due to a power outage (notification does not resume after power is restored)." is mentioned as a characteristic point. For example, the "abnormal error in the number of winning balls" takes priority over the "abnormal error in the number of balls fired". For example, an "abnormal number of winning balls error" can be caused by fraud such as using an illegal device or a game ball with a string attached to only detect the winning switch, but not allowing the out ball detection switch 39a located downstream of the winning switch to detect it. In contrast, an "abnormal number of balls fired error" is assumed to occur when a large number of game balls remain on the game board surface (a state where so-called "grapes" occur). Ru. In other words, since the "abnormal number of winning pitches error" has a higher probability of fraud, security can be improved by giving priority to the "abnormal number of winning pitches error" for notification. Further, the "RWM abnormal error" has priority over the "abnormal error in the number of winning pitches". As a result, it is possible to prevent a game from being played in a state where there is an abnormality in the main RAM 110c (which is more serious than an error in the number of winning balls), and it is possible to prevent a game from not being played properly.

In addition, "RWM Abnormal Error" is notified based on the assumption that after the power supply is cut off, the setting change operation is performed and the settings are changed the next time the power is supplied. It ends. That is, after the power supply is cut off, if no setting change operation is performed the next time the power is supplied, the notification of the "RWM abnormal error" continues.
Therefore, after the power supply is cut off, if a setting change operation is performed the next time the power is supplied and the settings are changed, an event in which notification ends due to power cut (notification does not resume after power is restored) )” can be categorized as an event.

In addition, "events in which notifications end due to a power outage (notifications are not restarted after power is restored)" means that notifications may end when the power is turned off for all types of audio notifications, screen notifications, and illumination notifications. , part of the screen notification, and the illumination notification may be terminated when the power is turned off. In other words, some of the audio notifications, screen notifications, and illumination notifications may be restarted. That is, it may be possible not to restart the notification after the power is restored (some notifications may be restarted and some notifications may not be restarted).
In addition, "events where notifications do not end due to a power outage (notifications resume after power is restored)" means that notifications may not end due to a power outage in all of voice notifications, screen notifications, and illumination notifications. Some of the audio notifications, screen notifications, and illumination notifications may be configured so that the notifications do not end when the power is turned off. In other words, it may be possible to restart the notification after the power is restored (some notifications may be restarted and some notifications may not be restarted).

Furthermore, regarding the error code displayed on the frame control display 125 shown in FIG. 99, the display termination conditions (non-display conditions) differ depending on each notification event type. For example, events can be divided into "events in which the display ends due to a power outage (the display does not resume after the power is restored)" and "events in which the display does not end due to the power outage (the display resumes after the power is restored)." Examples of "events where the display ends due to a power outage (the display does not restart after power is restored)" include "illegal radio wave detection error," "abnormal number of winning balls error," "abnormal number of fired balls error," and "display An example of an event in which the display does not end due to a power outage (the display resumes after the power is restored) is "the number of game balls cleared". Specifically, for the error code "H67" corresponding to "game ball count clear", the display termination condition (non-display condition) is satisfied 30 seconds after firing or counting is performed. On the other hand, the error code "H66" corresponding to "unauthorized radio wave detection error", the error code "H68" corresponding to "abnormal number of winning balls error", and the error code "H69" corresponding to "abnormal number of fired balls error" are , when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the display termination condition (non-display condition) is satisfied. This allows you to confirm that the high-priority "clearing the number of game balls" has been performed even after the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (after the power is turned on again). Even if the number of game balls is cleared, it can be surely recognized that the number of game balls has been cleared.

In addition to the above-mentioned "game ball count clear" regarding "events where the display does not end due to power outage (display resumes after power is restored)", for example, "glass frame opening error" and "inner frame opening error" It can be included in "events where the display does not end due to power outage (display resumes after power is restored)". For example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open (with an error code displayed), the power is turned on without closing the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3. However, the condition for ending the display of the error code is not met, and if it is a "glass frame opening error", "H64" will be redisplayed, and if it is an "inner frame opening error", "H65" will be redisplayed. . On the other hand, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open (with an error code displayed), and the power is turned on after closing the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3, In this case, the condition for ending the display of the error code is satisfied. In other words, it can be said that whether or not the condition for ending the display of the error code is met depends on whether the operation of closing the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3 is performed (it can be said that it belongs to either event). Thereby, if the number of game balls is cleared, even if a power outage occurs unexpectedly, it can be recognized that the number of game balls has been cleared. In addition, in the case of "Glass frame opening error" or "Inner frame opening error", if the error code is displayed when the power is turned on again, you may be prompted to close the glass frame 4 and inner frame 3. can. On the other hand, if the power is turned on again after the operation of closing the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 has been performed, the error code will stop displaying, so it is difficult to make it clear that the appropriate action has been taken. can.

Note that the "event in which the display ends when the power is turned off (the display does not restart after the power is restored)" may be a mode in which no display is performed at all after the power is restored, or a condition in which the display is not displayed at all after the power is restored, or for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the power is restored. It may be displayed and then hidden after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. That is, the display may not be restarted after the power is restored (it may not be displayed at all, or it may be displayed only for a predetermined time).
Furthermore, "events in which the display does not end due to a power outage (display resumes after power is restored)" may be a mode in which the display continues until the corresponding error is resolved after the power is restored, or a state in which the display is continued until the corresponding error is resolved after the power is restored; The display may be displayed for a time (for example, 30 seconds) and then hidden after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. That is, the display may be resumed after the power is restored (the display may continue until the error is resolved, or may be displayed for a predetermined period of time).

In addition, as mentioned above, when "setting change", "setting confirmation", "power on (RWM clear)", and "acquisition upper limit device activation" are performed, "fraud detection status 1 (main control )" is turned ON and is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. In addition, in the case of "clear the number of game balls", Bit 3 of "fraud detection state 2 (frame control)" of "HC/fraud monitoring information" is turned ON, and the information turned ON is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. will be sent to. On the other hand, "Bullet removal in progress", "Ball removal lever operation error", "Communication line abnormality error", "Communication no response error", etc. are detected as "Fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" of "HC/Fraud monitoring information". )" is not turned on, and no information is sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. This makes it possible to draw a line between information necessary to properly manage the gaming machine 1 and unnecessary information, and allows the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center to receive all kinds of information (receive everything). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the amount of information to be managed from becoming negligent.

In addition, when "setting change", "setting confirmation", and "power on (RWM clear)", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" of "HC/fraud monitoring information" is turned ON, and the dedicated unit is 170 and the gaming machine information center, but for example, if these events occur outside of the gaming parlor's business hours, the information may not be sent; Information may be transmitted when these events occur. In other words, if these events occur during business hours of the game parlor, there is a high probability that fraud was committed, so if you only receive information during the business hours of the game parlor, you can maintain the minimum level of security. can do. That is, depending on the business hours of the gaming parlor, information related to an event may be sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (during the gaming parlor's business hours), or information related to the event may be sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. There may be cases in which the information is not sent during (outside business hours of the game parlor).
On the other hand, "Bullet removal in progress", "Ball removal lever operation error", "Communication line abnormality error", "Communication no response error", etc. are detected as "Fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" of "HC/Fraud monitoring information". )" is not turned ON and information is not sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. However, information related to these events is sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. Alternatively, the information may be configured so that it may be transmitted during or outside business hours of the game parlor, or may not be transmitted.
In other words, it may be possible to send information related to an event to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (basically it is sent, but it may not be sent depending on business hours), or information related to an event may be sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. 170 and the gaming machine information center (basically not sent, but may be sent depending on business hours).

Here, the display order of error codes will be explained. As shown in FIG. 99, there are notification events detected by the main control board 110 and notification events detected by the frame control board 120, and the notification events detected by the main control board 110 are displayed on the frame control display 125. No error code is displayed, and an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 for a notification event detected by the frame control board 120. Additionally, the notification events detected by the main control board 110 and the notification events detected by the frame control board 120 are controlled by the production control means 130, and are voice notifications, screen notifications (display of error codes in icon images), and electronic notifications. Decorative notifications are now held (excluding cases where the number of game balls is exceeded). Furthermore, for notification events detected by the frame control board 120, an error code is displayed on the display section 174 of the dedicated unit 170.

For example, when the frame control board 120 detects that the number of game balls has cleared, the error code "H67" is first displayed on the frame control display 125, and then the first image display device 70 displays "H67 game balls". "Number Clear" is displayed, and finally, "H67" is displayed on the display section 174 of the dedicated unit 170. For example, if the operations are performed in the reverse order, the employee who is performing the operation to clear the number of game balls on the back side of the game machine will once be able to visually check the first image display device 70 or display unit 174 that can be seen from the front side of the game machine. Although it takes time and effort to do so, there is an advantage that if the error codes are displayed in the above-mentioned order, it becomes easier to confirm the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared.

FIGS. 116 and 117 are diagrams showing the relationship between the notification mode between the clearing of the number of game balls and each event at the time of turning on the power. "Audio notification", "screen notification", and "illumination notification" in the figure correspond to those described in FIGS. 113 and 114. In addition, FIG. 116 shows a case where the power is turned on after the game ball count clearing operation and a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation are performed together, and a case where the power is turned on when the game ball count clearing operation and the RWM clearing operation are both performed. The time chart assumes two cases: "Clear the number of playing balls" and "Change or check the settings". , a comparison between "game ball count clear" and "power on (RWM clear)", and "game ball count clear" and "power restoration".

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and changing settings or checking settings)
(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, the number of game balls is cleared, and if the settings are changed, the settings are changed, and if the settings are confirmed, the settings are confirmed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the production control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it outputs "The number of game balls has been cleared" by an audio notification, displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" by a screen notification, and displays "Number of game balls cleared" by an electric notification. The lighting device 10 is made to blink red.

(c) is the timing when the production control board 130 receives the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, when the power supply sw164 is turned on, the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 start starting up slightly earlier than the main control board 110. That is, the main processing on the frame control board 120 and the main processing on the production control board 130 are started earlier than the main processing on the main control board 110. Therefore, the game ball count clear notification starts at (b), and the setting change notification or setting confirmation notification starts at (c) later.

In (c), although the setting change designation command has been received, the notification of clearing the number of playing balls is being executed, and clearing the number of playing balls has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 113, so the voice related to the setting change is Notifications and electric notifications are not started. On the other hand, regarding the screen notification, the first image display device 70 starts displaying "Settings are being changed".

(d) is the timing when 5 seconds have passed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the audio notification of clearing the number of game balls ends, a new audio notification of setting change "Settings are being changed + siren" is started, and this is repeatedly output.

Regarding the notification modes (c) to (d), as shown in the setting change and setting confirmation (c) to (d) in FIG. In the first image display device 70, notification that the number of game balls has been cleared and notification that settings are being changed are performed. On the first image display device 70, "Settings changing" is displayed in red on a black background, and an icon image "H67 Game ball count clear" is displayed in the upper left of the display area so as not to overlap with the display. ing. The icon image has "H67" written in white letters on a red background and "Number of game balls cleared" written in black letters on a yellow background (the background color is two-tone red and yellow).

Although clearing the number of game balls has a higher notification priority, the display of "Settings changing" is larger than the font size of the icon image for clearing the number of game balls, and is displayed in red. , is displayed in the center of the display area, making it easy for employees to see. As a result, even in a situation where priority is given to the game ball count clear notification and the audio notification and illumination notification of the setting change notification cannot be performed, it is possible to sufficiently recognize that the settings are being changed. In addition, even if the game ball count clear and setting change notification are executed at the same time, both notifications can be identified, so it is possible to prevent failure to recognize which event has occurred. be able to.

(e) is the timing at which the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command (or the power restoration designation command if the setting is changed) transmitted from the main control board 110. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it ends the audio notification and screen notification of the setting change that is being executed.

Regarding the notification modes (d) to (e), as shown in the setting change and setting confirmation (d) to (e) in FIG. The one-image display device 70 is notifying that the number of game balls has been cleared and notifying that the setting is being changed, and the audio output device 9 is notifying that the setting is being changed. In this way, even after the audio notification for clearing the number of game balls has ended, if the notification period for setting changes is still in progress, by immediately starting the audio notification for setting changes, the system recognizes that the settings are being changed. can be made easier. Although not shown in the figure, after (e), the first image display device 70 displays an icon image for clearing the number of game balls, the initial number (123) of the effect pattern 70a, and a background image. The state will be as follows.

(g) is the timing when the counting button 20 is operated by the player and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the firing handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is launched. It is. When any one of the operations is performed, the screen notification and the illumination notification that the number of game balls has been cleared end 30 seconds after the operation. As a result, the notification can be ended without delay after the player takes his/her seat, so the screen notification and illumination notification of the number of balls cleared will continue to be displayed, which will prevent the player from playing the game due to a sense of discomfort. You can prevent this from happening.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and the settings are changed or confirmed, both events can be suitably notified by audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification, so employees can This also leads to improved work efficiency.

Note that in (d), a new audio notification of a setting change is started, but the audio notification of a setting change does not need to be started. Further, although the screen notification of the setting change starts from (c), it may start from (d). Further, in (d), the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls may be ended, and the illumination notification for setting change may be started.

Further, for convenience of explanation, the explanation has been given using a setting change as an example, but when setting confirmation is performed, the above-mentioned setting change may be replaced with setting confirmation as appropriate.

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and clearing RWM)
(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, the number of game balls is cleared, and if the RWM is cleared, the RWM clear operation is accompanied.

Since (b) is as described above, its explanation will be omitted.
(c) is the timing when the production control board 130 receives the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110. Although the RWM clear designation command has been received, the number of game balls clear notification is being executed, and the priority shown in FIG. It is set not to start. On the other hand, regarding the screen notification, the first image display device 70 starts displaying "the combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image).

(d) is the timing when 5 seconds have passed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the audio notification for clearing the number of game balls ends, a new audio notification for RWM clearing "Rum has been cleared + input BGM" is started, and this will be repeatedly output.

As for the notification modes (c) to (d), as shown in power-on (RWM clear) (c) to (d) in FIG. The first image display device 70 notifies the clear number of game balls and displays "the combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image). In other words, it does not directly display that the RWM has been cleared, but indirectly informs that the RWM has been cleared by displaying the "combination of the production symbols 70a of the initial roll of 123" (including the background image). ing.

(f) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (d), and the audio notification of RWM clear ends at this timing. On the other hand, the display of "the combination of performance symbols 70a for the initial roll 123" (including the background image) continues until the player starts playing the game (it may be interrupted due to a demonstration performance, etc.).

Regarding the notification modes (d) to (f), as shown in power-on (RWM clear) (d) to (f) in FIG. The first image display device 70 displays the game ball count clear notification and the “combination of the production symbols 70a of the initial roll 123” (including the background image), and the audio output device 9 performs the RWM clear notification. ing. In this way, if the RWM clear notification period is still in progress even after the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is finished, the RWM clear audio notification is immediately started to notify that RWM clearing has been performed. It can be made easier to recognize. Note that (g) is as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and the RWM is cleared at the same time, both events can be suitably notified by audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification, thereby improving the work efficiency of employees. It also leads to improvement.

In addition, in (d), although the audio notification of RWM clear is newly started, the audio notification of RWM clear does not need to be started. Further, although the screen notification of RWM clear is started from (c), it may start from (d). Further, in (d), the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls may be ended and the illumination notification for RWM clearing may be started.

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and restoring power)
(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, the number of game balls is cleared, and if the power is restored, only the power switch 164 is turned on.

Since (b) is as described above, its explanation will be omitted.
(c) is the same mode as the above-mentioned RWM clear, so the explanation will be omitted. However, since this is a power restoration, the command received from the main control board 110 here is a power restoration designation command.

(d) is the timing when 5 seconds have passed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the audio notification of the number of game balls being cleared ends, a new audio notification of power restoration, ``turn-on BGM'', is started.
(f) is the same mode as the above-mentioned RWM clear, so the explanation will be omitted.

Regarding the notification modes (c) to (d), as shown in power recovery (c) to (d) in FIG. 117, the voice output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 are notifying that the number of game balls has been cleared. In the first image display device 70, the number of game balls cleared is notified and the "combination of the performance symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image) is displayed. In other words, the system does not directly display that the power has been restored, but rather indirectly informs that the power has been restored by displaying the "combination of the production symbols 70a of the initial roll of 123" (including the background image). . In addition, in the power restoration, like the RWM clear, "the combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" is displayed, but another combination of effect symbols 70a may be displayed. For example, when the power is restored, "the combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 357" may be displayed.

In the notification modes (d) to (f), as shown in power recovery (d) to (f) in FIG. The device 70 notifies you of the number of game balls cleared and displays the "combination of the performance symbols 70a of the initial roll 123" (including the background image), and the audio output device 9 notifies you of the power recovery (power-on BGM output). It is being said. In this way, even after the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is still in the power restoration notification period, the audio notification of power restoration is immediately started to notify that the power has been restored. It can be made easier to recognize. Note that (g) is as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and the power is restored at the same time, both events can be suitably notified through audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification, thereby improving the work efficiency of employees. It also leads to improvement.

Note that in (d), a new audio notification of power restoration is started, but the audio notification of power restoration does not need to be started. Further, although the screen notification of power restoration starts from (c), it may start from (d). Further, in (d), the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls may be ended, and the illumination notification for power restoration may be started.

FIG. 118 is a time chart showing the relationship between the initial operations of the movable performance device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) when the number of game balls is cleared and when the power is restored. In addition, FIG. 118 is a diagram comparing the notification mode of each production means in the case where the power is turned on accompanied by the operation to clear the number of game balls and the case where only the power is turned on.

(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, the number of game balls is cleared, and if the power is restored, only the power switch 164 is turned on.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the production control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it outputs "The number of game balls has been cleared" by an audio notification, displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" by a screen notification, and displays "Number of game balls cleared" by an electric notification. The lighting device 10 is made to blink red.

(c) is the timing when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110.
When the power is turned on with clearing of the number of game balls, the first image display device 70 starts displaying "the combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image),
Even when the power is only turned on, the first image display device 70 starts displaying "the combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image). In other words, regardless of whether or not clearing the number of game balls is executed, the timing at which the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command is the same, and the "combination of production symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image) is displayed. The starting timing is also the same.

In addition, when the power is turned on with clearing the number of game balls, the initial operation of the movable presentation device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) is started,
Even when the power is only turned on, the initial operation of the movable presentation device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) is started. That is, regardless of whether or not clearing the number of game balls is executed, the timing at which the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command is the same, and the timing at which the initial operation is started is also the same.
As a result, there is no need to change the timing to start displaying the initial result, the timing to start executing the initial action, or the execution content of the initial action depending on whether or not clearing the number of game balls is performed, making it possible to prevent an increase in control load. .

In each case, from (c) to (g), the initial operation is such that the first movable member 77a operates in operation mode 1, then the second movable member 77b operates in operation mode 1, and then the first movable member 77a operates in operation mode 1. operates in operation mode 2. That is, in either case, the start timing of the initial operation and the initial operation mode are the same. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare an initial operation mode depending on whether or not clearing the number of game balls is to be executed, and commonization can be achieved, so that an increase in control load can be prevented.

In addition, in (c), when the power is turned on with the clearing of the number of game balls, the number of game ball clear notification is executed although the power recovery designation command is received, and the priority order shown in FIG. 113 is also clear. Since this has a higher rank, the audio notification and illumination notification related to power restoration are not started.

In addition, in (c), when the power is only turned on, the output of the audio notification "Turn on BGM" for power restoration and the illumination notification "Frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 76 are lit in white" begin. do.

(d) is the timing when 5 seconds have passed from (b). If the power is turned on with the clearing of the number of game balls, the voice notification of the clearing of the number of game balls ends at this timing. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the audio notification of clearing the number of game balls ends, the output of a new audio notification of power restoration ``insertion BGM'' is started.

(e) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (c). If only the power is turned on, the audio notification by the power-on BGM output ends. Similarly, (f) when the power is turned on with clearing the number of game balls is the timing 30 seconds have elapsed from (d), and the audio notification by the input BGM output ends at this timing.
Moreover, (f) in the case of only power ON is the timing 60 seconds have elapsed from (c), and the illumination notification ends at this timing.

(g) is the end timing of the initial operation in either case. That is, in either case, the initial operation of the movable presentation device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) started in (c) ends in (g). As a result, it is not necessary to change the execution end timing of the initial operation depending on whether or not clearing the number of game balls is executed, so it is possible to prevent an increase in control load.

In (h), when the power is turned on with clearing the number of game balls, the counting button 20 is operated by the player and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or the firing handle 15 This is the timing when the ball is gripped and the game ball is launched. When any one of the operations is performed, the screen notification and the illumination notification that the number of game balls has been cleared end 30 seconds after the operation.

Although not particularly shown, in both cases, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means provided in the movable presentation device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) during the initial operation is also the same. It's fine. For example, whether the power is turned on with clearing the number of game balls or only the power is turned on, the light emitting means provided in the movable performance device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) is lit in blue. An initial operation may also be performed. Thereby, it is not necessary to change the light emission pattern depending on whether or not clearing the number of game balls is executed, so that the control process can be simplified.

In addition, regarding the initial operation of the movable performance device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b), a comparison was made between the case where the power is turned on with the number of game balls being cleared and the case where the power is only turned on. In the case of only turning on the power, it may be read as turning on the power accompanied by a setting confirmation operation, turning on the power accompanied by an operation to change settings, or turning on the power accompanied by an RWM clearing operation. That is, in any case, the control load can be simplified by making the execution start timing, execution end timing, operation mode, etc. of the initial operation common.

FIGS. 119 and 120 are diagrams showing the relationship between the clearing of the number of game balls and the notification mode of each event (abnormality). Note that a magnet detection error and an unauthorized radio wave detection error will be described as examples of each event (abnormality). Further, FIG. 119 shows a case where a magnet is detected when the power is turned on after the operation to clear the number of game balls is performed, and a case where a radio wave is detected when the power is turned on after the operation to clear the number of game balls is performed. Assuming that, the time chart can be viewed as ``number of game balls cleared'' and ``magnet detection,'' and ``number of game balls cleared'' and ``radio wave detection.''

First, we will explain "game ball count clear" and "magnet detection".
(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, an operation to clear the number of game balls is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the production control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it outputs "The number of game balls has been cleared" by an audio notification, displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" by a screen notification, and displays "Number of game balls cleared" by an electric notification. The lighting device 10 is made to blink red.

(c) is the timing at which the main processing in the main control board 110 becomes executable, and (d) is the timing at which the main control board timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110 becomes executable. In other words, this is the timing at which the main control board timer interrupt process becomes executable and the error control process executed within the main control board timer interrupt process becomes executable.

(e) is the timing when magnet detection is performed by the error control process executed within the main control board timer interrupt process and the production control board 130 receives the magnet detection designation command. Although the magnet detection designation command was received at this timing, the notification of clearing the number of game balls is being executed, and clearing the number of game balls has a higher priority as shown in FIG. Decorative notifications are not started. On the other hand, regarding the screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "Magnet Detection".

(f) is the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the audio notification for clearing the number of game balls ends, a new audio notification for magnet detection "Magnet detected + siren" is started, and this will be repeatedly output.

Regarding the notification modes (e) to (f), as shown in magnet detection (e) to (f) in FIG. In the first image display device 70, the number of game balls cleared is notified and the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image) is displayed. Further, on the third image display device 72, an icon image of "magnet detection" is displayed (see FIG. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for clearing the number of game balls described above.

In this way, if a magnet is detected when the power is turned on with an operation to clear the number of game balls, the "magnet detection" icon is displayed on the third image display device 72 while notifying the clearing of the number of game balls, which has a high priority. By displaying the image, even if you perform the game ball count clear and magnet detection at the same time, you can identify both notifications, so you can easily identify which event is occurring. This can be prevented.

(h) is the timing when 180 seconds have elapsed from (e). At this timing, the audio notification and screen notification of magnet detection end. On the other hand, the screen notification and illumination notification of the clear number of game balls continue to be notified.

In the notification modes (f) to (h), as shown in magnet detection (f) to (h) in FIG. The device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and displays the initial number (123) of the performance symbol 70a and the background image.The third image display device 72 notifies the player that a magnet has been detected, and outputs audio. In the device 9, magnet detection notification is performed. In this way, if the magnet detection notification period is still in progress even after the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is finished, by immediately starting the magnet detection audio notification, the magnet detection, which has a high probability of fraud, can be prevented. This can make it easier to recognize what has been done.

(i) is the timing when the counting button 20 is operated by the player and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the firing handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is launched. It is. When any one of the operations is performed, the screen notification and the illumination notification that the number of game balls has been cleared end 30 seconds after the operation. As a result, the notification can be ended without delay after the player takes his/her seat, so the on-screen notification and illumination notification of the number of balls played will continue to be displayed, which will prevent the player from playing the game due to a sense of discomfort. You can prevent this from happening.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and the magnet is detected at the same time, both events can be appropriately notified through audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification, improving the work efficiency of employees. It also leads to letting people know.

Note that if magnet detection is not performed in (e) but magnet detection is performed between (f) and (i), audio notification and screen notification of magnet detection are immediately executed. On the other hand, regarding the illumination notification, since the illumination notification of the number of game balls being cleared is executed, the illumination notification corresponding to the magnet detection is not executed.

Further, in (f), although the audio notification of the magnet detection is newly started, the audio notification of the magnet detection does not need to be started. In addition, although the screen notification of magnet detection starts from (e), it may start from (f). Further, in (f), the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls may be ended, and the illumination notification for magnet detection may be started.

Next, "game ball count clear" and "radio wave detection" will be explained.
(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, an operation to clear the number of game balls is performed.

(b) is the timing when the number of game balls is cleared by the frame control board 120 in the frame control board main process, and the production control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it outputs "The number of game balls has been cleared" by an audio notification, displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" by a screen notification, and displays "Number of game balls cleared" by an electric notification. The lighting device 10 is made to blink red.

(e) is the timing when an illegal radio wave is detected in the error control process that is performed after the frame control board main process and is performed within the frame control board timer interrupt process, and the production control board 130 receives the illegal radio wave detection designation command. It is. Although the illegal radio wave detection designation command was received at this timing, the notification of clearing the number of playing balls was executed, and clearing the number of playing balls has a higher priority as shown in FIG. The electric notification will not start. On the other hand, regarding the screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "H66 unauthorized radio wave detection". Note that the icon image of "H66 Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection" continues to be displayed until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off.

(f) is the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the audio notification for clearing the number of game balls ends, a new audio notification for detecting unauthorized radio waves, ``Radio waves detected + siren,'' will start, and this will be output repeatedly.

Regarding the notification modes (e) to (f), as shown in radio wave detection (e) to (f) in FIG. In the first image display device 70, the number of game balls cleared is notified and the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image) is displayed. Further, on the third image display device 72, an icon image of "H66 Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection" is displayed (see FIG. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for clearing the number of game balls described above.

In this way, if a radio wave is detected when the power is turned on with an operation to clear the number of game balls, the third image display device 72 will display "Unauthorized radio wave detection" while notifying the clearing of the number of game balls, which has a high priority. By displaying the icon image, even if clearing the number of game balls and detecting radio waves are performed at the same time, both notifications can be identified, so it is not possible to recognize that either event is occurring. This can be prevented.

(g) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (f). At this timing, the audio notification of unauthorized radio wave detection ends. On the other hand, the screen notification and illumination notification of the clear number of game balls continue to be notified. (i) is the same as described in the section regarding magnet detection.

As for the notification modes (f) to (g), as shown in radio wave detection (f) to (g) in FIG. The device 70 notifies you of the number of game balls cleared, and displays the initial roll (123) of the performance symbol 70a and the background image, and the third image display device 72 notifies you of the detection of illegal radio waves, and the sound The output device 9 is notifying the detection of unauthorized radio waves. In this way, even after the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is still within the notification period for radio wave detection, by immediately starting the audio notification of radio wave detection, radio wave detection with a high probability of fraud can be prevented. This can make it easier to recognize what has been done.

As described above, even if the number of game balls cleared and radio wave detection occur at the same time, both events can be suitably notified through audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification, improving the work efficiency of employees. It also leads to letting people know.

Note that if radio wave detection is not performed in (e) but radio wave detection is performed between (f) and (i), audio notification and screen notification of radio wave detection are immediately executed. On the other hand, regarding the illumination notification, since the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls is being executed, the illumination notification corresponding to the radio wave detection is not executed.

Further, in (f), a new audio notification of radio wave detection is started, but the audio notification of radio wave detection does not need to be started. Further, although the screen notification of radio wave detection was decided to start from (e), it may start from (f). Further, in (f), the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls may be ended, and the illumination notification for radio wave detection may be started.

FIGS. 121 and 122 are diagrams showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality) in the notification mode. In addition, as examples of each event (abnormality), an abnormal communication error within a gaming machine, an abnormal communication error error, and a communication no response error will be cited and explained. In addition, FIG. 121 shows a case where a communication abnormality within the game machine is detected when the power is turned on after the operation to clear the number of game balls is performed, and a communication line abnormality when the power is turned on after the operation to clear the number of game balls is detected. It is assumed that a communication no response is detected, and the time chart can be viewed as follows: ``Number of game balls cleared'' and ``Communication error within the game machine'', ``Number of game balls cleared'' and ``Communication line abnormality error, communication "No response error".

First, we will explain "game ball count clear" and "gaming machine communication abnormality error".
(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, an operation to clear the number of game balls is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the production control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it outputs "The number of game balls has been cleared" by an audio notification, displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" by a screen notification, and displays "Number of game balls cleared" by an electric notification. The lighting device 10 is made to blink red.

(c) is the timing when main processing in the main control board 110 becomes executable. At this time, "gaming machine installation information notification" was performed in the main processing on the main control board 110, but communication could not be performed due to half-insertion or disconnection of the wiring connecting the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. Assume that a situation has occurred in which the receipt result of the "gaming machine installation information notification" has not been received.

(d) is the timing when the frame control board 120 determines that the period of not receiving the gaming machine installation information after startup is 3 minutes, and the production control board 130 receives the intra-gaming machine communication abnormality start designation command. Although the gaming machine internal communication abnormality start designation command was received at this timing, the game ball number clearing notification was executed, and the priority shown in Figure 113 was that clearing the gaming ball number had a higher priority, so the gaming machine internal communication abnormality occurred. Such audio notification and illumination notification are not started. On the other hand, regarding the screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "H06 Board connection error, confirm connection."

(e) is the timing when 5 seconds have passed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the voice notification of the clear number of game balls ends, a new voice notification of communication abnormality within the gaming machine ``Please call the staff + siren'' is started, and this is repeatedly output.

Regarding the notification modes (d) to (e), as shown in communication abnormal errors (d) to (e) in the game machine in FIG. The first image display device 70 notifies the number of game balls cleared and displays the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image). Further, on the third image display device 72, an icon image of "H06 Board connection error, check connection" is displayed (see FIG. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for clearing the number of game balls described above.

In this way, if a communication abnormality within the game machine is detected when the power is turned on with an operation to clear the number of game balls, the third image display device 72 will display "H06 By displaying the "Board connection error Check connection" icon image, even if clearing the number of game balls and in-machine communication error are executed at the same time, both notifications can be identified. It is possible to prevent failure to recognize that an event has occurred.

(f) is the timing when the half-insertion or disconnection of the wiring connecting the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is resolved. This ends the audio notification and screen notification of the abnormal communication error within the gaming machine.

As for the notification modes (e) to (f), as shown in communication abnormal errors (e) to (f) in the game machine in FIG. The first image display device 70 notifies the clear number of game balls, and displays the initial result (123) of the performance symbol 70a and the background image, and the third image display device 72 notifies the game machine communication abnormality error. The audio output device 9 is notifying the gaming machine of a communication abnormality error. In this way, if the notification period for an abnormal communication error within the gaming machine is still in progress even after the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is finished, the main control can be activated by immediately starting the audio notification of the abnormal communication error within the gaming machine. It is possible to prompt confirmation of the connection status between the board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(g) is the timing when the counting button 20 is operated by the player and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the firing handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is launched. It is. When any one of the operations is performed, the screen notification and the illumination notification that the number of game balls has been cleared end 30 seconds after the operation. As a result, the notification can be ended without delay after the player takes his/her seat, so the screen notification and illumination notification of the number of balls cleared will continue to be displayed, which will prevent the player from playing the game due to a sense of discomfort. You can prevent this from happening.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and an abnormal communication error within the game machine occur, both events can be suitably notified through audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification, so employees can work easily. This also leads to improved efficiency.

Note that if an abnormal communication within the gaming machine is detected between (e) and (g), a voice notification and a screen notification of the abnormal communication error within the gaming machine are immediately executed. On the other hand, regarding the illumination notification, since the illumination notification of the number of game balls being cleared is being executed, the illumination notification corresponding to the abnormal communication error within the gaming machine is not executed.

Further, in (e), a new audio notification of an abnormal communication error within a gaming machine is started, but the audio notification of an abnormal communication error within a gaming machine does not need to be started. Further, although the screen notification of the abnormal communication error within the gaming machine is started from (d), it may start from (e). Further, in (e), the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls may be ended, and the illumination notification for an abnormal communication error within the gaming machine may be started.

Next, "game ball count clear" and "communication line abnormal error, communication no response error" will be explained. Note that since both of these are connection errors between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, the explanation will be given as a "communication line abnormality error" and the "communication no response error" can be read interchangeably. In this example, the wiring connecting the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is partially inserted or disconnected.

(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, an operation to clear the number of game balls is performed. (b) is the same as (b) in the above-mentioned gaming machine communication abnormality error. Further, (c) is the timing related to an abnormal communication error within the gaming machine, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

(d) is the timing when the frame control board 120 detects that the VL signal (connection signal) with the dedicated unit 170 is OFF, and the production control board 130 receives the communication line abnormality designation command. Although the communication line abnormality designation command was received at this timing, the notification of clearing the number of game balls is being executed, and clearing the number of game balls has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 113, so the voice notification regarding the communication line abnormality is not executed. And the electric notification will not start. On the other hand, regarding the screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "H04 Dedicated unit connection error. Check connection."

(e) is the timing when 5 seconds have passed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the voice notification of the clear number of game balls ends, a new voice notification of communication line abnormality ``Please call the staff + siren'' is started, and this is repeatedly output.

Regarding the notification modes (d) to (e), as shown in communication line abnormal errors (d) to (e) in FIG. In the first image display device 70, the number of game balls cleared is notified and the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image) is displayed. Further, on the third image display device 72, an icon image of "H04 Dedicated unit connection error, check connection" is displayed (see FIG. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for clearing the number of game balls described above.

In this way, if a communication line abnormality is detected when the power is turned on with an operation to clear the number of game balls, the third image display device 72 will display "H04 dedicated By displaying the "Unit connection error Check connection" icon image, even if clearing the number of game balls and communication line abnormality are performed at the same time, both notifications can be identified. This can prevent situations such as not being able to recognize that something is occurring.

(f) is the timing when the half-insertion or disconnection of the wiring connecting the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is resolved. This ends the audio notification and screen notification of the communication line abnormality error. (g) is the same as (g) in the above-mentioned gaming machine communication abnormality error.

Regarding the notification modes (e) to (f), as shown in communication line abnormal errors (e) to (f) in FIG. The image display device 70 is notifying the clear number of game balls and displaying the initial number (123) of the performance symbol 70a and the background image, and the third image display device 72 is notifying the communication line abnormality error. Therefore, the audio output device 9 is notifying a communication line abnormality error. In this way, even if the audio notification of the clear number of game balls is finished, if the communication line abnormality error notification period is still in progress, by immediately starting the audio notification of the communication line abnormality error, the frame control board 120 , confirmation of the connection status between the dedicated units 170 can be prompted.

As described above, even if the number of game balls cleared and a communication line abnormality error or communication no response error occur together, both events can be appropriately notified by audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification. This also leads to improving the work efficiency of employees.

Note that if a communication line abnormality is detected between (e) and (g), a voice notification and a screen notification of the communication line abnormality error are immediately executed. On the other hand, regarding the illumination notification, since the illumination notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is executed, the illumination notification corresponding to the communication line abnormality error is not executed.

Further, in (e), a new voice notification of a communication line abnormality error is started, but the voice notification of a communication line abnormality error does not need to be started. Further, although the screen notification of a communication line abnormality error was decided to start from (d), it may start from (e). Further, in (e), the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls may be ended, and the illumination notification for a communication line abnormality error may be started.

FIGS. 123 and 124 are diagrams showing the relationship between the clearing of the number of game balls and the notification mode of each event (abnormality). In addition, as examples of each event (abnormality), a glass frame opening error, an inner frame opening error, and a ball removal operation will be cited and explained. Further, FIG. 123 shows a case in which the power is turned on after the game ball count clearing operation is performed with the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3 open, and a case in which the power is turned on after the game ball count clearing operation and the ball removal operation are performed. The time chart can be viewed as ``Number of game balls cleared'', ``Glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error'', ``Number of game balls cleared'' and ``Ball removal in progress''. Become.

First, we will explain "game ball count clear" and "glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error". It should be noted that since both errors are door opening errors detected by the frame control board 120, the description will be made using "glass frame opening error" and "inner frame opening error" can be read interchangeably.

(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, an operation to clear the number of game balls is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the production control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it outputs "The number of game balls has been cleared" by an audio notification, displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" by a screen notification, and displays "Number of game balls cleared" by an electric notification. The lighting device 10 is made to blink red.

(d) is the timing at which the frame control board timer interrupt process in the frame control board 120 is started. When the frame control board timer interrupt process is started, the opening of the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 can be detected in the error control process performed within the frame control board timer interrupt process.

(e) is the timing when the opening of the glass frame 4 is detected and the production control board 130 receives the glass frame opening designation command in the error control process (frame control board minor error notification control process). Although the glass frame opening designation command was received at this timing, the notification of clearing the number of game balls is being executed, and clearing the number of game balls has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 113, so the voice related to the glass frame opening error is Notifications and electric notifications are not started. On the other hand, regarding the screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "H64 Glass frame opening error".

(f) is the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the voice notification of the clear number of game balls ends, a new voice notification of the glass frame opening error ``door is open + siren'' is started, and this is repeatedly output.

The notification modes (e) to (f) are as shown in the glass frame (inner frame) opening error (e) to (f) in FIG. Notification is being carried out, and the first image display device 70 is notifying that the number of game balls has been cleared and displaying the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image). Further, on the third image display device 72, an icon image of "H64 Glass frame opening error" is displayed (see FIG. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for clearing the number of game balls described above.

In this way, if the operation to clear the number of game balls is performed while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open and the power is turned on, the third image is displayed while notifying the clearing of the number of game balls, which has a high priority. By displaying the icon image of "H64 glass frame opening error" on the device 72, even if clearing the number of game balls and glass frame opening error are executed at the same time, both notifications can be identified. , it is possible to prevent failure to recognize that any event has occurred.

(g) is the timing 37 seconds have passed since (e). At this timing, the audio notification of the glass frame opening error ends. On the other hand, the screen notification will continue to be notified. In addition, the screen notification and illumination notification of the number of game balls cleared will continue to be notified.

The notification modes (f) to (g) are as shown in the glass frame (inner frame) open error (f) to (g) in FIG. The first image display device 70 notifies the clear number of game balls and displays the initial roll (123) of the performance symbol 70a and the background image, and the third image display device 72 notifies the glass frame opening error. is being performed, and the audio output device 9 is notifying the glass frame opening error. In this way, even after the audio notification of the number of game balls being cleared is finished, if the notification period of the glass frame opening error is still in progress, by immediately starting the audio notification of the glass frame opening error, the glass frame 4 can be It is possible to make the user aware of the opening, and it is possible to prevent the game from being played with the glass frame 4 open.

(h) is the timing when the glass frame 4 changes from the open state to the closed state. For example, assume that the glass frame 4 is closed by an employee. When the glass frame 4 is closed, the screen notification of the glass frame opening error ends. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the employee from being confused due to the icon image "H64 Glass frame opening error" not being hidden even though the glass frame 4 is closed.

(j) is the timing when the counting button 20 is operated by the player and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the firing handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is launched. It is. When any one of the operations is performed, the screen notification and the illumination notification that the number of game balls has been cleared end 30 seconds after the operation. As a result, the notification can be ended without delay after the player takes his/her seat, so the screen notification and illumination notification of the number of balls cleared will continue to be displayed, which will prevent the player from playing the game due to a sense of discomfort. You can prevent this from happening.

As described above, even if the number of game balls cleared and the glass frame opening error occur together, both events can be appropriately notified through audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification, so employees can work more efficiently. It also leads to improving.
In addition, between (b) and (e), that is, during the period when the number of game balls cleared is being notified, launching the game ball into the gaming area is permitted, but between (e) and (h) ), that is, during the period when the number of game balls has been cleared and the glass frame or inner frame opening error notification is being performed, launching the game balls into the game area is restricted. This can prevent the game balls from being shot out and flying out of the game machine, making it impossible to secure the game balls necessary for the game.

Note that if a glass frame opening error is detected between (f) and (j), an audio notification and a screen notification of the glass frame opening error are immediately executed. On the other hand, regarding the illumination notification, since the illumination notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is executed, the illumination notification corresponding to the glass frame opening error is not executed.

Further, in (f), although the voice notification of the glass frame opening error is newly started, the voice notification of the glass frame opening error does not need to be started. Further, although the screen notification of the glass frame opening error was decided to start from (e), it may start from (f). Further, in (f), the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls may be ended, and the illumination notification for the glass frame opening error may be started.

Next, "game ball count cleared" and "ball removal operation in progress" will be explained.
(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, an operation for clearing the number of game balls and an operation for removing balls are involved. (b) is similar to the case of the glass frame opening error described above.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board 120 sets the ball extraction operation flag and the production control board 130 receives the ball extraction operation designation command. As mentioned above, in the frame control board main processing, clearing the number of game balls is executed before the processing related to removing balls, so the timing chart in the order of (b) and (c) above Become. In (c), although the specified command is received during the ball extraction operation, notification of clearing the number of playing balls is being executed, and clearing the number of playing balls has a higher priority as shown in FIG. The audio notification and the electrical notification are not started during the unplugging operation. On the other hand, regarding the screen notification, the first image display device 70 starts displaying ``in ball extraction mode''.

(f) is the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Further, when the voice notification of the clear number of game balls is completed, a new voice notification of the ball removal mode, ``It is ball removal mode'' (once) is output at the start of (f). In addition, at the end timing (i) of the ball extraction mode, the audio notification "Ball extraction mode is over" (once) during the ball extraction mode is output.

In the notification modes (c) to (f), as shown in (c) to (f) during the ball removal operation in FIG. In the first image display device 70, the number of game balls cleared is notified, the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image), and the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" are displayed. ``Ball extraction mode in progress'' is displayed superimposed on the screen.

In addition, the display "in the ball removal mode" may be displayed in a superimposed manner so that a part of the "combination of the production symbols 70a of the initial number 123" on the back is not visible, or the "initial number 123 A part of the "combination of performance symbols 70a" may be displayed in a superimposed manner so that it is visible (seeing through the back side).

(i) is the timing when 60 seconds have passed from (c). At this timing, as described above, the audio notification "Ball removal mode is over" (once) during the ball removal mode is output. Further, the display of "in ball extraction mode" ends. (j) is the same as (j) for the glass frame opening error.

The notification modes (f) to (i) are as shown in (f) to (i) during the ball extraction operation in FIG. The image display device 70 displays the game ball count clear notification, the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image), and the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" so as to be superimposed on the display. , "Ball extraction mode in progress" is displayed. In this way, even after the audio notification of the number of balls cleared in the game is finished, if the notification period is still in progress when the ball extraction operation is in progress, by immediately starting the audio notification of the ball removal mode, it is possible to It is possible to make it known that there is a certain thing, and it is possible to efficiently advance the ball extraction mode.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and the ball is being removed at the same time, both events can be appropriately notified through audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification, so employees can work more efficiently. It also leads to improving.

In addition, in (f), although the audio notification of the ball removal mode is started, the audio notification of the ball removal mode does not need to be started. Further, although the screen notification of the ball removal mode was decided to start from (c), it may start from (f). Further, in (f), the illumination notification of the clear number of game balls may be ended, and the illumination notification of the ball removal mode may be started.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the relationship between the glass frame (inner frame) opening error and the ball extraction operation in progress. As a situation, it is assumed that the power supply sw 164 is turned on with the bulb removal operation in a state where the glass frame 4 or the inner frame 3 are opened. Note that although an example in which the glass frame 4 is opened and closed will be described below, the glass frame 4 may be replaced with the inner frame 3.

(a) in FIG. 125 shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, a ball removal operation is involved. (b) is the timing at which the ball extraction operation process of the frame control board timer interrupt process is executed. In the audio notification, a voice saying "We are in ball extraction mode" is output once for 3 seconds, and in the screen notification, a display such as "In ball extraction mode" is started. The display such as "in ball extraction mode" continues until (f). Note that the illumination notification during the bulb removal operation is not specified (see FIG. 114), so it is not executed.

In addition, the game ball number display 135 (seg corresponding to the last digit) starts displaying "-" (bar pattern), and the frame control display 125 (seg corresponding to the last digit) starts displaying "-" ” (bar symbol) starts to be displayed, and the display of “-” (bar symbol) notifies that the ball extraction operation is in progress.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board timer interrupt processing (first after power-on) is executed, and (d) is the timing when the glass frame is This is the timing when the opening designation command is set and the production control board 130 receives the glass frame opening designation command.

When the production control board 130 receives the glass frame opening designation command, it repeatedly outputs the sound "The door is open" in the audio notification, and displays "H64 Glass frame opening error" on the third image display device 72 in the screen notification. ” icon image is displayed, and the frame lighting device 10 is made to flash in red with an illumination notification.

Note that the notification priority is higher for a glass frame opening error than for a ball extraction operation (see Figure 114), so in principle, the voice output from (b) saying "Ball extraction mode in progress" would be higher. The output will be interrupted and the voice output saying "The door is open" will start, but since the voice output from (b) that says "Ball extraction mode" is output once for 3 seconds, If the output is interrupted during the output, it will be difficult to understand what the audio notification is. Therefore, in this example, as an exception, even if a notification event with a higher priority than the currently executing notification event occurs while the audio notification is being executed, the currently executing audio notification ``This is ball removal mode'' will be interrupted. I was able to output (finish) the output without doing so. Thereby, it is possible to provide notification that is easy for the employee who is performing the ball removal operation to understand.

On the other hand, in accordance with the principle of priority order, there is no problem in interrupting the output of the voice saying ``Ball removal mode'' and starting outputting the voice saying ``The door is open.''

Further, in (d), the display on the frame control display 125 switches from displaying "-" (bar symbol) to displaying "H64" (segments corresponding to the last three digits to the last one digit). As a result, it is possible to notify the employee who is performing the ball removal work while looking at the back side of the gaming machine that a glass frame opening error has occurred.

On the other hand, the game ball count display 135 maintains the display of "-" (bar pattern) instead of switching to the display of "H64" (segments corresponding to the last three digits to the last one digit). There is. The game ball count display 135 is provided at a position that is visible from the surface side of the game machine, and on the surface side of the game machine, the first image display device 70 also displays a message such as "Ball extraction mode in progress". Therefore, the employee can be informed that the glass frame opening error has occurred without switching the display on the game ball count display 135 to "H64". This can be expected to have the advantage of reducing the processing load of display control on the frame control board 120 (eliminating the effort of switching to H64).

In addition, in (d), the display on the game ball number display 135 may be switched to "H64". Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent employees from being confused due to different information being displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball number display 135.

(e) is the timing when the glass frame 4 changes from the open state to the closed state. For example, assume that the glass frame 4 is closed by an employee. When the glass frame 4 is closed, the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification of the glass frame opening error end. It should be noted that at the timing (e), the ball extraction operation is still in progress.

In (e), the game ball number display 135 is displaying "-" (bar symbol), and the frame control display 125 is switched from displaying "H64" to displaying "-" (bar symbol). Thereby, after the notification of the glass frame opening error ends, the notification that the ball is being removed is made without delay, so that the notification can be easily understood by the employees.

(f) is the timing 60 seconds have passed since (b). The ball extraction operation ends at this timing. In the audio notification, the voice saying ``Ball removal mode is over'' is output once for 5 seconds, and in the screen notification, the display ``Ball removal mode in progress'' is ended.

In addition, in (f), the game ball number display 135 stops displaying "-" (bar pattern) and turns off completely, and the frame control display 125 stops displaying "-" (bar pattern) and turns off all lights. becomes. As a result, when you are performing ball removal work while keeping an eye on the back of the gaming machine, you can visually check that the frame control display 125 has completely turned off (along with the audio notification output in (f)). This makes it easier to recognize the end of the pulling operation.

Then, when the voice output saying "Ball extraction mode is over" ends, the ball extraction operation is ended in (g).
Note that although the bulb removal operation is not illuminated, it may be performed in a predetermined light-emitting manner. Furthermore, although the display of "Ball extraction mode in progress" is continued between (d) and (e), the display may be hidden between (d) and (e).

In addition, the "-" (bar symbol ) is always displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display "-" (bar symbol) for several seconds from the start of the ball extraction mode and not display it thereafter.

FIGS. 126 to 128 are diagrams showing the relationship between the clearing of the number of game balls and the notification mode of each event (abnormality, etc.). Note that the acquisition upper limit device (operation) will be described as an example of each event (abnormality). FIG. 126 assumes that the power is turned on after the acquisition upper limit device is activated. In other words, it is assumed that the RWM clearing operation is required to stop the operation of the acquisition upper limit device, but the power is turned on along with the game ball number clearing operation. FIG. 127 assumes a case in which an RWM abnormality (for example, a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned on after the acquisition upper limit device is activated, and a case in which it is not detected.

(a) in FIG. 126 shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, an operation to clear the number of game balls is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the production control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it outputs "The number of game balls has been cleared" by an audio notification, displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" by a screen notification, and displays "Number of game balls cleared" by an electric notification. The lighting device 10 is made to blink red.

(c) shows the start of activation of the main control board 110, and is the timing when the production control board 130 receives the acquisition upper limit operation command transmitted in the main control board main process. Although the production control board 130 has received the acquisition upper limit activation command, it is notifying the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and clearing the number of game balls has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 113, so the acquisition upper limit device is not activated. Audio notifications and electrical notifications related to this will not start. On the other hand, regarding the screen notification, the first image display device 70 starts displaying a message such as "Acquisition upper limit device has activated. Please clear RWM."

The notification modes of (b) to (c) are as shown in FIG. A notification is being given, and the first image display device 70 is giving notification that the number of game balls has been cleared. Note that the background color of the first image display device 70 at this time is preferably a color (different color) that does not overlap with the display color used for the icon image for clearing the number of game balls. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the icon image of the game ball count clear notification from becoming difficult to see.

(d) is the timing when 5 seconds have passed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the voice notification of the clear number of game balls ends, a new voice notification of the acquisition limit device ``Acquisition limit device in operation'' is started, and this is repeatedly output.

The notification modes of (c) to (d) are as shown in FIG. Notifications are being made, and the first image display device 70 is giving notifications that the number of game balls has been cleared and notifications that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated. Specifically, the message "Acquisition limit device has activated. Please clear RWM" is displayed in the center of the display area, and the icon image "H67 Game Ball Count Clear" is displayed in the upper left of the display area. has been done. Note that the background color of the first image display device 70 at this time does not overlap with the display color used for the icon image for clearing the number of game balls and the display color (text color) used for the acquisition upper limit device activation notification. It is preferable to use colors (different colors). This can prevent the icon image of the game ball count clear notification and the acquisition upper limit device activation notification from becoming difficult to see.

(e) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (c). At this timing, the audio notification of the acquisition upper limit device ends. On the other hand, the screen notification will continue to be notified. Note that although the voice notification of the acquisition upper limit device is terminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it may be terminated when the power supply is cut off.

The notification modes (d) to (e) are as shown in the game ball number clear & acquisition upper limit device (d) to (e) in FIG. The audio output device 9 is notifying that the acquisition upper limit device is in operation, and the first image display device 70 is notifying that the number of game balls has been cleared and notifying that the acquisition upper limit device is operating. The display mode is the same as the display modes (c) to (d) described above.

In this way, although the notification priority is higher for clearing the number of game balls, the display of "Acquisition limit device has activated. Please clear RWM" is displayed by changing the font size of the icon image for clearing the number of game balls. Because it is larger and displayed in the center of the display area, it is easier for employees to see. As a result, even in a situation where priority is given to notification of clearing the number of game balls and the audio notification and illumination notification of the acquisition limit device cannot be performed, it is possible to sufficiently recognize that the acquisition limit device is in operation. It is possible to make it easier for the user to understand the operation required to stop the operation of the acquisition upper limit device. In addition, even if the game ball count clear and acquisition limit device activation notification are executed at the same time, both notifications can be identified, so it will not be possible to recognize that either event has occurred. can be prevented.

(h) is the timing when the counting button 20 is operated by the player and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the firing handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is launched. It is. When any one of the operations is performed, the screen notification and the illumination notification that the number of game balls has been cleared end 30 seconds after the operation. As a result, the notification can be ended without delay after the player takes his/her seat, so the screen notification and illumination notification of the number of balls cleared will continue to be displayed, which will prevent the player from playing the game due to a sense of discomfort. You can prevent this from happening.

(a) in FIG. 127 shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. If there is no RWM abnormality, notification of the operation of the acquisition upper limit device is started in (b). Specifically, the voice notification repeatedly outputs ``Acquisition limit device is activated'', the screen notification displays ``Acquisition limit device has activated, please clear RWM'', and the electric notification displays ``Frame lighting device 10''. "is blinking red" is executed. As for the notification mode, while the acquisition upper limit device is in operation, as shown in "No RWM abnormality" in FIG. become. In this way, if an RWM abnormality (for example, a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is not detected when the power is turned on after the acquisition upper limit device is activated, a notification that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated will be executed, and the acquisition upper limit device will be activated. This makes it easier to understand the operations required to stop the operation.

On the other hand, if an RWM abnormality (for example, a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned on after the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the notification of the acquisition upper limit device activation is not started in (b), and the RWM abnormality is detected. Notification begins. Specifically, the voice notification repeatedly outputs "Please change settings + siren," the screen notification displays "Error, please change settings," and the electric notification displays "Frame lighting device 10 flashes red." ” is executed. Note that (c) is the timing when the power supply is cut off, and the notification of the RWM abnormality will continue until the power supply is cut off. In other words, the notification of the operation of the acquisition upper limit device will not be executed as long as the RWM abnormality notification is executed.

For example, even if you turn off the power in (c) and then turn it on without changing settings, the RWM error notification will start from (b), and the power will be turned off in (c). If you turn it off and then turn on the power with a setting change operation, the RMW clear process will also be executed after the setting change process (the main RAM 110c will be initialized), so the acquisition limit will be reduced by initializing the main RAM 110c. Since the operation of the device will also be stopped, the operation notification of the acquisition upper limit device will not be executed in this case as well. In other words, if an RWM error occurs after the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the acquisition upper limit device The operation notification will not be executed. As a result, while encouraging the main RAM 110c to be in an appropriate state, if the power is turned on with a setting change operation, initialization to stop the acquisition limit device is not required, so it is also possible to acquire Work efficiency can be improved by not notifying the operation of the upper limit device.

As for the notification mode, while the acquisition upper limit device is operating, as shown in ``RWM abnormality detected'' in FIG. . On the first image display device 70, "Error" is displayed in red letters on a black background, and below that, "Please change settings" is displayed in white letters. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to promptly perform a setting change operation, and it is possible to prevent a game from being played in a state where there is an abnormality in the RWM.

In addition, if there is an RWM abnormality, if priority is given to the acquisition upper limit device activation notification, the necessary operation to prompt the employee will become the RWM clear operation, and there is a concern that the RWM abnormality will not be resolved. By prioritizing notification, such concerns can be resolved.

FIGS. 129 and 130 are diagrams showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and each event (abnormality, etc.) in the notification mode. Note that an abnormal error in the number of winning balls and an abnormal error in the number of fired balls will be described as examples of each event (abnormality). In addition, FIG. 129 shows a case where an abnormality in the number of winning balls is detected when the power is turned on after the operation to clear the number of game balls is performed, and an abnormality in the number of fired balls when the power is turned on after the operation to clear the number of game balls. It is assumed that the time chart is detected as follows: ``Number of game balls cleared'' and ``Number of winning balls abnormal error'', ``Number of game balls cleared'' and ``Number of fired balls abnormal error''.

In addition, an abnormality in the number of winning balls is determined to be abnormal when the difference between the number of notified winnings and the number of passing through the winning path is a specified number (100) or more, as indicated by the frame control board severe error notification control processing, and the number of winning balls is determined to be abnormal. As indicated by the frame control board severe error notification control processing, the number of abnormalities is determined to be abnormal when the difference between the number of fired balls and the total number of returned balls is a specified number (100) or more, so power is not supplied. It is difficult to imagine that this will occur in such a short period of time. Therefore, FIGS. 129 and 130 assume a situation in which the power supply is cut off in a state where an abnormality in the number of winning balls or an abnormality in the number of fired balls has occurred, and the power is turned on without these abnormalities being resolved.

First, we will explain "game ball count clear" and "winning ball count abnormal error".
(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, an operation to clear the number of game balls is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the production control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. When the production control board 130 receives the command, it outputs "The number of game balls has been cleared" by an audio notification, displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" by a screen notification, and displays "Number of game balls cleared" by an electric notification. The lighting device 10 is made to blink red.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board error control process is executed, an abnormality in the number of winning balls is detected, and the production control board 130 receives the abnormality designation command for the number of winning balls. Although the performance control board 130 has received the winning ball number abnormality designation command, it has executed the game ball number clear notification, and since clearing the number of game balls has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 113, the number of winning balls is Audio notifications and electrical notifications related to abnormal errors are not started. On the other hand, regarding the screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying "H68 Winning Ball Number Abnormality".

(d) is the timing when 5 seconds have passed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the voice notification of the clear number of game balls ends, a new voice notification of an error in the number of winning balls, ``Please call the staff + siren,'' is started, and this is repeatedly output.

Regarding the notification modes (c) to (d), as shown in abnormal numbers of winning balls errors (c) to (d) in FIG. The first image display device 70 notifies the number of game balls cleared and displays the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image). Further, on the third image display device 72, an icon image of "H68 Winning Ball Count Abnormality" is displayed.

(e) is the timing when the counting button 20 is operated by the player and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the firing handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is launched. It is. When any one of the operations is performed, the screen notification and the illumination notification that the number of game balls has been cleared end 30 seconds after the operation. As a result, the notification can be ended without delay after the player takes his/her seat, so the screen notification and illumination notification of the number of balls cleared will continue to be displayed, which will prevent the player from playing the game due to a sense of discomfort. You can prevent this from happening.

The notification modes (d) to (e) are as shown in (d) to (e) of abnormal number of winning balls in FIG. The first image display device 70 notifies the number of game balls cleared and displays the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image). Further, on the third image display device 72, an icon image of "H68 Winning Ball Count Abnormality" is displayed (see FIG. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for clearing the number of game balls described above.

In this way, if an abnormality in the number of winning balls is detected when the game ball number clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, the third image display device 72 notifies the user that the number of winning balls has been cleared, which has a high priority. By displaying the icon image of "H68 Winning Ball Count Abnormality", even if you execute the game ball count clear and the winning ball count abnormality error at the same time, you can identify both notifications. It is possible to prevent situations such as not being able to recognize that an event has occurred.

As described above, even if both the clear number of game balls and the abnormal number of winning balls error occur, both events can be suitably notified by audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification, so that employees can work more easily. This also leads to improved efficiency.

In addition, in (d), the audio notification of the abnormal number of winning balls is newly started, but the audio notification of the abnormal number of winning balls does not need to be started. Further, although the screen notification of the abnormal number of winning pitches error was decided to start from (c), it may start from (d). Further, in (d), the illumination notification of the clear number of game balls may be ended, and the illumination notification of the abnormal number of winning balls may be started.

Next, "game ball count clear" and "launched ball count abnormal error" will be explained.
(a) shows the timing when the power supply sw164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is cleared, an operation to clear the number of game balls is performed. (b) is the same as (b) for the abnormal number of winning pitches error.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board error control process is executed, an abnormality in the number of fired balls is detected, and the production control board 130 receives the abnormality designation command for the number of fired balls. Although the performance control board 130 has received the abnormality designation command for the number of fired balls, it has executed the notification of clearing the number of game balls, and since clearing the number of game balls has a higher priority as shown in FIG. 113, the number of fired balls is Audio notifications and electrical notifications related to abnormal errors are not started. On the other hand, regarding the screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying "H69 Abnormal number of fired balls".

(d) is the timing when 5 seconds have passed from (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. On the other hand, screen notifications and illumination notifications will continue to be provided. Furthermore, when the voice notification for clearing the number of game balls has been completed, a new voice notification for an error in the number of fired balls, ``Please call an attendant + siren,'' is started, and this is repeatedly output.

Regarding the notification modes (c) to (d), as shown in abnormal error errors (c) to (d) of the number of fired balls in FIG. The first image display device 70 notifies the number of game balls cleared and displays the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image). Further, on the third image display device 72, an icon image of "H69 Abnormal number of fired balls" is displayed.

(e) is the same as (e) for the abnormal number of winning pitches error.
The notification modes (d) to (e) are as shown in (d) to (e) of abnormal number of fired balls in FIG. The first image display device 70 notifies the number of game balls cleared and displays the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image). Further, on the third image display device 72, an icon image of "H69 Abnormal number of fired balls" is displayed (see FIG. 115 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of the icon image is the same as the icon image for clearing the number of game balls described above.

In this way, if an abnormality in the number of fired balls is detected when the game ball number clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, the third image display device 72 notifies the user of the game ball number clearing, which has a high priority. By displaying the icon image of "H69 abnormal number of fired balls", even if clearing the number of game balls and abnormal number of fired balls error are executed at the same time, both notifications can be identified. It is possible to prevent situations such as not being able to recognize that an event has occurred.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and the number of fired balls error error occur, both events can be suitably notified by audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification, so employees can This also leads to improved efficiency.

In addition, in (d), the audio notification of the abnormal number of fired balls error is newly started, but the audio notification of the abnormal number of fired balls error does not need to be started. Further, although the screen notification of the abnormal number of balls fired error was decided to start from (c), it may start from (d). Further, in (d), the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls may be ended, and the illumination notification for an error in the number of fired balls may be started.

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing information output and notification modes of various events. In addition, as an example of each event (abnormality), the number of game balls exceeding the number of game balls and the operation of the acquisition upper limit device will be cited and explained.

(a) is the timing when the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 exceeds "40,000" as a result of the player playing the game (during a jackpot). Note that as a result of playing the game, the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 exceeds 40,000 pieces, but since this is the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135, , the "40,000 pieces" may also include the gaming value obtained by lending game balls.

In (a), 1-byte information indicating that the number of game balls has exceeded is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 as a gaming machine error state, and is finally transmitted to the gaming machine information center. Furthermore, an error code "H23" indicating that the number of game balls has exceeded is displayed on the frame control display 125. This makes it possible to confirm from the back side of the gaming machine that the number of game balls has exceeded. Note that the display of the error code shall be turned off after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In (a), as an example, the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 exceeds "40,000 pieces" during a jackpot, so the audio output device 9 outputs BGM during a jackpot. , the first image display device 70 displays a jackpot effect, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit light during a win. Even if the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 exceeds "40,000" during a jackpot, these performance means will not notify that the number of game balls has exceeded. In other words, from the player's perspective, the player cannot recognize that the number of balls to be played has exceeded, and the player can feel good about winning the jackpot. On the other hand, as described above, since 1-byte information indicating that the number of game balls has exceeded is transmitted as a gaming machine error state, the administrator side (gaming parlor, gaming machine information center) can grasp the necessary information.

Note that at least one of the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the third image display device 72, the fourth image display device 73, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 76 is used to prevent the number of game balls from exceeding. may be notified. In addition, as an example, the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 during a jackpot exceeds "40,000 pieces", but this is not limited to a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, a low probability In each game state of the time-saving game state and the high-accuracy time-saving game state, a prize may be won while a variable display is being performed, or a prize may be won while a customer waiting demonstration performance is being performed.

In addition, it was stated that the "40,000 balls" may include the gaming value obtained by lending game balls, but in the extreme, the "40,000 balls" should not all be the gaming value obtained by lending them. Also, the number of game balls may be exceeded.

(b) is the timing when the maximum increase number reaches "95,000" (during a jackpot). It should be noted that the "95,000" does not include the gaming value obtained by renting game balls. When the maximum increase reaches 95,000, the acquisition cap device will be activated. In addition, the operation timing of the acquisition limit device for each situation (during a jackpot, during a variable display, during a customer waiting demonstration performance) at the timing when "95,000" is met is as described above (main processing step of the main control board). (See explanation of S28).

When the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice message “Acquisition upper limit device has activated” (for 10 seconds), and the screen notification is displayed on the first image display device 72 saying “Acquisition upper limit device has activated.” "The device has been activated. Today's game is over" is displayed (displayed until the power is turned off), and in the illumination notification, the frame lighting device 10 flashes white (flashes white until the power is turned off). On the other hand, the frame control display 125 does not provide notification corresponding to the operation of the acquisition upper limit device and remains hidden.

To explain the display mode of the first image display device 70 in detail, the message "Acquisition limit device has been activated. Today's game is over" is displayed above the display area, and the message "Count Please press the button to count.'' is displayed. As a result, the gaming value displayed on the game ball count display 135 can be recorded on the inserted member card or visitor card. It is possible to reduce the situation where this occurs.

Further, below the message "Please press the counting button to count", a warning image such as "Be careful not to get addicted!" and a caution promoting image such as "Be careful not to take out the card!" are displayed. ``Be careful not to get addicted!'' is a display that urges you to prevent excessive gaming, and ``Be careful not to remove your card!'' is a display that urges you to prevent forgetting to remove the inserted member card or visitor card. By displaying a caution-promoting image such as "Be careful not to get addicted!", it is possible to calm down the player when he/she has acquired a lot of game value and is feeling excited. Further, by displaying an image promoting caution such as "Be careful not to take out a card!", it is possible to reduce the situation in which a player forgets to take out a card and incurs a loss.

Note that the display such as "Please press the counting button to count" may remain displayed until the counting button 20 is operated. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier to notice that the counting button 20 is not being operated.

Further, the background color of the first image display device 70 may be, for example, black, and various character images may be displayed in white characters, or white may be used as the background color, and various character images may be displayed in black characters ( (The background color and text color should be different colors.) However, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the audio notification will end in 10 seconds, the screen notification will be displayed in a relatively small size, and the illumination notification will have an effect such that only the frame lighting device 10 flashes white. Since the notification is suppressed, it is preferable to use a combination of white and black for the background color and text color. By suppressing the amount of performance in this manner, it is possible to prevent players who are likely to have acquired a large amount of gaming value from becoming too conspicuous. Further, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being stimulated more than necessary.

Furthermore, the order in which the various character images are displayed may be such that they are all displayed at the same timing, or may be displayed at different timings. For example, first, the message ``Acquisition limit device has been activated. Today's game is over'' and ``Please press the counting button to count'' are displayed, followed by ``Be careful not to get addicted!'' and ``Card removal.'' It is also possible to display the message "Be careful not to forget!". By arranging the display order in this way, each piece of information can be easily seen by the player, making it more effective.

In addition, first, the message ``The acquisition limit device has been activated. Today's game is over'' and ``Please press the counting button to count'' are displayed, and if the counting button 20 is operated, the message ``The counting button ``Please press to count'' may be hidden, and ``Be careful not to get addicted!'' and ``Be careful not to forget to take out your card!'' may be displayed. This makes it possible to perform a display that matches the player's operations, making it more effective because each piece of information can be easily seen by the player.

In addition, in (a), a message such as "Please press the counting button to count" may be displayed, or an image that promotes caution such as "Be careful not to get addicted!" and an image that promotes caution such as "Be careful not to forget to take out the card!" may be displayed.
In addition, in (b), the display such as "Please press the counting button to count", the warning image such as "Be careful not to get addicted!", and the caution promoting image such as "Be careful not to take out the card!" are not displayed. Good too. For example, it is also assumed that the players are replaced just before reaching (b). In such a case, the display of the attention-promoting image or the like will feel bothersome to the player who started the game just before (b). Therefore, a detection means for detecting a change in players may be provided, and when a change in players is detected, an attention-promoting image or the like may not be displayed.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing information output and notification modes of various events. As an example of each event (abnormality), similar to FIG. 131, an excess of the number of game balls and activation of the acquisition upper limit device will be described. FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example in which, exceptionally, the number of game balls exceeds and the acquisition upper limit device operates at the same timing.

In (a), the gaming machine 1 is in a playable state (a so-called "empty machine"), and the maximum increase in the number of gaming machines 1 is "55,000." Then, in (b), it is assumed that the player takes a seat to play the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, suppose that the player wins an immediate jackpot.

After that, in (c), jackpots occur continuously due to the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (probability change), and in (d), the gaming value displayed on the game ball number display 135 becomes "40,000 pieces." Assume that (the player has acquired 40,000 shots). In such a case, the number of game balls is exceeded, and the maximum increase number also satisfies "95,000", so the acquisition upper limit device is activated. Therefore, the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 transmits 1-byte information indicating that the number of game balls has exceeded as a gaming machine error state to the U board 171, and indicates that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1". 1 byte of information is transmitted. Then, it is finally transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

Note that either the 1-byte information indicating that the number of game balls has exceeded as a gaming machine error state or the 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1" may be sent first, but this It is a rare case that the number of playing balls exceeds and the maximum acquisition limit device activates at the same time.Basically, the maximum number of game balls exceeds the number of balls played, and depending on the subsequent situation, the maximum acquisition device activates. Basically, according to the flow, 1 byte information indicating that the number of game balls has exceeded is sent as a gaming machine error state first, and then it is confirmed that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1". It is preferable to send one byte of information later. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent confusion caused by first receiving 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1" at the gaming machine information center.

Although Figure 132 uses numbers such as "55,000," "40,000," and "95,000" for ease of explanation, in actual games, due to differences in the number of prize balls for each winning slot, etc. It is also possible that the number of game balls exceeds the number slightly and the acquisition upper limit device operates at the same timing. Therefore, some errors (errors slightly exceeding the above numbers) are included in the example of FIG. 132.

FIGS. 133 and 134 are diagrams showing effects when various events occur. Note that, as in FIGS. 131 and 132, as examples of each event (abnormality), the number of game balls exceeding the number of game balls and the operation of the acquisition upper limit device will be cited and explained, and in particular, the relationship with the look-ahead type effect will be explained. Note that description of parts common to FIGS. 131 and 132 will be omitted.

First, as mentioned above, the game machine 1 is assumed to be in a situation immediately before the "number of game balls exceeds" and a situation immediately before the "acquisition upper limit device" is activated, and the "number of game balls exceeds". The situation immediately before is a situation in which the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 exceeds "39,000," and the situation immediately before the "acquisition upper limit device" is activated is a state in which the maximum increase number exceeds "94,000." This corresponds to a state in which it exceeds the limit.

More specifically, if the number of game balls is over, the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 is "39000" and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) is executed, that is, the number of game balls is over. 2 If the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 satisfies "40,000" due to the execution of a jackpot game, or when the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 is "39990" and each It is assumed that a high-probability time-saving gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state, low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is also possible) in which game balls are likely to enter the prize opening is started (during a variable display, during a customer waiting demonstration performance), etc. Ru.

Similarly, if it is an "acquisition upper limit device", if the value of the maximum increase is "94000" and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) is executed, that is, the maximum increase is due to the execution of the second jackpot game. When the value of the number satisfies "95,000" or the value of the maximum increase number is "94990", the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy non- It is assumed that a time-saving gaming state) is started (during a variable display, during a demonstration performance while waiting for a customer), etc. In addition, below, explanation will be given using an example of a jackpot in which it is expected that the value of the maximum number of increases satisfies the above value.

In (a), a jackpot is won in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and during the jackpot, a right-hitting image is displayed that urges the player to shoot toward the right side gaming area. This is the timing when the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 becomes "40,000" due to winning in the big prize opening 50 etc. during the jackpot. In other words, when the second jackpot game is executed, the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 becomes "40,000 balls." Although not particularly illustrated, it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special symbol determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c. Note that the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state may be replaced with the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. Further, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state may be replaced with the low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. In this case (when rereading as a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the first special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c.

In the case of ``the number of game balls exceeded'', it is possible to perform a held consecutive game effect during a jackpot. That is, since the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c, a lottery for execution of the retention consecutive winning performance is performed with a predetermined probability, and it is determined to be executed. In this case, a holding consecutive play performance is executed. Specifically, as shown in (b), by operating the movable presentation device 77 (the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b) in front of the first image display device 70, the game is executed after the jackpot game ends. It is notified that the variable display corresponding to the above-mentioned pending memory is a jackpot before the variable display is executed. Then, in (c), the jackpot game is ended, and the player is notified of the jackpot by executing a variable display corresponding to the above-mentioned suspended memory.

As a result, there is no need to limit the execution of look-ahead effects even if the situation is just before the ``number of game balls exceeds'', and it is possible to maintain the enjoyment of the game without reducing the degree of freedom of the effects. .

Although the explanation has been given using as an example the execution of the held consecutive game effect during a jackpot game, the execution of a look-ahead type effect when the game is not a jackpot game may also be allowed. For example, when the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 is "39990", an icon change effect may be executed, or a continuous preview effect or a lamp change effect may be executed. On the other hand, the execution of the look-ahead effect may be limited in a situation immediately before the ``number of game balls exceeds''.

(d) is the timing when a jackpot is won in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the value of the maximum increase number is "94000", and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) starts to be executed. In other words, the situation is such that the value of the maximum increase number satisfies "95,000" by executing the second jackpot game. Although not particularly illustrated, it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special symbol determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c. Note that the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state may be replaced with the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. Further, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state may be replaced with the low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. In this case (when rereading as a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the first special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c.

In the case of the "acquisition upper limit device activated", execution of the held consecutive winnings effect during a jackpot is restricted. That is, although the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c, the execution lottery for the reserved consecutive game performance is not performed, and naturally, the reserved consecutive game performance is not executed. is also not executed. Specifically, as shown between (d) and (e), the jackpot game ends without the movable presentation device 77 (first movable member 77a and second movable member 77b) operating. Then, when the jackpot game is finished, the acquisition upper limit device is activated in (f), and the notification described in FIG. 131 is executed. Further, the game progress control (specific control processing) is not performed, resulting in a situation where the game cannot be continued any longer.

(f) In a situation where it is impossible to play the game after that, if the held consecutive game performance is executed just because the random number for jackpot determination is stored in the held memory, you may not win the jackpot. This results in players feeling disappointed because they are unable to play the game even though they are playing the game. To deal with this problem, if the situation is just before the operation of the "acquisition upper limit device", execution of the held consecutive winnings effect is restricted, thereby preventing the player from feeling disappointed.

Although the explanation has been given by taking as an example the execution of the held consecutive game effect during a jackpot game, the execution of the look-ahead type effect when it is not a jackpot game may also be limited. For example, when the value of the maximum increase number is "94990", the icon change effect may be limited, or the continuous preview effect and the lamp change effect may be limited. On the other hand, execution of the look-ahead effect may be allowed even in a situation immediately before the "acquisition upper limit device is activated". This eliminates the need to determine whether the situation is just before the "acquisition upper limit device is activated", so a reduction in control load can be expected.

The above-mentioned "restrictions" in the case where the execution of the held consecutive game performance during a jackpot is restricted include the following.
For example, the execution of the pending consecutive game effect during a jackpot may not be executed completely (not executed),
For example, it becomes difficult to execute a held consecutive winning performance during a jackpot (it may be executed with a low probability),
For example, if there are multiple types of held consecutive game effects during a jackpot, held consecutive game effect A will not be executed, but pending consecutive game effect B can be executed;
For example, when realizing a holding consecutive winning performance during a jackpot by operating the movable presentation device 77 and changing the pending icon, the movable presentation device 77 may not be activated, but the pending icon may be changed. .

Similarly, the "restrictions" in the restriction on the execution of look-ahead effects when it is not a jackpot game include the following.
For example, if it is an icon change effect,
For example, the icon change effect should not be performed completely (not executed),
For example, it becomes difficult for the icon change effect to be executed (it may be executed with a low probability),
For example, in the icon change effect, certain icons (red icon, rainbow icon) may not be displayed (changed), but predetermined icons (blue icon, green icon) may be displayed (changed).
Further, the same applies to restrictions on continuous preview effects and lamp change effects. In addition, in look-ahead performances (for example, icon change performances, continuous preview performances, lamp change performances), for example, icon change performances are not completely performed (not executed), but continuous preview performances and lamp change performances can be executed. It may also be called a "restriction".

FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating a presentation mode when the number of game balls is exceeded during a jackpot, and a presentation mode when the “acquisition upper limit device is activated” during a jackpot.

In (a), a jackpot is won in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and during the jackpot, a right-hitting image is displayed that urges the player to shoot toward the right side gaming area. This is the timing when the game value displayed on the game ball number display 135 becomes "40,000" due to winning in the big prize opening 50 etc. during the jackpot. During the jackpot, a character introduction performance (normal performance) that is displayed during the SP reach or SPSP reach is executed, and the jackpot game ends at (b). In addition, the normal effect can be executed even in cases other than jackpot games where the number of game balls exceeds or the maximum acquisition limit device is activated. be.

(c) is the timing when a jackpot is won in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the value of the maximum increase number is "94000", and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) starts to be executed. In other words, the situation is such that the value of the maximum increase number satisfies "95,000" due to the execution of the second jackpot game. In (d), it is assumed that the value of the maximum increase number satisfies "95,000".

In (d), a portion of the display area of the first image display device 70 is used to display a message such as "You have hit the jackpot. Please continue playing. After the win, the acquisition limit device will operate and the game will end." A notification message is now displayed. This advance notification message is displayed in a manner that darkens (makes it difficult to see) the jackpot performance image displayed on the back side, and is displayed using almost the entire display area. This makes it easy for the player to recognize in advance that the acquisition upper limit device will operate, and prevents the player from being disappointed by the unexpected operation of the acquisition upper limit device. In addition, by including the message ``You are hitting the jackpot. Please continue playing.'' in the advance notice message, you will not be able to stop launching the game ball just because the advance notice message is displayed. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage from being impossible to obtain. In addition, the advance notification message is displayed so that it does not overlap with the right-handed image that encourages players to shoot towards the right side gaming area, so that the player is aware in advance that the acquisition limit device will be activated. This also prevents players from becoming confused about the game method.

The advance notification message may be deleted after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, or may continue to be displayed until the end of the jackpot, or may continue to be displayed until the player operates the production button 17. . Alternatively, the entire display area of the first image display device 70 may be used for display.

In this case, when the jackpot game ends in (e), a completion performance is executed. That is, only when the acquisition upper limit device is activated, a completion effect is executed which serves both to notify that the game cannot be played any more and to congratulate the player who is highly likely to have acquired a large amount of game value. It is assumed that the completion performance will, for example, display a special video that is different from the above-mentioned normal performance, or display an image that gives a special title (for example, "Master"), and may also be displayed in conjunction with the completion performance. It is assumed that a text image such as "The game will end soon" is displayed below the area.

By executing the completion performance in this way, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to the player who has activated the acquisition upper limit device. In addition, by displaying a character image such as "The game will end soon", it is possible to prepare the player, compared to the case where (g) is suddenly announced after the jackpot ends, and after that, (g) ) can smoothly lead to the end of the game.

Then, in (g), the acquisition upper limit device is activated and the notification described in FIG. 131 is executed. Further, the game progress control (specific control processing) is not performed, resulting in a situation where the game cannot be continued any longer. It is assumed that the execution period of the completion effect performed from (e) to (f) is, for example, 3 minutes. Further, when the completion effect is completed in (f), the acquisition upper limit device is immediately activated to promptly end the game.

Although the completion effect is executed with an execution period set after the end of the jackpot game, it may be executed from the timing when the value of the maximum increase number satisfies "95,000". In addition, if the above-mentioned type 1 type and type 2 type is used, and the maximum increase value satisfies "95,000" due to winning in a specific area in the small winning game (first round), it will be executed after that. The completion effect may be executed from the start of the jackpot game (from round 2). However, regardless of the specifications, it is preferable to set an execution period after the end of the jackpot game and execute it, considering that the execution period of the performance will not be determined depending on the winning situation in the big winning opening 50 while the jackpot game is being executed. .

Furthermore, in (a), a normal performance is performed, but a special jackpot performance corresponding to "the number of game balls exceeded" may be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the gaming value "40,000 pieces" does not include the gaming value obtained by lending game balls. In other words, since the purpose is to congratulate the player for having worked hard to obtain the gaming value, it is preferable to exclude the gaming value obtained by lending even if a special jackpot effect is executed.

Further, a plurality of types of completion effects may be provided, and any one of the completion effects may be selected and executed. Further, in a gaming machine having multiple levels of setting values, the setting value may be suggested depending on the type of completion performance to be executed. Since it is not possible to continue playing after the execution of the completion effect, the suggestion of the setting value does not suggest useful information, but it is possible to grasp at what setting value the acquisition limit device was activated. , it can be said that there is significance in implementing it.

Furthermore, as in the above-mentioned attention promoting image, if a change in player is detected immediately before the acquisition upper limit device is activated, the completion effect may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player who has just started playing the game from feeling uncomfortable (such as feeling that the performance is based on what he has completed).

(Contents 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine in which a player plays a game using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a control device that controls storage and updating of gaming values owned by players (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2021-083516). However, the gaming machines described in the above-mentioned patent documents have a problem in that it is inconvenient for gaming store staff to perform tasks such as checking and inspecting the control device that controls the storage and updating of gaming values owned by players. there were.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming value owned by the player is stored. A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and a power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the control device by operating a power switch, and the control device is owned by the player. A specific display (frame control display 125) capable of displaying the amount of the gaming value to be played, and an operation unit (game ball number clear switch 121, game ball number clear switch 121) for clearing the gaming value owned by the player. switch 121+play ball count clear button 121b), and the distance from the power switch to the specific display and the distance from the power switch to the operation section are made different. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming values owned by the players, the gaming values owned by the players are stored, and the gaming values owned by the players are stored. A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and a power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the control device by operating a power switch, and the control device is owned by the player. a specific display device (frame control display device 125) capable of displaying the amount of the game value to be played; and an operation section capable of performing a discharge operation to discharge the game media used in the game out of the game machine. (bulb removal switch 122, ball removal switch 122+bulb removal button 122b), and the distance from the power switch to the specific display is different from the distance from the power switch to the operation section. . Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming machine can play the game using the gaming value owned by the player. A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, a power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the control device by operating a power switch, and a specific notification indicating that a predetermined notification event has occurred. a specific notification unit (speaker, display device, lighting device) capable of performing (error notification, etc.); (frame control display 125), and an operation unit (error release switch 123, error release switch 123+error release button 123b) for canceling the specific notification by the specific notification unit, The distance to the specific display and the distance from the power switch to the operation section are made different. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming machine can play the game using the gaming value owned by the player. The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board that houses the control board. a board case (frame control board case 300), and the plurality of electronic components include an electronic component (for example, an integrated circuit) having a first identification mark (model number, manufacturer name, etc.), and a second identification mark. (model number, lot number, etc.) and a specific display (frame control display 125) capable of displaying the amount of the gaming value owned by the player, The height from the surface of the control board to the second identification display is higher than the height to the identification display. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming value owned by the player is stored and the gaming value is The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board that houses the control board. a board case (frame control board case 300), and the plurality of electronic components include a first electronic component (for example, an integrated circuit) having a first identification display (model number, manufacturer name, etc.); A second electronic component (for example, an electrolytic capacitor) having an identification mark (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) and a third identification mark (model number, lot number, etc.), and a value amount of the gaming value owned by the player. a specific display (frame control display 125) that can be displayed, and the height from the surface of the control board to the third identification display is greater than the height from the surface of the control board to the second identification display. is lower. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming value The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board that houses the control board. a board case (frame control board case 300), the plurality of electronic components have a first identification display (model number, manufacturer name, etc.), and control the updating of the gaming value owned by the player. It has an executable control part (frame control unit 120m), a second identification display (model number, lot number, etc.), and a specific display device (frame control display) that can display the amount of the gaming value owned by the player. 125), and the height from the surface of the control board to the first identification display is different from the height from the surface of the control board to the second identification display. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the game The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a specific display device (frame control display device 125) that can display the amount of the game value owned by the player, and The control device has an operation unit (game ball number clear switch 121, game ball number clear switch 121 + game ball number clear button 121b) for clearing the gaming value owned by the person, and the control device has the specific display. While no guidance information regarding the device is provided, guidance information regarding the operation section (engraved portion 310a of "game ball count clear button" on button cover member 310) is provided at a position corresponding to the operation section. There is. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that can play games using gaming value owned by a player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming value owned by the player is stored. The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a specific display device (frame control display device 125) that can display the amount of the game value owned by the player, and an operation section (ball removal switch 122, ball removal switch 122+ball removal button 122b) capable of performing a discharge operation for discharging game media used in the game machine out of the game machine, and the control device is not provided with guidance information related to the specific display device, while guidance information related to the operation section is provided at the position corresponding to the operation section (letters of "ball removal button + arrow" on the operation guide sticker 309). is provided. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming value A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and a specific notification unit (display device, lighting device) that can make a specific notification (error notification, etc.) indicating that a predetermined notification event has occurred. , the control device includes a specific display (frame control display 125) capable of displaying the amount of the gaming value owned by the player, and an operation for canceling the specific notification by the specific notification unit. (error release switch 123, error release switch 123+error release button 123b), and the control device is not provided with guidance information related to the specific display, but at a position corresponding to the operation part. is provided with guidance information related to the operation unit (the characters "error release button + arrow" on the operation guidance sticker 309). Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player, which stores the gaming value owned by the player, and stores the gaming value owned by the player. The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board that houses the control board. a board case (frame control board case 300), and the plurality of electronic components include a specific display (frame control display 125) capable of displaying the amount of the gaming value owned by the player; a connector to which a predetermined wiring is connected, the specific indicator is mounted near one end of the control board, and the connector is mounted near an end of the control board different from the one end. ing. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming values owned by the players, the gaming values owned by the players are stored, and the gaming values owned by the players are stored. A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control is provided, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a board case that houses the control board. (Frame control board case 300), and the plurality of electronic components include an operation unit (gaming ball count clear switch 121) for clearing the gaming value owned by the player, and predetermined wiring. a connector to be connected, the operating section is mounted near one end of the control board, and the connector is mounted near an end of the control board different from the one end. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming value owned by the player is stored. A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control is provided, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a board case that houses the control board. (frame control board case 300), and the plurality of electronic components have an operation section (ball) that can perform an ejection operation for ejecting game media used in the game out of the game machine. an unplug switch 122) and a connector to which predetermined wiring is connected, the operating section is mounted near one end of the control board, and the operating section is mounted near an end different from the one end of the control board. The connector is mounted. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the game value is stored. A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and a specific notification unit (display device, lighting device) that can make a specific notification (error notification, etc.) indicating that a predetermined notification event has occurred. The control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a board case (frame control board case 300) that accommodates the control board, The plurality of electronic components include an operation unit (error release switch 123) for canceling the specific notification by the specific notification unit, and a connector to which predetermined wiring is connected, and one end of the control board. The operating section is mounted near the control board, and the connector is mounted near an end of the control board different from the one end. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the game value is stored. A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control is provided, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a board case that houses the control board. (frame control board case 300), and an identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to the board case, and the identification sticker includes first information (two-dimensional code), second information (manufacturer's an identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b) containing third information (management number), and an information entry area in which predetermined information can be written (opener entry field 308c, It has a date entry column 308d). Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆ A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming values owned by the players, the gaming values owned by the players are stored, and the gaming values owned by the players are stored. The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board that houses the control board. It has a board case (frame control board case 300) and an identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate part 302) of the board case that faces the surface of the control board. The identification seal has a first entry area (opener entry field 308c) in which first information (opener) can be written, and second information (opener date) different from the first information can be written. a second entry area (opening date entry field 308d), and between the first entry area and the second entry area, the electronic component mounted on the control board can be visually recognized. A transparent region (third transparent window portion 308g3) is provided. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming machine The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board that houses the control board. It has a board case (frame control board case 300) and an identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate part 302) of the board case that faces the surface of the control board. The identification sticker has an identification information display area (frame management information printing section 308b) that includes first information (two-dimensional code), second information (identification symbol indicating the manufacturer's name), and third information (management number). ) and an information entry area (opener entry field 308c, opening date entry field 308d) in which predetermined information can be entered, and between the identification information display area and the information entry area, A see-through area (a first light-transmitting window portion 308g1, a second light-transmitting window portion 308g2) is provided that allows the electronic components mounted on the control board to be viewed. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the game A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control is provided, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a board case that houses the control board. (frame control board case 300), and an identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate part 302) of the board case facing the surface of the control board, The plurality of electronic components include an operation section (gaming ball count clear switch 121) for clearing the gaming value owned by the player, and the operation section is arranged in front and behind the identification seal of the control board. It is mounted in a position that does not overlap. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming value The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a board case that houses the control board. (Frame control board case 300), the plurality of electronic components include an operation unit (gaming ball number clear switch 121) for clearing the gaming value owned by the player, and the board case is provided with an identification information display area including first information (two-dimensional code), second information (identification symbol indicating the manufacturer's name), and third information (management number), A guide information section related to the operation section (engraved section 310a of "game ball count clear button" on the button cover member 310) is provided at a position that does not overlap the information display area front and rear and corresponds to the operation section. There is. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming value A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and a specific notification unit (display device, lighting device) that can make a specific notification (error notification, etc.) indicating that a predetermined notification event has occurred. The control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, a board case (frame control board case 300) that houses the control board, and an identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to the opposing wall (top plate portion 302) facing the surface of the control board; It includes an operation section (error release switch 123) for canceling the specific notification, and the operation section is mounted on the control board at a position that does not overlap the identification seal in the front and back. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A 20th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming values owned by the players, which stores the gaming values owned by the players, and stores the gaming values owned by the players. A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and a specific notification unit (display device, lighting device) that can make a specific notification (error notification, etc.) indicating that a predetermined notification event has occurred. The control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a board case (frame control board case 300) that accommodates the control board, The plurality of electronic components include an operation unit (error release switch 123) for canceling the specific notification by the specific notification unit, and the board case includes first information (two-dimensional code) and second information. (an identification symbol indicating a manufacturer's name) and an identification information display area including third information (management number), and is located at a position of the control device that does not overlap with the identification information display area in the front and back, and is located on the operation unit. A guidance information section (second guidance printing section 309b2 on which "error release button + arrow mark" is printed) related to the operation section is provided at a position corresponding to the operation section. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can play games using gaming value owned by a player, which stores the gaming value owned by the player, and stores the gaming value owned by the player. A control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control is provided, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a board case that houses the control board. (frame control board case 300), and an identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate part 302) of the board case facing the surface of the control board, The plurality of electronic components include an operation section (ball removal switch 122) that can perform a discharge operation for discharging game media used in the game out of the game machine, and the operation section It is mounted on the control board at a position that does not overlap with the identification sticker. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming values owned by the players, the gaming values owned by the players are stored, and the gaming values owned by the players are stored. The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board that houses the control board. a board case (frame control board case 300), and the plurality of electronic components include an operation unit that allows the plurality of electronic components to perform an ejection operation for ejecting game media used in the game out of the game machine. (bulb removal switch 122), and the board case displays identification information including first information (two-dimensional code), second information (identification symbol indicating the manufacturer's name), and third information (control number). A guide information section ("ball removal button + arrow mark") related to the operation section is provided in a position of the control device that does not overlap front and rear with the identification information display area and corresponds to the operation section. A first guide printing section 309b1) on which is printed is provided. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, and the gaming value owned by the player is stored. The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board that houses the control board. a board case (frame control board case 300), and the plurality of electronic components include first electronic components (integrated circuits, capacitors, etc.) on which first identification information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) is displayed; , a second electronic component (frame control display 125) on which second identification information (model number, lot number, number of game balls, etc.) is displayed, and a display mode (font, color, size, etc.) of the first identification information. ) and the display manner (font, color, size) of the second identification information are made different. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can play games using gaming value owned by a player, which stores the gaming value owned by the player, and stores the gaming value owned by the player, and The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board that houses the control board. a board case (frame control board case 300); a first electronic component (for example, an integrated circuit) on which first identification information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) is displayed on the plurality of electronic components; A second electronic component (for example, a capacitor) on which second identification information (model number, lot number, etc.) is displayed, and a third electronic component (for example, a capacitor) on which third identification information (model number, lot number, number of game balls, etc.) is displayed. frame control display 125), and the display mode (font, color, size) of the first identification information is different from the display mode (font, color, size) of the third identification information. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player, which stores the gaming value owned by the player, and stores the gaming value owned by the player. The control device includes a control device (frame control device 120A) that performs value update control, and the control device includes a control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and a transparent board that houses the control board. a board case (frame control board case 300); a first electronic component (for example, an integrated circuit) on which first identification information (model number, manufacturer name, etc.) is displayed on the plurality of electronic components; A second electronic component (for example, a capacitor) on which second identification information (model number, lot number, etc.) is displayed, and a third electronic component (for example, a capacitor) on which third identification information (model number, lot number, number of game balls, etc.) is displayed. frame control display 125), and the display mode (font, color, size) of the second identification information is different from the display mode (font, color, size) of the third identification information. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control device (main control device) that controls the progress of the game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. 110A), and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control device has a plurality of A first control board (main control board 110) on which electronic components are mounted, a first board case (main control board case 200) housing the first control board, and the first of the first board cases. The second control device has a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to the opposite wall (top plate portion 202) facing the surface of the control board, and the second control device has a plurality of electronic components on the surface. A second control board to be mounted (frame control board 120), a second board case (frame control board case 300) housing the second control board, and a second control board of the second board case. a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to a facing wall (top plate portion 302) facing the surface, and a height from the surface of the first control board to the first identification sticker; , the height from the surface of the second control board to the second identification seal is made different. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control device (main control device) that controls the progress of the game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. 110A), and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control device has a plurality of A first control board (main control board 110) on which electronic components are mounted, a first board case (main control board case 200) housing the first control board, and the first of the first board cases. a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) facing the surface of the control board, and the plurality of electronic components mounted on the first control board. includes a first control component (main control unit 110m) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and the second control device includes a second control board (frame control board 120m) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted. ), a second board case (frame control board case 300) that accommodates the second control board, and an opposing wall (top plate part 302) that faces the surface of the second control board of the second board case. a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to the second control board; It includes an executable second control part (frame control part 120m), and has a height from the upper end of the first control part to the first identification seal, and a height from the upper end of the second control part to the second identification seal. The height is different. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control device (main controller 110A), and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control device has a plurality of A first control board (main control board 110) on which electronic components are mounted, a first board case (main control board case 200) housing the first control board, and the first of the first board cases. a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) facing the surface of the control board, and the plurality of electronic components mounted on the first control board. includes a first connector (main inspection connector 116) for connecting predetermined wiring, and the second control device includes a second control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted. ), a second board case (frame control board case 300) that accommodates the second control board, and an opposing wall (top plate part 302) that faces the surface of the second control board of the second board case. A second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) is affixed to the plurality of electronic components mounted on the second control board, and a second connector (for connecting predetermined wiring) The height from the upper end of the first connector to the first identification seal is different from the height from the upper end of the second connector to the second identification seal. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control device (main control device) that controls the progress of the game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. 110A), and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control device has a plurality of A first control board (main control board 110) on which electronic components are mounted, a first board case (main control board case 200) housing the first control board, and the first of the first board cases. a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) facing the surface of the control board, and the plurality of electronic components mounted on the first control board. includes a first operation section (RWM clear switch 111a) for clearing predetermined information (information related to game progress, etc.) stored in the first control device, and the second control device includes a a second control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted; a second board case (frame control board case 300) housing the second control board; a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 302) facing the surface of the second control board, and the plurality of devices mounted on the second control board The electronic component includes a second operating section (gaming ball number clear switch 121) for clearing the gaming value stored in the second control device, and the electronic component includes a second operating section (gaming ball number clear switch 121) for clearing the gaming value stored in the second control device; The height to the identification seal and the height from the upper end of the second operating section to the second identification seal are made different. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A 30th configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using gaming value, a first control device (main controller 110A), a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and performs update control of the gaming value; A power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the control device, and the first control device clears predetermined information (information related to the progress of the game, etc.) stored in the first control device. The second control device has a first operation unit (RWM clear switch 111a, RWM clear switch 111a+RWM clear button 111b) for clearing the gaming value stored in the second control device. It has an operation section (game ball number clear switch 121, game ball number clear switch 121 + game ball number clear button 121b), and has a distance from the power switch to the first operation section and a distance from the power switch to the second operation section. The distances are different. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A thirty-first configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control device (main control device) that controls the progress of the game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. 110A), and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control device has a plurality of A first control board (main control board 110) on which electronic components are mounted, a first board case (main control board case 200) housing the first control board, and the first of the first board cases. a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 202) facing the surface of the control board, and the plurality of electronic components mounted on the first control board. includes a first operation section (RWM clear switch 111a) for clearing predetermined information (information related to game progress, etc.) stored in the first control device, and the second control device includes a a second control board (frame control board 120) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted; a second board case (frame control board case 300) housing the second control board; a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to an opposing wall (top plate portion 302) facing the surface of the second control board, and the plurality of devices mounted on the second control board The electronic component includes a second operation section (ball removal switch 122) that can perform a discharge operation for discharging the game media used in the game out of the game machine, and the electronic component includes The height from the upper end to the first identification seal is different from the height from the upper end of the second operation part to the second identification seal. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A thirty-second configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control device (main control device) that controls the progress of the game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. 110A), a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and performs update control of the gaming value; A power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the control device, and the first control device clears predetermined information (information related to the progress of the game, etc.) stored in the first control device. The second control device has a first operation unit (RWM clear switch 111a, RWM clear switch 111a+RWM clear button 111b) for ejecting gaming media used for gaming out of the gaming machine. It has a second operation part (ball removal switch 122, ball removal switch 122 + ball removal button 122b) that can perform the operation, and has a distance from the power switch to the first operation part, and a distance from the power switch to the second operation part. The distance to the operating section is different. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆ As a thirty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value, a first control device (main controller 110A), a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and a specific notification (error) indicating that a predetermined notification event has occurred. The first control device includes a first control board (main control board 110) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted. ), a first board case (main control board case 200) that accommodates the first control board, and an opposing wall (top plate part 202) that faces the surface of the first control board of the first board case. a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to the plurality of electronic components mounted on the first control board, and predetermined information stored in the first control device. The second control device includes a first operation unit (RWM clear switch 111a) for clearing information (information related to the progress of the game, etc.), and the second control device includes a second control board (frame control board 120), a second board case (frame control board case 300) that accommodates the second control board, and an opposing wall (top plate) that faces the surface of the second control board of the second board case. 302), and the plurality of electronic components mounted on the second control board are configured to receive the specific notification from the specific notification unit. It includes a second operation part (error release switch 123) for canceling the error, and the height from the upper end of the first operation part to the first identification seal, and the height from the upper end of the second operation part to the second identification seal. The heights are different. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

◆A thirty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control device (main control device) that controls the progress of the game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. 110A), a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and performs update control of the gaming value; A power supply device (power supply device 160A) that supplies power to the control device, and a specific notification unit (display device, lighting device) that can make specific notifications (error notifications, etc.) indicating that a predetermined notification event has occurred. , the first control device includes a first operation unit (RWM clear switch 111a, RWM clear switch 111a+RWM clear button 111b), and the second control device has a second operation unit (error release switch 123, error release switch 123+error release button 123b) for canceling the specific notification by the specific notification unit. However, a distance from the power switch to the first operating section and a distance from the power switch to the second operating section are made different. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game store clerk.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine in which a player plays a game using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a first control device that controlled the progress of the game, and a second control device that controlled the storage and updating of gaming values owned by the player (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2021-083516). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem of low security.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value, a first control device (main controller 110A), and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control device has a plurality of A first control board (main control board 110) on which electronic components are mounted, a transparent first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and the first board case of the first board case. The second control device has a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to a facing wall (top plate portion 202) facing the surface of the first control board, and the second control device has a plurality of electronic A second control board (frame control board 120) on which components are mounted, a transparent second board case (frame control board case 300) that accommodates the second control board, and the second board case of the second board case. a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to the opposing wall (top plate portion 302) facing the surface of the second control board, and the first identification sticker is attached to the first control board. The second identification seal has a transparent area that allows electronic components to be mounted on the second control board to be seen through, and the second identification seal has a transparent area that allows electronic components to be mounted on the second control board to be seen through. While no predetermined pattern is added to the transparent area of the identification seal, a predetermined pattern is added to the transparent area of the first identification seal. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security of the gaming machine.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value, a first control device (main controller 110A), and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control device has a plurality of A first control board (main control board 110) on which electronic components are mounted, a transparent first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and the first board case of the first board case. The second control device has a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to a facing wall (top plate portion 202) facing the surface of the first control board, and the second control device has a plurality of electronic A second control board (frame control board 120) on which components are mounted, a transparent second board case (frame control board case 300) that accommodates the second control board, and the second board case of the second board case. a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to the opposing wall (top plate portion 302) facing the surface of the second control board, and the first identification sticker is attached to the first control board. The second identification seal has a transparent area that allows electronic components to be mounted on the second control board to be seen through, and the second identification seal has a transparent area that allows electronic components to be mounted on the second control board to be seen through; The transparency of the transparent area of the identification seal is made different from the transparency of the transparent area of the second identification seal. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security of the gaming machine.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value, a first control device (main controller 110A), and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control device has a plurality of A first control board (main control board 110) on which electronic components are mounted, a transparent first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and the first board case of the first board case. The second control device has a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to a facing wall (top plate portion 202) facing the surface of the first control board, and the second control device has a plurality of electronic A second control board (frame control board 120) on which components are mounted, a transparent second board case (frame control board case 300) that accommodates the second control board, and the second board case of the second board case. a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to the opposing wall (top plate portion 302) facing the surface of the second control board, and the area of the first identification sticker and the second identification The area of the seal is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security of the gaming machine.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value, a first control device (main controller 110A), and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control device has a plurality of A first control board (main control board 110) on which electronic components are mounted, a first board case (main control board case 200) housing the first control board, and the first of the first board cases. It has a first identification sticker (main management number sticker 208) affixed to the opposite wall (top plate part 202) facing the surface of the control board, and the first identification sticker contains predetermined information (name of the person who opened the seal). A first information entry area (opener entry field 208c, opening date entry field 208d) is provided for writing information (opener entry field 208c, opening date entry field 208d), and the second control device has a plurality of electronic components mounted on the surface thereof. a second control board (frame control board 120) that accommodates the second control board, a second board case (frame control board case 300) that accommodates the second control board, and a surface of the second control board of the second board case. It has a second identification sticker (frame management number sticker 308) affixed to the opposing wall (top plate part 302), and the second identification sticker includes predetermined information (opener, opening date, etc.). ) is provided (opener entry field 308c, opening date entry field 308d) for entering the number of the first information entry areas provided on the first identification seal and the second information entry field. The number of the second information entry areas provided on the identification sticker is made different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security of the gaming machine.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value, a first control device (main controller 110A), and a second control device (frame control device 120A) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control device has a plurality of It has a first control board (main control board 110) on which electronic components are mounted, and a first board case (main control board case 200) that houses the first control board, and the first board case includes: , a first crimping part (main crimping part 204A) is provided for sealing the first board case housing the first control board, and the second control device has a plurality of electronic components mounted on its surface. It has a second control board (frame control board 120) and a second board case (frame control board case 300) that accommodates the second control board, and the second board case includes the second control board A second crimped part (frame crimped part 304A) is provided for sealing the second board case containing the board case, and the number of the first crimped parts provided in the first board case and the second board case are The number of the second caulking portions provided is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security of the gaming machine.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine in which a player plays a game using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a notification means for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-16405). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for improvement in properly reporting the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(A) A first configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using gaming value owned by the player. control board 110), second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and notification means (audio output device 9, image display device 70). - 73, a frame lighting device 10, a board lighting device 76), and the first control means controls to clear predetermined information stored in a predetermined area (for example, the main RAM 110c, the frame control RAM 120c). (RWM clearing process), the second control means is capable of controlling to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notifying means is capable of controlling the predetermined information. It is possible to perform a first notification (RWM clear notification) in response to the clearing of the game value, and a second notification (play ball count clear notification) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, and the first notification and the first notification can be performed. The feature is that the priority of the notification is different between the two notifications. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(B) As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player, when the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped, A first control means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; and a second control means that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value. (frame control board 120), and notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the second control device controls the game value. It is possible to carry out control to clear the number of game balls (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means provides a first notification (power restoration notification) in response to the restoration, and a second notification (power restoration notification) in response to the clearing of the gaming value. The first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(C) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a first control means (main control means) that controls the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. control board 110), second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and notification means (sound output device 9, image display device 70). - 73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the first control means is capable of controlling settings (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing), The second control means can perform control to clear the gaming value (clear the number of game balls), and the notification means can perform first notification (setting change notification, setting confirmation notification) according to the control related to the setting. ), and a second notification (play ball count clear notification) according to the clearing of the gaming value, and it is possible to perform a second notification (game ball number clear notification) according to the clearing of the gaming value, and it is possible to make a notification that the priority of notification is different between the first notification and the second notification. Features. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(D) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and a detection means (first magnetic detection sensor) that detects magnetism. 53a, second magnetic detection sensor 53b), and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame illumination device 10, board illumination device 76), and the second control means includes: It is possible to perform control for clearing the gaming value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means is configured to issue a first notification (magnet detection error notification) in response to the detection by the detection unit, and clearing the gaming value. It is possible to perform a second notification (game pitch count clear notification) according to the above, and the priority of notification is different between the first notification and the second notification. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(E) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and a detection means that detects radio waves (radio wave detection sensor 54a). and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame illumination device 10, board illumination device 76), and the second control means controls to clear the gaming value (game The notification means can issue a first notification (unauthorized radio wave detection error notification) in response to the detection by the detection device, and a second notification (game The first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(F) A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and a detection unit that detects gaming media corresponding to the gaming value. Means (general winning opening sw43a, first starting opening sw45a, second starting opening sw47a, big winning opening sw50a, out opening sw39a) and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10 , a board illumination device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means is capable of controlling the detection of the detection means. It is possible to perform a first notification (an abnormal error notification of the number of winning balls) in response to the clearing of the game value, and a second notification (notification of the number of game balls cleared) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, and the first notification and the A feature is that the priority of the notification is different from the second notification. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(G) A seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and a gaming area in the gaming medium corresponding to the gaming value. A detection means (subtraction port sw91c) for detecting the game medium ejected into the interior, and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame illumination device 10, board illumination device 76). The second control means can perform control to clear the gaming value (clear the number of balls played), and the notification means can perform a first notification (clear the number of balls fired) in response to the detection by the detection means. Abnormal error notification) and a second notification (game ball count clear notification) according to the clearing of the gaming value, and the priority of notification is determined between the first notification and the second notification. characterized by different things. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(H) As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using gaming value, the first control means (main controller) controls the progress of the game. control board 110), a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and a door body (inner frame 3, glass frame) that can be opened and closed. 4), detection means for detecting the state of the door (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b), and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, board illumination device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means is capable of controlling the number of game balls to be cleared by the detection means. It is possible to perform a first notification (glass frame opening error notification, inner frame opening error notification) according to the detection, and a second notification (game ball number clear notification) according to the clearing of the gaming value, The first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(I) A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), a second control unit (frame control board 120) capable of communicating with the first control unit, storing the gaming value owned by the player, and controlling update of the gaming value; Detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for detecting that the first control means and the second control means are unable to communicate; and notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73). , a frame illumination device 10, and a board illumination device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means is , it is possible to perform a first notification (notification of an abnormal communication error within the gaming machine) in response to the detection by the detection means, and a second notification (notification of clearing the number of game balls) in response to the clearing of the gaming value; The first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(J) A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is that in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored; A control means (frame control board 120) that performs update control of the gaming value; a detection means (frame control board 120) that detects that communication between the gaming machine and the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170) is impossible; Notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the control means controls to clear the gaming value (clear the number of game balls) The notification means can issue a first notification (communication line abnormality error notification) in response to the detection by the detection device, and a second notification (game ball count clear notification) in response to the clearing of the gaming value. ), and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(K) As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine in which a player can play a game using gaming value, a first control means (main controller) for controlling the progress of a game is provided. control board 110), second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and notification means (audio output device 9, image display device 70). - 73, a frame lighting device 10, a board lighting device 76), and the second control means includes a discharge control (frame control board It is possible to perform a control for clearing the game value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (notification during ball removal operation) according to the discharge control. ) and a second notification (play ball count clear notification) according to the clearing of the gaming value, and it is possible to perform a second notification (game ball number clear notification) according to the clearing of the gaming value, and that the priority of notification is different between the first notification and the second notification. Features. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(L) A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. control board 110), a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and specific information (for example, , maximum increase number); and notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76); The second control means can perform control to clear the gaming value (clear the number of game balls), and the notification means can perform a first notification (acquisition upper limit device activation notification) in response to the detection by the detection device. ), and a second notification (play ball count clear notification) according to the clearing of the gaming value, and it is possible to perform a second notification (game ball number clear notification) according to the clearing of the gaming value, and it is possible to make a notification that the priority of notification is different between the first notification and the second notification. Features. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(M) A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using gaming value owned by the player. control board 110), a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and a door body (inner frame 3, glass frame) that can be opened and closed. 4), detection means for detecting the state of the door (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b), and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, board illumination device 76), and the second control means performs discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging the game media corresponding to the game value out of the game machine. The notification means can issue a first notification (glass frame opening error notification, inner frame opening error notification) in response to the detection by the detection device, and a second notification (bulb removal operation) in response to the discharge control. middle), and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(S) A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using gaming value owned by the player. control board 110), second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and notification means (audio output device 9, image display device 70). -73, a frame illumination device 10, a board illumination device 76), and predetermined information stored in the first control means based on the fact that a specific operation (RWM clear operation) is performed. , and predetermined information stored in the second control means, and the notification means clears the predetermined information stored in the first control means when the specific operation is performed. It is possible to make a notification according to the specific operation without making a notification in a manner that differentiates between the clearing of the predetermined information stored in the second control means and the clearing of the predetermined information stored in the second control means. characterized by something. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(a) A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming values owned by the players, storing the gaming values owned by the players; A control means (frame control board 120) that controls the update of the game value, a door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4) that can be opened and closed, and a detection means (glass frame open detection switch) that detects the state of the door body. 31a, inner frame opening detection switch 31b), and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, a frame lighting device 10, a board lighting device 76), and the control means performs discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging game media corresponding to the gaming value to the outside of the gaming machine. The notifying means may detect when the detecting means performs the detection when the emission control is being performed and when the detecting means performs the detection when the emission control is not performed. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform notification in accordance with the detection by the detection means both when the detection is performed and when the detection is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(b) A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), a second control unit (frame control board 120) capable of communicating with the first control unit, storing the gaming value owned by the player, and controlling update of the gaming value; Detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) detects that the first control means and the second control means are unable to communicate; (error notification) (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76); It is possible to carry out such control (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing), and the notification means is configured to detect when the detection means performs detection when the control related to the settings is being performed. The present invention is characterized in that the notification according to the detection is not performed, and the notification according to the detection can be performed after the control related to the setting is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(h) A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine in which a player can play a game using gaming value owned by the player. control board 110), second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and notification means (sound output device 9, image display device 70). - 73, a frame lighting device 10, a board lighting device 76), and the notification means includes a first notification (for example, a setting change notification, setting confirmation notification), and second notification according to a second event that can control the progress of the game (for example, game ball count clear notification, RWM clear notification). The first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(i) An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine in which a player can play a game using gaming value owned by the player. control board 110), second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and notification means (sound output device 9, image display device 70). - 73, a frame lighting device 10, a board lighting device 76), and the notification means includes a first notification (for example, a setting change notification, setting confirmation notification) and a second notification in response to a second event that makes it impossible to control the progress of the game (for example, acquisition upper limit device activation notification, ball extraction operation notification). is possible, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(j) A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. control board 110), second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and notification means (audio output device 9, image display device 70). - 73, a frame illumination device 10, a board illumination device 76), and the notification means includes a first notification (for example, a game ball It is possible to perform a second notification (for example, RWM clear notification, power recovery notification) according to a second event that can control the progress of the game, and the first The system is characterized in that the priority of notification is different between the notification and the second notification. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(k) A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. control board 110), second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and notification means (audio output device 9, image display device 70). - 73, a frame illumination device 10, a board illumination device 76), and the notification means includes a first notification corresponding to a first event (for example, abnormal number of winning balls error notification, abnormal number of fired balls error notification ), and a second notification according to a second event different from the first event (for example, game ball count clear notification, setting change notification, setting confirmation notification), and the first notification is , when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first event is occurring, the first notification may not be restarted, and the second notification is when the second event occurs. The second notification can be restarted when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the system is in the state where the power supply is running. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(l) A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine in which a player can play a game using gaming value owned by the player. control board 110), second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and notification means (audio output device 9, image display device 70). - 73, a frame lighting device 10, a board lighting device 76), and the notification means is configured to provide a first notification in response to a first event (for example, a notification that the number of game balls has been cleared), and a first notification in response to the first event. It is possible to perform a second notification (for example, setting change notification, setting confirmation notification) in response to a different second event, and the first notification is made when power is supplied while the first event is occurring. When the power supply is restored after being cut off, the first notification can be restarted, and the second notification can be made when the power supply is cut off while the second event is occurring. When the system is restored, the second notification can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(m) A twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine in which a player can play a game using gaming value owned by the player. control board 110), second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and notification means (sound output device 9, image display device 70). -73, a frame lighting device 10, a board lighting device 76), and the notification means includes a first notification (for example, an abnormal error notification of the number of winning balls) according to a first event, and a first notification corresponding to the first event. It is possible to perform a second notification in response to a second event different from the first event (for example, abnormal ball count error notification, RWM abnormal error notification), and the first notification is made when the first event occurs. If the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off in a state where the power supply is interrupted, it is possible to not restart the first notification, and the second notification is issued when the power supply is cut off while the second event is occurring. The second notification may not be restarted if the power supply is restored after that. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(n) A twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine in which a player can play a game using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and a display means (frame control display 125). In addition, the display means displays first information corresponding to the first event (for example, an error code "H66" indicating an unauthorized radio wave detection error, an error code "H68" indicating an abnormal number of winning balls, an abnormal number of fired balls error). error code "H69"), and second information corresponding to a second event different from the first event (for example, error code "H68" indicating the number of game balls cleared, error code "H64" indicating the glass frame opening error) , an error code "H65" indicating an inner frame opening error), and the display of the first information is performed when the power supply is interrupted after the power supply is cut off while the first information is being displayed. When the power supply is restored, it is possible not to restart the display of the first information, and the second information is displayed after the power supply is cut off while the second information is being displayed, and when the power supply is restored, The present invention is characterized in that display of the second information can be resumed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(o) A twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and a display means (frame control display 125). The display means displays first information corresponding to the first event (for example, an error code "H68" indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared) and second information corresponding to a second event different from the first event (for example, , an error code "H64" indicating a glass frame opening error, and an error code "H65" indicating an inner frame opening error), and the display of the first information is displaying the first information. When the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off in the state, the display of the first information can be resumed, and the display of the second information can be performed when the power supply is turned off while the second information is being displayed. The present invention is characterized in that the display of the second information can be resumed when the power supply is restored after the power supply has been cut off. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(p) A twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine in which a player can play a game using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and a display means (frame control display 125). The display means displays first information corresponding to the first event (for example, error code "H66" indicating an unauthorized radio wave detection error) and second information corresponding to a second event different from the first event (for example, , an error code "H68" indicating an error in the number of winning pitches, and an error code "H69" indicating an error in the number of fired balls. If the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the display is in a state where the display is in a state where the display of the first information is not restarted, the display of the second information is in a state where the second information is displayed. The present invention is characterized in that when the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off, the display of the second information may not be resumed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 4)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine in which a player plays a game using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines perform a game ball count clearing process to clear the gaming value when power is supplied to the gaming machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2021-104306). By the way, if the game ball number clearing process is performed when power is supplied, there is a possibility that the control process of the control means becomes complicated.

(N) A first configuration for solving the above problem is to provide a movable performance means (movable performance device 77) that can operate in a predetermined manner, and to play a game using the gaming value owned by the player. In a gaming machine capable of this, when the power supply is restored after the power supply has been stopped, a first control means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and a first control means (main control board 110) owned by the player. a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value and controls updating of the gaming value; a third control means (performance control board 130) that controls the initial operation of the movable presentation means; means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame illumination device 10, board illumination device 76), and the second control means has control for clearing the gaming value (clearing the number of game balls). ), and the notification means may provide different notifications (audio It is possible to perform different notifications (notifications, screen notifications, and illumination notifications), and the third control means controls the It is characterized in that the movable presentation means can be initially operated in the same manner. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control processing of the control means in the gaming machine where the game ball count clearing processing is performed.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine in which a player plays a game using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a ball removal switch for discharging the gaming balls circulating inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-39943). However, there is room for improvement in properly notifying that game balls are being ejected.

(O) As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, The control means includes a control means (frame control board 120) that performs update control of the game value, and a specific display (playing ball number display 135) capable of displaying the amount of the game value, and the control means controls the amount of the game value. It is possible to perform discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging game media corresponding to the game value out of the game machine, and when the discharge control is being performed, the specific display The feature is that it is possible to display specific information (error code "-"). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably notify that the game balls are being ejected.

(P) As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, A control means (frame control board 120) that performs update control of the gaming value, a first display unit (frame control display 125) capable of displaying the amount of the gaming value, and a first display unit (frame control display 125) capable of displaying the amount of the gaming value. a second display section (gaming ball number display 135), and the control means controls ejection control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for ejecting the game media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine. ), and when the emission control is being performed, specific information (error code "-") can be displayed on the first display and the second display. It is characterized by Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably notify that the game ball is being ejected.

(Q) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a first control means for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that can execute a game using gaming value owned by a player. (main control board 110), second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and executes update control of the gaming value, and notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, a frame lighting device 10, and a board lighting device 76), and the first control means controls predetermined information stored in a predetermined area (for example, main RAM 110c, frame control RAM 120c). It is possible to execute clearing control (RWM clearing process), and the second control means executes ejection control (frame control board ball removal operation) for ejecting the game media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine. process), and the notification means is configured to issue a first notification (RWM clear notification) in response to clearing of the predetermined information, and a second notification (in-progress notification) in response to the discharge control. ), and the execution of the first notification can be restricted while the second notification is being executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably notify that the game ball is being ejected.

(R) As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player, when the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped, , a first control means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a second control means (main control board 110) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and executes update control of the gaming value. The second control means includes a control means (frame control board 120) and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame illumination device 10, board illumination device 76), and the second control means It is possible to execute ejection control (frame control board ball removal operation process) for ejecting game media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine, and the notification means is configured to perform a first notification ( It is possible to execute a power supply recovery notification) and a second notification (notification during bulb extraction operation) according to the emission control, and it is possible to restrict execution of the first notification while the second notification is being executed. It is characterized by Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably notify that the game balls are being ejected.

(Contents 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine in which a player plays a game using gaming value owned by the player. Among such gaming machines, there are those that transmit information from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, see FIGS. 4 to 9 of Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2021-104306). However, the amount of information transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine is large, resulting in a control load on the control means.

(T) A first configuration for solving the above problem includes a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of the game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control means It is possible to perform predetermined processing (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, RWM clear processing) based on the fact that the operation (setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, RWM clear operation) is performed, and the second The control means performs ejection control (frame control board ball ejecting operation processing) for ejecting game media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second operation (ball ejecting operation) is being performed. When the discharge control is performed, the information is not sent to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and when the predetermined process is performed, the information (HC/fraud) is not sent to the outside of the gaming machine. It is characterized by being able to transmit (information related to Bit0 to Bit2 of fraud detection state 1 in monitoring information). Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(U) As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, A control means (frame control board 120) that performs update control of the game value, and the control means performs ejection control (frame control board ball extraction operation processing) for ejecting game media corresponding to the game value out of the gaming machine. ), and control for clearing the gaming value (clearing the number of game balls), and when the emission control is performed, the information is not transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and the When the gaming value is cleared, information can be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(q) As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, It is equipped with a control means (frame control board 120) that performs update control of the game value, and when the first event occurs, the control means displays information corresponding to the first event (for example, "setting change", "setting confirmation"). ", "Power on (RWM clear)", "Acquisition upper limit device activated", information whose corresponding bit of "Fraud detection status 1 (main control)" of "HC/Fraud monitoring information" is "1") is played. It is possible to send information outside the machine (dedicated unit 170), and when a second event different from the first event occurs, information corresponding to the second event (for example, "Ball removal in progress", "Ball removal operation in progress", For "lever operation error", "communication line abnormality error", and "communication no response error", the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" of "HC/fraud monitoring information" does not become "1" and the information is (not transmitted) to the outside of the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(r) As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, It is equipped with a control means (frame control board 120) that performs update control of the game value, and when the first event occurs, the control means displays information corresponding to the first event (for example, "Ball extraction operation in progress", " In the case of "Ball removal lever operation error", the corresponding bit of "Fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" of "HC/Fraud monitoring information" is not "1" and no information is sent) is sent to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170). If a second event different from the first event occurs, information corresponding to the second event (for example, "communication line abnormal error", "communication no response error", "HC - The corresponding bit of "Fraud detection state 2 (frame control)" of "Fraud monitoring information" does not become "1" and the information is not transmitted) can be not transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(s) As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, It is equipped with a control means (frame control board 120) that performs update control of the game value, and when the first event occurs, the control means displays information corresponding to the first event (for example, "setting change", "setting confirmation"). ”, it is possible to send information in which the corresponding bit of “Fraud detection status 1 (main control)” of “HC/Fraud monitoring information” is “1”) to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), When a second event different from the first event occurs, information corresponding to the second event (for example, "power on (RWM clear)", "acquisition upper limit device activated", "HC/fraud monitoring information") The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to transmit information in which the corresponding bit of "fraud detection state 1 (main control)" is "1" to the outside of the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(Contents 7 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine in which a player plays a game using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a ball removal switch for discharging the gaming balls circulating inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-39943). However, no consideration was given to the execution of other control processes while the game balls are being ejected, and there was a risk that the ejection of the game balls would be delayed.

(V) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control means It is possible to perform predetermined processing (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, RWM clear processing) based on the fact that an operation (setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, RWM clear operation) is performed, and the above-mentioned The second control means performs a discharge control (frame control board ball withdrawal operation processing) for discharging the game media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second operation (ball withdrawal operation) is being performed. ), and the first control means does not perform the predetermined process when the emission control is being performed, and performs the predetermined process when the emission control is not performed. It is characterized by the fact that it is possible to Therefore, it becomes possible to discharge the game balls without delay.

(W) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a first control means (main control means) for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player. a control board 110), and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value, and the first control means controls a predetermined area. It is possible to perform a process (RWM clear process) for clearing predetermined information stored in the game machine (RWM clear process), and the second control means performs discharge control for discharging game media corresponding to the game value out of the game machine. (Frame control board ball removal operation process), and the first control means does not perform the process of clearing the predetermined information when the ejection control is performed, and the first control means does not perform the process of clearing the predetermined information when the ejection control is performed. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform a process of clearing the predetermined information when the predetermined information is not being carried out. Therefore, it becomes possible to discharge the game balls without delay.

(X) As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player, when the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped, a first control means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; and a second control means that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value. (Frame control board 120), and the second control means is capable of performing ejection control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for ejecting game media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine. is possible, and the first control means does not restore to the state before stopping the power supply when the emission control is being performed, and does not restore the state to the state before stopping the power supply when the emission control is not being performed. It is characterized in that it can be restored to the state of. Therefore, it becomes possible to discharge the game balls without delay.

(Y) As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine is in a playable state (for example, when the main control board main processing A first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game when all interrupts are permitted in step S33, and stores the gaming value owned by the player and updates the gaming value. a second control means (frame control board 120) that performs control; The first control means does not set the playable state when the discharge control is being performed, and sets the playable state when the discharge control is not performed. It is characterized by the fact that it is possible to Therefore, it becomes possible to discharge the game balls without delay.

(Z) As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, A control means (frame control board 120) that performs update control of the game value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, a frame illumination device 10, a board illumination device 76), and the control means includes a discharge control (frame control) for discharging game media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine. control board ball removal operation processing), and the notification means does not notify the occurrence of the predetermined event when the emission control is being performed, and when the emission control is not performed. is characterized in that it can notify the occurrence of the predetermined event. Therefore, it becomes possible to discharge the game balls without delay.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine in which a player plays a game using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines play games using game balls (enclosed game balls) that circulate within the gaming machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-39943). However, no consideration was given to retaining the game balls that circulate within the gaming machine, and there was a risk that interest in the game would be reduced due to a shortage of game balls.

(c) As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, A control means (frame control board 120) that controls the update of the game value, a door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4) that can be opened and closed, and a detection means (glass frame open detection switch) that detects the state of the door body. 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b), and notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame illumination device 10, board illumination device 76), and the control means Control to fire game media corresponding to the value into the game area (gaming area 5a) (control to drive the firing solenoid 92b to operate the firing mallet when there is an input from the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b); It is possible to perform control to clear the value (processing to clear the number of game balls), and the notification means can perform notification according to the clearing of the game value (notification of clearing the number of game balls). and the control means is capable of causing the game medium to be ejected into the gaming area if the detection means is not performing the detection while the notification is being performed; The present invention is characterized in that when the detection by the detection means is performed, it is possible to restrict the game media from being ejected into the game area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to a shortage of game balls.

(Contents 9 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine in which a player plays a game using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines have a compulsory system where the difference between the number of balls indicated by the ball holding information and the number of balls held corresponding to the total loan amount reaches a predetermined upper limit. Some games were equipped with forced termination means for ending the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent No. 6318340). By the way, although it is possible to realize a healthy game by forcibly ending the game, no consideration is given to the players, and there is a risk that interest in the game may be reduced.

(d) As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, It includes a control means (frame control board 120) that controls the update of the gaming value, and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), When the value of the gaming value owned by the player (for example, the amount of gaming value owned by the player displayed on the game ball number display 135) satisfies a first value (40,000), the control means It is possible to transmit the first game information ("H23 number of game balls exceeded" in the game machine error state in HC/fraud monitoring information) to the outside of the game machine (dedicated unit 170), and specific information counted when the counting conditions are met. When the value (for example, the value of the maximum increase number) satisfies the second value (95,000), the second gaming information (Bit 6 of fraud detection status 1 in HC/fraud monitoring information) is stored outside the gaming machine. When the first value is satisfied, the notification means does not perform a predetermined caution promotion notification (be careful not to get addicted to it, be careful not to forget to take out the card), and the notification means transmits the second value. If a value is satisfied, the predetermined attention-promoting notification can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(e) As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game using the gaming value owned by the player, the gaming value owned by the player is stored, A control means (frame control board 120) that performs update control of the game value, a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and a player a counting operation section (counting button 20) for counting the gaming value owned by the player; When the amount of game value owned by the player) satisfies the first value (for example, 40,000), the notification prompting the player to operate the counting operation section (please press the counting button to count) is not made. , when the value of the specific information counted (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) satisfies a second value (e.g., 95,000) when the counting condition is met, prompting to operate the counting operation section; It is characterized in that it is possible to make notifications. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(f) As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using gaming value, the acquisition condition is satisfied (the first starting port 45, Judgment information (random value for jackpot judgment) is acquired by winning (winning into the second starting port 47), and control is executed to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired judgment information. a first control means (main control board 110) to perform the control, and a second control means (performance control board 130) to perform effect control according to a command transmitted from the first control means, The means is capable of executing control to pre-determine whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, prior to the determination (e.g., a first preliminary determination process), and the second The control means is capable of executing a preliminary effect (for example, a held consecutive winnings effect) according to a command based on the preliminary determination (for example, a first look-ahead designation command), and is capable of controlling the gaming value owned by the player. Before the value of (e.g., the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball number display 135) satisfies the first value (e.g., 40,000), the preliminary effect can be executed; To limit the execution of the preliminary effect before the value of the specific information counted due to the fulfillment of the condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase number) satisfies the second value (for example, 95,000) The present invention is characterized in that when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the value of the maximum increase number becomes "94000"), execution of the preliminary performance can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(g) As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player in a gaming machine that allows playing a game using the gaming value owned by the player. a first control means (main control board 110) that performs control to determine the game value; a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and performs update control of the gaming value; A performance execution means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70 to 73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) capable of performing a game performance related to the special game, and the performance execution means is, when the value of the gaming value owned by the player (for example, the amount of gaming value owned by the player displayed on the game ball number display 135) satisfies the first value (for example, 40,000), A specific game performance (for example, a completion performance) is not performed as a game performance related to a special game, and the value of specific information (for example, the value of the maximum increase number) that is counted when the counting condition is satisfied is a second value (for example, 9 15,000), it is possible to perform the specific game effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously (in parallel). The variable display of the special symbols may be performed in the order in which game balls enter the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special symbols are displayed in a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times after the end of the first jackpot game, and 10,000 times after the end of the second jackpot game or the third jackpot game). However, the fluctuating display of normal symbols is controlled a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times after the end of the first jackpot game, and 100 times after the end of the second jackpot game or the third jackpot game). After the game ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving game state or a variable probability game state until the game is played 10,000 times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines that recycle game balls (managed gaming machines), but can also be used for pachinko gaming machines that do not recycle game balls (general pachinko machines). be able to. Furthermore, the present invention can also be used in a drum-type gaming machine (general slot machine) that awards a predetermined amount of medals to the player when winning symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line in a game using medals. In addition, when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line (granting conditions are met) during a game using gaming value (virtual medals), a predetermined amount of gaming value (virtual medals) is awarded to the player. It can also be used for gaming machines (managed gaming machines). Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 17 Performance button 20 Counting button 43 General prize opening 44 General drawing gate 45 First starting opening 47 Second starting opening 50 Big winning opening 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 72 Third image Display device 73 Fourth image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Frame control board 120a Frame control CPU
121 Game ball count clear switch 122 Ball removal switch 123 Error release switch 125 Frame control display 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU
135 Game ball count display 170 Dedicated unit

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that allows players to play games using gaming value owned by them,
a control means that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updating of the gaming value;
A door body that can be opened and closed,
a detection means for detecting the state of the door body;
comprising a notification means capable of executing notification according to the detection by the detection means,
The control means includes:
It is possible to perform discharge control for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine,
The notification means is
In both cases where the detection means performs the detection when the emission control is being performed and when the detection means performs the detection when the emission control is not performed, the detection means A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to make notifications according to detection.